CONTENTS

B. P. Wess: The Geological Structure of the Blinman Dome

I, A. MummeE: Geophysical Investigation of the Blinman Dome

H. Worrner: The Occurrence of a Shallow Groundwater Horizon and its

Natural Outlets in North-Easternmost South Australia :

D. E. Symon: The Early Production by A. W. Howard of dubietiaheat

Clover Seed .

P. G. Wizson: A “Caabmonite Revision of the Gaia Earnest (Comms

cated by Hj. Eichler.) . . ’

N. H. Lupsroox: Revision of the Tate Syrolicest Types: Pelegypoda

Nuculidae and Nuculanidae . ¥ ° : .

N. H. Lupsroox: Permian to Cretaceous Subsurface Suateredy Between

Lake Phillipson and the Peake and Denison Ranges, South Australia

P. M. Mawson: A New Species and Some New Record in the Genus

Cloacina Linstow (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) from Western Australia

P. M. Mawson: A Note on the Occurrence of Oesophageal Teeth in the

Species of the Genus Cloacina (Nematoda: Strongyloidea )

Hetene A. Martin: Sclerophyll Communities in the inglencoe District,

Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia . f . ;

R. C. Mrras: Field Relationships of the Anabama Crates

R. L. Srecut, P. F. Brownexrt anp P. M. Hewerr: Plant Ecology of Part

of the Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia. 2. The Distribution of

Eucalyptus elaeophora

R. L. Specur anp J. B. CLELAND: Flora Conservation in South Avista ee

1. The Preservation of Plant Formations and Associations Recorded

in South Australia ; :

R. V. Sourscorr: Descriptions of Two New Australian Smarididae

(Acarina) with Remarks on eBuetotony: and eegeiiphien Distribu-

tion . : 3 ‘ ? .

P. L. Krame: Some Maitusae from Northern Austealia,

H. H. Fintayson: Mitchell’s Wombat in South Australia .

B. G. Forses: Magnesite of the Adelaide a A Discussion of its

Origin

Memoir and Bibliography, Sasean Cunnpbell Sane .

Sir William Mitchell, Centenarian

List of Lectures and Exhibits, 1960-1961

Balance Sheet

Awards of the Sir Joseph Yee Medal oe List of eattaws, 1961

Index

121

155

177

133

197

207

217

224

225

223

226

227

233

THE GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE OF THE BLINMAN DOME

BY B. P. WEBB

Summary

THE GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE OF THE BLINMAN DOME

by B. P. Wess*

[Read 10 November 1960]

INTRODUCTION

In November, 1958, whilst engaged on mapping the Willochra one-mile

sheet for the Department of Mines, the author and C, Von der Borch made a

brief feld inspection of the structure known as the Blinman Dome, Observa-

lions made on this inspection suggested that the Blinman Dome was a diuapiric

structure, related to diapirie phenomiena mapped on the Willochra Sheet (Geol.

Surv. 5, Aust, ).

In July, 1959, the Department of Mines undertook a gravity traverse across

the structure, extending out into the ucighbouring country for several miles.

Suhsequently, additional traverses were run to confirm the preliminary results,

and at the same time an opportunity was taken to geologically map portion

of the central part of the structure, and determine its relationships to the en-

closing country rocks. The geophysical surveys were carried out by LA.

Mumme, and the author spent several days in the field on the geological inves-

tigation. Petrological examivations of various rock samples were carried out

by W. Fander of the Australian Mineral Development Laboratories.

PREVIOUS WORK

Petrological notes on certain of the igneous racks of the region were made

by Benson (1909), and geology of the area briefly discussed by Howchin (1922).

Mawson (1939, 1942, 1949) carried out stratigraphical studies in this region, and

Dickinson (1942) described the gealogy of the Blinman Mine,

Howard (1951) carried out a detailed geological investigation of the Blin-

man Dome and surrounding urea, with particular reference to the basic igneous

rocks, and this work has been of great vulue to the author. The present paper

is largely a reassessment of the data recorded by Howard,

The author (1960) reported briefly on the results of mapping carried out

at Blinman.

REGIONAL GEOLOGY

As shown on Howard's map, the Blinman Dome consists of a central core

of disturbed and brecciated rock, occupying an area of some 18 square miles,

surrounded by Adelaide System and Cambrian sediments dipping outwards from

the central structure.

TVhe succession in the Adelaide System and Cambrian sediments surround-

ing the dome is illustrated in the accompanying cross-section (Fig. 1), and can

be summarised as under, Thicknesses have been estimated from field observa-

tions supplemented by photogeological studies, and refer to the section exposed

on the eastern side of the Dome.

* Geological Survey of South Australia.

Trans, Roy, Soc. §, Aust. (1961), Vol. 85.

sauoyssis ajdund ‘saaisnsyxa pud

SBAISNIZU! ISDA *sJpNy ‘SHUOYSPUds ‘sa/DYs 'sayIWO}Og

QUOZ [DJ WI 10 syD0u pajduinso pud payoI93DaIg

SWOd NYWNIT8 SHL

HONOYHL (passasuy yrdap ui aouasaud inq pasodxa you) ayia

SIUOTSTIS ‘SAUDIS

NOIWDAS SSOHYD WOIDO10ES SUO{SIIIS PUD sazD]s d;1WO}Og

(Aqy)56 A\uouwod) SPUOPSIUN| ‘SIUO]SzIS *83701S

" auoysau| aiyddybosayy

y2/Painba JLT L YNILW1a

BUOPSAW| 31ZJWOlOQ

SauopszIS PUD sazois ajdund

BLIZLYYNO Z3ONVY Dav

Sauoysz|is Pud says ajdun4

SsIdas

NVILYNLS

WALSAS JAdIvisadVv

Sa|DYS ‘SaUo;sauT] Ii{Woloq

Sald3S NVONIYYA

ssuW 8 - he : ALIZLYYNO GINNGd

B. P. WEBB

S3/DYs *sauoysaUir] >| NVIPEANYD

QON3Z9347

vtasacetetnteotet

ecatatseatnietstotek

. Weitee? iSeatatctatatetcs ereteretera

SSIES : ce sees ee ateteesecomaectceren

NYANING VSaLSOH YNIKSIHOONY

40 HLYON STUN ZS YN HOY e¥d — NYWNITE HLNOS 31IW F

GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE OF THE BLINMAN DOME 3

Cumbrivn

(1) 7000 tt, (plus) Fossiliferous limestones, shales, sandstones.

Adelaide Systen:

3 1300 ft Pound quartzite,

3 2000 Fe. Dolomitic limestones, shales.

4 L800 Ft. Purple shales and siltstones.

(5) 800 ft. A.B.C, Range Quartzite.

6) 5L00 Lt. Purple slates and. siltstones.

7) 20 fF, Dolomitic limestone.

(8) GOO fr. Purple sandstone, with tillitic lenses ( Flatine

Tillite equivalent).

(9) 2100) Ft. Hicroglyphic limestone.

(10) 4000 ft. Slates, siltstones, limestones (commonly gritty).

(11) 1500 Ft. Dolomitic siltstones and slates.

(12) 4000 ft. (plus) — Siltstones und slates, with local pockets of tiie

material in lowest exposed beds,

This succession is essentially the same as that deseribed by Howard, with

sume additions and modifications. Of interest is the recognition of the Elatina

Tillite equivalent horizon, and an overlying thin but persistent buff-coloured

laggy dolomitic limestone (items 8 and 7 above),

‘These units were not specified by Howard, but would be inchaded in sub-

division 13 on his map —“chocolate and grey shales", Thoy correspond direatly

ta items 45-46 and 47 respectively of Mawson’s (1939) Brachina Gorye Section,

the former being subsequently (1949) named by him the Elatina Tillite. This

horizon was recognised on the eastern and western sides of the dome, and is

well exposed in a creek bed half mile south-west of Angorichina Hostel,

Items 8, 9 and 10 (above) together comprise the “upper glacial sequence”

(Webb and Horwitz, 1959). The Sturtian-Marmoan Series houndary has been

placed in the upper partion of the 4000 ft, section of slates, siltstones and gritty

limestones (item 10).

Howard suggested that the lowest beds exposed sround the rim corre-

sponded to the “grevwacke grit” horizon of Mawson (1942). However, the

present mapping shows that on the south-western side of the structure even

lower beds. are exposed before the true outcr edge of the structure is reached.

They consist of massive siltstones and slates, with local tillitic lenses, and are

voneluded. to represent the uppermost portion of the “lower glacial sequence”

(Webb and Iiorwitz, 1959). In this area the author places the boundary of the

disturbed central zone up to three-quarters of a mile further in towards the

centre of the structure than shown on Howard's map.

The Cambrian and Adclaide System rocks are draped around the central

area in the form, of a large regional dome, dips being generally less than 45 deg.

In the immediate vicinity of the disturbed central arca, the surronnding rocks

are sharply pturned,

Howard recognised this unusual feature of the structure and concluded

“+. there must have been a great force from beneath to lift the sediments into

their upturned position. . . .” (italics the present author's). This sudden up-

turning was noted wherever the contact was examined during the present

study, and is apparent along the south-avestern margin where uptuming was not

recogniscd by Howard. Here dips steepen from 30 deg. to vertical over a

distance: of 500 yards.

Of interest is the noticeable thinning of certain of the surrounding beds

as they approach the structure from the south-cust side. Measured sections

4 i. P. WEBB

through the hieroglyphic limestone formation in this area shuw a decrease in

Huckoess from 2100 feet to 1300 feet in less than three miles. Over the same

interval the overlying purple sandstones and grits (Elatina Tillite equivalent)

decrease from 600 feet to 400 feet. These relationships suggest an original sedi-

mentary thinning, which could perhaps be related to carly uplift in the domal

area, but further mapping is needed before any conclusions can be reached.

CEOLOGY OF THE CENTRAL ARBA

The breceiated and deformed rocks within the central area are made up

ut a variety of sedimentary and igneous types, Ripple marked and crusshedded

sandstones and quartzites are common, ind locally contain interbedded hasic

lava Hows. The finer grained sandstones frequently contain halite pseudomorphs.

Purple shales and siltstones (some tuffaceous) and dolemitic rocks occur locally,

and there are numerous small scattered “plugs” of basic rock, The rocks are

frequently intensely deformed, with resulting confused structure, and much

of the central country ig a breeeia, made up of the above components. Sideritic

veins locally traverse the breccia tear the margins of the structure, and some-

times exterid out into the siltstones and slates of the surrounding rim rock.

Toward coneluded that the rick types in the central country corresponded

ti the slute, arenaceous slate and fluagey quartzite overlying the Sturt Tillite.

However, these rock types are quite unlike those which could be expected to

occur in the central area if the normal succession continucd below the rim

rocks. In the region to the south, near Oraparinna, where this part of the

section is exposed, units broadly equivalent to the rim rocks are succeeded in

depth by fluvio-glacial beds leading downwards ta true (Sturt) tillite.

Ripple marked sandstones with hulite pseudomorphs, and interbedded basic

lava Hows, are quite out of character with the normal Sturtian succession foe

this 7evion. Mawson (1942) had previously suggestel that the deformed rocks

in the vicinity of Bliuman were equivalent to rocks in the Oraparinna_ region,

veeurring uncontormably belo the Sturt Tillite, and it is considered that this

conclusion is probahly more correct. However, as Howard points out, there

is no evidence of unconformity ut the contact in the Blinman area,

lt is apparent that most of the rocks in the centre country helong strati-

vraphieally below the Sturtian ant that they have been structurally emplaced

in their preseut position. The presence of ripple marked sandstones, purple

shales ind interbedded lava flows are all suggestive of rock belonging to the

Willonran Series as develaped in the region to the north, near Mt, Painter. A

specimen of basic: lava caltected from one and wx half miles south of Blinman

js described by W. Funder us being (on examination in thin section) “very

similar lo the trachytes of the Wooltana district”. Rock types typical of the

Torrensian (such as sedimentary magnesites) appear to be absent. Many of

the rock types at Blinman recall those occurring in diapiric-type structures on

the Willochra one-mile sheet, and here, too, they would appear to be more

typie! of the Willowran than the Torrensian, Tt is suggested that in the light

al available evidetice the rocks in (he Blinman structure are mostly derived

lnm the underlying Willouran Series.

There aré numerous scattered occurrences of plug-like masses of doleritie

rock, which Howard grouped into a “younger” doleritic suite, concluding that

the inteusion of these rocks was responsible for the formation of the Blinman

strnetiire, (In the field it is difficult to distinguish these racks from certain of

the basie lavas.) It is apparent trom Howard's map that these bisic igneous

imtrnsives make up a relatively small proportion of the total onterop area of the

GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE OF TIE BLINMAN DOME 5

central Gore, The presence of a small but distinct gravity low over the central

wiea (established by the associated geophysical work carried aut) indicates that

it is unlikely that it is underlain by a Jaege body of basic igneous rocks, as sug-

gested by Iloward.

Many of the outcrops of fine-grained sandstones and siltstones show de-

velopment of halite pseudomorphs, often associated with ripple marks and srull

seale cross-bedding, the latter sometimes picked out with fine heavy mineral

bands. As pointed out by Howard. these are features suggestive of shallow

water and arid vonditions at the time of sedimentation, At one locality, some

two miles west of Blinman, there is an outcrop of fine-grained arkose and silt-

stone contaiming numerous small cavities, the general shape of which are sug-

gestive of the former presence of gypsum. A buff-coloured siltstone from an

urea four miles west of Blinman, containing pseudomorphs resembling halite,

yas sutplteet for chemical analysis ot the soluble salt content, with following

results:—

Calcium sulphate . . . Q-UHt me.

Magnesium sulphate 1-13 pie.

Magnesium chloride .... 0-35 p.c.

Sodium: chlaride — . 2-07 pe

These unusually high percentages may be significant, bat considerably

more sampling aud testing is requited before any conclusions can be reached.

fowever, it is apparent thaf many of the cocks exposed in the central area were

deposited in shallow water and under arid conditions — conditions fayourable

for development of evaporiles.

In addition to the rock types described above there are isolated occur-

rences of other types, which are of considerable interest,

Some one and 2 half miles north-west of Blinman is a large mass, over 50

yards. across, of typical Sturt Tillite—prey green matrix with erraties, It is

completely surrounded by hrecciated siltstones, purple shales, etc,

Large fragments of gneissic granitic rocks up to several tons it weight

ocenr three-quarters and two and a quarter miles north-west of Blinman, adjacent

to the Mooloolov road. These granitic rocks accur as discrete fragments, sur-

rounded by crushed and broken siltstones and sandstones showing uo sign of

metamorphism, It is suggested that these fragments which in the field resemble

certain of the graniti¢ rocks of the Mt. Painter region, were derived from the

underlying crystalline basement, Samples of these rocks were examined in thin

section, and deseribed by Mr. Vander as “orthogneisses”. Referring to a sample

from the location two and a quarter miles north-west of Blinman, he states:—

“Strong, crushing and shearing of an originally porphyritic granodiorite has

produced gneissose aud fuser structure. Relict phenocrysts of microcline are

sero in u ground-mass of fresh and altered oligoclase, and quarty as highly

stressed, sutured aggregates. Chusters of biotite have associated xenutime,

aircon, Opaques, sphene and apatite. There is widespread development of very

couyse-grained secondary muscovite and of calcite. Except for a higher pro-

portion of oligoclase, which places this rock with the granodiorites, its similarity

to the Flinders Ranges ‘older’ granite is very marked.”

The suggestion by Howard that these vocks xepresent highly stressed

extreme differentiates of the basic doleritic magma is not supported by the

held and petrological evidence,

In a few localities large fragments of grey siltstone, typical of the Sturtian

rocks at the rim, were observed within the stmeture.

G fh, P. WERE

Most of the rocks within the structure have been intensely deformed, and

frequently strongly breeciated, In some areas, particularly in the south-eastern

part of the structure, there are very large blocks of folded sediments up io

half a mile long, surrounded (in plan) by completely brecciated material, The

general structural pattern appears to be quite contused,

The présence of large blocks of crystalline basement material and of sedi-

ments belongings stratigraphically well below the rim rocks, together with the

confused and brecciated structure, ure features suggestive to the author ol a

diapirie type structure. The blocks of basement appear to have been caught up

with the diapiric sediments and “intruded” with them.

Copper mineralisation is occasionally developed, usually in dolomitie-

quartzo-felspathie rocks, The Blinman Mine occurs in a dolomitic rock, asso-

ciated with shales and sandstones, together forming a large mass, which appears

to be surrounded (in plan) by completely brecciated material,

CONCLUSLONS

The material forming the crumpled and brecciated core of the Blinman

Dome consists for the most part of strata belonging stratigraphically to rocks

below the Sturtian Series. forcibly intruded into their present position, and

resulting in murked local upturning of the surrounding Sturtian rocks. The

presence of covks formed under arid shallaw water conditions suggests that

relatively low density evaporite type sediments assisted the deyelopment of a

large-scale diapiric strocture before and during the folding of surrounding Adec-

laide System and Cambrian rocks. The concept of a large mass of basic intrusive

rock underlying and causing the structures, is not in agreement with observed

geological and geophysical data.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author is grateful ta Mr. T, A. Barnes, Director of Mines, for permis-

sion to publish this paper, and to Mr. L. W. Parkin, Deputy Director of Mines,

for interest and help in this work. ‘he work of the Drafting Section of the

Geological Survey in preparation of the accompanying illustrations is gratefully

acknowledged. The assistance of Mr, W, Fander of the Australian Minceal

Development Laboratories is much appreciated.

REFERENCES

Benson, W. N., 1909. The Basic Rocks of Blinman, South Anstralia, with Notes on Asso-

ciated or Alliod Rocks. Trans. Rov. Soc. S, Aust. 83,

Drexinson, §, B., 1942, The Structural Control of Ore Deposition in xeme South Australian

Copper Vields. Dept, of Mines, Bull, 21,

Gyo. Sunv..S. Aust, Cvological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Willoehra Gmpublished )-

Howarp, P. F,, 1951. The Basic Tencous Rocks of the Blnman Nome. Trans. Rey, Soe,

8S, Aust, 74. p. 2.

Hower, W., 1922, A Geological Traverse of the Winders Range from the Porachilna Garge

to the Luke Franic Flains. ‘Trans, Rey, Soe, &, Aus, 46.

Mawsorw, D.. 1935. The Lat: Proterozoic Sediments of South Australia, Rept. Aust—N.Z.

Ass, Adv. Sei., 24.

Mawson, D., 1942, The Strnetura] Character of ihe Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy, Soe 8.

Aust., 66, p. 2.

Mawsox, D.. 1949. The Blatine Glaciation. A Third Reenrrence of Glaciation Evidenerd

in the Adelaide System. Trans. Roy: Soc, §. Aust, 78, np. I.

Wess, B. P., 1960, Diapirie Structures in the Flinders Ranges, South Australien, Aust, J,

Science, 22, p. 4.

Wess, B, P.. and Horwitz, R., 1959: Notes on the Boundaries of the Marinoan Seri of the

Adelaide System, Aust, J, Sci, 21. p. 6.

B. P. Wess PLAtre 1

Acrial photo of portion of the Blinman Dome structure, showing the disturbed central aren,

surrounded by outward dipping strata of the flanking tiut rocks. The limits of the disturbed

central arew are indicated.

“Trans. Ray. Soc. S.AS. Val. 85.

B. P.o Wen PLATE 2

Fig. 1, View along the south-western rim of the Blinman Dome structure, looking

north-west. Rocks of the disturbed central area oceupy the foreground and. right-

hand portion of the photo.

ig. 2. Outerop of a Jarge clement of granitic rock occurring in the breeciated

contril zone two and a quiirter miles north-west of Blinman, The line of hills

in the background is formed of steeply mpturned strate alone the northern rim of

the structure. View looking north-west.

“Trans, Roy. Soc. S,A.". Val. 85,

B, P. Wess PLATE 3

Vig. 1. Crompled rocks of the central zone, acliacent to the Blinman-Parachilna

road,

Fig, 2.) Breeeiatec! material of the central zone, near the south-western rim ot the

steuctnre, adjacent to the Blinman-Parachilna road.

“Trans. Hay, Sac, S.A. Vol. 85.

GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE BLINMAN DOME

BY I. A. MUMME

Summary

The results of a geophysical investigation carried out on the Blinman Dome show a small gravity

"low7' over the structure suggesting that the rock formations beneath the central portion of the dome

are generally less dense than those comprising the surrounding area. Surface density measurements

are in general in agreement with the gravity results. No significant magnetic variations were

observed. It is concluded that the results are broadly in agreement with the structure being of

diapiric origin, as suggested by geological mapping.

GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE BLINMAN DOME

by I. A, Munimr*

[Read 10. November 1960]

SUMMARY

The results of a geophysical investigation carried out on the Biinman Dome

show a small gravety “low” over the structure suggesting that the rock forma-

tiony beneath the central portion of the dome are generally less dense than

these copiprising the sutrounding area, Surface density measurements are in

general in agreement with the gravity results, Na significant magnetic varia-

tions were observed,

1t is concluded that the xesults are broadly in agreement with the structure

being of dhapiric origin, as suggested by vealogical mapping.

INTRODUCTION

Although the dome structure at Blinman had been recognized many years

ago by geologists, the first theory suguyested as a possible mechanism of its

cause was published by Toward (1931).

He considered that it was caused by the intrusion of a plug of basalt deep

in the structure and that the exposures of basic rocks are genetically related ta

a deep-seated parent basalt plug.

During 1958, C. von der Borch and B. P. Webb, alter a brief inspection

suggested that the structure was essentially diapiric by analogy with similar

smaller structures on the Willochra sheet fifty miles to the south. It was further

suggested that a short programme of detailed mapping in the Blinman area

be combined with a yeophysical investigation with particular reference to

gravity variations, to provide further data on the question of the origin of the

structure.

The yeophysical investigation consisted of several gravity and magnetic

traverses across the dome and its surroundings. Density measurements were

earried out on rock formations located in the area investigated to aid in the

interpretation of the gravity results obtained.

The survey was carried out during the following periods—15th July to the

5th August, 8th September tu the 9th October and from 9th November to the

19th November, 1959.

Webb (1960) described briefly the results of the associated detailed imap-

ping study, concluding that the structure was diapiric in nature.

Gravimetric measurements have previously been conducted in the area by

D. Pegum on behalf af Geosurveys of Australia.

The domal structure is developed in Upper Proterozoic racks of the Ade-

laide System with a breceiated and deformed central core, approximately

eighteen square miles iu urea.

METHODS USED

Initially two traverses were completed with a Worden gravimeter. Those

are the Parachilna-Blinman-Wirrealpa traverse and the Moolooloo-Blinman-

Gum Creek traverse and are designated as Traverses (1) atid (2) respec-

tively (Vig. 1).

* Geological Survey, Department of Mines, South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1961). Vol. 85.

bel GS

I. A: MUMME

bo}

Gannaas

‘ N

& 8

-+ 2

VERTICAL MAGNETIC INTENSITY

+30

Graze

BOUGUER ANOMALY

ac, 7

QO up| AVERAGE DENSITY OF_OUTCROPEIMG ROCKS 2

Qo ope AMERAGE DENSITY OF QUT CRORES | BEA a!

8 By cf ~ a

2 ite ALB ae Ss eee 4

22! — — eee

DENSITY

GEOLOGICAL SECTION

TOPOGRLPHE PROFLE SHOWN aT i000! TO I”

GEOLOGICAL, DETAILS SHOWN AT NATURAL SCALE

LEGEND SCALE

MILE 1 ° \ 2 3 4 5 MILES

>t c= mat mt

7 7] GRITTY LIMESTONES & INTERBEDDED

Ol sLates AND: SILTSTONES

SLATE AND SILTSTONE

DOLOMITIC SLATE & SILTSTONE

SLATE & SILTSTONE

STURTIAN SERES

ADELADE SYSTEM

| Staats BRECCIATED MATERIAL BLINMAN DOME

COMPOSITE SECTION — TRAVERSE 2

Fig. 2, Composite Geological and Geophysical Profiles for Traverse 2.

GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE BLINMAN DOME }

Microbarometcr measurements with Askania Microbarometers for height

determinations were also made at the gravity stations so that the gravity results

could be reduced and plotted as Bouguer Anomalies,

Later two further traverses (Nos. (3) and (4)) were completed and re-

duced and a Bouguer Anomaly Plan prepared from the results of the four

traverses (Fig. 1).

TRAVERSE 3 TRAVERSE 4

BOUGUER ANOMALY

AGE, — DENSI,

ated *XEs_pe ourzaopanc VT

H DENSITY VARIABLE FROM 203-302 is DENSITIES WHA BLE gi

ESIIMATED AVERAGE 245 i FROM 203 TO 302

' ESTMATED AVERAGE 245

GEOLOGICAL SECTIONS

TOPDGHAPHIC PROFILE SHOWN aT ocd TO |’

GECLCGTAL DETAILS SHOWN AT NATURAL SCALE

LEGEND SCALE

SLATE & SILTSTONE SMILES

PF] TALLINE. SLT TOM

Ae BLINMAN DOME

ADELAIDE SYSTEAS

STURTIAN SERES

| RR antcon COMPOSITE SECTIONS — TRAVERSES 344

Fig, 3. Composite Geological and Geophysical Profiles for Traverses 3 and 4.

A number of rock samples were collected from along the initial two tra-

verses (referred to as traverses (1) and (2)) and further samples were

collected by B. P. Webb from traverses (3) and (4) us well as from other areas

of the Dome and its surroundings including samples of basic igneous rock.

Density measurements were made with a Walker’s Arm Density Instrument.

A magnetic investigation of the Dome was alsu carried out along traverses

(1) and (2) with a Hilger and Watt’s vertical force magnetometer.

If 1 AL. MUMME

The gravity results were corrected, reduced and presented both as longi-

tudinal profiles for the four individual] traverses as well as a composite contour

plan. Composite gevlogical and geophysical profiles were prepared in asso-

ciation with B. P. Webb. 'The composite Bouguer anomaly contour plan (show-

ing the position of traverse Imes and location of the gravity stations) is shown

in Fig. 1, Composite profiles for traverse (2) are shown on Fig. 2 and for tra-

verses (3) and (4) on Hig. 3.

RESULTS

Magnetic readings conducted along traverses: (1) und (2) show that there

are no marked magnetic variations in the general area. However, significant

but local magnetic anomalies occur in association with outcropping basic rocks

in the Dome.

Along traverse (1) a gravity anomaly (gravity “low”) of the order of

about 4 milligals was located over the Dome demonstrating that the Dome

is cored by rock types of lower density than those surrounding the Dome.

Density measurements on selected rock samples generally confirm this.

Along traverse (2) the gravity and surface density measurements again

show fhat the rock formation comprising the Dome are generally of lower

density than the surrounding rock formations, A gravity anomaly of approxi-

mately 8 milligals occurs on traverse (3) im agreement with the density measure-

ments in the area. Similar results occur in traverse (4).

SUMMARY OF RESULTS

Summing up the geophysical results:

(1) The Blioman Dome is associated with 4 small but significant gravity “low”.

(2) There is no significant regional magnetic unomaly associated with the

Blinman Dome,

(3) The density of the basic igneous rock material enclosed in the host breecia

in the Dome is significantly higher than all other rack formations occurring

bath in the Dome and its surroundings.

(4) The longitudinal height profiles across the Blinman Dome show that it is

symmetrical m shape,

The results indicate that the rock formations comprising the domal area ave

of lower density than those comprising the surrounding area and therefore do

not support the hypothesis that rock formations comprising the domal area are

underlain by large areas of basic igneous rocks.

Two theoretical gravity profiles were computed hased on geological in-

formution supplied by B. P. Webb, and the following two sets of assumptions

were made from the field geological and density measurements.

(1) The domal area is three miles in diameter and comprises a vertical

cylinder of density 2-40 g, perc.c., with an outer area surrounding the Dame of

density 2°62 g, per cc. The height of the cylinder comprising the Dume is

assumed to be 6,000 fect.

(2) The domal area is three miles in diameter and comprises a vertical

cylinder of density 2-50 ¢, per cc. with an outer area surrounding the Dome

of density 2'62 g. per ac. The height of the cylinder comprising the Dome

is assumed to be 6,000 Feet,

In the first case, the computed gravity anomaly is 12 milligals, and in the

second case 6 millizals.

Field geological and density measurements suggest that the density of

the Dome: cylinder is between the limits 2-40 ¢. per co. and 2:50 y, per ce,

GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE BLINMAN DOME ll

and therefore the anumaly that should occur would be between the limits 6 and

12 milligals (as measured at the centre of the Dome).

The results are in reasonable agreement with the observed gravity results,

as shown in Fig. 4,

Surface

oy DIAPIRE ~ ' '| DENSITY 2-62

1!) DENSITY, 280 —+— Pearefica! (i! Profile

J @) DENSITY. 2:50, =< Theoretical (2) Profile

DENSITY 2:62

Actual Protile cbfained

5 Q------ eaten raverse (3) gh ee een oO 3

$ ite tee eee ol -%> oe =

Ow Me i eater oo e Dw»

Za a 7 Theoretical Pratite (i) 23

t D6 ~e ee —.|-to <i

a= an Theoretical Profile (2) re

52 5 =

oO 0

3 3

2 -20 -200

Fig. 4. Comparison of Actual and Theoretical Gravity Profiles.

CONCLUSIONS

The results of the geophysical survey are in agreement with the theory that

the Blinman Dome is a diapirie structure, and do not support the theory of the

formation of the Dome by the action of a concealed basic plug. Additional

magnetic traverses to determine polarity of the larger masses of basic igneous

intrusive rocks would assist in determining whether these were intruded along

with, or atter, the formation of the structure,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to thank the Director of Mines for permission to publish

this report and to acknowledge the assistance received from J, E, Webb. The

assistance of the Drafting Section of the Geological Survey in preparation of the

accompanying plans is gratefully acknowledged.

REFERENCES

Howann, P. F,, 1951. The Basic Igncous Rocks of the Blinman Dome. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8,

Aust., 74 (2), pp. 165-188,

Wess, B. P., 1960. Diapiric Structures in the Flinders Ranges, South Australia, Aust. f. Sei,

22 (9), pp. 390-1.

THE OCCURRENCE OF A SHALLOW GROUNDWATER HORIZON AND

ITS NATURAL OUTLETS IN NORTH-EASTERNMOST

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H, WOPFNER

Summary

Shallow groundwater occurs on the limbs of anticlines in north-easternmost South Australia. The

water, which usually is of good quality, is derived from local intakes and occurs immediately above

or at the duricrust horizon. Laterites and lateritic sands overlying the duricrust act as water-bearing

strata. Natural springs or seepages are occasionally developed where the contact between duricrust

and laterite is exposed down dip on large fold structures. Two such occurrences are described. The

Nilpie Springs, situated 20 miles east of Cordillo Downs on the south limb of Cordillo uplift deliver

approximately 6,000 gallons of water per day into Nilpie water hole and the Callamurra Seepages,

16 miles east of Innamincka Station, on the southern limb of Innamincka Dome, discharge an

estimated 1,000 gallons per day into Callamurra water hole. The importance of this shallow

groundwater horizon as a source of good quality water and as an additional feeder for some

permanent water holes is emphasised.

THE OCCURRENCE OF A SHALLOW GROUNDWATER HORIZON

AND ITS NATURAL OUTLETS IN NORTH-EASTERNMOST SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

by H. Woprrnen*

[Read 10 November 1960]

SUMMARY

Shallow groundwater occurs on the limbs of anticlines in north-casternmoast

South Australis. The water, which usually is of gaod quality, is derived from

loval intakes and oceurs immediately above or at the duricrust horizon. Laterites

and fateritic sands overlying the duricrust uct as water-bearing strata.

Natural springs or seepages aru ovcasionally developed where the contact

between duricrust and laterite is evpased down dip on large fold structures,

Two such uccurrences: are described, The Nilpie Springs, situated 24) miles

cast of Cardillo Downs on the south limb of Cordillo uplift deliver approxi-

mately 6,000 gallons of water per day into Nilpic water hole and the Calla-

mura Secpages, 10 miles east of Thuamincka Station, on the southern liml of

Innamincka Dome, discharge an estimated 1,000 gallons per day into Calla-

mura water hole.

The importance of this shallow groundwater horizon as a source of guod

quality water and as an additional feeder for some permancnt water holes is

emphasised.

INTRODUCTION

The area discussed in this paper concerns approximately 2,000 square

miles in the far north-eastern corner of South Australia between Cooper Creek

and Haddon corner. It comprises some of the most prominent and best de-

veloped surface structures in the geological unit known as the Great Australian

Artesian Basin. Domes and anticlines greatly influence the occurrence and

the distribution of shallow groundwaters whose sources are largely derived from

local intake areas. Some of the characteristics of the uppermost water-bearing

stratum are subject of the present paper.

The observations were made while the author was engaged in exploration

work in the Cordillo area on behalf of Santos Ltd., in 1957-58, and during sub-

sequent visits to the area.

GEOLOGY OF THE “LATERITE” WATER IIORIZON

The structures which goyern the shallow aquifers are developed in Creta-

ceons sediments. the exposed strata being members of the Winton formation

(Cenomanian) which, in most parts of the area are overlain by Tertiary grits

and sands. The top-members of the sequence are invariably silicified and

allered to a very hard and tough crust usually referred to as “duricrust”. The

amplitudes of the fold structures are up to 700 feet with limb dips ranging from

2° to 20°, The tectonic movements responsible for formation of these structures

post-dated the development of the duricrust (Wopfner, 1960).

R. L, Jack (1925) who gave a comprehensive account of the occurrence

of shallow groundwater in the north-east of South Australia (particularly the

area around Cordillo Downs), placed the aquifers of all the shallow wells, e.g.

° Geological Survey, Department of Mines, South Austrulia,

Trans, Roy. Sve. S. Aust. (1961), Vol. 85,

14 H, WOPPNER

Nada, ete, within the “upper third of the Desert Sandstone Formation”, and

consequently, his cross-sections show these aquifers well below the lire,

silicified “duricrust”,

However, recent investigations by the author have shown that many of these

shullow wells are fed by a water-hearing horizon occurring above the duricrust.

Due ta the development of the broad domal and anticlinal structures which

characterise the area, the duricrust frequently forms extensive dip slopes, with

prominent erosional remnants forming flat-topped hills in the structural “highs™

The dip slopes are covered with younger outwash deposits, commonly made up

largely of “yibber” gravels formed from the break down of the duricrust itself,

The amount of dip of the duricrust on the southern lunb of the Cordillo uplift

ix shawn on Map A in Fig. 1.

Approximately halfway down the dip slopes a lateritic formation can he

observed overlying the duricrust, extending duwn dip into the synclinal areas.

(Sce yeological cross-section in Fig. 1.) It is a dark brick-red, nodular (pise-

litic) luterite varying in thickness from a thin veneer of a few fect to 120 feet

thick and more in the centres of the synclines. Layers and wedges of a red,

highly ferruginous, laterised sand and some stringers and lenses of red clay are

common throughout the laterite sequence. The base is. commonly clayey.

The position of the laterite above the duricrust and the continuity of the

latter wnderneath the laterite has been established in several localities in the

Cordillo urea, and extending into Queensland. It was particularly clearly de-

tnonstrated i seismic shot holes aeross the Haddon Syiline which were drilled

in the course of 4 seismic survey carried out by the Bureau of Mineral Resourees

in 1957 (Wopfner, 196(+), A distinct increase of thickness of the laterite towards

the synelines is evident,

The contact between the laterite and the duricrust is cither conformable

or in form of an erosional discunfurmity. In the latter case the laterite can rest

dircetly on Cretaceous ar Tertiary strata, parts of the duricrust having been

removed by pre-laterite erosion, On structures with steeper limb-dips, the

contact ig unconformable. In some places a thin pebble horizon composed of

wellerounded duricrust pebbles occurs between duricrust and laterite. The

veeurrence of these pebble beds, which might be interpreted as traces of a

consequent drainage pattern “in statu nascendi” suggests that the laterite is

formed on top of and is younger than the duricrust awd therefore is not directly

relyted to the formation of the latter. The author considers that the laterisation

process affected late Tertiary to carly Pleistocene soils, developed on “post-

durienist” sands and silts.

These laterites, which are cxatvemely porous (15-25 pc. porosity) and

permeuble, generally curry a considerable amount of groundwater, The water

hecurs near the battom of the laterite, a few feet above the top of the churt-

crust. ‘Che duricrust ucts as an impermeable horizon preventing the water from

entering deeper strata (see geological cross-section in Fig, 1).

The source of the water is the Inca) intake area situated in the upper parts

of the anticlinal limbs, mainly along the contact between daricrust and laterite.

The most effective intake conditions exist where consequent streams with a

lesser (radient than the existing duricrust dip-slope flow actoss large expasures

of laterite, Water may also enter the laterite anywhere along the dip-slope, but

the clayey “gibber-soils” which extensively cover these slopes may tend to reduce

the effective intake. (See geological cross-section in Fig, 1).

The quality of the water is very good, provided the horizon is tapped on

the structural slopes, where the total salinity very rarely exceeds 50 grains per

gallon. ‘Towards the synclines the total salinity increases rapidly. Tables 1

SITALLOW GROUNDWATER HORIZON IN N.E. SOUTH AUSTRALIA 15

and 2 show the change of the quality of the water in relation to the structural

position of the individual well. In both cases the increase of total salinity

towards the synclines is evident. (Refer to Map A in Fig. 1 for position of

wells mentioned in Table 2. Analyses of Nada and Horseshoe Well are taken

from R, L, Jack’s paper, 1925.)

TABLE i.

Total salinity

Name of well Position of well Grains per gallon

Coppacunda Wostlimb Cnrallie-Dome, Qld. 36

Tobo South-west-limb Curallie

Dome, Qld. 46

Torrieicha Haddon Syneline, 8.A. 80

TABLE 2.

Well or spring Nada Well Nilpie Springs Horseshoe Well

Date of analysis 19-7-24 2H-1-54) 1-724

Chlorine, Cl 2-10 14-0 65-94

Sulphurie acid (rad) SO,y 7-O) 4:2 37-49

Carbonic arid (rad) CO, 5-10 a) 11-85

Nitwie acid (rad) NO, > 3 trace —_—

Sodium, Na 2-96 1fi-2 53-18

Potassium, K -—

Calcium, Ca 3-36 1S T+72

Magnesium, Mg 1-16 (7 4-02

Tron, Fe -- — —

Silica, SiO, 5-90 = 5+80

Total saline matter

Grains per gallon 28-40 AT-4 186-00

Assumed composition of salts

Calvium carbonate #-40 4-5 19:20

Culcium sulphate = = —

Calcium chloride | —~ _— —

Magnesium carbonate 0-08 2-4 0-38

Magnesium sulphate i 5-70 — 19-54

Magnesium chloride — — —

Sodium carhonate — 11-7 —

Sadium sulphate 4-95 6-2 32-32

Sedium chloride 3-46 23+1 108-65

Potassium chloride —

Sodium nitrate trace

Silica. 4-90 — 5-80

Hardness (Envlish Degrets)

Total 13-24 Te4 36-08

Temporary 8-48 7-4 1-76

Permanent 4-76 nil 1-32

Due to Calcium 8-40 ' 4-5 19-30

Due to Magnesium 4-84 2-9 16-78

The water-bearing strata are always tapped by means of shallow well-shafts

ranging in depth from approximately 50 to 100 feet. This form of develop-

ment appears to be the most suitable and gives very good pumping supplies.

Unfortunately, there are no exact figures available, regarding the supplies of

lt H. WOPFNER

these wells but as far as the author could gather in conversation with lucal

pastoralists, none of them produces less than 3,000 to 4,000 gallons per day.

Mast of them are stated to have never been pumped dry by continuous wind-

mill wperation, (In 1957, while SANTOS driJling operations were in progress,

a daily average of 4,000 gallons was obtained from Terrietcha Well without

lowering the water level.)

NATURAL, OUTLETS

In twa places, the “laterite” groundwater finds a natural outlet, forming

springs or seepages,. This is significant, when one considers that the area only

registers an average annual rainfall of approximately 6 inches.

One such natural outlet, the Nilpie Springs, is situated on the southern Link

of the Cordillo Uphift (see Map A in Fig, 1) und another, the Callamurra seeps

vecurs on the eastern end of Callamurra Water Hole which is situated om the

south-side of Innumineka Dome {sce Map B in Fig. 1).

Nilpie Springs

The Nilpie Springs are situated 20 miles ENE of Cordilla Downs homestead

on the north-eastern embankment of Nilpie Water Hole in the course of Nilpie

Nilpie Creek (see Map A in Fig, 1),

The Nilpie Nilpie Creek is a consequent stream originating on the southern

limb of the Cordillo Dome. At the location where the springs o¢cur, the creek

has cul deep into the laterite down to the level of the duricrust, forming steep

laterite cliffs on its north-eastern side, and exposing the water-bearing horivar.

At the base of the cliff face an intricate system of springs occurs over a distance

of 200 to 250 feet. There are at Jeast 30 to 40 separate outlets each one showing

a small but free How of clear wuter, which finally collects in the deepest part

of Nilpie Water Hole, (Plate 1, Fig. 1.) ‘The water is discharged from small

avities ut the base of the laterite, underlain by a red silty clay (Plate 1, Fig. 2).

The layer of clay which attains a thickness of 2 to 3 feet rests directly on top

of the duricrust. The cross-section in Fig, | illustrates the geolowieal condi-

tions which govern the Nilpie Springs.

The temperature of the spring-water immediately at the outlet was mea-

sured. [t registered 74° F. at an air temperature (shade temperature) nf

102-5 1. An analysis of the water is given in Table 2.

tt would be extremely difficult to obtain an exact figure on the total supply

of the springs, but the following indirect deduction gives an approximate figure.

The author was tald by the manager of Corditlo Downs Station, Mr. R, B. Beck-

with, that the supply of the springs is sufficient to water a herd of 600 heads

of cattle for 12 months. Ata daily average consumption of 10 gallons per head

und negleeting, evaporation, the total supply of the springs would be at Teast

6,000 gallons per day of excellent water. The supply of the springs remains

faitly consistent under drought conditions. The springs themselves can only

be observed, when the Nilpie Water Hole has reached a very low level, so

exposing the lower cliff-face.

Callamurra Seepages

The Callamurra Seepages occur at the northern embankment of Callamurra

Water Hole on the Cooper Creek, about 16 miles east of Innamineka Station

(see Map Bin Vig 1). There, the Cooper Creek which in this region usually

consists of a multitude of channels, has only one single, narrow chanel, cut deep

into the durierust, Being part oF the southern limb of the Innamincka Dome

(Sprigg. 1959). the duricrust slopes slightly to the south, Iracturing and subse-

INTAKE AREA

MAIN

VERTICAL SCALE IN FEET

Formation

Wdeeour}

—_

Toles we sittfomes of

—

Shei

Mieitort

(ther ore.

i mo

. ba is, [Zz

my bet |F @

Wg ees [Ow

HsSs | Wo

pI EES | A

fe. | w

mi)

ai Dio

——

gq”

ee, a3

;

£ ek

3 1 &

& 4 3

a ;

‘i od,

4 ————+ U)

zy n

2 0 OU CG

wren] o&

= oo

% 7

Fig. 1.

described. in this paper.

dip of strata.

HORIZONTAL SCALE IN MILES

_ u

f 41

A 4

(4 1 eo + Hi

vom | cma ap

a@ 2 4 6 8

SS =

Scale in Miles

eshoe®

ors

Well 1

etn

1 a a beeper

==lnhamincka H.S.

Callamurra

Seepages

Luenlity map showing areas of shallow groundwater occurrence as

Insett A shows drainage of Cordillo area and

Tnsert B illustrates dip of strata und drainage north of

Callamurra Water Hole (Inmamincka area).

The position of the seo-

logical cross-section A-B-C is shown in insert A.

18 H. WOPFNER

quent block-weathering has dissected the duricrust extensively, forming deep,

paste cracks, which protrude down to the underlying clays (see Plate 1,

ig. 3).

The water of the seeps extrndes at the base of the duricrust into recent

river silts which are deposited against the duricrust. Immediately at the seep-

ages thernselves, the laterite has been eroded but is still preserved about 300

feet north,

lt appears that the water is carried in the laterite and also in the duricrust

where the latter ig fractured. The final transport to the seeps takes place within

the fractured duricrust.

The seepages occur over a distance of 150 feet and nine individual outlets

were observed, The amount of supply of the visible discharge is rather small

and was estimated to be about 500 to 1,000 gallons per day. The actual quan-

lity may be considerably larger, as a great amount of the escaping water dis-

appears immediately into the recent river silts.

The intake area is along the southern limh. of the Innamincka Dome. As

with the Nilpie Springs the groundwater is hydrodynamically controlled by the

structural dip. The seeps can only he observed at times of low water level in

the Cooper Creek.

CONCLUSIONS

Tt can be concluded that wherever the duricrusted limbs of prominent struc-

tures are blanketed by a reasonable thickness of laterites good pumping supplies

of water can usually be obtained, The likelihood of obtaining good supplies

of fresh-yater will be increased when the location of a new well is positioned

down dip from the major intake area. The quality of the water, which is excel-

lent along the slopes, rapidly deteriorates towards the structural “lows”. Shallow

wells appear to be the most suitable method of developing this groundwater

horizon.

Several of the large permanent waterholes in this area occur at a position

which is identical to the one described for the natural outlets of the shallow

groundwater, It seems highly probable that these waterholes receive addi-

tional water via springs and seeps from the laterite groundwater, which could

balance the loss incurred by evaporation, The permanency of these water holes

could well be due therefore to the additional supply which they obtain from

groundwater sources.

REFERENCES

Jack, Ki. L., 1925. Some Developments in Shallow Water Areas in the North-East of South

Australia. Geol. Survey 8.A. Bulletin No, 11.

Jack, R: L,, 1930. Geological Structure and other Factors in Relation to Underground Water

Supply in Portions of South Australia, Geol. Survey, 8.A, Bulletin No. L4

Feescott, J. A. and Penpuxron, H. L,, 1952. Laterite and Lateritic Spils. Commonwealth

Borcau of Soil Scienve, Technical Communic, No. 47.

Spricc, RN, C., 1958. Petroleum Prospects of Western Parts of Great Australian Artesian

Basin, Bull. Amer. Assoc. Pet. Geol., Vol. 42.

Worrnen, H., 1960. On Some Structural Develypment in the Cerrtral Part of the Great

Australian Artesian Basin. ‘Transact. Noy. Soc, S.A., Vol, 83.

TH. Woprnrr Piatre |

Mig. 1. The northern embankment of Nilpie Water Tole showing the occurrence of

the springs along the base of the laterite oliff (left centre ol picture) ancl the spring-

witter draining down the ereck-bed to the water hole. In the foreground the daricenst

is covered by recent silt and gravel, but is exposed at the far end of the water hole.

Height of laterite cliff approximately 15 to IS fect.

( Author's photograple)

om ORE ROC ns

Sgro

Fig. 2. Two of the individual ontlets (points of arrows) of the Nilpie Springs at ihe

base of the laterite. The pisolitic nature of the laterite is illustrated between the

two arrows. ‘

(Authors photograph )

“Trans, Roy. Sac. S.A," Vol

H, Woprntn PLATE 2

Fig, 3. The surface of the duricrust at the castern end of Callamurra Water Hole with

typieal development of open joints. The seep occurs to the far left of picture,

(Author's photograph)

*Truns. Rov, Soe, S.A.”, Vol. &

THE EARLY PRODUCTION BY A. W. HOWARD OF

SUBTERRANEAN CLOVER SEED

BY D. E. SYMON

Summary

THE EARLY PRODUCTION BY A. W. HOWARD OF

SUBTERRANEAN CLOVER SEED

by D. E.. Syxron

[Read 11 May 1961]

Subterranean Clover (Trifolium subterranenm 1.) is the most important

sown pasture plant in Australia, now occupying an estimated area of 25-30

million acres (Donald, 1960). 1t was in South Australia that its. agricultural

development began and here the first clean seed was sold by Mr. A. W. Howard

ot Blakiston. Snbterranean Clover lias the unusual habit of placing its fruiting

burrs on or just below the soil surface so that the gathering of the burrs and their

threshing presented two distinct problems which had to be overcome before

eleau secd could be produced.

Hill (1986) states that Howard's. attempts to produce seed began about

1900. The dried mature plants were hand raked, chafled and winnowed, to

obtain a relatively clean sample of burrs. It proved bnpossible tu thresh the

burrs by flailing and they were eventually hand-rubbed and sieved. Small quan-

titics of seed were cleancd by 1963. Howard persisted in Iris attempts tu improve

the method of threshing and with F. I. Dutch eventually built a small two-man

huller. With this or other relatively simple machines threshing was conlinued

unti) after World War T when much larger, more clahorate, tractor-driven hullers

were both imported and manufactured locally, At this time, too. the use of

horse rakes and rotary brooms for sweeping the burrs together became cammon,

The considerable increase in seed production at this time is reflected in the

ligtires below and in those quoted by Hill for the State,

Miss G. Howard of Blakiston, South Australia, has made available papers

of her futher, the late A. W. Howard of Blakiston, in which are recorded details

of the early sales of subterranean clover seed.

Ioward's first letter to the press advocating subterrancan clover was to the

Adelaide “Advertiser” on February 3rd, 1906, in which a brief but enthusiastic

refercrice was made to the plant, He wrote again to “The Advertiser” on March

8nd, 1906, offering seed to the secretaries of the local branches of the Agricul-

tural Bureau of South Australia. This letter was copied widely in the Australian

press and Howard later distributed over 300 packets of seed in response to

requests from all over Australia. Ninety-two of these letters requesting seed

have been preserved und of these 38 came trom Victoria, 33 from South Aus-~

tralia, 10 from New South Wales, three each from Qaeensland and Tasmania,

four fram Western Austulia and one from South Africa.

Small quantities of seed must have been available at this time, but the first

commercial sale was on January 18th, 1907. when Messrs. FE. and W. Hackett,

an Adelaide firm of seedsmen, bought 30 Ib. of clean seed at 2/6 Ib. This order

was supplicd in three lots during January and February which suggests that

Huward had little seed on hand and that threshing was slow, Hacketts gave

firther orders for seed during Febriary-June, 1907, the amounts ranging from

15-44 Ib. ‘The only other sales in this year appear to have been 7 Ib. to Mr, J,

KRedeamp, Mayhu, Victoria, and 7 Ib. to R. Sewell, another Adelaide seedsman,

Iu this frst scason about 160 th. af sced was sald, of which 146 tb. went to

Hacketts,

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Anet, (1961), Vol. 83,

20 D. E, SYMON

During the 1907-1905 season 624 Ib. of seed were cleaned and sold at 2/3

Ib. and a single order for 10 Th. of clover burrs was supplied. Hacketts received

602 Ib. of the clean seed, the remaining 22 Jb. being sold in eight small lots,

none greater than 5 |b,

Seed production was further increased during the 1908-1909 season and

1,720 Jb. of seed were sold by Howard at 2/3 or 2/- Tb, All this seed went to

Hacketts except for 40 Ib. to two other Adelaide seedsmen. Seed production

was more than doubled in the next season (1909-1910) when 3,730 Ib, of seed

were sold at 2/- per Ib. Of this only 926 Ib. went to Taeketts, the remuinder

heing widely distributed to buyers from New Zealand, South Australia, Victoria,

New South Wales and Tasmania.

Until the 1914-15 season, seed production continued to increase, but only

6 ewt, was recorded as sold for the 1915-1916 season and no records of sales for

the two seasons, 1916-1917 and 1917-1916, have survived,

In 1914, the only year of apparettly full records during the war, the sale of

subterranean clover seed provided more than half of Howard's income. His

income was reduced by about 20 per cent. in the next year, 1915, but rose

steadily in 1916 and 1917 until it had doubled the 1915 figure by 1918, when

the sale of seed again provided more than half vf his income. In addition, a

record of wages paid by Howard also suggests there was some seed harvested

and cleaned during this period.

After the 1914-1918 war, seed production again increased considerably as the

threshing machines were greatly improved and there was a strong demand for

seed. Many other farmers now began to harvest and distribute seed and

Howurd’s personal contribution was relatively less important.

A summary of his production for the puriad 1906-1924 ts as follows:

Sewsort Seed Production Season Seed Production

1906-07 1-4 owt, 1916-16 6 ewt.

1907-08 5-5 owt, THL6-17 Wo records

1908-00 \ 15 ewt. 1Q1T-18 No records

1804-1) | 13 owt. 1918-19 64 ew.

1410-11 37 cwt. 1919-20 148 cwt.

IHi1-t2 2) exypts 1920-21 171 owt.

1912-13 ! 41 ew. 1921-22 T&T cw.

ToL3-14 j Ti owt. 122-23 131 ewr.

1914-15 45 ewh, 1924-24 133 Gwh,

Finally, it is of interest to compare Howard's production with recent figures

for Australia,

Australian prediction of Subterranean Clover Seed

Season | Toms Season | Tons

1950-51 | 2605 1955-56 G236

1951-52 3671 1956-457 4319

1952-53 2492 1957-58 8197

1953-54 3523 158-59 3100

1944-45 3208 |

REFERENCES,

Hint, H., 1936. Subterranean Clover, its History in South Australia. J, Dept. Agric., Sth.

Aust., 40, pp, 422-330,

Donato. ©. M., 1960. The Influence of Climatic Factors on the Distributien af Subter-

ranean Clover. Herb. Abst., 30, pp, ST-90.

D. E. Symon PLATE 1

Vor \ ‘ :

Kory \ Nokett Mura, . Gare On vs oy Vow Wweneanves

50 Varies Tadurgatlt(aradlatl ot) HeLa sea

hot Davy 1 Gaal Ao | hase ee ak. Qo do BET ag Fee 2

\ ae oe Biles Won i

| ane BLL. hoe Ae an ins \p

yy ae Win Godt | Aoy cosh cae \8y \%.

A photograph of portion of a page in A. W. Howard’s order book showing

Hackett’s original order.

“Trans. Roy, Soc, $.A.”, Vol. 85.

A TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA

BY PAUL G. WILSON

Summary

The genus Correa is endemic to Australia and is found in all States. Eleven species are here

recognized, three of which are subdivided into varieties. No new species but five new varieties are

described; one new varietal name and two new varietal combinations are made. A key to and

description of the species and varieties is given.

A TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA

(RUTACEAE)

by Paun. G. Wirson*

(Communicated by Hj. Eichler)

)Read 11 May 1961]

SUMMARY

The genus Correa is endemic to Australia and is found in all States.

Eleven species are here recognized, three ol which are subdivided into varieties.

No new species’ but five new yarieles are described: one new varietal name

and two new varietal combinations are made. A key to und deseriplion of ihe

species and varieties 3s given.

Only a selection of material seen from the following private and public

herbaria is cited: C. Beauglehole Herbarium (ACB); State Herbarium of South

Australia (AD); Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide (ADW));

Botanic Museum and Herbarium, Brisbane (BRI); C.S.0R.0., Div. of Plant

Industry and Div. of Land Research and Regional Survey, Canberra (CANB);

Snowy Mountains Hydro-Electric Authority, Soil Conservation Section

(COOMA); Gauba Herbarium, Canberra (GAUBA): Botany School, University

of Cambridge (CGE); Bot. Anstalten, Univ, Halle-Wittenberg (HAL); Univer-

sity of Tasmania (110); C. Ingram Merbarium, Bathurst (INGRAM); Royal

Botanic Gardens, Kew (K); National Herbarinm of Victoria (MEL); N. A.

Wakefield Herburium, Melbourne (NAW); University of New England, Armi-

dale (NE): National Herburium of New South Wales (NSW); Dept. of Botuny

of the University, Sydney (SYD); L. Williams Herbarium, Meningie

(WILLIAMS).

INTRODUCTION

The genus Correa first became known to science when Joseph Banks and

Danic] Solander collected seed and herbarium specimens of it at Botany Bay,

May, 1770. The genus was twice described in 1798 within a short period by

Tl. C. Andrews in the Botanists” Repository and apparently independently by

J. E. Smith im the Trans Linn. Soc. (as Corraea), both of whom named it alter

the Portuguese ambassador and botanist. Jose Correa de Serra.

The genus is limited to Australia and neighhouring islands «nd extencls

from south-cast Queensland to Vietoria anc Tasmania and at least as fur west

as. the Western Australian border. It occupies a variety of habitats ranging

from sand dunes on sea coasts and semi-deserts to humid subtropical valleys

and alpine streams,

In their natural state all the species except C. baeuerlenii show indications

of ability to hybridize, at Teast occasionally,. with one or more Correa species

if crowing at the same locality. Besides the more obvious hybrids which are

found between two otherwise distinct species ane may also find a gradual

regional change from one form, variely, Or species to another, This topocline is

* State Herbarium of South Australia, Adeliice,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, (1961), Vol. 35,

22 PAUL G. WILSON

one uf the causes of taxonomic confusion within the genus, Ths it is that on

the Australim mainland and iv Tasmania the various regional forms of GC.

reflexa grade into each other, as similarly does C. backhousiuna yrade inta C,

reflesd. F. Mueller ( LRU perhaps Jogically, limped together all those

fortis which he could wot clearly demarcate, under C. speciosa, Bentham (1863)

acted similarly, as have most botanists subsequently, No one, since Benthum.

has attempted to monograph the genus as a whole. Fdwin Ashby (1939)

revised the South Australian species but, tmtortumatcly, failed to adhere ta

the international rules of botanical nomenclature and also overlooked two species

already described from South Austrulian material (C. pulchella and ©.

schlechtenddalii)

Of the generic synonyms, the earliest, Maszeutoxeron Labill., was sunk hy

Labillurdigre himself in 1806 (but after Verntenat in 1803) under Correa after

the prinr publication of the latter had been brought to his attention, na author

has attempted to reinstate the name, The genus Antommarchia Calla ex Meisner

was credited in order to separate the C. reflexa complex from C. alba, on the

basis of fusion or distinctiveness of the petals, a separation which no one else

has followed except at a subgeneric level. Lindley’s genus Didimeria (1838)

was bused on the churacter of the free petals in C, acmula being each rolled

ground two stamens (alter anthesis) and of the capstant presence of two seeds

in each ecarpel. The latter character is shared by the other species while the

petal character although unique within the genus is not of inter-generic tlis-

tinction.

The genus Currea is very clearly defined, no species have been first de-

scribed under any other genus or have been transferred fram Correa ta other

gencrie (except those now regarded as taxonomic synonyms). It is recognized

hy its opposite leaves, entirely stcllate pubescence, floral parts im fours, sym-

petalous corolla (at least when young), and glabrous. lincar stamens, Agardh

(1858) considered the genus of sufficient distinctness to treate for it the

separate family Correaccue, but in this he has not been followed hy other

botanists. The sympetalons corolla has been shown by Hartl (1957) to be due

ta a secondary fusion, thns it is primarily apopetalous as are most other mem-

hers ol the Reeteceue.

According to $. Smith-White (Austral, ].Bot, 2:293( 1954) ) the chromosome

number of C. alba, C, lawrenciana (probably var. cordifolia) and C, reflexa (“C-

speciosa”) isn = 16, [have not been able to verity the identity of the specimens

referred to by him but 1 have no reason to doubt his determinations.

Since the genus was first mtroduced into Europe it has been popular among

hovtieulturalists as a greenhouse plant, and as the species could so readily be

artificially hybridized many new cultivars were soon introduced into the

gardening world, Some of these were figured and described in horticultural

and botanical journals. I have not attempted to search out all names of horti-

cultural plants but in the accompanying index | have listed those which appear

in the Index Londonensis und the Index Kewensis, although I have not always

been able to see the literature cited nor am I certain that in the reference given

the plant was there first described, Where the parentage of the horticultural

hybrids was stated [ have indicated it within inverted commas after the reference.

The name Correa Andr. has been conserved against the name Correla

Vellaza (1788), 2 member of the Ochnaceae, which may be considered a

lhomonym. It las also been conserved against Corraca Smith, u name which

was published in the same year and at about the same time as Andrews’, although

secmingly independently, aud describing the same plant.

TANONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORHEA 33

CoRREA

Correa IL. Andrews, Bot.Rep.l:t18(1 Apr. 1798) nom. cons., Smith,

‘Trans, Linn, Soc42219(1798), ~“Corraca”; Willd., Sp.PL.2;324(1799); Vent. Jard,

Malm. sub 613 (1803); Desfont, Ann. Mus.Par. 2:32( 1803): Persoon, Syn.Pl.

1:419(1805); Labi. Nov ilolL Pl. 2:120(1806-07); Smith in Rees, Cyelop,

10: (May 1807); Gaertu.K.k., ruct.Sem.Pl. 3:154( 1507); Ait, Hort-Kew. ed.2.

2:349(181L); Poir.. Tabl.Eneyel, 2(6):+.945(1819), Le. 3(1):606(1823), Ed-

wards, Bat. Reg, 6:t,515(1821), DC,, Prod, 1:719( 1824); Jossieu, Mem.Mus,Paris

12:478 t.21 4. 22(1825), G.Don, Gen.Hist.Dich,P]. 1:790( 1831); Dietrich, Syn.PI.

1269( 1840); Encll,, Gen.Pl. 1156(1840); Hook.f., Fl.,Tasm. 1:61(1855); Agardh,,

Theoria syst.PL 299(1858): F.Muel., Pl, Vict. 1:135( 1860-62); Benth. et Hook.t,,

Gen.Pl. 1:294(1862); Genth., Fl.Austral. 1:354(1863); I. Muell., Native PI Vict.

1:43(1879), Moore, FIN US.Wales 47(1893); Rodway, FLTasm. 20(1903);

Engler, Phanzenfam. 3(4):144(1896); Bailey, Syn,Queensl.FL51( 1853); Builey,

Queensl.FL, 1:195(1899): Black, FIS.Austral, 339(192d); Ie, #1.2.09( 1948 ),

Engler, Pflanzenfam. ed.2.193:262(1931); Ewart, Fl.Vict. 694(193L); Ashby,

Proc, Linn.Soc,Lond, Sess, 151;214(1939}; Hartl, Abh.Akad.Wiss,Mainz, Math.-

nat.K], Jg@, 1957:53-63( 1957); Curtis, Students Fl.Tasm. 105( 1956). ‘Type species:

Correa alba Andr.

(For note on priatity of publication (Andrews ur Smith) ch Rickett and

Stalleu, Taxon §:299(1959).)

§ Breviflarae DC., Prod. 1:719(1824); Sprengel, Svyst.Veyg. 2:215( 1825);

G.Don, Gen Hist.Dichl,Pl, 1:790( 1831 )-

§ Longiflorae DC, l.c.; Sprengel. lie: G.Don, |v,

Mazeutoxeron Lalill, VoyRech.La Perouse 2:11(1800), Type spectes:

M_ rufum Labill., Le. 12 Atlas &17( 1800). i

Euphocarpus Anders.cx Telsy., Pead. 533(1810) nomen,

Antommarchia Colla ex Meisner, Linnaew 4. Litt, 56( 1829); Colla, Mort.

Ripul.App. 2:345(1827), nomen; Presl. Rep.BotSyst, 1,185(1834) “Anto-

marchia’; Colla, MerAcad.Turin IL, 5:492(1843). Type species: A. rubra

Colla ex Presl,, le.( 1834).

Didimeria Lindl. in Mitchell, Three Exped.l.Austral. 2:197(1838); ed.2,

2:198(1839); Lindl, Ann.Sci.Nat.If, 15:59(1841) “Didymeria”; Endl, Gen.Pl,

suppl.2. 92(1842) “Didymeria’; Walpers, Rep.Bot.Syst. 5:390( 1845-46) “Didy-

merta”, Type species: D, aemula Lind]. in Mitchell, |.c.

Small shrubs to trees up te 30 fect high. Stem, leaves, calyx, and corolla

all more or less stellate pubescent at least in the young stage. Leaves opposite,

petiolate, chartaceous to coriaceous, entire or variously crenulate, orbicular to

narrowly oblong, Inflorescence a small cymose cluster of 1-5 (-7) flowers,

terminal on branchlets of 1-seyeral internodes, the terminal pair of foliar organs

often variously modified to form obvious bracts, Pedicel with a pair of normally

linear or oblong (often minute) bracteoles, these are persistent or caducous feom

the bud stage, and are inserted from the extreme base to the apex of the pedicel,

Calyx more or less cupuliform with the margin entire or four lobed; lobes

undulate or denticuliform to lanceolate, occasionally with intermediate lobes.

Corolla sympetalaus sometimes becoming polypetalous by the early splitting

apart of the 4 petals, white or various shades of green or red, lobes valvate.

Disc S-lobed, Stamens 4+ 4, inserted at the base of the disc. Filaments linear

usually dissimilar, the antipetalous slightly sharter and with broader basal

portions that the antisepalous, glabrous; anthers included or exsert. broadly

oblong te lanceolate, with a deep dorsal concavity in which the filament is

attached, introrse. Ovary densely hirsute to tomentose or with only apical

24 PAUL (, WILSON

tufts of hairs, 4-carpellary, 4-Iocular, Ovules normally 2 per carpel, superim-

posed on the axile placenta. Style filiform glabrous or tomentose towards the

base, usually more or less equalling the stamens in length; stigma minutely 4-

lobed. Fruit splitting into 4 cocci except at the base; coeci axially and apically

dehiscing to release the 1 or 2 seeds and cartilaginous endvearp.

Key toa species of Correa

1. Filaments somewhat dilated at the base; anthers oblong to lanceolate, the margins not

recurved after dehiscence; corolla falling after anthesis (except in C. aemulir),

B. Calyx + truncate, if lobed then the lobes dentoid, linear, rounded, or obtusely deltoid,

Coralia shades of white, green, or red.

3. Corolla green or red, over 1-3 cm. long nut (or rarely) splitting ta the base,

4. Calyx without Jobes between the calyx teeth or if present then small and ineon-

spicnous: plant erect.

5. Pedicel 3 wim. long or wmder, bracteoles persistent or caducous, if caducous then

corolla red with green Inbes or all green and leaves cuneate to rounded (not

cordate) at the base; calyx glabrous fo densely pubescent, becoming closed

bnmediately after anthesis.

G. Bracteoles cacieous in bud; anthers well exsertcd; Jeaves smooth above,

chartaceous, rounded to cuneate at the base,

7, Corolla green, calyx vlabrous to tomentose .-..-. A Ae 3. 0. glabra

7. Corolla ted with grocen Iobes, calyx glabrous to sparsely pubescent

2. C, schlechtendalii

6. Bracteoles persistent (caducous in some §. Australian forms); avthers partly

to fully exsorted; leaves smooth to scabridulous above, cordate (if not cordate

then seubridulays above, ar coriaceous, or with persistent bracteoles )

1. C. reflexa

5. Pedicol 4-8 mm. long, bracteoles caducous: corolla entirely pale red or green

(or if red with green lobes then under 2 em. long and with coriaceous leaves);

ealyx glabrous or subglabrous, remaining wide open atter anthesis.

8. Pedicel closely tomentose, not thicker towards the apex; corolla yellowish

green, or red with green lubes: anthers 3°5-4 mm. long, leaves dark yreen.

9. Corolla less than 2 em. long, yellowish green or red with greenish

Jobes. (Islands off coast of §,A., Eyre Pen. and W.A,)

l, C. reflexa var, cortacea

9. Corolla more than 2-3 em. long, yellowish green. (Tasmania and

islands. ) 6. C. backhousiona

8, Pedicel glabrous or practivally so, becoming thicker towards the apex;

corolla entirely pale red; anthers 1-1-5 (—2) mm. long; Jeaves light

green, + glabrous or very sparsely pubescent ..-.... - 8. GC. pulchella

4. Calyx with prominent deltoid or oblong lobes between the calyx teeth; plant

prowumbert ... nee e pe e ee 4. CG. decumbens

3. Corolla white or yery pale pink, to 1-3 em. long, hecuming split to base C. alb

. alba

3, Culyx very deeply 4-lobed. the lohes triqngnlar or lanceolate, acute to acutninate,

Corolla greenish.

LO, Pedicel nnder 0-5 em. long, corolla remaining sympetalous

5. C. calycina

10. Pedicel aver 1 em. long, corolla becoming split to base

9. C. gemula

1, Pilsments searcely broadened at the base: anthers lanceolate with the margins recurved

after dehiscence (at least when dry); coroll: not falling after anthesis.

Calyx rounded at the base without any protuberance

1). C. lawrencivna

11. Calyx with a puytellifonn outgrowth at the base

ll, €. baeuerlenti

1. Correa reflexa (Labill.)Vent., Jard.Malm. sub.t.13(1803); Person, Syn.Pl.

1;419(1805); Labill., Nov-Holl,PlSpec. 2:120(1806); K. PF. Gaertner,

Frict.Sem.Pl, 3;155(1807); Britten in Banks and Sol., Ilust.Austral-Pl.

14/1905); Black, FI.S.Austral. 340(1924); Le. ed.2.496(1948); Ashby, Proc:

Linn.Soc.Lond.Sessx. 151:216(1939); Curtis, Stadents FiTasm. 106( 1956);

Court, Vict.Nat. 73:174( 1957).

TAXONOMIC HEVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA 2

Mazeutoxeron reflexum Lubill, Voy.Recherehe La Perouse 2;66( £800),

Atlas £.19(1800), Type, La baie de L’Aventure, southern Tasmania, ca, 1791,

Labillardiére (not seen),

C. rubra Smith in Rees, Cyclop, 10:(1807); Smith, Exot.Bot. Pana

nomen; Banks and Sol., Wlust.AustealPl 14, t.34(1905); Black, FLS.Austral.

340 (1924) p.p.; 1c. ed.2.496( 1948); Kwart, F, Viet. 695(1931); Astiby, Ie. ( 1989).

‘Type, plant described from unpublished plate drawn from material collected

by Banks and Solander in 1770 at Botany Bay and named by Solander C. rubi-

eunda (= Banks and Sol, l.c, tab.34), corresponding material MEL, NSW.

C. rubicunda Solander ex Britten in Banks and Sol., Ic, pro syn. sub. (.

rubra,

C. speciosa J. Donn ex Andr., Bot.Rep. 10:t.653( 1812); J, Don, Hort.Cantab.

ed-6. 100(1811) nomen; Ait, Epitome Hort.Kew. addeudi 4(1814) nomen;

Sims in Curtis, Bot.Mag, 4%:t.1746(1815); DC., Prod. 1:719(1824); Spreng.,

Syst.Vew, 2:215(1825); GC. Don, Gen.Ilist.DichI.PI, 1:790(1831); Dietrich,

Syn.Pl. 1263(1840); Walpers, Rep.Bot.Syst. 1:506(1842); F. Muell,, PlViet.

1,136( 1860-62); Benth. Fl.Austral. 1:354(1863) pip. Moore, FIN.S,Waeles

47( 1893); Bailcy, Queonsl.Fl, 1:196(1899); Rodway, FI-Tasm. 20(1903): Banks

and Solander, Wlust.Austral. Pl 14. .33(1905). ‘Type figure drawn from plant

raised from seed which came from Now South Wales.

Antommarchia rubra Colla ex Presl, Rep. Bot.Syst. 1:185( 1834), Colla, [fprt.

Ripul.App, 2:345(1827) pro synsub. C. speciosa; Colla, Mem.Acae.Turin LL,

5:492(1843). Based on C. speciosa Andry,

C. speciosa “race” it. normalis Benth., 1c. 355 (1863), based on C. speciosa.

Nomen illeg,

“Antommarchia speciosa [Andr.] Schlecht.”, LK. 1-157(1893),

G. virens Sm., Exol.Bot. 2:25 t.72(1806); Smith in Rees, Cyel. 10:( 1807);

Ait, Hort.Kew, ed.2, 2:349( 1811); Curtis, Bot.Mas. 44:4.190L( 1817); DG., Pend,

tera teary Spreng., Syst.Veg. 2:315(1825); GC, Don, Gen.Hist.DichLPl.

1:790(1831); Dietrich, Syn.Pl, 1269(1840). Type, figure and description frum

plant raised by the Marquis of Blandford from’ seed from “New Holland”,

Autummarchia vires (Sm.)Colla, Mem. Acad, Turin LU. 5:493(1843),

C. virldidflore Andr.. Bot-Rep. t.436(1806); Bonpl, Pl.Rar.Malm. 132-34,

1.12(1813), Based om ©, virens Sm, nom. illeg,

C. speciosa yar, virens ( Sin.) Huok.£., Fl.Tasm. 62(1855); Engl,, PHanzenfam.

3(4),144(1896),

C. rubra var. virens [Sm.] Ewart, Fl.Vict. 695(1931) without indicatian of

basionyn, wem. ileg,

C. virens Hook,, Journ.Bot. 1:253( 1835); Walpers, Rep.Bot.Syst, 1506

(1842). Syntypes, Tasmania; 1831, Lawrence (K); Gunn 152 (K). (fowever,

upparently not intended to be a new species, cf. Mook., Camp.BatMag, 1:876

(1836). }

C. cordifolia Lind}. i Mitchell, Three Exped-F-Austral. 2:2'31 (1838)+ Limdl.,

Ann.Sci.Nat. IL. 15:58(1841); Walpers, Rep,Bot.Syst, 2-824 (1843), Type, near

junction of Crawford R. and Glenelg R.. south-west Vietoria, 24 Ang:, 1836,

T, L, Mitchell 295 (tole GGE, iso MEL),—Figs. 1, 2.

Shrub 1-4 feet high semiprostrate to erect. Stem closely tomentose to

luosely flocculose. Leaves subsessile to distinctly petiolute; petiole 2-5 mm. long;

lamina oblong to broadly ovate or orbieulur, to 5 om. long and 3 cm. wide, entire

ar erenulate, chartaccous to coriaceous, upper surface smooth to seabridilous,

glabrous or pubescent, lower surface subglabrans to tomentose, paumose, or

flucculose, apex rounded to obtuse, hase rounded to cordate with rounded lihes.

Flowers erect or pendulous, typically at the end of slender branchlets of one

pe by PAUL. G, WILSON

Internode bearing a terminal pair of refexed leafy bracts and 1-3 fowers on

shart pedicels (in some forms the: branchlets are of more than one internode

und the bracts not differentiated from ordinary foliage leaves). Peclicel 2-6:5

tim, lung, not swollen above; bracteoles linear, 3-11 mm, long, inserted in the

lower half of the pedicel, persistent (or in var. corlacea caducous). Calyx

semiorbieular, 3-6 mm. high, ereum-ferruginous tomentose, more or Jess truncate

or slightly undulate, 4-dentate (sometimes with intermediate lobes), becoming

viriously folded or flattened after anthesis. Corolla cylindrical ta infunidi-

buliform sometimes swollen slightly in the middle, 1-5-3-8 em. long, closely

squamulose, yellowish-green or red with green tips, falling after anthesis.

Stamens with the antipetalons filaments broadened and inwardly convex at the

base, antisepalous filaments slightly so. Anthers slightly exsert, oblong or ovoid,

2-5-3:5 mm. long (dry) the margins not recurved after dehiscence, Style

tomentose tawards the base. Ovary densely tomentose to hirsute, Froit with

eneei to 1 em. long, rounded at the summit, normally not causing the calyx to

split,

Key to varieties of C, reflexa

1. Flowers subtended by a pair of foliaceous bracts, Bracteoles persistent at loust to flower-

ing stage.

2, Teaves ovate, usuully broadly so, base = cordate or subeordate (ar reunded): dlowers

ureentish yellow to red... 62.262. =. 2 1 pe ee genta mal ...-- var. veflexa

2, Teaves narrowly oblong or lanceolate, base rounded; Howery red with ercen tips.

3. Calyx d¢-dentate; leaves smoolly above, [Grppsland.) 2..........,. var. eardinalis

3. Calyx 4-dentate with + inter-raunced to deltoid lobes; leaves s¢abridilous above.

(Grampians) 2.0. ee ee eatee Melo aewip, Sty5 oe yar, réflexe

1, Tas not obviously subtended by a pair of foliaceous bracts ar if so them with eaducons

iacteoles.

{. Leaves coriaceous.

5. Leaves closely tomentose below, srucoth and glabrous above. #lowers less than

2 em, long; pedicels 5 mm. long or over, S.A, islands; southern Eyre Pen,;

Bewales 22a ceca vase D eine ame fo ge stele oe Ceiba tt ale pe estes var. coriacea

5, Leaves with course of fine clense fomentum below, sinanth ta seabrid above,

Flowers over 2 em, long; pedicels less than 4 mm_ long.

6. Leaves broadly ovate to orbieulay, (Islands af Buss Str. und Kangaroo fs, )

; var, nummulartifolia

G. Leaves marrowly ovate. ».--. 0 ., 0-2-2 2 ne eee eee var, reflexa

2. Leaves CHataecauges ej ena ean elt e ee eee ee cee ees var. reflesa

var. reflexa.

Shrub of 2-4 feet high, Stem lousely ferruginons flocculose. Leaves sub-

sessile to distinctly petiolate; petiole 2-5 mm, long; lamina narrowly to broadly

ovate (rarely suboblong), 1-5-5 cm. long, 0-6-3 cm, wide, chartaceons (to sub-

coriaceous in western $. Australia), entire or irregularly crenate, glabrous to

sparsely pubescent and usually scabridulose above, thinly tomentose to pannusc

(rarely subglabrous) beneath, Hat or with recurved margin, apex rounded to

obtuse, base shallowly to deeply cordate (rarely rounded or cbtuse)- Flowers

1-3(-5) at the end of lateral branchlets usually of one internode, the terminal

foliaecous bracts usually appressed to the pendulous flowers. Perdicel 2-4 min,

long, tomentose; bracteoles narrowly linear, 3-5(-11) mm. long, usually per-

sistent, inserted at or near the base of the pedicel, the lateral flowers of a cluster

sometimes with a short peduncle (ca. 2mm.) and an additional pair of small

oblanceolate bracts 2-3mm. long. Calyx semiorbicular 3-6 mm. high, tomentose,

truncate and + 4-dentate, sometimes with small intermediate lobes. Corolla

(1-5-)2-3-5 cm, long green, or red with green tips.

As delimited here this variety is extremely polymerphic but there does not

appear to he any natural break between one form and another. Each locality

has its own form or forms whieh grade into each other, The type form from

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE CENUS CORREA 27

southern Tasmania has slender peduncles bearing a terminal pair of reflexed

foliaceous bracts (from which character it derives its specific epithet) and a

pendulous flower with a green cylindrical corolla. Only in the north of the

islind around Georgetown docs a red flowering form occur, On the mainland

this typical form is found in New South Wales and Victoria, especially the

montane regions, as well as many variations of it.

The red and green forms appear to be intermixed indiscriminately for the

most part, although in some cases over large areas only one colour form is found,

such is the case in South Australia where east of the Mt. Lofty Ranges to the

Victorian border only red flowered forms oceur.

As is discussed under C, alba, it appears that the type of C. rubra is a hybrid

between C. alba and C. reflexa, both species grow near together at the type

locality, Botany Bay. Putative hybrids between the two species have also been

found along the south coast of Victoria.

—* nae

lam bea

i) c

Tig. 1, Correa veflexa var, reflexa: A, typical form from. Uriarra, A.C.'T,

(Pulleri 2087); B, satue with bracts. removed; C, form fond aronnd

Retany Bay (NSW 51571),

A form with thin white tomentose leaves und green flowers occurs at the

Encounter Bay region of Fleuricu Peninsula and as. is discussed under C.

calycing it appears to be in the nature of a hybrid swarm helween that species

and C. reflexa with possibly the influerice of other species,

C. reflexa var. reflexa grades into the other varieties and the distinctions

made in this paper belween them are possibly not entirely natural.

The type plate of C. speciosa agrees well with specimens of C. reflexa

gathered from the area around Botany Bay.

Distribution: §.E. Queensland, eastern New South Wales, Victoria, Tas-

mania, southern regions of South Australia.

QUEENSLAND, south-east. Darling Downs: Crows Nest, C, White (BRI, NSW); Mis-

take Plateau to Castle Mt, 3100 fu, “shrub 3 ft", Goy and Snuth AG7( BRI); Mt. Ernest,

2500-3000 ft. C. White 5575(BR1); Stanthorpe, J. Boorman (NSW); Wallangatra, anon.

105( BRT); Wyherba, C_ White 9340( BRT).

New Souin Waces. Abercrombic Caves, “3-4 ft.”, E. Constable (Al); Apsley Falls,

L.. Johnson (NSW); Armidale, M, Cumstan 10( NSW); Barrington, “2 ft", BE. Hyem 11

(NSW); Burrill Lake, M. Tindale (AD); Brosh Is. FL Rodway 12)1( NSW); Bundanoon,

J. Williams (NE); Bundeena, R, Oxenford (NSW): Burrinjuck Dam, 2B. Straatmans

(CANB); Botany Bay, 1770, Banksy and Sulunder (MEL, NSW); ibid., Kurnell, 7. Boorman

ef PAUL GC. WILSON

(NSW); Concord, O. Boas (CANB); Olyde Nt. 7. Suormen (NSW); Cambewarm, W,

Raenvslen (MEL); Cessnock, C, Ingram (INGRAM); Disaster Bay, B. Constable. (NSW);

Kast Burnerong, Gh, Chippendale (NSW ); Coultmrn, C. Moore (MEL); George, B., Canpbell-

town, No Ford (NSW); Gladesville,. J, Boorman (NSW): Guyra, B, Mulligan LONSW);

Gloucester Buckets, J. Boorman (NSW); Jenolan Caves, Blakely (NSW); Kuri Karri, 2

Pinning (NE); Kureajong Mix, J. By Cleland (AD); Mudgee, W. Woolls (MEL); Meritn-

bula-Pambula, F. Redway 1208( NSW); Mt. Dromedary, B, Reaver 1(MEL); Mt. Jellow,

£, Cheel (NSW); Milton, J. Bourmen (NSW); Mi Kaputar, 3000 t., G. Invrans (INGRAM),

Monnhi, N, Burbidge 2847(CANB): Met, Kosciusko, near base, F. Mueller (MEL); Narva-

been, M. Day (CANB); Neweastle, L. Lotchherdt (NSW): Natmoi, Nuvo. 92( MEL);

Nowr, F. Rodway 1202(NSW); Olney State Forest, ©) Constable (NSW); Pt. Stephens,

C. Davis 1ACNSW ); Peak Hills, Harvey Rauges, J, Boorman (NSW): Pambula; ALM. 2271

(COOMA); Red Head, I, Rodway (NSW); Sussex Inlet, J, Viekory CAD); Squatlings Rock

Gap, Mt. Colong, 2500 ft, J. Garden (NSW); Seuth Kincinnher, G. Chippendale (NSW),

‘Tawee, W. de Bouuseville LECNSW ); ‘Caseott, Ho Seutt (NE); Torrington, J. Boorman (NSW);

Talbingo, Althofer 948(COOMA), Tuinut, Maiden (BRI, NSW); Twotold Bay, Ganda

(GAUBA); ‘Tabonrie Is. F Rodway t2l2(NSW);) Warrumbungle Range, , Althufer

34(MEL); Ubarby, C. Ingram (INGRAM); Ulan, 1200 ft, 2. Johnson (NSW). Widder,

& Constuble (NSW); Warlalda, J. Boorman (NSW), Wentworth Falls, ti Katoomba, F

Hitton (AD).

ACT. Punchbowl! Ck, A, Gry 4594(CANB); Murrimbicdgee Ry, W. Mariley 48

(CANB); Uriwrra, Cauba (CAUBA). Weetangora, Ro Pullen 2115(CANB); Jervis Bay,

Giuby (GAUBA); Bowen Is, Jervis Bay, Fo Rodway 1204( NSW)

Viewnara. Aniherst, J. AL Soith (ML); Brightun, &. Afveller (MEL); Bendigo, C.

Suiton (MEL); Buchan RY, I, ASueller (MPL); Buffalo Ranges, &, Maeller (MME I: Bartwag,

T. Rewiler (MEL); Bridgewater, C. Beauglehole 5106(ACK); Bendiyn, C. Beanulehale 5124

(ACB); Upper Cann Th, No Wakefield 4605(NAW); Doteaster, GC. Torpffer A( MEL),

Daylestord, @, Wallace (MEL); Dimboola, C. E. D'Alten (MEL); Tpinting Rano, 1883,

A. Howitt 4(MEL); Forest Ck,, Costlemaie, Bunce (MELA: Glenelg R.. Mt. Kincaid, iM.

Alltt (MEL): Genoa K., Sept. 1460, FL Mueller (MEL); Gabo Js, Maplestane (MEL);

Flue TS. Jenheote (MELD, Ihdls Gap, Grampians, Burford (AD): tigleweod, 2, Nolan

(MEL): Lakes Entrance. Gippsland, Jo Stirling 137( MEL); Mt. Dandenong, FP. St Jol

(MET), Mallioooti, Te Slat (MEL): mj SIL Hotham, 5000 1b, Mes, MCaonn (MEL);

Meredith, S. Johnstone (MEL): Murrtingowar, LOOD ft, N. Wakefield? (NAW): Mary-

borough, GC. Maylestone (MEL); Nhill, ©, Wolter (MEL), Orbost, WV Wakefiel'! 3546

(NAW); Plenty Ranges, Oct. 1853, & Mweller (MEL); Kesearch, 2 Jun. 1Y47, Gauly

(GAUBA); Station Perk, ar, Geelong, J, FE. Main (MED); Smythesdale, C. Cullyer (MEL),

Sedhrs Cove. Wilsons Prom), F. Mueller (MEL); Stawell, {- Stuer (NSW): 'yrenclerra te

Surry FL, Portland, MW. Aston 695(AD), Victana Range, Flack ond Beanglehole (MEL).

Basy Srmare. Flinders Is, L. Rodway (NSW); Ring ds. Co French Je (NSW),

Tasmania. Avoca, Soulll Ese 3, C, Stuart (MEL). Coles Bay, Fleurien Bay, Radway

(CANB), East Arm, C. Stuart (MEL); Hreycinel Pen. K. Black (Ml), Georges Bay,

A. Simpson (BRI), Glonorehy, L000 fr, Fo Lang J98(CANB): George Town, A. Gunn

NSW); Glen Leith, H, Gunn L036( NSW); Kingston, WY, Cures (PCr); Linelisfatne, 8, Black

ait.) Tow Feud, R. Rupp (NSW), Launceston, C. Stuart 23(MEL); Mt. Direction,

F. Rodway, 1Q01( NSW): Mt. Wellingtun, Bo Bluck (MEE): Mt Nelson, Ae Black (MIELI;

Month, EF. Leng 4387(CANBI, New Sown rivulet, Wo Werymonth 29°MKL); SN. Texk

B. Gure 1S20NSW); Penwuin, AL Gain (NSW); Port Sorel, GC. Stuart ATOC MEL). Sunily

Ch, OC, Stuart 238(MEL); “Neithbourhood ef fie Derwene’, A Brea (MEL.

Soot Arstmacia. Amo Bay. 6. fsing (ADDY: or Buckleboo, K, Rolrlach TAD):

Bakers Range, f. Green 247(AD); Clarendon, J. Tepper (MEL); Cape Banks, J. B. Clylamd

(ADB): Cupe BDonglay, T. Letkiee (AD): Connalpyn, (1 Andrem (AT); Cummins, JD Che

lund (809); Coovang, oe Salt Ck. D. Whitley TLLOAD). Carapee Hill, RK. Rolirlach 462

CAD), Encounter Bay, J 8. Cleland (AD); Gawler Range, E- Ising (AD); Tlawhes Nest,

Malinong, M, Sharrad 529( AD). Keith to Bordertown, M2 MeLarun (INGRAM); Kuitpo,

A. Morris (ADW): of Keith, Al Speelt and Rayson 41(AD): Taceprde Bay, TT, Baldage

(MPLA, Lake Barney, 1874. Mi. Well (MEL); Meomeie, £. Williams G38(WOLLLTAMS }s

Mt. Bor, 8 Crocker (ADW): Marble Runges, C. Wilhelmi (MEL); Mi Magnificent, &,

Schade T53(AD): Narienorts, Ars. Peierick (AD); Onkaparinga to Willuaga, Fo Mueller

(MEL), Pk. Lincoln, A. Adcock (AD): Pt. Pirie, AL, Koch TS8 NSW); Pt. Flliot, Miss Thussey

I23( MEL); Pt Vincent. J. Black (AD): Rapid Bay, BL Mueller (MEL): Hivelt Bay. hr

Mueller (MEL); Spalding Cove, Po Wilson 308(AD); Samly Ck. Gawler, J. Cleland (AD);

Yiulinara, J. Wo Green 1548( AD, NE); The Springs. Me. Garmlsier. BE Iving (AD); Kanuaroa

Island: Kingseote, A, Ravers (ADL, Kelly Hill, FP Wile TO8(AD): Mog Bay, L. &. Clarke

(AD); Penola, W. Gil (NSW); Wilson Hf Wilson ONSW).

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE CENUS CORREA 29

©, REFLEXA X ?

“Encounter Bay” form

Sourm Ausrratra, Southern Fleurieu Peninsula and Encounter Bay: Boat Harbour Ck.,

Hj. Bichler 14426( AD); Callawonga Ck., F, Hilton (ADW); Deep Ck., E. Jackson 8( AD);

Goolwa, J. B. Cleland (AD); Tunkalilla Beach, J. B. Cleland (AID, MEL); Tapanappa Ck.,

Hy, Eichler 14478(AD): Willow Gk., Waitpinga, J. B. Cleland (AD).

Fig. 2. Distribution of Correa reflexa var. reflexw @; var. cardinalis *; vat.

corlacea +: var. nummnulariifolia CO.

CORREA REFLEXA [X DECUMRBENS ?]

VictoriA. Grampians: C. Walters (NSW); ibid, R. Baker (AD, MEL): ibid., Gauba

(GAUBA), ibid.. F. Robbins (ACB); ibid., Finck and Beauelehole (ACB); ibid., A, Hicks

(ACB); ibid, D. Syman 37(AD, ADW); ibid., M. Singleton (MEL): Burneys Ck., J. Willis

(MEL); Mt. Victoria, 2. H. [sing 3324(AD); Marra Warr, F. Mueller (MEL); Pomonal,

J. Staer (NSW); Stawell, A, Tadgell (MEL); Stony Ck., A. Tadgell (MEI); Victoria Range,

Hinek asd Béauglehole (MEL).

var. cardinalis (tM. ex Hook.) Court, Vict.Nat. 73:175( 1957),

C. cardinalis FvM. ex Hook., Bot.Mag. 92:t.4912 (1 Apr. 1856); F. Muell.,

First Gen.Rep. 10(1853) nomen; anou., The Florist, 187(June 1856) nomen, et

225 t.116 (Aug. 1856); Fl.des Serres 11. 1:t.1144(1856); Hannaford, Jottings in

Australia 41(1856)p.p., UlHort. t.102(1856); Parey’s Blumengaertnerei 1:847

(1931). Type, figure drawn from plant raised from Australian seed hy Veitch

and Son. “Our Herbarium shows the plant [i.e. that raised from seed] to he

identical with Correa cardinalis of Dr. Ferdinand Mueller, . .. and which he

discovered ‘about the Latrobe Hiyer, in sandy, bushy places of the hills, and

in the sterile plain of Port Albert, Gipps’ Land, Colony of Victoria, South Aus-

tralia’.” Hook. Le. Syntypes: “In virgnltis collium arenos. inter fl. Latrobe und

Merrimans creek”, 26 Apr. 1853, F. Mueller (MEL); “Sandy serubland near Port

Albert”, May 1853, F. Mueller (MEL).

C, speciosa {- cardinalis (EVM, ex Hook.) Voss, Vilmorin’s Blumengacrtnerei

ed.3. 1:170(1894-1896),

Shrub 1-2 ft high, Leaves narrowly to broadly oblong or slightly lanceolate,

from 2 em, long and 0-8 cm. wide to 4 cm. long and 0-4 em. wide, glabrous and

smooth above, tomentose beneath, maryin minutely undulate, slightly recurved,

3b PMU, G, WILSON

apex obtuse to rounded, base rounded to subcordate. Flowers normally ter-

minal on slender lateral branchlets of one intemmode. Calyx suborbicular,

truncate, 4-dentate, ferruginous tomentose, Corolla + cylindrical, 3°0-3:8 em.

long, red with green tips. Anthers just exserted.

This variety is distinguished by its oblong leaves and relatively large red

corolla, In the Grampians of western Victoria ueeurs a similar plant but with

the leaves seabrid on the upper surface and the calyx with 4 deltoid to rounded

processes between the normal calyx lobes. This form is very variable and

appears to be in the nature of a hybrid swarm belween C. reflexa and C. de-

enmbens although the latter has not yet been recorded from Victoria.

Distribution; Gippsland, south-eust Victoria.

VicvortA, TDutson, nr. Sale, P. St. Johw (MEL): Hedley; nr. Pt. Albert, A. Tadgell

(MEL): Latrobe K., Purdie 108(MEL): Port Albert, F, Mueller (MEL): Taralgon. Po St,

John (MET); Toora, wt. Foster, A. Tadgell (MEL); Yarram, J. Wo Avadas (MBL); South

Gippsland, W. H, Lucas 1(MEL).

var. nummulariifolia (#lovk},) comb.nov.

CG. speciosa var, nummulariifolia Hook.f, FlLTasm. 1:62(1855). ‘fype,

Flinders Island, Bass Strait, J]. Backhouse (not scen).

C. rubra var. orbiculariy Black, T1,S.Austral, ed.2. 496(1048) without a Latin

diagnosis, nom.illeg. :

[C. speciosa [race] b. backhousiana auct, non (Hook.) Benth.: Benth., PL.

Austral. 1:355(1863)p.p,]

Leaves broadly ovate, semiorbicular or orbicular, coriaceous, glabrous or

simewhat pubescent above, tomentose to pannose below. Flowers 1-3 at the

end of short branchlets of 1-3 internodes. Peduucle and bracts not differentiated.

Pedicels 2-4 mm, long; bracteoles, linear, cadnewus, inserted near the base of the

pedicel, Calyx ferruginous tomentose.

This variety varies considerably in leaf indumentum, texture and shape.

The flowers also vary from cylindrical to infundibulitorm and from greenish

yellow to red. Although this creates a polymorphic taxon, I am broadening

Hooker's concept of the variety to include the form designated by J. M. Black

as “C, rubra var. orbictlaris’, a same never validly published, [n Kangaroo

Island it uppears to take part in a hybrid swarm between C. puflehella, C-

decumbens, and GC. reflexa var. reflexa.

Distribution; From Flinders [sland (Bass Strait) westward to Kangaroo

Island. An island vartety.

Bass Srmart, Flinders Is, 1952, 0. Stedne 2945( HO): ibid, anon. 695( MEL), Fur

neaux Group, 1893, J, Gabriel (MEL); Deal Ts., 1880, Jude Dobson (MEI): Mt. Mura,

Cape Barren Is., (891, Bishop of Tasmania [Hen Montgomery] (MEL),

Kaneanoo [suany. American KR. Wo Wade tani: Birchrnore Lagoon, P. Wilson 691

(ADD); Gape du Couedic. J. B. Cleland (AD); Gupe Borda, J. B. Cleland (AD); Hog Bay,

J. Maiden’ (NSW): Hanson Bay, P. Wilton 434(AD); Kingseote, G, Beck (AD); Kelly Hill,

PF. Wilson 708(AD); Moston, H. Cooper (AD); MeGillivray, C. MM. Eardley (ADW); Pen-

ninuton Bay, D. Symon (ADW); Remarkable Rocke, J. B- Cleland (AD); Rocky. River,

R. Rogers (NSW); Vivoone Bay, J. B. Cleland (AD), West Bay, BP. Wilson 246( 4D); Kan-

divou Island, Web. 1802, KR. Brown (BRI, MEL, NSW).

var. corlacea noy.yar,

[C. alba auet. non Andy.: Black, FIS.Austral. 340(1924) pp; Le. ed, 2.

493( 1948) p.p.|

Folium petiolis 3-5-6 mni, longus; lamina coriacea, integra, supra glabra.

levis, infra dense et minute tomentosa, late ovata vel orbicularis, busi rotundata

vel truncata. Pedicellus 5-6-5 mm, longus, bracteolis caducis prope basem

insertis. Calyx truncatus, dense ct minute tomentesius, Corolla 1-5-1-7 em.

longa, viride-Hava vel rubra. (Holotypus, North Peurson Is.. }4 Feh, 1960,

R. 1, Specht 2102(AD).)

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF ‘THE GENUS CORREA oh

Bush to 3 fect high. Leaves with petiole 3-5-6 mim, long; lamina broadly

avate to orbicular, smooth and glabrous above, closely and finely tomentose

below, apex + rounded, base rounded to truncate. Inflorescence withuut dif

ferentiatcd peduncle or bracts. Flowers terminal on short branchlets of inde-

finite length, Pedieel finely aud closely tomentose, 5-6°5 mim. long; bracteoles

caducous inserted towards the base of the pedicel. Calyx truncate, closely und

finely tomentose, Corolla 1-3-1-7 am. lony, greenish-yellow to red, someLlimes

becoming split to the base, Style tomentose towards the base.

This variety closely approaches, on the ene hand, C. backhousigne, and on

the other the 8. Australian mainland form of C. reflexa var. reflexa. C. back-

housiana has similar leaves, indumentum, and a well-pronounced pedicel with

caducous bracts, it possesses, however, a larger corolla of rather different shape

and the calyx is usually undulate on the margin, The §, Australian mainland

form of var. reflexa has larger flowers than var. cvriacea, with shorter pedicels,

the indumentum and leaf shape is also very diferent although intermediate forms

occur on Eyre Peninsula and Yorke Peninsula, The var. nummtdartifolia differs

in having a shorter pedicel and larger Howers, and also in the coarser indumen-

tum onestem, leaves und flowers.

This variety is interesting in being the only form of Correa townd in

Western Australia and then from only just within the border (between Hucla

ancl Wilsans Point). The reeord by Bentham in Fl.Austral, 1:354(1863) under

C. speciosa of “King George’s Sound, Maclean” (which record is also referred

to by }. D. Hooker in FLTasm.), I haye not been able to confirm, the Perth

Herbarium have no record of Correa occurring in their State, and 1 have sean

no specimens from the King George's Sound areca, but 1 see no reason why it

might nok be present there.

The var. coriacea could be us well cousidered a variety or form of C. back-

housiana as ot C). reflexc since it grades imperceptibly into both species, yet the

reeognition of its status does separate off an on the whole well-marked variety.

{ have been unable to ascertain the nature of the calyx after anthesis, but

because it is fairly curiaccoys it may remain partially open.

Distribution: The islands off the west coast of South Australia; southern

Eyre Peninsula; and near Fuela, south-cast point of Western Australia.

Sout Ausrnauia. EByre Peninsula: Mumory Cove or Pt. Lincoln area, Teb, 1802, 2,

Brown (BRL)\ Port Linealn, Jf. G. OQ. Tepper (AT); South Pearson Ts,, 7', Osborn (AU,

NSW); North Pearson Js, HK. 2. Specht 2100, 21010419); Isle St, Francis, 3-4 Feh. 1602,

R, Brown (MEL, NSW); Greculy Is,, Adelaide Bushawalkers (AD).

Wesrens Ausimaiia. Encla, 188d. PL Olinter (MTL); Wilscns Hott, 11 Meh. 1479,

®, Tate (AD),

2, Correa schlechtendalii IT. Behr, Linnaca 20:630(1847); Walpers, Ann-Bot.

Syst, 1:155(1848), Type, Stony scrubland, South Australia, TW. Behr 189

(holo HAL),

[C. speciosa [race] d. glabra auct. non (Lindl.) Benth. Benth,, Fl.Austral.

1:355( 1863) p,p:]

[C, rubra var. glabra auct. non (Lindl.) Black: Black, FI.S.Anstral. 340

(1924) p.p.]

C. henbullit Ashby, Proc.Linn,Soc,Lond.Sess, 151: 219, 220(1939). ‘Type,

near Monarto South, Murray Mallee, South Australia, KE. Ashby (holo AD).

C. tubea yar. ternbulltt (Ashby) Black, I'l$,Austral. ed. 2. 496(19-48)—

Figs. 36, 4,

Shrub to 6 feet high. Young branches spursely ferruginous tomentose.

Leaves with petiole 3-5 mm. long; lamina narrowly to very broadly elliptic er

almost oblong. 1-7 em. long and 1-2 (-1-5) em, wide to 4-5 em, long and 4-8

32 PAUL G, WILSON

em, wide, chartaceous, glabrous above, glabrous or sparsely pubescent below,

apex rounded, base rounded to cuneate. Flowers solitary, terminal on lateral

branchlets of 3-4 internodes. Pedunecle not differentiated, bracts (ice. terminal

foliar members) cither foliaceous and persistent or oblong, 3-4 mm. long, and

usually cadueous. Pedicel slightly pubescent, not thickened above, 3-4 mm.

long; bracteoles linear, 2-3 mm. long, caducous, inserted at or near the base

of the pedicel, Calyx campanulate, 4-6 mm. long, sparsely pubescent or glabrous,

margin + entire and 4-denticulate, rarely irregular, becoming flattened after

anthesis. Corolla infundibuliform to eylindrical, 1-6-2-8 em. long, red with

green lobes, deciduous in fruit. Staminal filaments broader at the base; anthers

narrowly oblong 2-6-3-3 mm. long (dry), the margins nol recurved after de-

hiscence, well exsert to about 4 to % the length of the corolla. Fruit to 8 mm.

high, the cocei rounded above, not causing the calyx to split.

00)

lon

Fiy. 3, A, Correa ulabra (Mt, Talharcoya, NSW 30228): B, C.

sehileehtendalti (Chaunceys Line, Eiehler 12394),

This species may he recognized by the elliptic subglabrons leaves and by

the position, shape, und colour of the Hower. It appears to be closely related to

C. wlabra, and intermediates between the two species are fonnd in the Torrens

Gorge of the Mt, Lofty Ranges where they both occur.

Distribution: Mt. Lofty Ranges to Murray scrub; and occasional in southern

Flinders Range, South Australia, Extreme north-west Victoria,

Vicrorr. Dimboola and Nhill, S#, FE. D’Alton (AD. MEL).

Soutn AvstHauia, Black Springs, Y. Symon (ADW); Burra (ADW); Cudnaka (ie.

Kanyaka), Oct. 1851, F. Mueller (MEL); Chauncey's Line, Monarto South, Hj. Eichler

12394(AD); Cooke Plains, M. Sharrad 573(AD); Coonulpyn, J. B. Cleland (AD); Bont

Downs, Borra, 1931, Hoff (AD): Eden, £. H. Ising (AD): Ualls Ck. If, Mueller (MEL);

Muubug Serub, Hy. Eichler 12205(AD); Inlia Range, P. Wilson 1021(AD); Kulde, E. H.

Tsing (AD); Karoonda, J. B. Clelawd (AD); Kimchina, E. H. Ising (AID); Lameron, R. Hill

1010(AD); Lowan Sto. nr. Sherlock, Chinnick (CANB); Malinong, L. Williams G67(WIL-

TJAMS); Mannum, J, B. Cleland (AD); Mr. Beevar, Mt, Lafty Ranges, Feb, 1844, C. Stuart

(MEL); Mt. Barker, Sept; 1848. I’) Mueller (MEL); Murray Bridge, J. M. Black (AD);

Nairne, FE, VW. Tsing (AD); “North Rhine River” (ice. Somme River), Dee. 1850, F, Mueller

(MEL); Paria Forest, W. Gill (NSW): Telowie Gorge, ff. Jackson 1(AD); Torrens Gorge,

J. Black (AD); Tailem Bend, F. H. Tsing (AD); Wynarka, E. H. Ising (AD); Yumali,

L. 2D, Williams 830(AD, WILLIAMS),

3. Correa glabra Lindl. in Mitchell, Three Exped.E.Austral. 2:48(1838);

Lindl., Ann.Sei.Nat. IT. 15:58(1841); Walpers, Rep.BotSyst. 2:824(1843).

Type, between Mt. Warraway and Tillston, Lachlan district, New South

Wales, 21 Apr. 1836, T, L. Mitchell 84 (holo CGE, iso MEL).

C. lawrenciana var, glabra (Lindl.)Hookf., FlTasm. 1:62(1855) not as to

specimen cited.

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA 3

C. speciosa {race d. glabra (Lindl) Benth., FlAustral. 1:355(1863) p.p

CG. speciosa var. glabra (Lind!) Maiden et Betche, Census N.S.Wales PI

117(1916),

Cc ay vary glabra { Lindl.) Black, F'LS.Austral, 340(1924) excl.dese.

GC. reflexd vur- glabra veto Court, Viet.Nat, 73:175( 1957 ).

GC. leucoclada Lindl, in Mitchell, Le, 39(1938); Lind, Ann.SaiNat. Fl, 15538

(1541); Walpers, Rep. Bot. Syst. 2:524( 1843). ‘Lype, Summit of Goulburn Range,

New South Wales, 29 Apr. 1836, T. L.. Mitchell 108 (holo CGE, iso MEL ?),

C. speciosa [race] ¢. leucoelada (Lindl.) Benth, le. (1863).

GC) speciosa var. leuncoclada (Lindl,) Maid. et Betche, le. (1916),

C. rubra var. megacalyx Black, F1.S.Austral. ed. 2. 496( 1948) without a Latin

diagnosis, nom, illeg.—Figs, 3A, 4,

Bush to 9 feet high, Young branches grey to ferruginous tomentose or sub-

glabrous. Leaves with petiole 2-4 mm. long; lamina uarrowly to broadly elliptie

(or occasionally sub-ovate or obovate), entire, 1-4 em. long, 0-5-1°7 om. wide,

glahrous or sub-glabrous above, vlibrous to tomentose or Hoeeulose below, apex

obtuse to rounded, hase cuncate to rounded. Flowers solitary, terminal on short

axillary shoots which bear usually 2 pairs of leaves, ‘Che peduncle and bracts

are not differentiated. Pedice! glabrous or pubescent, not enlarged above, 2-4

tam. long; bracteoles basul, linear to oblanceolate, 4-7 mm. long, caducous or

persistent. Calyx shallowly to deeply eupulifonn (3-)46(-10) mm, long, ca,

5(-8) mm. broad, glabrous ty tomentose on the outside, = truncate, lobes

minute: calyx becoming Hattered and closed after anthesis, Corolla cylindrical

to infundibuliform L+5-3 em. long, pale green, lobes erect or recurved, deciduous

in fruit. Staminal filaments broadened at bases anthers exserted ts about & to J

the length of the corolla (L-5-)2-5-3-5(-4) mm. long, + narrowly oblong, the

margins uot recurved after dehiscence, Style glabrous tu tomentose below,

ovary tomentose. Fruit white, apex af covet rounded, te 75 mm. long, not

causing the calyx to split,

This is again a very variable species. Lindley distinguished two specics,

his C. leucoclada heing 2 more densely tomentose form but otherwise very. simi-

lar. The great variability in the sizes of the anthers, corollas, and calyces suggest

that some subspecifie distinctions could he made. howéver, there are all inter-

mediates between the extremes. [lt may be distinguished from its closest ally,

C. schlechtendalii, hy its green not green and red corolla but otherwise sume

forms of the two specics are very similar, Except for one locality in the lower

Mt. Lofty Ranges, South Australia, their areas of distribution do nut overlep.

at that point where the two appear to meet all intermediates between them

may be found. From C. reflexa it may he distinguished by the leaf shape and

ubsence of bracts and peduncle; the calyx is also of a different shape, usually

deeper and less tomentose,

At Barwon Falls newar Geelong, Vietewia, oceurs ayhit appeyrs to be a

hybrid between €. glaftiva and C. leewrenciana, oth species are found in this

ares,

Both the holotype at Cambridge (CGE), and the isotype at Melbourne

(MEL), uf C. glabra bear the date 21st April 1836. According to Mitchell's

Journal if was eulleeted on the 22nd, There is a similar anomaly in the collect-

ing diutes of the type of C, leucoclada, The holotype at Cambridge is dited

29th April, the isotype at Melbourne 27th April, that vivew in the Journal being

16th April. Since the collecting was not done by Mitchell himself but by John

Robertson it is not unlikely that when the plant names and descriptions were

eventually: inserted in the manuseript of Mitchell's Journal mistakes arose over

the date of collection.

dt PAUL G, WILSON

Distribution: South-east Queensland, central and eastern New South Wules,

central and western Victoria, Mt. Lofty Ranges of South Australia.

Qurensianp. Mingoola (“Mongula’), C. Stuart (MEL).

New Sour Wates. Mingara, J, Boorman (NSW); Nandawar Range, anon. (NSW);

Bartaba, A. Cooper (NSW); Warrunibungle Ranges, W. Forsyth (NSW); Mt. Talbareeya,

Mullaley, Johnson and Constuble (NSW); Nymazee, R. Cambaze 214(NSW): Timor Rack,

H, McKee (NSW): Page R,, Murrurundi, J. H. Maiden (AD); Stanthorpe, F. MW. Batley

(NSW): Dripstone, Wellington, G, Althafer (NSW); Molong, H. McKee (NSW); Goolgowi,

tb Constable (NSW); Mt. Wheoga, Grenfell, E. Constable (NSW); Tabletop, £. MeBarron

NSW).

Victor, Bendigo, anon, 11(MEL):; Campbellficld to Darebin Ck., P. S& Johw (AD,

MEL); Darling Desert, F. Mueller (MEL); Lower Goulburn R., H, Pye 36(MEL); Greens-

borough, P. St. John (MEL); Kororoit Ck., P. St. John (MEL); Lake Hindinarsh, C, Walters

(MEL); Little Desert, A. Swaby (MEL); Melton, E. Reader 4( MEL); Mitiamo, C. 5,

Fig, 4. Distribution of Correa glabra ++ C. pulchella @ ; C. schlech-

tendalit O;

Sutton 92(MEL); Mt. Arapiles, C. Beauglehoie (ACB); Mt. Dumaresq, J. Gwyther (BRI);

Mt. Hope, F. Mueller (MEL); Saltwater R., Melbourne, A. Lucas (NSW); Somerton, P. St.

John (MEL); Station Peak, You Yangs, P. St. John j MEL) ; Terricks, A. Purdie 392( MEL);

Toolern Vale, A. Tedgell (MEL); Wando Vale, Robertson (NSW).

SouTw AustrRauiA. Mt. Lofty Ranges: Blackwood, J. M. Black (AD); Millbrook, E. H.

Tsing (AD); Morialta, H. Sulusoo 1693( NSW); 4th Creek ( Morialta), 1847, C. Stuart (MEL);

Sturt Gorge, FE. L, Ashby (ADW); Torrens Gore, R. Specht (AD).

C. GLABRA & LAWRENCIANA P

Vicroms. Barwon Falls, nr. Geelong, 7 Apr. 1883, W, B, Wilson (MEL).

4, Correa decumbens FrM/., Trans.Vict.Inst, 1:30(1855); F. Muell., PI. Vict.

tipped ad Benth., Fl.Austral. 1:356(1863:); Black, FI.S.Austral., 340

(1924); ed. 2. 497(1948); Ashby, Proc.Linn.Soc.Lond. Sess. 151;220( 1939),

pres “Ad ripas FLOnkaparinga”, 21 Dec. 1848, F. Mueller (lecto MEL).—

Fig, 5A,

Procumbent woody plant to low shrub, Stem ferruginous tomentose when

young, [Leaves with petiole to 3-5 mm, long; lamina narrowly elliptic to oblong,

to 4-5 em. long and to 0-8(-1:0) em. wide, glabrous and smovth above, light

brawn closely tomentose below, margin slightly recurved, apex rounded, base

rounded to cuneate, Flowers erect, terminal on short axillary branches bearing

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF TITRE GENUS CORREA 35

1-2 pairs of foliage leaves. Peduncle and bracts not differentiated. Pedicel

4-9 mm. long, ferruginous tomentose. Bracteoles linear to sub-foliaceous 0-5

cm. to I cm. long, inserted at base of pedicel, sometimes caducous. Calyx

shallowly to deeply cupuliform with 4 sepaline aud 4 intermediate lobes, 2-4

mm. high to hase of lohes, ferruginous tomentose, sepaline lobes lincar 3-5 mm,

long, intermediate lobes triangular to lanceolate 0-5-2 mmm. loug, Coralla

cylindrical, 1-8-2-7 em. long, closely squamulose, tube pink to red, lobes erect

green, corolla caducous after anthesis. Stamens with antipetalous filaments

slightly broader at the base; anthers long exsert to about # to 4% the length of the

Tig. 3, A, Correa decumbens (Onkaparinga R., Hichler 14573); B,

C. calycina (Hindmarsh Falls, R. Hill, 25.May 1958).

corolla, narrowly oblong to lanceolate, 2-2-3 mm. long, the margins not recurved

after dehiscence. Ovary Jong rufous tomentose, style glabrous prominently 4-

lohed at apex. Fruif with cocei to 7 mm, long, rounded at apex.

This species is well characterised by the long linear calyx Jobes and the

prominent intermediate lobes, and by its semiprocumbent habit. On Kangaroo

Island all intermediates between C. decumbens and the local forms of C. reflexa

oceur. In the Grampians of Victoria are found plants with some characters

intermediate between C. reflexa and GC. decumbens. These plants have broadly

evate lo narrowly oblong leaves, scabridulose above, and calyces with short

dentoid sepaline lobes and strongly marked deltuid intermediate lobes, in other

characters, &g. size and shape of staminal filaments and anthers, pubescence of

style, inflorescence, possession of well-marked peduncle and bracts, ete, they

agree with C. reflexa. The marked variability of the plants from that area

suggest that some form of hybrid swarm is involved but so far nothing closcly

approaching the typical C, decumbens has been recorded from Victoria.

Distribution: Southern Mt. Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island, S.A.

Sourm Avstranr. Mt. Lofty Range: PF. Mueller (syntype MEL): Aldwate, EB. H. Ising

(AD); Ambleside, FE, H. Tsing (AD, ADW); Bridgewaler, E. H. Ising (AD): Clarendon,

Ij. Eichler 14573(AD); Dashwood Gully, J. B. Cleland (AD); Decp Ck. R. Schodde

617(AD); Eangarilla, E, Hf, Ising (AD); Mt. Lofty, HW. B, Williamson 2339(MEL); Mylor,

36 PAUL G, WILSON

E, A, Ising (AD, ADW); Onkaparinga RL, Blandowsyky SO(ALEL); ibid., 21 Dec. 1848 and

Mar. 1851, F. Mueller (syntypes MEL); ilid., 3847,.C, Stuart (synlype MEL): Stirling Eust,

E. I, Ising (AD); Kangaroo Island: Breakneck Ry J. B. Cleland (AD): Kelly Bil, J. 2,

Cleland (AD); Kinch’s Station, Cygnet 1, J, G. ©; Venper (MEL); Ravine de Casoars, H.

Cunper (AD): Stonsail Boom R., C. M. Kardley (ADW).

C, DECUMBENS > REMLEXA

Sour AustHALIA. Kangarao Island; Cassini, HW. W. Andrew (AD); Kelly Hill, f. B.

dice (AD); Sandy K,, Flinders Chase, P. Wilson 938( AD); Vivonne Buy, [. B, Cleland

5. Correa calycina Black, Trans,Roy,Soc.S.Austral, 49:273(1925); Black, FI,

S.Austral. 692(1929); Le ed.2, 496(1048); Ashby, Proc.Linn.Soe,Lond Sess.

191:217(1939), Type, Upper Waterfall, Mindmarsh Valley, South Australia,

34 Jan. 1924, J. B, Clelaral Qlialo AD, isa K).—Fiz. SB.

Shrub erect to § ft. high, Young branches ferruginous flocculose, Leaves

with petiole to 8 mm, lony; lamina narrowly ovate or elliptic ta oblong, entire,

24 cm. long, 0-8-1-4 em. wide, glabrous above, thinly tomentose below, apex und

base rounded ta obtuse. Flowers solitary terminating lateral branches of irre-

gular length with two or more pairs of leaves; the bracts and bracteoles mot

dlitterentiated, i.e. the terminal pair of appendages are foliaceous. Pedicel 2-3

mm. long, densely tomentose, not thickened above. Calyx deeply cupuliform,

tetragonal in cross-section, half to two-thirds divided into broadly lanceclute

lobes, thinly tomentose outside and within, in all to 15 mm. long, Corolla

evlindrical to 2-8 em. long includiny the erect lobes, green, deciduous in fruit.

Stamens with the antipetalous Mlaments slightly broader at the base, antisepalaus

more or less nuifarm in width, Anthers well exserted, sublanceolate 2:2-3+2

mn. long (dry), triangular in cross-section the margins not recurved (or only

slighlly so) after dehiscence. Style glabrous, Ovary white tomentose. Fruit

ca. 7 mm, long, the cocei rounded at apex; the calyy lobes close over the ovary

after anthesis.

This species is distinct, apart from the shape of the calyx, in being the only

wc in which the calyx is pubescent within. Material which appears to he a

liwlnid with CO. glabra has been collected at the mouth of Myponga Creek near

to where C. ealycina accurs. Another curious form of Correa which J. M. Black

referrm to, G. reflexa (FLS. Austral. ed. 2, 496(1948)), occurs near the southern

aiast of Fleurieu Peninsula in the Encounter Buy region. It has thin ovate

leaves, which are while pubescent beneath, and a distinetly 4ohed white

pubescent calyx, This plant grades into C. calycina and Jike that species has

scinie pubescence within the calyx, it is extremely variable and for the moment

! am treating it as a probable hybrid swarm of uncertain origin (see nmder

C_ reflex).

Distribution. Known only from 2 few valleys ai the southern end of

Fleurieu Peninsula, S.Australia.

SouTn AusTRAla., Mt, Lofty Range: Ininan Valley, E. Ashby (AD, MEL); Hindmarsh

tiers, J, B. Cleland (40D); ibid., Hf Eicher 13598( AD); ihid,, “hush & AL tall”) Ro Scharlde

S83 AD); Myponga, J. B. Clelanet (AID).

6. Correa backhousiana Hook. Journ.Bot, 1:253( 1834); Backhouse in Ross,

Hobart Town Alm. 80(1835); Hook., Comp.BolMag. 1:276(1836); Tluvk,,

Te.PL t2(1837), Walpers, Rep. Bot.Syst. 1:506(1842); THlook£., FLTasm.

1;61( 1855); Curtis, Students F1.Tasm. 106(1956); Turvill, Bot. Mag: 171,289

(1957). Type, Cape Grim, ‘Tasmania, 1835, |, Backhouse (holo K),

C, spesiesa [race] b. backhousiana (Mook) Genth., Vl.Anstral. 1:355(1863)

exel syn.

Co ospeeiose var. backhousiana (Wook,) Rodway, FLTasio, 2L( 1903)—

Figs. 6A, 9.

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS COHREA 37

Bush to 15 feet high. Branches Ferruginous tomentose when young, Leaves

with petiole 4-7 mm. long; lamina ovate to elliptic, normally broadly so, entire,

to 3 em. long and 2 cm, wide, coriaceous, dark green in colour, glabrous and

smooth above, closely ferruginous tomentose beneath, apex obtuse to rounded,

base cuneate to rounded. Flowers solitary or in clusters of 3 or more, normally

termina] on lateral branchlets bearing 2-3 (or more) pairs of foliage leaves.

Peduncle and bracts not differentiated. Pedicel 3:5-5 mm. Jong, densely terru-

zinous tomentose; bracteoles linear, ca, 3 mam. long, inserted at or near the

base of the pedicel, caducous. Calyx cupulitorm 4-5 mm. high, closely ferru-

ginous tomentose oulside, margin truncate and minutely 4-denticulate or un-

dulate and then often slightly recurved, remaining wide open after anthesis.

Corolla broadly cylindrical ta slightly infundibuliform, 2:3-3 cm. long, cream to

pale green in colour, caducons in fruit. Staminal filaments linear, the anti-

petulous broadened at the base, Anthers narrowly oblong, 3-2-4 mm. long

(dry), inchided to barely exserted. Style glabrous or stellate pubescent towards

the base, Ovary tomentose. Fruit 6-8 mm. high, cocci rounded at apex and

slightly apiculate, not causing the calyx to. split.

Fix, 6. A, Correa backhousiana (Pi. Davey, M. Dayis 1294); 3,

C, alba (Palm Beach, NSW 44445).

C. backhousiana may be distinguished by its dark green broudly ovate

coriaceous leaves, its long pedicel, green corolla, and calyx which remains open

after anthesis (in C. reflexa it hecomes closed).

This species has evident relationships with C. reflexe into which it merges

through the forms of C. reflexa var. coriaeea which I am distinguishing by its

shorter corolla and usually red and green flowers, I have not scen any speci-

mens which show any definite indication of hybridization with C. reflexa or

CG, liwrenviane.

Distribution: south, west, and north-west coasts of Tasmania; King Island

( Tasmania ),

Bass Srmarr. King Ts.: C. French (MPT... NSW); R. Perry (CANB): RB, Brotwen (MEL),

Tasseanta. Woolnorth, A. Gunn (NSW); Circular Hd., R. Gunn (NSW); Rocky Cape,

R. Gunn 456(NSW); Howth, anon, (HO); New Harbour, CG, Davis (NSW); Pt. Dayey,

F, Long (HO); Bond Bay, M. Davis 1294(HO, MEL): Strahan, Hi. Bichler 18683(AD).

Remine, W. V. Piteverald { NSW); Pieman R.. H. Comber 2119( HO); Island on south coast,

Dr, Woolls (NSW); Tasmania, Lahillardiégre ( MEL).

7. Correa alba Andr., Bot.Rep. 1:t.18(1 Apr. 1798); Willd., Sp.Pl, 2;324(1799);

Vent, Jard.Malm. 1:t.15(1803); Desfont., Ann.Mus.Par, 2:32( 1803):

Persoon, Syn.Pl. 1:419(1805); Smith in Rees, Cyclop. 10:(1807): Poir.,

38 PAUL G, WILSON

TabLEncycl. 2(6):t.945 £.1(1819); ibid., 3(1):606(1823); Aiton £, Hort.

Kew ed. 2, 2:349(1811); Edwards, Bot.Reg, 6:t.515(1821); DC., Prod,

1:719(1824); Jussieu, Mem.Mus.Paris 12:478 t.21 £.22(1825); Spreng.,

Syst, Veg, 2:215(1825); G. Don, Gen.Hist.Dich.Pl. 1:790(1831); Dietrich,

Syn.Pl. 1269(1840); F. Muell,, Pl.Vict. 1:135(1860-62); Benth., Fl.Austral.

1;354( 1863); F. Muell., Native Pl.Vict. 1:66(1879); Moore, FI.N.S.Wales

47(1893); Banks and Solander, Tlust,Austral,Pl, 1:13. ¢.32(1905); Dixon,

PLN.S.Wales 47(1906); Black, F).S.Austral. 340( 1924); le. ed.2, 495(1948);

Ewart, FL Vict. 694(1931); Ashby, Proc.Linn,Soe.Lond.Sess, 151;216( 1939);

Curtis, Students F1.Tasm. 105(1956). Type, “it was first raised in the year

1793, from seeds which were given by Sir Joseph Banks, Bart., to J, Vere,

Esq., of Kensington-gore, and from a plant in whose collection our figure

was taken”, Bot.Rep. t.18.

C. cotinifolia Salisb., Parad.Lond. t.100(1806) nom. illeg. Based in part

on C. alba.

Mazeutoxeron rufum Labill., Voy.Rech.La Perouse 2:12(1800), Atlas t.17

{ ene Type, nr. Recherche Bay, south coast of Tasmania, Jan, 1793, Labil-

ardiére,

Fig, 7. Distribution vf Correa alba yar, alba @ ; var,

pantiosa CO.

Correa rufa (Labill.) Vent., Jard.Malm. sub ¢.13(1803); Persoon, Syn.Pl,

1:419(1805); K. F. Gaertner, Fruct.Sem.P]. 3:t210, 155(1807); Labill., Nov.

Holl.Pl. 2;120(1806-07); DC., Prod. 1:719(1824); Spreng,, Syst.Veg, 2:215

(1825); G. Don, Gen.Hist.Dich.Pl. 1:790(1831); Spach, Hist.Nat.Veg.Phan.

2;336(1834); Dietrich, Syn.Pl. 1269(1840); Colla, Mem,Acad, Turin II, 5;492

(1843): Hook.f., FlTasm. 1:61( 1855).

C. alba var. rotundifolia DC., Prod. 1;719( 1824); G. Don, |,c, (1831), Based

on ©. rufa (Labill.) Vent.—Figs. 6B, 7.

Prostrate to erect shrub to 5 ft, high. Young branches closely ferruginous

tomentose to flocculose. Leaves with petiole 2-8 mm. long; lamina ovate to

round or obovate, 0-8-3-5(-3} cm, long, 0-6-2-7(-3-5) em. broad, entire, glab-

rous to pubescent above, thinly tomentose to pannose below, Flowers solitary

or clustered at the end of short axillary branches. Peduncle not normally dif-

ferentiated, bracts usually foliaceous, Pedicel 0-5-5 mm. long, tomentose;

bracteoles linear to oblanceolate, 1-5 mm. long, inserted at or near the base

of the pedicel, caducous: Calyx shortly cupuliform or semiorbicular, 2-4 mm,

high, cream to ferruginous tomentose, truncate and 4-denticulate to deeply

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORKEA ag

sinuate between deltoid lobes, after anthesis becoming constricted between the

carpels, Corolla 11-13 mm. long, the petals soon becoming + free and spread-

ing outwards, white (or rarely pale pink), deciduous in troit. Staminal Bla-

ments distinctly broadened at the base; anthers enclosed, 1-2 mm. long, broadly

vblong, margins not recurved after dehiscence. Ovary hirsute; style plabrinus.

Fruit with cocci to 7 mmm. long, more or less truncate, normally splitting the calyx,

Key tu Vuricties

Leaves clasoly tomentose beluw. Podieels 2-5-3 mm. Imng - 222.0222 0,4 Je Van alba

Leaves thickly tomentose to pannose below. Pedivels O-5-l+3 amin, long ..-.. - var, prnnosa

var. alba,

Erect shrub to.5 feet high, Leaves ovate te round or oboyate, 1-5-3+5 om,

Jong, 1-2-7 cin, broad, sparsely pubescent and at length glabrous above, thinly

ta thickly tementose beneath, apex rounded, base rounded tu cuneate, Pedicel

25-5 mm, lene: bracteoles linear to oblancealate 1-5-5 mm. long. Anthiers

hroudly oblong or obovate, ca. 2 mam. long,

This plant is practically confined to coustil beaches and cliffs. ln New

South Wales it bas fairly large closely tomentose leaves and calyx with merely

denticulate lobes. In Victoria, towards the west, the lobes become more pro-

minent and the leaves smaller and more densely tomentose, thus erading inte

the typical) form ot var. panwosa at the Glenelg River. In Tasmania similar

variations occur, Along the north coast of the island the lewes are only thinly

tomentose below as in the eastern mainland forms, while in the south: they are

thickly ferruginous tomentase, a character which caused Labillardiére to name

the plant Mf, rafum. The calyx lubes of Tasmanian forins are deltoid,

Hybrids between C. alba and ©, reflexa oeeur but do not appear to Le

common, The type of ©. rubra is such a hybrid; it has the small enclosed anthers

of C, alba while the Jeaves und vorvlla are intermediate between C. alba and

C. speciosa, all three species of which were described Hom plants coming from

the: Botany Bay area.

Bentham Le. and |. M. Black J.c. both recurd CG. ala var. alba for South

Australia including Kangaroo Island, but the material so determined by them

that | have seen has been non-flowering specimens of forms of GC. refleva,

Androws iu Bot.Rep. 1c. states that the seeds giving rise to the plant figured

were obtuined from Sir Joseph Bunks. Tt seems unlikely that they could have

come from Banks’ own collection made at Botany Bay in 1770, Possibly they

were obtained from Capt. Phillip who was Governor of New South Wales

frum 1788 to 1793, and who corresponded with Banks; he returned to England

early in 1793. The type locality even so is still probably in the Botany Bay area,

Distribution: From Neweastle south along the coast of New South Wales

ancl Victoria as far west as Otway Peninsula, coastal regions of Tasmania.

New South Waxes. Newcastle, anon. (NSW); Swansea, W. Nieholly (NSW): Kime

cumber, J, Maiden (NSW); Hawkesbury B., aaa I. Vickery (NSW); Palin Beuch,

BE. Constables {NSW ): Port Jackson, R. Helms (NSW); Maroubra, OG, Boany (OANB): Littl:

Bay; J, B. Cleland (AD): La Perouse. M. Mills (NSW ; Botany Bay, 1770, Banks ane

Sutaneder ( MEL. NSW); Karnell, J, Boorman (NSW); Wollongong, L, Johnson 398 (NSW:

Port Kembla, Mive Islands, M. F. Day (CANB); Gerringong, anon, (NE); Jervis Bay, J,

ates (AD, NSW); Mt. Dromedary, &. Header 31(MEL); Bermagui, W, Breerlen

(NSW).

Vicronta. Gabo Ts, Maplestone (MEL); Cape Everard ta Cape Howe, awn. 133

(MEL); Mallacacta, N, Wakefield 2463( NAW); Lindemoay, Mitchell R., “limestone lifts,

miany Jniles fro the coast", N. Wakefield 3544( NAW), Wilsons Promontory, F, Mreller

(MEL): Cape Paterson, P. St. John (MFL); Cane Schanck, A. Howitt (MIEL); Sorrento,

Fo Garmpheall 3(BRL); Port Phillip, A. Brown (BRI, MEL); Frankston, J, Staer (NSW);

Queenscliff, St. £. D’Alton 3(MEL); Pt. Lonsdale, K, Cowle (MEL): Geelong, J. Paskoe

40 PAUL G. WILSON

(MEL); Barwon Falls, W. Wilsyn 24( MEL); Anglesea, M. Davis 134(AD); Anvlesea to

Airey’s Inlet, 2D, Whihley 161(AD); Cape Otway, I, Williamson (MEI),

Tasmania. Flinders Js., anon, 260( MEL); Clarke's Is, Marlaine (MEL); CGirculac

Ha,. HK. Guin 428( NSW); Wynard, May 1924, A, Lucas (NSW); Burnie, Ao A. Black

(MEL); Ulverstone, A. Black (MEL); Devonport, Hj, Kichler 16995(AD); Grorgetown,

C. Stuarf 577( MEL); Bridport, W.. Curtis (HO); Diana Basin, A. Simpson (BRL); Dunalley,

Hj. Eichler 16861( AD), Eaglehawk Neck, J, Garden (NSW); Pt. Avthur, J. Battan. 7(MEE.):

Hoaring Beach, Tasman Pen., Re Carolin 1807(AD); Bruny Is, A. Black (MIL).

C, ALBA % REFLEXA

Victona, Cape Everard, Walter (MEL); Wilsons Proniontery, 12 May La53, F.

Mueller (MEL),

var, pannosa nom.nov.

Lindl,, Ann.Sci,Nat. II, 15:58( 1841); Walpers, Rep.Bot.Syst. 2:824(1843), Type,

near the mouth of the Glenclg R., south-west Victoria, 15 Any, 1836, T. L.

Mitchell 287 (holo CGE, iso MEL),

CG, alba var. rotundifolia (Lindl.) Benth.. Fl.Austral, 1:354(1563) non DC.

(1824); Ewart, Fl.Vict. 694( 1931); Black, FI.S.Austral, 495( 1948); nonvilleg.

Small procumbent to erect shrub, Leaves broadly elliptic or rotund, 0-7-L-7T

cm. tong, 0-6-1:4 cm. wide, tomentose above or eventually glabrous or seme-

what seabridulous, densely pannose below. Flowers solitary or densely clust-

ered; pedicels 0-5-1-5 mm, long. Anthers 1-1-3 mm, long (dry), usually hecom-

ing lunate after dehiscence.

The plants I have seen growing at Encounter Bay, $.A., were procumbent,

those growing in south-west Victoria have been described as being erect, Speci-

tnens. from the two regions also differ in the nature of the calyx lobes, at En-

counter Bay the calyx is practically trancate, whereas in south-west Victoria the

calyx has prominent deltoid lobes. However, the leaf shape and indumentum

and wither Horal and inflorescence characters of the two forms correspond closely,

Distribution. Along the south-west coast of Victoria and the Encounter

Bay region of South Australia,

Vecronra. Bridgewnter, CG. Beauulehule GO96(ACR); Portland, C. Beanglehole 394

(ACB): Glenelg BR. C, Walter (NSW); Nelson, C.. Bequgleliole 695(ACRB).

Sourm AuatRaAna. Lake Alexandrina, Nov,-Dee. 1847, C. Stua7t (MEL); Pelican Pi.

Coorong, anim, (AD); Rneounter Bay, J. B, Cleland (AD); Waitpinga Clits, R. Hill (AD).

8 Correa pulchella Mackay ex R. Sweet, Fl.Austral t.1(1827); Sweet, Hort.

Brit, 89(1927) nomen.; Lindl,, Bot.Reg, U5:t.1224(1829); G. Don, Gen.Hist.

Dich.Pl. 1;790(1831); Dietrich, Syn.P]. 1269(1840); Wulpers, Rep Bot.

Syst. 1;:505(1842); Bot.Mag. ¢4024(1843), Type, figure drawn from plant

raised by J. Mackay, Clapton nursery. from seeds collected by. Williara

Baxter at Kangarou Island, South Australia (holo K ?).

©. rubra var. pulchella (Sw.) Black, FVS.Austral. ed.2, 496( 1946).

C. reflexa var. pulchella (Sw.) Court. Vict.Nat. 73:175(1957).

€. neglecta Ashby, Proc,Linn Soe.Lond, Sess. 1511217 et 219(1939), Type,

Cape Spencer, Yorke Peninsula, South Australia, TE. Ashby (holo AD).

C. nexvlecty var. minor Asliby, Ie. 219, without a Latin diagnosis, norilleg.

C. miner (Ashby) Black, FI.S.Austral. ed.2, 496(1948), comb.illeg.

[C. speciosa [race] d. glabra auctnon (Lindl) Benth,; Benth., Fl.Austral.

1;355(1863) p.p.]

IC. rubra var, glabra auctaon ( Lindl.) Black; Black, FIS.Austral. 340 (1924)

pyp-|—Fies. 4, SA.

Small erect shrub to ca. 2 feet high (rarely more), Leaves with petiale to

8°35 am. long; lamina oblong, narrowly or broadly elliptic to broadly ovate,

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA 4]

10-20 mm. long, 1-5-15 mm. wide, thin te coriaceous, upper and lower surfaces

glabrous or subglabrous, light green in colour, apex obtuse, base cuncate to

rounded, Flowers solitary, horizontal to pendulous, terminal on short axillary

branclilets bearing 1-3 pairs of foliage leaves, the terminal pair often smaller

and caducous, no typical peduncle or bracts differentiated, Pedice! + glabrous,

4-L0 mm. long, thickened below the calyx; bracteoles minute, caducous, ca. 0-5

mm. long, inserted at the base of the pedicel. Calyx bruadly cupuliform or

semiorbicular, ca. 4 mm. long, margin entire, = truncate, green, glabraus or

very slightly pubescent, remaining wide open after anthesis. Corolla entirely

pinkish red, broadly cylindvical or infundibulitorm, closely squamulose, 1-7-2-7

cm. long, lobes crect or spreading, decidious. in fruit. Staminal filaments dis-

tinctly broadened at the base; anthers enclosed or just exserted, broadly oblong,

1-1-5 mm. long, the margins not recurved after dehiscence. Ovary practically

glabrous to tomentose; style glabrous or sparsely pubescent at the base; disc

white to purple. Fruit ca, 4 mm, high shortly execeding the calyx, cveci

ramded above not causing the calyx Lo splil.

Vig. §. A, Corres pulehella (Kangaroo Is., P. Wilson 737); B, GC. aemule

(Hindinarsh ‘Viers, KH. Schodde 1028),

This species is quite distinct frora all the other species of Correa including

C. reflexe. It is distinguished by its light green practically glabrous leaves, long

swollen pedicel, and entirely pinkish corolla, It has smaller anthers than any

other species except C, alba, One peculiarity with which it shares with C. back-

Rousiana is the calyx which remains wide open after anthesis.

The leat shape varies greatly even on the same bush and the corolla size

and shape within a small area is also inconstant. here are differences be-

tween plants coming from their present three main ureas of distribution, ie.

Kangaroo Island, and Yorke and Eyre Peninsulas, bot not sufficient to warrant

subspecific status,

Hybrids between C. pulchella and C, reflexa var, nummulariifolia have been

found at Remarkable Rocks (south-western Kangaroo Island), and with C.

reflexa var, reflexa at Encounter Bay and possibly at Cape Banks, south-east of

South Australia, All the hybrids have larger anthers (over 2 mm,), a more

pubescent pedicel and calyx, and a deeper red corolla. The shape of the corolla

and leaf ulso show intermediate characters.

49 FAUL ©. WILSON

Distribution: Eyre Peninsula, Yorke Peninsula, and Encounter Bay, South

Australia.

Sewry AusTratiA, Kangaroo Islands American i., EF. HW. Tving (AD); Bay of Shoals,

J. Tepper 56(MEL); Cape Borda, P. Wilson 689(AD), Cape clu Couedic, 2. Wikon 636( AD};

Kelly Hill, P. Wilson 925(AD); Kingseote, Mrs, R, Rogers (NSW); Tavine de Casnars,

RS. Rogers (NSW); Remarkable Rocks, J B. Clelund (A1D); Rooky Hy J. B. Clelend (AD);

Stokes Bay to Middle R., R. Ragers (NSW).

Fleurieu Peninsula, Waitpinga Ck., R. Filson $46(AD),

Yorke Peninsula; Corny Pt, Aj, Bichler (4079(ATD); Cape Yorke, S, White (AD);

Pontlulowie Bay, 5. White (AD), Stenhouse Bay, D. N, Krachenbuehl 165(AD), Warrow,

Dr. Sehmid a(MEL).

Eve Peninsula: Coffin Bay, Wilhelmi (MEI), Cape Wiles, E. M. Newmun (AD);

Kliston, ca. 30 kn. south of, “edwe of salt pan", “Sft. Sick", 1. Lothian (AD); Memacy

Cove and Port Lincoln [Bay [X and XJ, 1802, Ro Brown (MEL); Memory Cove, P. Wilson

344(4D); Mt Drummond, Pt. Lincom, G. Wilkelmi (MEL); Polda, J.-B, Cleland (AD);

Streaky Bay, Mrs. Hichurds (ADj; Venus Bay. J. ff. Willis (MEL).

C. PULCHELLA °° REFLEXA

Souste Ausraaia. Kangaroo Island. Remarkable Rocks, J. B. Clelancd (AD); Fleuneu

Peninsula, Encounter Bay, 16 Jan., 830 Au.. 16 Nov, 1924, 16 May 1927, J. B. Cleland (AD)-

J. Correa aemula ( Lindl.) FvM., Fragm. 1:3(1858); FP. Muell., Wirst General

Report, 10(1853) without reference to basionym; I’, Muell., PLViet. 1:139

t.7( 1860-62); Benth., Fl Austral, J:353(1863); C, Muell,, Walpers’ Ann,Bot.

Syst. 7:524(1868); F. Mnell., Native Pl.Vict. 1:65(1879), F, Mucll,, Key

Syst. Vict.Pl. 2:f.14(1685); Black, FLS.Austral, 340(1924); Le, ed.2. 495

(1648); Ewart, FlVict, 694(1931); Ashby, Proc.Linn.Sec.Lond, Sess,

151:215( 1939).

Didimeria aemula Vind). in Mitchell, Three Exped. E.Austral. 2:197( 1538);

Lindl., Ann.Sci.Nat. UH. 15;59(1841); Walpers, Rep.Bot.Syst. 5:390( 1545-46).

‘l'ype, between Douglas (at White Lake) and the Glenelg R. ut Mostyn, south-

west Victoria, 28 July 1836, Fo L. Mitchell 266 (iso MEL).

Correa affinis Ashby. Proc.Linn.Soe,Lond. Sess, 151;215(1939). Type.

Lower Mt, Lufty Ranges, E, Ashby (holo AD).

Correa speciasa var, * hillii Guilfoyle, Austral.Pl. 118(1930) pro sp. anen.,

Vict.Nat. 23:13] and 133(1906) nomen. = C. aemula * reflexa. Type, Mt, Cole

nr. Beaufort, Grampians, Oct, 1906 [G. R, Hill] (hole MEL).—Figs. 8h, 4%.

Sinall bush 2-3 fcet high, semi-procumbent to erect. Stem ferruginous

Hinentose, Leaves with petiole to 4 mm. long, Jamia ovate to subcordate, to

9 (-4) em. Jong.and 2-5 um. wide, entire, chartaceous, sparsely stellate pubescent

uboye and below, apex obtuse. hase truncate to slightly cordate. Flowers soli-

tary (rarely in pairs), axillary. Peduncle 0-5-1 om, long; bracts. (persistent)

stibsessile, cordate to orbicular 2-7 mm. long, Pedicel glabrous to sparsely

pubuseent, thickened above, 1-22-6 em. long; bracteoles (persistent) linear

to filamentous 0-5-2 mm, lany, inserted cu, two-thirds from base of pedicel,

Calyx broadly cupulitorm, deeply 4-lobed, 2-4 mm. long to hase ot lobes, green,

wlabrous to loosely ferruginons pubescent, chartaceous; lobes Janceolate, =

acuminate 3-8 mm. long. Corolla cylindrical, soon becoming split into 4 nar-

rowly oblong petals which intold around their contiguous stamens, 2-3 om. long.

een to pale purple, the colour deepening with age. Stamina] filaments linear,

the antipetalous broaden slightly at their base; anthers oblong, nurrowing towards

their apex, ca. 2-5 mim, long, the margins not recurved after dchiscence, slightly

exsert or just enclosed within the corolla, Ovary tomentose, style glabrous.

Fruit ca. 8 mm. high, apex of cocci rounded, not splitting the calyx, the corolla

persistent in fruit,

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA 43

This species is easily recognized by the decply lobed calyx, split corolla,

and the long peduncle and pedicel bearing the characteristic bracts and brac-

teoles. Hybrids between it and C. reflexa have heen found in the Grampians at

Hall’s Gap, Ararat, and Beaufort.

C. speciosa var. hillit is a hybrid between C, aemula and C\ reflexa, collec-

tions so named and presumably those on which Guilfovle’s name was based

show gradations between the two species.

The distinction made by Edwin Ashby (that of pubescence) between the

Victorian and South Australian forms is one of degree only and all intermediates

may be found, his further distinguishing character of absence of bracteoles in

C. aemula was presumably due to poor material, the Victorian material | have

seen possesses. bracteoles

Hig, 9. Distribution of Correa aemula @; C. backhousiana © ;

C, baeuerlenii +.

In the Vict,Nat. 17:59( Aug. 1900) C. aemula is recorded as being collected

by Mr. Ed. E. Pescott on Mt. Buck, nr. Orbost, Victoria. The corresponding

specimen in the Melbourne Herbarium shows the record to consist of two pieces

of C. reflexa stuck on to a piece of C. aemula. The origin of the C. aemula

portion is therefore in dauht.

Distribution: Mt. Lofty Range and Kangaroo Is., South Australia; The

Grampians, Victoria.

Sourn Ausrratra. Mt. Lofty Range: Inman Valley, E. Ashby (ADW); Hindmarsh

Falls, R. Schodde 1028(AD); Boundey R., E. Jackson 294(AD}; Mypouga, J. M. Black

(AD); Eneounter Bay, Oct. 1847, F. Mueller (MRL); Tanunda, F, Mueller (MEL). Kan-

garoo Island: Breakneck R., J, B. Cleland (AD); Rocky By, J. B. Cleland (AD); Kelly Hill,

J. B. Cleland (AD),

Vieroma. Grampians: D. Symon 147(AD, ADW); Hall’s Gap, J. Audas (BRI); Mt.

Rosea, J. Audas (BRI); Mt, Victory, E. Jackson 311(AD); McKenzie Falls, R. Rohbins

(ACB); Horsy Ck., C. Walter (NSW); Dunkeld, J. Steer (NSW); Stawell, W. E, Mathews

34(MEL.); Mt. Abrupt, C. French (MEL); Mt. Sturgeon, H, Williamson (MEL); Mt. Zero,

H. B. Williamson (MEL); Victoria Ranve, Finck und Beauzlehole (ACB).

44 PAUL C, WILSON

CG. AEMULA X REFLEXA

Vierorta, Grampians: Guuba (GAUBA); Ararat, Hill 1.4(NSW); nr. Ararat, “Field

Nat.Show Oct. 1906", ex herb. C. Walter (MEL, isotype C. speciosa var hillii?); Hall’s Gap,

Burford (AD).

10. Correa lawrenciana Hook., Journ.Bot, 1:254(1834); Hook... FlTasm. 1:61

(1855); F. Muell., Pl.Vict. 1:138( 1860-62); Benth., Fl.Austral. 1:353( 1863);

Walpers, Rep.Bot.Syst. 1:506( 1842); Moore, FI.N.S.Wales 47(1893); Rod-

way, Fl.Tasm. 21(1903); Ewart, F1.Vict. 695(1931); Curtis, Students

F1'‘Tasm. 106(1956). Syntypes, Tasmania, Lawrence s.n. (K), R. Gunn

sn. (K).

Cc, taeda var, ¢labra Benth., |.c. (1863) non (Lindl) Hook.f. (1855);

Rodway, FI.Tasm. 21(1903); Curtis, Students F1.Tasm, 107(1956); nom.illeg-

Type, Derwent R., Tasmania, R, Brown 5323 (holo K).

C. ferraginea Backhouse in Ross, Hobart Town Alm. and Van Diem, Land

Ann, 80(1835); Took. [¢.Pl. 1:t.3(1837), Type, “It is abundant in the middle

region of Mount Wellington”.

C. ferruginea Gunn ex Hook., Comp.Bot.Mag, 1:276(1836); Maund, Botanist

3:t.124(1889); Hook., Journ.Bot, 2:417(1840); Walpers, Rep.Bot.Syst. 1:506

(1842). Type, Hobart Town, Tasmania, Gunn 557 (= 457?) (holo K). Nom.

illeg,

Fig, 10. Correa lawrenciang ver. lawcrenciana: A, Tasmania (G. Wein-

dorfer T.1810); B, Otway Peninsula (D. Whibley 187).

C. lawrenciana var. ferruginea Hook.é,, Fl.Tasm. 1:62(1855), based on C.

ferruginea Guan ex Hook.

C, latrobeana VyM. ex Hannaford, Jottings in Australia 40(1856); Dietrich,

FL.Univ. [1. t.11(1861) withont text; F. Muell., First General Report 10( 1853)

nomen, Type, Delutite River, 20 Mar. 1853, F. Mueller (Jectotype MIL, iso

NSW ?).

[C. lawrenciana var. glabra anect.non. (Lindl.) Wook.f,:; Hookd., FLTasm.

1:62( 1855). |

Shrub or small tree 2 to 30 feet high. Branches ferruginous, finely tomen-

tase fo pannose or floeculose. Leaves distinctly petiolate; lamina narrowly to

broadly elliptic or ovate, 2-4 em. long and 0-7 em, wide to 8 cm, long and 6 cm.

wide, upper surface glabrous, smooth, lower surface glabrous to finely or

densely tomentose, pannose, or focculose, chartaceous to coriaceous, apex acute

to rounded, base cuneate to subcordate. Inflorescence an axillary (rarely ter-

TAXONOMIC EEVISION OF THE ORNUS CORREA 45

minal) cyme of 1-3(-7) flowers. Peduncle erect or recurved 0-4 cm. to 5 em.

long; terminal bracts, which are normally caducous in the bud, filamentous to

oblanceolate, 02 em, to 0-3 em. long (or sometimes subfoliate and up to 3 em.

long in var. nutcrocalyx). Pediccls tomentose, 05 em. to 1-0 em. long: brac-

tedles caducous in the bud, filamentous, 0-5 mm, to 2 min, long, inserted from

base lo apex of pedicel. Calyx shallowly to deeply cupuliform, 4 to 6 mm.

wide, 3 to'8 mm. (-10:mm.) high, subglabrous to densely ferrugingus tumentuse

or pannose, lohes dentoid to broudly obtuse or rarely acuminate (lanceolate and

up to 3mm, long in var. genoensis), Corolla more or less cylindrical, L-6-3-2

em. lang, 0-4-0-7 om, broad, squamese toe vélotinous, greenish vellow to rec;

lobes erect. Staminal filaments not or seareely broader at the base; anthers

lanceolate, 2-5-3 mm. long, well exserted te about half the length of the corolla,

the margins recurved after dehiscence so as to partially obscwve the hack of the

wither. Style glabrous. Ovary densely tomentose and somewhat hirsute. Fruit

up toY mm, long, the cucei spreading ut maturity causing the calyx to split. The

torn cmolla and staminal flaments persist even after the fruit has dehiseed.

Key to Varieties

I. Calyx without apparent glandular dots, + pubeseeut (rely sub-glabrons).

2 Flowers greenish yellow or reel, leaves broadly elliptic to broadhy ovate, chartaceous

to voriuceous,

3. Leaves chartaceons to coriaceous “+ elliptic, base cuneats to obtuse: pedunele ta 1:5

om, lony; calyx 3-5 am. high; flawers gree (or rarely red)... 0. 0 Vat, dawrenciana

3, Leaves chartaceons, braadly ovate, base obtuse to sibeordate; peduncle 1-5) em.

long; calyx 4-10 19m. high.

4. Bracteoles (cadneous) inserted at base of pedieel, corolla red (or rarely greenish

VET GM) we Hp aceon bee =e PEE ee ene poe va et eee. Vor. cordifolia

4, Bracteoles (eadncous) inserted ak or new upex af pelicel subtercling the calyx;

® blower red; Ives oblong-elliptl:, caviserong oo... 2 2. we ee WT, Penge

1. Calyx with prominent iandular dots, subylubrows or vlabrons,

5, Calys lobes merely dentoll, (Queomsland-N.SAVoles bearer.) var. glandulifera

5. Galyx lobes duncveolate, acuminate, from bulf as lone to as Tong as the calys

PU Ne, GS Bi MRCROPEEE ese cap ceieiceeecie ey eblecie: ne tvecfowe ‘a fteteoe om mi vier. BenvESTS

var. lawrenciana— Figs, 10, 13A.

Leaves nacruwly to broadly elliptic. 2:4 om. * U-7 cn, to 6-35 on, % Bed

om., Slabrous to densely tomentose or pannose below, chartaceous to coriaceous,

apex rounded to obtuse, base obtuse to cuncate. Peduncles 0-4 cm, tu 1-3 em,

lune. erect or somewhut recurved; terininal bracts caducous when flowers are ia

bud, Flowers 1-3(-7) ina eve; pedicels 3-10 mm. long; bracteoles filamentose,

caiducous, inserted usually near the middle of the pedicel. Calyx shalluwly ia

deeply cupuliform, 3-5 mm. high, ferruginously squamate to tomentose. Corolla

yellowish green (rarely red), 1-6-2-5 cm. long. Fruit to 7 mm. high, the vacci

rounded at their summit.

Correa linerenciana was first described from specimens, callected by R. W-

Lawrence and Ronald Gunn in Vasmanin, The description given by W, J-

Hooker fits those plants found in the northern part of the island around Lanunees-

ton. Cy liwrenciana var. elabra was described by Benthain from aw plant col-

lected by R. Brown on the Derwent. In hoth the Jeaves are relatively small

(ea, 3 am. Jong), thin, and ¢labrous below. The peduncle is short, up to 0°5

em. lung, and bears only oue flower, The corolla is also small being up to 2

wn. long. W. J. Hooker (1834) states that the plant reaches a height of 8-10

fect. Towards the southern and western parts of the island the leaves became

larger (up ta 8 em, long, 2-5 em, wide), thicker, and deusely ferruginous beluw,

and the Howers longer (up to 2-5 em, long). This corresponds to the descrip-

4 PAUL G. WLLSON

lim wf C. ferruginea Buckh., described by Backhouse as coming from Mt. Wel-

linwtin, Hobart, and Maequariao Harbour, On Mt. Wellington also occurs a

form with smaller and thicker leaves. All the Tasmanian firms grade into each

uther, only the extremes of which would comfurtably fit into the separate

specifie or varietal categories which have been mace-

On the mainland of Anstralia var, /awrenciane is similarly complex. in the

Grampians occurs a small bushy forty (similar to that found on Mt, Wellington )

with small thick leaves densely lanose beneath, a short one-flowered peduncle,

a deeply enpuliform ferruginous calyx and a short yvelutinows corolla, In the

high mountains to the south of the Snowy Mts. is Found a similar form with

small thick leaves and short red or green corollas. Around Mts. Buffalo and

Latrube and the Delatite River occurs a large leaved form with flowers in threes

or fives un peduncles of about 1 cm., a coarsely tomentose calyx and velutinous

cordla, This is ¥. Muellev’s C. latrobeana, a name which he himself does not

appear ty have used apart from in one or two carly lists of plants and on some

herbarium specimens. In eastern Victorla near Kuchan is a form with large

elliptic leaves, fluwers in threes. the calyx with prominent acuminate Ivhes

va. 4 mm. Jong, and a red corolla, All intermediates between these and other

less praminent furms are found, and again it appears unwise to retain or create

subspecific divisions for them.

A specimen which appears ta be a hybrid bebween C. vlabra and C. late-

reaciana has been collected at Barwou Falls near Gevlong, It shows characters

intermediate hetween the forms of the two parent species vrowliui there.

As will be noted in the synonymy, the name C, fatrobeana was first published

by F. Mueller in 1553 as a nomen. In 1856 Samucl Tanuaford in “A Catalogue

of the Plants Commun in the Colony of Vietaria” (the second part ot his fringes

in Austrilia®) gives a very brief description of the species and under habitat,

“Delatite”, J have therefore chosen a Mueller specimen collected in 1853 on the

R, Delatite as the Lectotype, 4 portion of which, according ta Muclicr’s pencil

note, was sent ta Dietrich, and it is therefore probally a duplicate of the material

from which the latter made his plate which was published in. 1861,

Distribution: Tasmania, Victoria and south-east New South Wales.

AusimaLian Carrera Terarrony, Brindahella Ranve, Gaunhea ({GAUBA).

New Sout Wanrs. Soutlh-cnst region, Baw Baw, nr. Goulburn, ©, French (NSW),

Delegate, W. Baeuerlen 183(MEV); Snowy Mts, Jacobs BR. Alviofer 945(GOOMA);

Thredho ., C, Ingram (INGRAM).

Vierona, Grampians: ME Rosea, D, Symon 270(AD, ADW); Mt. Willian, 2. Sulll-

pan (MEL); Cape Otway Runges, J. Mulder 7(MEL); You Yangs, J. Mulder (MEL); Wild

bay Ck, Apollo Bay to Beech Forest, D, Whibley 187(AD), Powelltown, C. White (BRT);

Becnak. F, Campbell (BT); Warburton, Pitcher (MEL): Berwick, Rebinawn (MEI.)5 Yarra

Ranyes, FP. Mueller (MEL); sources of Bunyip BR. F. Mueller (MEL), Healesville, 7. Sé,

John (MEL); Blacks Spur, a, Healesville, "small slender tree”, anon. 14010 NSW); Grace

Burn BR. C.W. (NSW): Mt Ritca, 4080 FL, CG. French (MEL); Bright, J, Maiden (NSW):

Howdqia TR, T. Whaite (NSW); Mitte Mittu, A. Meebold, 21596(NSW); “Punjil Bren, J.

Gathraith (ACB): Acheron, “tres 30 ft,", L. Fraser (NSW, SYD); Matlock, J. Staer (NSW,

Mt, Bow Baw, H, Tisedall LO(MEL); Met. Fuinter, Mrs. MeGann (MEL); Buffalo Range, F.

Mueller (MEL); Mt, Latrohe, ---5000 ft. F. Mueller (MEL); Erskine BR. 1. G, Date (ACT);

Met. Scldomseen, 4000 ft. No A. Wakefield 2272(NAW); Upper Buchan RK, 10nd £0, oN,

Wakefield 4841 (NAW); Mt. Buck, N. Wakefield 3548( NAW); Mt. Ellery, £2. Merrah (MEL);

suptees Of Delegate A, EB Meru (MELI, Bern RB. headwaters, 2. Merrah 3(MEL). Don I,

C. Sutton (MEL); Newnerella, Grove 4(MEL); Bonane, W. Forsyth (NSW); Wattle Tree,

Muehan, L, Hedge (MEL),

Bass Steam, King bs, &. Smith (1tQ),

Tasmania. Penguin, B, Gunn 153( NSW); Harford, WH, Hamilton 135(CANB, HO}>

Mersey BR. anon. 334 and 335(MEL); Port Dalrymple, R. Brown (BRI); Deloraine, R. Black

(MEL); Westhury, Simson (MEL); Launceston, S. Hannaford 107(MEL, NSW); Mt.

Barrow, “shrub 3 ft", N. Burbidge 3001(CANB, HO); Snug Plains, Wobart, Hi, Eichler

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA AT

16835( AD); Derwent R., J. Lutrell (AD); Mt. Wellington, I’, Rodway 1215(NSW); ibid.

[Feh, 1804], R. Brown (MEL); Dromedary, New Norfolk, H. Black (MEL); Southport, anen.

1815(MEL); Recherche Bay, J. Maiden (NSW); Gordon R., J. Milligan 728(MEL),

var, cordifolia var.nov.—Figs. 11A, 13B.

Folia late ovata vel subcordata, ad 7-5 em. longa, 5 cm. lata, chartacea,

infra !axe flocculosa. Pedunculus filiformis 1-5-5 cm. longus; pediccllus 0-5-1-5

cm. longus bractiolis hase insertis. Calyx cupuliformis, ferrugino-tomentosus,

minute 4-dentatus, ad 0-5 cm. altus, 0-6 em. latus. Corolla pallido-rubra (rare

virido-flava) ad 2:7 em. longa. Holotypus, Mt. Dromedary, Central Tilba, 800

me x) Sept, 1953, “erect spreading bush 5-7 ft.”, E. F, Constable, NSW 26186

D).

Fig, Ji. A, Correa lawrenciana var. cordifalia {Mt Dromedary, NSW

26186, holotypc); B, var, macracalyx (Patonga Ck., NSW 16271).

Leaves broadly ovate with the base rounded to subcordate, chartaceous,

loosely flocculose beneath. Flowers 1-3 at the end of slender peduncles 1-5-5

cm. long. Pedicels 0-5-1:5 om. long with the minute caducous bractevles in-

serted at the basc, Calyx cupular, ferruginous tomentose, minutcly 4-dentate.

Corolla squamulose pubescent, pale red with the apex brownish tinged (or

rarely entirely greenish yellow), to 2-7 cm. long.

This plant grows apparently to a heiyht of about 8 feet, and occurs in locali-

ties not far from the coast. It does not appear to extend as far north as docs

var. macrocalyx and I have not seen any specimens intermediate between the

two varieties. It is characterised by its leaf shape, long peduncles, and basal

bracteoles.

Distribution: South-eastern New South Wales.

48 PAUL G. WILSON

New Sourn Waces, south coast, Bornmagni, W. Dane L22( NSW); Bodalla, "spreading

bush 6 {t. high”, A. Floyd LU NSW); Qnbargo, “3-8 Tt", J. Boorman (NSW); Clyde BR, divtrivl,

W. Buenerlen 417( MET); Conjola Gh. Milton, Hadley (NSW): Little Forest, Milton, £-

Hodway 1219(NSW); Lawlers (ic, Bndalla State Forest, “h+7 ft", E. Constable (AD);

Milton, Cambage 4149( NSW); Mi. Dromedary, Central Tilba, Bice (NSW); 'Tahle Mt.,

Milton, R. Combage 4026( NSW); Tilba, E. Reader 37(MEL); Turpentine Ck. Milton, A,

Cambape 4140( NSW).

var, macrocalyx (Blakely) stat, nov.

C. manrecalyx Blakely, Proc,LinnSuc.N,.S.Wales 54:681(1929), Type,

Patonga, Llawkesbury R., N.S.Wales, Oct. 1923, Shiress and Blakely (noi seen fas

Figs, 11B, 130. .

Leaves broadly ovate, chartaceous, loosely Hoceulose below, base rounded

to subeordate. apex obtuse. Peduncle 1°5-4°5 em. long; bracts ablanceylate and

ca. 10 mm. long to foliaceous, nsnally cadneons. Pedicel 0-5-1-2 cm. long, the

hractenles minnte and subtending calyx. Calyx deeply cupuliform, sparsely

stellute pubescent, (5-)7-10 mm, long, margin sinuate. Corolla greenish yellow,

velutinous, ta 2-3 em, long,

Specimens of this variety from. the type locality at Patonga have very long

valyces, those collected further south fave them only to 5+5 mm. long.

According to W, F, Blakely it is a loosely branched shrub 3-12 feet high,

usually producing several stems from a woody rootstock. It is notable for its

deep subglabrous calyx andl for the bractecles bein inserted almost directly

underneath the calyx.

Distribution: Only known from the type locality on the Hawkesbury River

and further south at Minnamurra, New South Wales.

New Sovrn Wares. Phowvkesbury W., Patonga Ck. 19 Sept. 1926, W. Blakely (MEL,

WSNY I ibid,, 6 Dec. 1925 and 28 Any. 1927, W. Blakely (NSW); Minnamurra, 2 May. 1954,

J. Judd 30(NSW): Middle Brother State Forest, 16 Apr. 1960, BE. Winterhalder (NE).

yar, rosea varmoy,—Pig, L5G.

Volia anguste elliptica, plana, sub-coriacea, infra dense tomentosa, apici

vbtuso, basi cuneata vel obtnsa, ad 6G cm. longa, 1-3 cm. lata. Corolla pallido-

rubra. Holotypus, Geebi River, Alpine Way, 10 Apr. 1958, [. Vickery, NSW

51508( NSW).

Leaves narrowly elliptic, subcoriaceous, densely tomentose beneath, to 6

em, long, 1-3 em, wide, apex obtuse, base cuneate to obtuse. blowers usually

solitary; peduncle 3-7 mm. long, pedicel 5-8(-15) mm. long, Calyx closely

ferrugmous squamuse, 3-5 mm. high, ca. 6 mm, wide. Corolla pale red.

This variety appears to have been first noticed by I’. Mueller during his

Visit to the Hume River distict of Mt. Kosciusko in January 1874, He reters

to it fv Fragm. 8:142 (March 1874) as “C. lawrenetana (var. foribus amoene

rubris)", and again Le, 9117 (August 1875), a mention of it was also made

in bis Report of the Government Botanist p. 8 (1874), Tt apparently grows

alony the alpine watercourses up to an altitude of 4,500 feet and reaches a

height of 6-12 feet.

Intermediates between var. rosea and the red-flowered form of var, lawren-

clane Found near Buchan oceur. To the south-east of Mt. Kosciusko at Mt. Tin-

giringi there is a form with much smaller and thicker broadly elliptic Jeaves

and with small rufons flowers which appewrs to have relationships with var.

rosea and the Grampian Form of var. lawrenciana,

Distribution: Snowy Mts., New South Wales.

New Sour Waces.. Snowy Mts: Cobberas Mts., 5000 ft, W, Munter (MEI); Cracken-

buck RB. C. Ingram (INGRAM); Pippy Jack BR. 3800 ft, 2. Filnier (NSW): Mome &B.,

ea, 4000 fe, “on the banks of brooks", "12-20 te. high’, Fo Mueller (MEL); Island Burd,

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA 49

Althofer 944(COOMA); Jindabyne, W, Baeuerlen (NSW, BRL): Lobbs Hole, W.. Forsyth

(NSW); Mt. Kosciusko, F. Mueller (MEL); ibid., 5000 ft., J. McLuckie (GANT); Mt. Tin-

giringi, 5000 ft., “4-6 ft.”, W. Baecuerlon 176(MEL), Upper Murray R,, Findlay (MEL);

Pipers Ck., Snowy B., 4500) fe, “6 ft", L. Johnson (NSW): Tooma R., F, Cambell (BRI);

Upper Tumut R., Whitfeld (NSW).

var, glandulifera varnov.—Figs, 12A, 13D.

Folia avata vel elliptica, charlacea, sublus minute tomentosa, integra, Calyx

brevite cupuliformis vel tanden patelliformis ad 2 mm. altus, 4 mm. latus, sub-

vlaber, glunduloso-punctutus, margine undulato, 4-dentato. Fructus carpelli

prominenter apicnlatis. Holotypus: Queensland: Springbrook, 3,000 ft, 21

Sept. 1929, “large shrub or small tree in dense Eucalyptus forest, vety common

also as secondary growth”, C, T, White 6274( BRI).

Vig, 12. A, Correa lawrenciana var. glandulifera, with frat (C.T. White

6274, holotype); B, var. genocnsis (Genoa B., F. Mueller).

Shrub to 20 feet high. Young branches closely ferruginous tomentose,

Leaves with a petiole to 1 cm. long; lamina ovale, entire, chartaceous, minutely

tomentose beneath, to 8 cm. long, 3-3 cm. wide, apex acute, base cuncate.

Pedunele 2-7 mm. long bearing 1-5 Howers, terminal bracts linear-oblong, ca, 4

mm. lang. Pedicel 4-10 mm. long, bracteoles (caducous) in the lower half or

basal to 3 mm, long. Calyx shortly cupuliform becoming patellifurm in fruit,

2mm. high, ca. 4+ nim. wide, sparsely pubescent or subglabrous, prominently

glandular punctate, margin undulate, minutely 4-dentate. Corolla to 2-7 em,

long, 0:4 em. wide, squamose tomentose, greenish-yellow. Carpels to 9 mm.

high in fruit, prominently apiculate and with a longitudinal ridge along their

outer margins.

This variety is readily distinguished by the thin minutely tomentose leaves

and hy the short, almost glabrous, calyx which has prominent glandular dots.

The apicnlate fruit is also characteristic.

T have seen specimens only from the Macpherson Range, probably all from

near Springbrook. Robert Brown, in his manuscript notes, recorded a glandular

species of Correa from Newcastle, N.S.W. I have not seen a specimen of any

at) PAUL G, WILSON

C. lawrenciana variety from this locality but it is possible that var. glandulifera

does or did once extend southwards into New South Wales, although it is unlikely

that it would be present as far south as Neweastle.

Distribution: Macpherson Range, south-east Queensland.

Qvuernstann, Macpherson Range, Springbrook: “shrub about 15 ft.”, C. T. White (BRI,

NSW); 2000. ft., “small tree about 12 ft. high”, D. Goy and L. Smith 226(BRL); 3000 ft,

“shrub 6-8 fe.", C. Hubbard 491(BRI, K); 2600 ft. “shrubby, 15-20 ft.”, 8. T. Blake

15895(K).

var. genoensis var.noy.—Figs, 12B, 13C,

Folia late ovata vel elliptica, integra, ad 6 cm. longa 2-8 em. lata, infra

sparse vel dense Janosa. Flores axillaris; pedunculus brevis, 3-6 mm. longus,

bractei_ anguste oblanceolatis ad 4 mm, longis; pedicellus ad 5 mm, longus,

bracteolis linearibus, ad 5 mm. longis, prope base pedicelli inserti. Calyx

chartaceus, urceolatus, sparsi pubescens vel glaber, lobis lanceolatis ad 3 mm.

longis. Holotypus: East Victoria; Genoa River, “Hooded banks”, Sept. 1860,

“calyx green”, F. Mueller (MEL).

Fig, 13. A, Distribution of Correa lawrenciuna yar. lawren-

clana; B, var. cordifolia; C, var, genoensis; D, var, glandult-

fera; BE, var. macrocalyx; C, var. rosea.

A shrub with loosely tomentose branches. Leaves entire broadly ovate to

elliptic, subcoriaceous, to 6 em, Jang, 2-8 cm. wide, sparsely ta densely lanose

beneath, base obtuse to rounded, apex obtuse. Flowers axillary; peduncles

only 3-6 mm. long, bracts (caducous) narrowly oblanceolate; pedicel to 5 mm.

long, bracteoles (caducous) linear, to 5 mm. long, inserted at or near the base

of the pedicel. Calyx urceolate, to 7 mm. long to base of lobes, glabrous or

subglabrous with seattered glandular dots, lobes lanceolate ca. 3 mm, long,

Corolla to 2-3 em. long, colour pale red (>).

This interesting plant, described by one collector, E. Reader, as a low

shrub, apparently grows along the banks of the Genoa River where it is sub-

jected to periodic flooding, all the herbarium specimens (4 collections) show

presence of detritus. The most characteristic feature is the thin urceolate calyx

which is only sparsely pubescent even in the bud, and which has very long

lanceolate lobes.

TAXONOMIC REVISION OF THE CENUS CORREA a!

Distribution: Genoa River, far cast Victoria.

Vieronta. Cenoa R.: 1860, F. Mueller (MEL isotype 2); River Banks, 23 May 1880,

“hny shruh”, E. Header 816MEL),

di. Correa baeverleniti Fuld. Proe.Linn.Sac.N.$.Wales 9:960(1885); Moore,

FLN.S.Wales 47(1893) Oliver, Hook, [e2]. 23:1,2245(1892). Type, The

Clyde, Sept, 1884, W. Baeuerlen 1 (lectotype MEL, iso. BRI ?); near Bate-

man’s Bay, on rivulets, Oct. 1884, W. Baeuerlen s.n. (syntype MEL).—

Fig, 9.

A small shrub. branches closely ferruginous pubescent. Leaves ovate ur

almost lanceolate to elliptic. entire, 2:2 to 6-5 am. long, 1 to 2-2 om. wide,

chartaccous, sparsely and minutely pubescent below Aion young, eventually

glabrous, apex obtuse to acute, base obtuse to cuneate. Flowers terminal or

asillary, solitary. Peduncle (when axillary) 3-12 mm. Jong, ferrnginons tomen-

tose; bracts (eaducous) oblanceolate ca. 3 mm. long (or rarely subfoliate).

Pedicel ferruginous tomentose §-10 mm. long; bracteoles linear ca. 1-5 mm, long

caduemis in bud, affixed towards the base of the pedicel. Calyx broadly eylin-

drical, to 7 mm. high, ca. 6 mm. wide, chartaceous, sparsely pubescent or sub-

glabrous, mouth irregularly undulate and + 4-dentate, base produced into a

patelliform process ca. 9-10(13) mm. diameter, at first horizontal, later with the

margin reflexed. Corolla cylindrical 2-2-8 cm. long, glabrous towards the base

otherwise squamellate pubescent, greenish yellow, lobes deltoid ca. 4 mm. long.

Staminal filaments linear, very slightly broadened at the base. Anthers well

exsert, lanceolate, ca, 2-3 mm. Jong (dry), their margins recurved after de-

hiseence. Ovary densely hirsute. Style glabrous. Fruit with the cocci rounded

al the summit, to 9 mm, long, separating and spreading ubove causing the calyx

to split, Corolla persistent in fruit.

C. baeuerlenii, the must curious species within the genus, is outstanding

bevause of the patellitorm appendage at the base of the calyx, not one of the

ather species shows any sign of such an outgrowth,

The relationship of this species is probably with C. lawrencianu. ‘The

narrow stumiual filaments, well exserted anthers with reflexed margins, persistent

curulla, and spreading cocci are characters also found in the latter, while the

leaves in their shape, texture und indumentum arc similar to the northern Tas-

manian form of var, lawrenciana, Tt appears to inhabit damp gullies and banks

of streams,:2nd to be confined to the lowlands.

Distribution: Clyde River district, south-east New South Wales,

New Sovry Wates. Braidwood District, 3500 ft, W. Baeuerlen (MEL); Nelligan,

W. Buencrlen (NSW); Bolaro Mtn, “only Jocality”, W. Baeuerlen (BRI); Clyde R., W.

Bacterlen (MEL), Wapengo Ck., nr. Bega, “shrnb 6 ft. tall, occurs in the damper gullies’,

A. Floyd 1(NSW),

UNGERTAIN SPECLES

Correa reyoluta Vent., Jard.Malm, sub ¢.13(1803); Persoon, Syn-Pl. 1-419

(1805), Nomen sub-nudum, origin unknown.

EXCLUDED SPECIES

“Correa papyrifera Craill, voy. a Meroe.” D. Dietrich, Synops.Pl, 2;1369

(1840), presumably intended to be:—

Amyris papyrifera Delile, Cent. Pl. Afr. Voy. Méroé 99( 1826); Delile in Cuil-

livud, Voyage & Méroé 4:389( 1827), = Boswellia papyrifera (Delile) A. Rich,,

Tent.Fl.Abyss, 1:148( 1847).

52 PAUL G, WILSON

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

{ should like to express my thanks to the Curators of the University and

State Herbaria who have kindly sent specimens on Juan and also in particular

to C, Beauglchole, R. Filson, C. Ingram, K. Rohrlach, M. Sharrad, N. Wakefield,

and L, Williams who have lent their private collections and often made special

efforts in the field to obtain further Correa material.

Invex ‘ro NAMES

Ttulics indicate synonyms: numbers refer to species,

Antomarchia Pres] = Antommarchia

Antommarchia Colla ex Meisn., cf. sub Correa

rubra Colla ex Pres] 1

speciosa (Andr.)Schlecht. 1

virens ($m.) Colla 1

Automachia FyM., Sec.Syst.Census 1:20(1889) = Antommarchia

Automarchia Rehb., Nomencl, 197(1841) not seen = Antommarchia

Corraea Sm. cf, sub Correa

Correa And?

§ Breviflorac DC.

§ Longiflorae DC,

netmula (Lindl. Fem. 9

af nis Ashby 9

alba Andr. 7, (1)

y var. pannosa P. G. Wils. 7

> var. rotundifolia DC, 7

> var. rotundifolia (Lindl,)Benth, 7

backhousiana Hook.

baeuerlenii FoM. 11

% bicolor Hort., Paxt.Mag.Bot. 9:267(1842) “C. alba ™ pulchella 2”

calyeina Black 5

cardinalis FyM, cx Hook. 1

cavendishii Hort., Floricult.Cab, 8:112(1840), not seen

cordifolia Lindl,

cotinifolia Salish. 7

enriosa TTort., Paxt May.Bot. 14:147(1848), parentage unknown,

decumbens FoM,

X delicata Hort., Paxt.Mag.Bot. 12:77( 1846) “C. alha * rosen”

ferruginéa Baekh. 10

ferruginea Gunn ex Hook. 10

* ferruginca Hort., Paxt.Mag.Bot. 12:77(1846) “C. alba x grevillii”

vlubra Lindl. 3

erevillei Hort., Ettingshausen, Blatt-Skel.Dikot. t.78(1861), not seen; Paxt.Mag.Bot.

12:77( 1846) note only

* harrisii ITort., Paxt.May.Bot. 7:79( 1840) °C. pulehella * speciosa”

latrobeana FvM. ex Hannaford 10)

Jawrenciana Hook, 10

oy yar. cordifolia P. G, Wils. LO

“ var. ferruginea Hookf. 10

sy var. genoensis P. G. Wils. 10

35 var. glabra Benth, 10

s yar, glabra (Lindl.)Hook-f. 3, (10)

y var. glandulifera P. G. Wils. 10

x vitr, mactrocalyx (Blakely)P. G. Wils. 10

leucaclada Lindl. 3

lindleyana Hort., Paxst,Mag.Bol, 12:77( 1846), in a note only

longiflora Hort., Paxt.Mag.Bot. 7;195(1840), no mention of parents

macrocalyx Blakely 10

magnifica Hort.. Paxt.Mag.Bot. 14:147(1848), no mention of parents

milneri Hort., Glenny in Hort.Journ.&FloristsReg. 4:1(1836), not seen

minor (Ashby)Black 8

neglecta Ashby 8

rn yar. minor Ashby &

ochroleuca FvM., First General Rep. 10(1853), nomen.

TAXONOMIG REVISION OF THE GENUS CORREA 53

%* pallida Hort., Past.Mag.Bot. 12:77(1846), °C. alba x rufa”.

papyrifera P. Dietrich = Boswellia papyrifera (Delile)A, Rich. (Under “Excluded

Species”. )

X picla Horl,, Past.Mag.Bot. 12;77( 1846), “C. speciosa * virons”.

pulchella Hort., Bot.Reg. t.1224(1829) = pulchella Mack, ex Sw.

pulchella Mack, ex Su. §&

reflesa (Labill.)Vent. 1

> var, cardinalis (FeM. ex Hook.)Courl 1

» var, coriacea P. CG. Wils. 1

» var, glabra (Lindl,)Cowt 3

» Var. nummutlariifolia (Hookf.)P. G. Wils 1

> var, pulchella (Sw.)Court §

revoluta Vent., nomen sub-nudum. (Under “Uncertain Species.” )

roseo-alba Hort., Paxt.Mag,Bot, 14:147(1848), no parents mentioned

rotundifolia Lindl. 7

< rubescens Hort., Paxt,Mag,Bot. 12:77( 1846), “C, lindleyana X speciosa”.

rubicunda Solaud. ux Britten 1

rubra 5m. 1 ;

» yar, glabra (Lindl.)Black 3, (8), (2)

» var. megacalyx Black 1

» var, orbicularis Black 1

> var, pulchella (Sw.)Black 8

» var. turnbullit (Ashby )Black 2

+ Var. virens [Sm.JEwart 1

< rubra Hart., Paxt.Mag.Bot. 14:147(1848), no mention of parents

rufa (Lubill.)Vent, 7

schlechlendalii Behr 2

speciosa Donn ex Andr. 1

i “race” hackheusiana (Hook,)Benth. 6, (1)

bs var. buckhousiana (Hook.)Radway 6

* f. cardinalis (FvM. ex Hook.)Voss

LM “race” plabra (Lindl.)Benth. 3, (8), (2)

bg var. glabra ( Lindl.) Maid. ct Betche 3

ni var. hillii Guilfoyk: 9

a “race” leucaclada (Vindl,)Benth, 3

Wy var. leucoclada (Lindl.) Maid. et Betche 3

an “race” normaliy Benth, 1

5 var. nummulariifolia Hook.f. 1

¥ var. tirens (Sm,)Hookf. 1

turgida Hort., Floricult.Cab, §:112(1840), not seen

furnbullit Ashby 2

ventricosa Iort., Thurston, Trees and Shrubs of Cornwall. 99(1930).

virens Hook. 1

virens Sm. 1

viridiflora Andr. 1

viridiflora-alba Hort, Paxt.Mag.Bot, 14:147(1848), no parentage indicated

viridis Spach, Hist.Nat.Phan. 2:236(1834) = virens Sm.

Correaea Post et Ktze., Lexic.Gen.Phan, 143( 1903 = Correa.

Correas Hoflmsg., Verzeichniss der Planzenkult. 1:168(1824) not secn = Correa

Dicimeria Lindl. cf. sub Correa,

aemula Lindl. 9

Didymeria Lindl., Ann.Sci.Nat, IT, 15:59(1841) = Didimeria,

Didymoria Mcisn., Pl.Vase.Gen.Comment, 347(1843) = Didimeria

Mazentoxeron Witlst., Etym,Bot-Handw. 563( 1552) = Mazeutoxeron

Mazeutoxeron Labill. cf. sub Correa

reflexum Labill. 1

rufum Labill, 7

REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES: PELECYPODA -

NUCULIDAE AND NUCULANIDAE

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

The paper is the second of a series revising the Tertiary molluscan species described or identified by

Ralph Tate. The Nuculidae are represented by three species of Pronucula, the Nuculanidae by

eleven species belonging to five genera.

REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES;

PELECYPODA — NUCULIDAE AND NUCULANIDAE

hy N. H. Lupproox®

[Read 11 May 1961]

SUMMARY

The paper is the second of a series reyising the Tertiary molluscan species

descrihed or identified by Ralph Tate. The Nuculicdae are represented by three

species of Pronueula, the Nuculanidue by cleven species belonging to five genera.

INTRODUCTION

All the material redescribed in the present paper is in the Tate type collec-

tion belonging to the Geology Department of the University of Adelaide. Holo-

types of a few species are licated elsewhere, the following abbreviations being

used for the collections in whieh they are housed;

A.U,G.D.; Adelaide University Geology Department.

M.U.G.D.; Melbourne University Geology Department.

A.M.: Australian Museum, Sydney,

I am indchted to the Director and Dr. D. F. McMichael of the Australian

Museum, Sydney, for the loan of type material.

PITYLUM MOLLUSCA

Class PELECYPODA

Family NUCULIDAE

Genus Pronucuta Iedley

Pronucvla Hedley, 1902, Aust. Mus, Sydney Mem, 4, 290,

Type species (v.d.) Pronucula decorosa Hedley

Pronucula morundiana (Tate).

(pl. 1, figs. 1, 2)

Nucula morundiana Tate, 1886, p, 128, pl, 4, figs. 2a-2c.

Pronucula morundiana (Tate), Ludbrovk, 1955, p. 20 (includes references to publication of

name in. lists).

Diagnosis, A high, tumid, trigonal Pronucula with inner margins of valves

minutely denticulate; sculpture of equal rounded concentric ribs.

Deseription. Shell minute, tumid, solid, trigonal, nearly equilateral, pos-

terior side roundly angulate; posterior dorsal margin straight; anterior side

xounded, Surface sculptured with regular equal romded concentric ribs, about

12. per mm., faintly crossed by microscopic radial striac.

Umbo high, tumid, subcentral and directed posteriorly, hinye lne arcuate

and broad with 3 strong posterior and 8 unterivr teeth. Chondrophore broadly

triangular. Valve margin thin dorsally, moderately thick and finely denticulate

ventrally,

Dimensions, Length 2-8 mm., height 2:8 mm.

Holotype. A.U.G.D., Tute Coll. T.1042.

Type Locality, Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; ? Muddy Creck Marls.

* Palaeontologist, Geological Survey of South Australia. Published with the permission

of the Director of Mines.

Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust. (1961), Vol. 85,

ob N. H, LUDBROOK

Material. Uolotype and 9 paratypes on smull tablet, 7 specimens from

Muddy Creek mourited in 2 rows —3 in the top row of which the right-hand

specimen is the holotype; 4 in the second row. The third raw contains 2 valves

from Mornington and the fourth row 2 valves from near Morgan (? Cadell

Marl Lens),

Stratigraphical Range. Miocene. (2?) Pliocene.

Pronucula tatei (Finlay).

(al. 1, figs. 5, 6)

Nacnla semistriate Vale, 1886, p. 128, pl. 4, figs. 5a-5b (non Wood).

Nucula tates Finkty, 1924, p. 107, 1927, p. 491 (nom, amut.).

Diagnosis, A wediam size nearly smooth Fronucula.

Description, Shell small, obliquely trigonal, only maderately intlated.

Umbo siluated at posterior onc-quarter; posterior side short and flatly rounded,

anterior side produced and rounded; dorsal margins very gently rounded, yentral

margin broadly romded, Umbones high and recurved. Surface sculptured with

Hat und slightly retroflexed growth folds, becoming more conspicuous ventrally,

famtly crossed by microscopic radial striae. Hinge line only moderately broad,

with 11 teeth anteriarly and 5 posteriorly. Chondraphore small, oblique. Margin

finch: and conspicuously denticulate.

Dimensions. Length 5-75 mm., height 4-5 mm., inflation (both valves)

3 anim,

Holotype. AU,G.D,, Tate Coll. T.L045.

Type Locality (here desiynated). Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay; Blanclie

Polnt Marls, Upper Eocene.

Material. Holotype and 9 paratypes on tablet labelled “Hocene, Adeluide;

Aldinga”. There is nothing on the tablet to indicate which specimens came

from the “Turyifella clays” (Blanche Point Marls) at Blanche Point and which

from the glanuconitie sands of Adelaide (ie, Keut Town} Bore.

Stratizraphical Range. Blanche Point Marls, Upper Eocene.

Pronucula fenestralis (Tate).

(pl. 1, figs, 9, 10)

Niteula fenestraliy Tate, 1586, p. 129, pl 4, fig. 4

Diagnosis, A minute Pronucula with strong coarse cutcellute sculpture, the

radial ribs becoming obsolete anteriorly and posteriorly.

Description. Shell minute, fragile, translucent, shining, oyate-oblong, same-

what tumid, posterior margin roundly arcuate, anterior side produced and

angulate, straight towards the dorsal margin and rounded to the ventral margin.

Umbo in the posterior third and directed posteriorly, Surface stronely and fairly

coarsely cancellate except at the anterior and posterior where the radial ribs

become obsolete and the shell has only coticeritrie ribs, The radial ribs are not

developed in the umbonal third which carries fne concentric threads.

Hinge line broad and rounded with five posterior teeth, anterior portion

broken but there are probably 8 anterior teeth of which 4 are preserved.

Chondrophore small, slightly oblique. Margin obseletely denticnlate in the

posterior dorsal portion but smooth elsewhere.

Dimensions. Length 2-25 min., height 1-875 mm.

Holotype. A.U.G.D., Tate Coll. T.L044.

Type Locality. Table Cape, Tasmania,

Alaterial. The holotype and 2 paratypes, all more or less imperfect.

Observations. This very distinctive cancellate species is similarly sculptuced

to the Recent P. decorosa Hedley and P. vincentiana Cotton and Godfrey.

Stratigraphical. Range. Oligocene of 'Table Cape only.

HEVISION OF THE TATE MOLIUSCAN TYPES

Family NUCULANIDAE

Genus Nucunana Link, 1807

Nuevlana Link, 1807, Beschreib. Nat.-Samtml, Rostock. Abt, 3, 155.

Type species (monotypy) “Arce rostrata Chemnitz” = A. pernula Miller

Subgenus Saccecs.a, Woodring, 1925

Saccella Woodring, 1925, Carnegic Inst, Wash. Pub, 366, 15,

Type species (0.d.) “Area fragilis Chemnitz” = Lembulus deltoideus Rissa, 1826

Nuculana (Saccella) chapmani Finlay.

(pl. 3, figs, 1, 3)

Ledu apieulata Tate, 1886, p, 131, pl. 9, figs. 4a, tb. nom Nucula apiculata Sowerby nec

Nuculu epiculutu Reuss

Nuculana chapmont Finlay, 1924, p, 107 nom. mut. for L. apinulate Tate non Sowerby.

} Bp d

Nuenlara chapmani Finlay, 1927, p. 529 nom, now, for L. apieulita Vale ron Reuss.

p . L !

Diagnosis, An inflated rather broad Saecella sculptured with regular angular

concentric upturned ribs sharply cut off on the dorsal side which become weaker

and ubsolete posteriorly,

Description. Shell of moderate size, ovate, broadly subtrigowal, inequi-

lateral, inflated, Umbo situated a little to the anterior, inflated, romded and

reeurved. Anterior inflated, margin rounded, posterior shortly and sharply

rostrale, posterivr-dorsal margin slightly concave and curved upward at the

end, Ventral margin strongly arcuute, Lunule broad and well defined. Surface

sculptured with fine regular concentric upturned ribs, about 10 per mm. dorsally

and separated by linear grooves. ‘The threads are strongest over the anterior

and median portions of the shell and in older specimens become weaker and

absolete towards, the rostration, The threads turn roundly on the rostrum and

become weaker and finer on the lunule as they turn up towards the mmbo.,

About 15 chevron-shaped teeth in each series on either side of a very small

deep chondrophore.

Dimensions. (Holetype.) Length 9-5 mm., height 6-5 mm., inflation (both

valves) 4 mm.

Holotype. AU.G.D., Tate Coll. T.1036A,

Material, Vate’s original tablet marked “Ledu apiculata Tate”, with the

holotype and 24 paratypes mounted in 4 rows. The top row contains 7 complete

specimens. of which the holotype is the middle one. all presumably from Aldinga-

Row 2 eantains 6 specimens, 4 of which marked “4° are from Snapper Point,

Victoria; ome marked “3” from Tuble Cape, and one “7° from Camperdown,

The third row contains 9 specimens presumably from Adelaide (Kent Town)

Bore, ouly the six on the left belonging to the species, Three small shells on

the right do nat belang ta “Leda apiculata Tate” but to a small undescrihed

Saceella from Kent Town Bore. The fourth row has 6 specimens marked “3”

from Gellihrand Biver; one at the right marked “6" from Spring Creek is prob-

ably vot conspecific with the others and belongs to Nuculane (Saccella) fontinalis

(Pritchard ).

Type Locality. Blanche Point Marls. Blanche Point, Aldinga Buy, $A.

Upper Eocene.

Straligraphical Range. Upper Kocene to Lower Miocene.

Nuculana (Saccella) vagans (Tate).

(pl. 2. figs. 5, 6)

Lele Cuctila T. Woods. 1880, p. 3, pl. 1, figs. 5, 5a, non Loven,

Leda Tucide Vate, 1886, p. 131, pl. &, figs. Ta, Tb. non Loven.

Leda vagans Tate, 1887, p. 188. nom. mat. for Lede Tucily Tenison Woods, ates, 1886,

Nucnlana vagens Tate (sp.) Harris, 1897, p. 348.

a8 N, H, LUDBROOK

Diagnosis. A tairly large robust subveniricose Saccella with variable sculp-

ture uf concentric striae and growth lines generally smooth in the umbonal area.

Description. Shell solid, thick, subventricose, triangularly subovate, wnbones

subcentral, slightly directed posteriorly, anterior side rounded, posterior side

shortly rostrate, dorsal margin roundly sloping anteriorly, sliglitly concave pos-

teriurly. Ventral margin curved and tending to be somewhat straight in the

middle, curving sharply up towards the posterior rostration. Surface with fine

concentric striae and growth lines except for umbonal area which is generully

smooth. Lumule well defined, broad, lenticular, striated, Hinge plate strong,

tenély angulate, separated by a narrow biangular ligament pit: 13 chevron-

shaped teeth and about 4 immature tecth in the anterior series, 13 chevron-

shaped and about 7 immature teeth in the posterior series.

Dimensions. Uvlotype of Leda lucida VY. Woods length 5 mm., height 3

mm: Hypotype figured by Tate 1886 length 18 mn, height 11 mm., inflation

(bath valves) 8 mm.

Holotype, A.M. F.1808; hypotype, figured Tate A.U.C,D, T.1034A; hypa-

type figured this paper pl. 2. figs. 5, 6, T.1034Q.

Type Locality. Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marls,

Material. The holotype A.M. F.1808 of Leda lucida T. Woods, Two tablets

in the Tate Collection; T.1034 with 29 specimens, 14 of which are from Morgan

(Cadell Marl Lens), 6 from Muddy Creck, 4 from Snapper Point, 3 from Corio

Bay, and 2 from Spring Creck. A complete growth series is represented on this

tublet, 5 examples from Morgan and 3 from Snapper Point being longer than the

rest, Muddy Creek topotypes are small. Tablet T,1038 with 9 examples in 2

rmws, one specimen from’ Camperdown, 3 from Fyansford and 5 from Gelli-

brand River.

Stratisraphical Range. Miocene.

Observations. The holotype of L. fecida T. Woods is an immature left valve

of the sume size us the right hand (sixth) topotype of the fourth row of T.L034:

speeimen T.1034M from Morgan (an immature right valve) is very close to

the holotype.

Nticulana (Saccella) fontinalis (Pritchard)

(pl. 2, figs. 3, 4)

Leda fontinalis Pritchard, 1901, p. 28, pl. 3, figs. 3, Ja,

Diagnosis. A small tamid subtrigenal Saceelle with an acute-angled rastra-

tion, sharp keel and a Hattened posterior area.

Description, Shell small, subtrigonal, inequilateral, umbones subcentral,

sitouted @ little to the anterior, Anterior side rather sharply rounded, posteriur

side shortly and sharply rostrate. Anterior dorsal margin slightly convex, pos-

terior dorsal margin nearly straight and but slightly concave towards the

rustrum; ventral margin very gently arcuate and tending to be straight in the

middle, Surface sculptured with somewhat irregular concentric grooyes which

hecume deeper and stronger and more crowded towards the ventral margin.

Pusistiat to the umbones a very broad Hat triangular area bounded by a sharp

ceel.

Hinge plate strong, fairly broad, the anterior and posterior series making

wi angle of about 120 degrees and separated by a small deeply set broadly

triumualar ligament pit. Thirteen chevron-shaped tecth in cach series.

Dimensions, Loeneth 7-25 mm., height 4-25 mm,

Holotype, M.U.G.D, 1779, paratype 1780; hypotvpe A.U,G.D., Tate Coll.

TLRS.

Type Locality. Bird Ruck, Torquay, Jan Juk Formation.

GEVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES 58

Material. One tablet marked “Leda embolos” with 13 topotypes Spring

Creek, 2 specimens 'yansford, 3 Snapper Point, one River Murray, one Belmont,

one Tuble Cape.

Stratigraphical Rane. Oligocene ta Miocene.

Subgenus Scazoumpa Iredale, 1929

Sevevleda Sredale, 1929, Rec, Aust. Mus., 17 (4), 138,

Type species (o.d.) Leda crassa Hinds,

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) acinaciformis (Tate).

(pl. 2, figs. 7, 8)

Twa acinacijopmis ‘Tate, L886, p. 130, pl. 5, gs. 6a-Gh,

Nuculana acinaciformis Tate (sp.). Marris, 1897, p, 349.

Diagnosis. A moderate sized Scacoleda, acutely rostrate, with strong con-

centric rounded ribs, about 3 per mm. ‘Twelve chevron-shaped and up to 5

immature teeth in each serics,

Description, Shell of moderate size, moderately compressed, elongate-

subovate, umbo subcentral, anterior side sharply rounded, posterior side avutely

rostvate, dorsal margin gently convex anteriorly and slightly concave posteriorly,

curved upwards at the posterior end; ventral margin strongly arched, A strongly

defined narrow triangular rostral area extending from the umbo to the posterior-

ventral margin. Launule lanceolate, longitudinally ribbed.

Surface sculptured with strong concentric rounded ribs, abont 3 per mm.,

which are directed upwards and scparated by grooves narrower than the sibs.

Ribs interrupted at the margin of the rostral area.

Hinge line gently arched with 2 chevron-shaped teeth and up to 5 immature

tecth on either side of a broad deeply set triangular chondrophore.

Dimensions. Holotype length 17-5 mm., height 8-5 mm., inflation (one

valve) 3mm. Largest paratype length 21 mm., height 10 mm.

Holotype. AU.G.D,, Tate Coll. T.1033A,

Material. The holotype and 22 paratypes on tablet 1.1033 in 5 rows, the

holotype being the left-hand specimen in the lowermost row.

Type Locality. Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria, ? Grange Burn Coquina,

Lower Pliocene.

Stratigraphical Range. Lower Pliocene,

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) woodsi (Tate).

(pl. 3, figs. 5, 6)

Tela inconspieua Tenison Woods, 1879, p. 239, pl. 31, fig. 3 (non A, Adams).

Leda woodsi Tate, 1886, p. 133, pl. 9, fis. 8.

Nueulgna twoodsi Tate (sp.) Harris, 1897, p. 349.

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) woodst (Tate). Ludbrook, 1955, p. 20, pl. 1, fw. 5.

Diagnosis. A small compressed Seacoleda, only moderately aciiminately

rostrale, sculpture of 5 to § ribs per inm.. about 17 teeth m the posterior series

and 26 in the anterior series.

Description. Shell small, compressed, elongate-subovate, inequilateral,

umbones situated a little to the posterior, small, and only slightly inflated, An-

terior side rounded and somewhat attenuated; posterior side slightly longer than

anterioy side and moderately acuminately rostrate, dorsal margins nearly straight,

ventral margin gently rounded. A well-defined rather broad triangular rostrah

area extends from the umbo to the posterior ventral margin, Lunule lanceolate,

longitudinally ribbed.

6u Nh. H. LUDBROOK

Sculpture of fine concentric ribs on the hypotype and generally about 6 per

mn, but varying in some specimens from 5 to 8 per mm.; ribs directed upwards

and separated by grooves about equal to the ribs, the ribs are weaker on the

anterior of the shell.

Hinge strong and gently arched with about 17 close-set chevron-shaped

tecth in the posterior series and 26 in the anterior series separated by a narrow

deep triangular chondrophore.

= Dimensions, Length 12:5 mm., height 6-5 mm., inflation (both valves)

3°53 mm,

Holotype. A.U,G.D., Tate Coll. T.1039] (both valves); Paratype ‘T,L039A

(figured pl. 3, fig. 6).

Material. The holotype and 18 paratypes on tablet in three rows. The

holotype is a complete specimen marked J, the first on the left of the middle

row; the figured paratype marked A is the first on the left of the tap row. Holo-

type and 11 paratypes from Muddy Creck, Two paratypes Table Gave, 3 Spring

Creek, 3 Morgan. The specimen from Muddy Creek figured by Tenisou Woods

as Leda inconspicua Reeve is Australian Museum No. F.1800.

Type Locality, Muddy Creck, Hamilton, ? Muddy Creek Marls, Miocene.

Stratigraphic Range, Oligocene to Pliocene.

Ohservations. Leda ineonspicua Tenison Woods is practically identical

with Tate's immuture paratype T.LO39D.

Genus Ovarepa Iredale, 1925

Ovaleida tredale, 1925, Rec, Aust. Mus. I4 (4), 248, 850.

Type species (o.d,) Sarepta (?) tellinaeformis Hedley = Leda oboletla Tate

Oyaleda obolella (Tate).

(pl. 3, fizs, 1, 2)

Leda obolella Tate, 1886, p. 129, pl. 5, figs. 3a, 3b.

Nuculane obvlella Tate (sp.) Harris, INY7, p. 352,

surepla (2) tellinaeformls Hedley, 1901, pp, 26-27, fig. 8.

Ovaleda tellinaeformis Hedley. Iredale, 1925, p. 250.

Sarepta obdlella (Tate). Chapman and Singleton, 1927, p. 116, pl. 10, figs. 2-7.

Diagnosis. An Ovaleda of moderate size with a broadly triangular chondro-

phore with a narrow vertical triangular resilifer, Fifteen to eighteen hinge teeth

on either side.

Description. Shell of moderate size, thin and fragile, ovate-quadrate slightly

inequilateral, moderately inflated, Posteriur margin bluntly rostrate and

rounded: anterior margin roundly truneated, dorsul margin gently sloping from

u low angle at the umbo, Ventral margin well rounded. Umbones very small.

subcentral, situated slightly to the anterior, slightly recurved. Surface smooth

but for close fine concentric striae covering the whole shell, Interior smaoth;

adductor impressions inconspicuous, the posterior small and subtriangular, the

anterior larger and samewhat pear-shaped; pallial line entire. Hinge plate

narrow, slightly arched at a very low angle with uw broad shallow triangular

chondrophore supporting a narrow vertical triangular resilifer extending to the

umbo. Hinge with two series of small teeth, on the lectotype 16 in the pos-

terior series of Which the 7 near the umbo are more ov less curved, the 8 further

from the umba chevron-shaped; 19 in the anterivr series of which the 11 near

the umbo are more or less curved, the 8 further from the umbo chevron-shaped.

Dimensions Cheetolype). Length 11-5 mm., height 9-5 mm,

Lectotype (here designated). A.U.G,D., Tate Coll. T.1035A,

Type Lavality, Muddy Creek, Hamilton. Victoria; ? Muddy Creek Mars.

REVISION OF ‘THE TATIE MOLLUSCAN TYPES Gl

Material, The lectotype and J! paratypes on tablet labelled Leda obolella

Tate, Lectotype and 3 paratypes in the top row from Muddy Creek, in the

second row specimen D from Gellibrand River, specimen E from Spring Creek.

Of 6 specimens in bottom row 3 are from River Murray, | from Fyansford, 1

from Balcombe Bay, and 1 from an unspecified locality,

Two paratypes A.M. C8959 Sarepta tellinceformis Hedley, a number of small

specimens A.M. 13243 of the Thetis series examined by Hedley and identified

as and labelled Sarepta obolella Tate, 3 specimens A.M, C48115 of Sarepta

tellinaeformis including the hypotype figured by Chapman and Singleton from

44-56 fathoms off Botany Heads.

Stratigraphic Range. Miocene and Recent.

Observations. Like Ucdley and Chapman and Singleton, | am iinable, in

the absence of sutfivient material tor statistical study, to find any specific char-

acters to distinguish fellinacformis from oholella, and in agreement with Chap-

man and Singleton lave included the Recent species in the synonymy, Although

1 have not seen the type species of Sarepta, 1 have accepted the opinion of

Powell (1935, p. 252) that “in its thin rounded shell Ovaleda resembles Sarepta,

but differs in having feeble traces of a rostrum and a small broadly triangulate

vhondrophore with @ normal resilium, quite unlike the narrow oblique resilium

of Sarepta”.

Ovaleda planiuseula (Tate),

(pl. 3, figs. 3, 4)

Ledy plantiscula Tate, 1886, p., 130, pl. 5, fig 2.

Sarepla plantusetila (Tate). Chapman and Singleton, (827, p. 116, pl. 10, fies. 5-12,

Diagnosis. A very small fragile rather Hat Ovaleda with about 9 teeth on

the anterior side, 5 on the posterior.

Description. Shell very small, thin, very fragile, flattish, roundly quadrate,

slightly inequilateral, slightly prodaced and rounded posteriorly, roundly trun-

eated anteriorly, Dorsal margin very gently arcuate, ventral margin gently

rounded, Surface smooth but for fine concentric striae, interior smooth, ad-

ductor impressions weak. Umbo subcentral. Hinge plate very narrow, with

§ sruull chevron-shaped teeth in the anterior series and 5 in the posterior series;

chondrephore broadly triangulate, nature of the resilifer uncertain, as with the

exception of the figured paratype (pl. 3, fig, 4) the fragile specimens are too

firmly stuck on the tablet for safe handling.

Lectotype (designated Chapman und Singleton, 1927). A.U.G.D., Tate Coll,

T.LOOIA.

Type Locality, “Adelaide Bore”, Kent Town. Upper Eocene.

Material, The lectotype and 4 paratypes A-E mounted on tablet 'T.1009.

Strafigraphical Range, Known only from subsurface material of Upper

Korcene age intersected in the Kent Town Bore-

Genus Lepren.a Verrill and Bush, 1597

Ledella Verrill and Bush, 1897, Amer. Journ. Sei, 4 (3), 54,

Type species (o,d.) Leda messanensis Seguenza

Ledella leptorhyncha (Tate).

(pl. 1, figs. 3, 4)

Leda leptorhyncha Tate, 1886, p. 131, pl. 10, figs. Sa-5h

Nucalana leptorhyncha ‘Tate (sp.) Harris, (897, p, 350,

Diagnosis. A mimite ovale-pyriform Ledella sculptured with fine concen-

tric threads on the middle and ventral portions, obsolete on the rest of the

shell. Thirteen cheyron-shaped teeth in both the anterior and posterior series.,

62 N, TT LUDPBROOK.

Description, Shell minute, ovate-pyriform, ventricose, inflated in the middle,

conspicuously compressed and rostrate posteriorly; umbones subcentral, slightly

elevated and opisthogyrate, anterior margin rounded, posterior margin

acnmimite-rostrate, anterior dorsal slope nearly straight, posterior dorsal slope

slightly concave, ventral margin evenly convex except for a fairly broad insinua-

tion immediately below the rostrum. Rostrum unicarinate, only slishtly

elevated, Surface sculptured with concentric threads and microscopic striae.

The threads are strongest on the middle of the shell and ventrally; they became

obsolete dorsally and both antevinrly and posteriorly. Hinge strong, with 13

chevror-shaped tecth on either side of a small broadly-triangular well-defined

ehondrophore,

Dimensions, Lectotype length 4-25 mm., height 3-1 mm., inflation 2+5 oun.

Lectotype (here designated), A.U.G.D. T.1041A.

Type Locality. Blanche Point Marls, Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay.

Material, The lectotype and 8 paratypes all of which are complete (both

valves) and 3 paratypes which are incomplete. Paratype T.10d1L, showing the

internal features, is figured (pl. 1, fg, 3), Three topotypes GS.S.A, 1/60/1.

Six specimens Adelaide Children's Hospital Bore 5, 63-64 feet.

Stratigraphic Range. Blanche Point Marls, Upper Eocene.

Observations, The species is known only fron the Blanche Pomt Marls at

their type locality and intersected in Adelaide (Kent Town) Bore and founda-

tion test bores at Adelaide Children’s Hospital. On his original tablet Tate has

nat indicated which specimens are from Blanche Point and which from Adelaide

Bore, Tt cannot be said with certainty that the lectotype is the specimen figured

by Tate as two specimens are missing from the tablet, the first on the left hand

ot the top row and the third in the seeond row, The lectatype is very cluse to

the original figure, but from its telatively bleached appearance it is almost

certainly from Blanche Point and not from the bare.

Ledella praclongs (Tate).

(pl. 1, figs. 7, 8)

Leda praclonga Tate, 1886, p, 152, pl. 12, figs. ta, 4b.

Nuoulana praclonga 'Vate (sp.) Harris, 189T, p. al.

Diagnosis. A small weakly rostrate Ledella which is smooth but for growth

striae, Anterior side twice as long us the rostrate posterior side,

Description, Shell very small, transversely subovate, inequilateral, same-

whal compressed, smooth but for fine growth striae, which are stronger over the

rostrum Umbo situated at almost the posterior one-third. Anterior side twice

as long as posterior, sharply rounded and prodiiced; posterior side shortly and

weakly rostrate. Dorsal margin broadly rounded and somewhat angulate at

the umbo, ventral margin evenly and broadly convex except for a shallow and

weak insinuation just below the rostrum. Hinge strong with 10 chevron-shaped

tecth in the posterior series, 13 chevron-shaped fecth in the anterior series,

separated by a small subtriangular chondrophore.

Dimensions. Llolotype length 4-25 mm., height 2-23 mm.. inflation (bath

valves) 1 mm,

Holotype. A.U.G,D., Tate Coll, T1040A. Paratype (figured) T0408.

Type Locality, Muddy Creck, llamilton, Victoria. ?Muddy Creek Mays,

Miovene.

Material. The holotype and 13 paratypes om tablet. There are three sows

aut flie top of the tablet, the holotype being the middle specimen in the second

ruw and the figured paratype the specimen on the extreme right of the third

REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN ‘TYPES 63

row. Except for one valve in the first row marked “2" from Snapper Point and

3 valves marked “T, Cape”, all specimens are from Muddy Creek (?Muiddy

Creek Marls),

There is a second series of T specimens in a single row below this, 6 of whieh

marked “1" pre from “River Murray” and 2 macked “3” from Spring Creek.

Only one from Spring Creek on the extreme right belongs to L. praeclonga, The

ather 7 are a distinct and as vet undescribed species well known to me [iim

the Miocene of the Murray Basin.

Stratigraphic Range, Oligocene to Miocene,

Genus. PoroievA Hutton, 1§93

Paroleda Huiton, 1893, Linn. Soc, N.S.W, Macleay Mein. Vol, 88.

Type species (monotypy) Seaphula (?) lanceolate TMutten

Poroleda huttoni (Tenison Woods).

(pl, 3, figs. @, 10)

Luda huttoni Tenison Woods, 1879, p. 239, pl. 21, fiz, 2,

Leda huttont Tenison Woods, Tate, 1886, p. 130, pl. 6, fig, 4,

Nuewlana hutéoni Tenison Woods. Marris, 1897, p. 351.

Diagnosis. A Poroleda with « conspicuous flattened posterior rostral area,

Thirteen chevron-shaped teeth in the anterior series, 20 in the posterior, becom-

ing lamellar and imbricuting towards the umbo in both series.

Description, Shell depressed, opaque, dull, clongate, subrectangular,

slightly rostrale, posteriorly much produced, between the umbo and the pos-

terior margin a triangular flattened rostral area. Umbo very small and but

slightly elevated, situated at the anterior one-third. Dorsal margin broadly

angulate, slightly convex anteriorly and slightly concave posteriorly; anterior

margin narrowly arcuate; posterior margin obliquely truncated; ventral margin

gently wrcuate.

Ifinge line broadly arcuate with 13 chevron-shaped narrow imbricating

terth in the anterior series; 20 narrow imbricating teeth in the posterior row,

all chevron-shaped but the two in the posterior series nearest the umbo which

are lamellar; the two series separated by a broad triangular chondrophore with

a long narrow oblique ligament pit oo the posterior side,

Dimensions. Length 12 mm., height 5 mm,

Holotype and one paratype A.M. F,1786; hypotype A.U.G.D., Tate Coll.,

T1087,

Type Locality. Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria (? Muddy Creek Maris),

Material. The holotype and paratype A.M. F.1786, Tate's tablet T.1037

with 22 specimens. In the top row 2 marked “1” from Aldinga, the left one of

which was figured by Tate; 4 marked “2” from Adelaide (Kent Town) Bore.

In the middle of the tablet one specimen (“3”) from Table Cape; in the bottom

row 13 topelypes fom Muddy Creek marked “4” und one marked “5° from

Snapper Point.

The two figured hypotypes are (1) the topotype on the extreme left of

Tate's tablet, (2) the topotype third from the left in the bottom row. Bath are

very close to the holotype.

Stratigraphic Range, Upper Lacene (Blanche Point Marls) to Miocene

(Muddy Creck Marls),

Observations. Tate figured a specimen from Aldinga (Blanche Point Maris)

which is now broken. The Aldinga and Kent Town Bore specimens exhibit

reengnizable differences from huftoni which were noted by Tate (p, 130). The

species is variable, however, and there is insufficient material to separate the

species, with any certainty.

G4 N. H, LUDBROOK

Genus Lamenunena Cotton, 1930)

Lameliileda Cotton, 1930, Ree. S. Aust. Mus, 4 (2), 227.

Type species (monotypy) Lamellileda typica Cotton

Lamellileda tatei (Hedley).

(pl. 3, figs. 7, 5)

Porvleda lunceolata Tate, 1894, p, 186, pl. 12, fig. 6. (Not Poroleda Inecolita (Hutton,

1893) = Scephula (?) Jenvcetelata Hutton, 1585.)

Poroleda tatei Medley, 1904, p. 112 (tam. mut. for P. lanceolate Tate).

Diagnosis, A subrectangular Lamellileda with seven imbricating lamellar

teeth in the posteriox and seven in the anterior series.

Description. Left valve only. Shell depressed, opaque, shining, sculp-

tured with microscopic concentric striae, elonygate-subrectangular, posteriorly

much produced, abruptly and somewhat squarely truncated, Dorsal margin

nearly straight; slightly convex anteriorly and slightly concave posteriorly;

anterior margin roustded, posterior margin straight; ventral margin gently arcu-

ate, Umbo small but elevated, situated at the anterior one-fourth. Hinge line

nearly straight, with 7 long lamellar teeth in the narrow gba series, 7 shorter

and also lamellar teeth in the anterior scrics separated by a broad triangular

cheater op hin with a deep long and narrow oblique ligament pit on the posterior

side,

Dimensions. Length 11-7 mm., height 3-9 mm.

Holotype. A.U.G.D., Tate Coll, T.1001.

Type Locality. Gelibrand River, Victoria,

Material, The holotype only.

Strativraphic Range. ? Gelibrand Clays, Miocene.

REFERENCES

CHarmayn, F., and Sincreton, F, A., 1927, Descriptive Notes on Tertiary Moallusea from

Fyanstord and other Australian Localities. Part 1. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic. 88 (2), ns,

pp. 113-124, pls. 10, LL.

Finnay, F. J., 1924, Some Necessary Changes in Names of New Zeuland Mollusca. Proc.

Malac. Sov. Lond., 16 (2), pp. 99-L07.

INES, H. 1927, New Specific Names [or Austral Mollusca. Trans: N.Z. Inst., 37, pp.

488-533,

Harris, G. F,, 1897. Catalogue of Tertiary Mollusca in the Department of Geology. British

Museum (Natural Ilistory), Part 1. The Australasian Tertiary Molluses. British Museur

(Natural History), pp. 1-407, pls, 1-8.

HEDLEY, eran IT Some New or Unfigured Australian Shells. Rec. Aust. Mus. 4 (1), pp.

22-27. figs, 18,

Heorey, C., 1902-3. Scientific Results ‘Trawling Expedition H,M,C.S. Thetis off the Coast of

New South Wales. Molluses. Mem., 4 (5-@), Aust. Mus. Sydney,

Hrucey, C., 1904, On the Change of Name of Paraleda lanevoluta Tate. Viet, Nat, 21 (8),

Dec. 8, No. 252, 112.

Herron, F. W., 1885, Description of New Tertiary Shells. Trans. N.4. Inst., 17, pp-

313-332, pl. 18

TrrvaAce, T., 1925. Mollusca from the Continental Shelf of Eastern Australia. Rec. Aust.

Mus. 14 (4), pp, 243-270, pls, 41-43, map.

Lupsnook, N, H., $955. The Molluscan Panna of the Pliovene Strata Underlying the Adelaide

Plains. Part 2— Pelecypoda. Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 78, pp. 18-87, pls. 1-6,

Lupproox, N. IL, 1959. Revision of the Tate Molhiscan Types ~ Scaphopoda. ‘Trans, Ray..

Soc, S, Aust., 82, pp. 141-149, pls. 1-2.

Powriu., A. W, B, 1935. New Recent and Tertiary Nuculanidae from New Zealand, Proc.

Milae. Sov. Lond., 21 (4), pp. 232-253, pl, 27.

ParGuaso, G, B,, 1901. Contributions to the Palaeontology of the Older Tertiary of Victoria.

Lamellibranchs — Part 2. Proc, Roy. Sac. Viet, 14, ns. (1), pp, 22-31, pls. 2-3.

Tare, R., 1886. The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australix. Part 1. Trans. Roy-

Soc. S. Aust., & pp. 96-158, pls, 2-12.

REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES 65

Tate, Kt., 1887. The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia, Part 2, ‘Trans. Roy-

Suc. S. Aust, 9, pp. 142-200, pls, 14-20,

Woops, J. E, Tentson, 1879. On Soine Tertiary Fossils from Muddy Creck, Westem Victoria,

Proc. Linn. Sov. N.S.W., 3 (3), pp. 222-240, pls, 20-21,

Woops, J- “e Apress 1860. On Some ‘Tertiary Fossils. Prov. Linn. Sov, N.S.W., 4, pp.

1-20, pls, 1-2.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Puate 1

Pronucula morundiana (Tate), Holotype T.1042, x 12-5.

Pronucula morundiana (Tate). Paratype 'T.1042, left valve, interior, x 12-5,

Ledella leptorhyncha (Tate). Paratype T.1041L, left valve, interior, x 10,

Ledella leptorhyncha (Tate). Lectotype T.1041A, right valve, exterior, x 10.

Pronucula tatet (Finlay) = Nucula semistriata Tate, Holotype T.1045. x 12-5,

Pronucula tatei (Finlay) = Nucula semistriata Tate. Paratype T.1045, right valve,

interior, x 12-5,

Ledella praelonga (Tate). Paratype T,1040B, left valye, interior, x 10.

Ledella préclonga (Tate), Holotype T.L040A, right valve, exterior, x 10,

Pronucula fenestralis (Tate). Holotype T.1044, right valve, exterior, x 20,

Fig. 10, Pronucula fenestralis (Tate). Holotype T.1044, right valve, interior, x 30.

f BAG

Sen Saku

Paty 2

Fig. 1. Nuculuna (Saecella) chapmani Vinlay = Leda apiculata Tate. Holotype T.1036A,

side view, x 7-5.

Fig. 2. Nuculana (Saccella) chapmani Fiulay = Leda apiculata Tate. Holotype T.1036A,

dorsal view, x 7-5.

3. Nueulana (Saccella) funtinalis (Pritchard). Typotype, T.L028A, exterior, x 7-5.

Fig. 4. ently (Saccella) fontinalis (Pritchard), “Hypotype T.1028B, interior, right

valve, x 7-5.

Fig. 5. Pronucula tatei (Finlay) = Nucula semistriata Yate. Holotype 1.1045, x 12-5.

interior, right valye, x 5.

Fig. 6. Nuculanu (Suecellt) vagans (Tate) = Ledu lucida T. Woods, Typotype T.1034A,

exterior, right yalve, x 3-2.

Fig. 7. Nuculana (Scaeoleda) acinuciformis (Tate), Paratype T,1033B, exterior x5.

Fig. 8. Nuculana (Scaeoleda) acinacifarmis (Tate). Paratype T.1033B, interior, x 5.

PLATE 3

Fig. Ovaleda obolella (Tate). Lectotype T.1035A, extemal view, x5.

Fig. Ocaleda obolella (Tate). Lectotype T.1035A, internal view, x 5.

Fig. Ovaleda planiuscula (Tate). Lectotype T,1009A, external view, x 10.

Vig. Ovaledu pluniuseula (Yate), Paratype T.1009R, internal view, x 15.

Fig. Nueculana (Scaeoleda) woodsi (Tate). Holotype T1039], x5.

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) woodsi (Tate), Paratype T.1039A, left valve, internal view,

x5,

Lamellileda tatei (Hedley) = Poroleda lanceolata Tate. Holotype 1.1001, external

view, x 7.

Lamellileda tatei { Hedley) = Poroleda lanceglata Tate. Holotype 'T.LO01, internal

view, x7.

Porvleda huttont T, Woods. Hypotype T,1037C, right valve, internal view, x 7+5.

Poroleda huttont T. Wounds. Hypotvpe T.1037B, right valve, external view, x 7-5.

Sof AN aso

N. H. Lupprook PuLaAte |

“Trans, Roy, Sov, $.A,". Vol. 85,

N. H. Lupsrook

PLATE

“Trans. Roy. Soc. §.A.”, Vol. 85,

N. H. Lupsrook PLATE 3

“Trans. Roy. See, S.A.", Vol. 8

PERMIAN TO CRETACEOUS SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY BETWEEN

LAKE PHILLIPSON AND THE PEAKE AND DENISON

RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

Examination of seven old water bores sunk between 1887 and 1920 in the area between Lake

Phillipson and the north-south railway line has established a well-defined Lower Permian sequence

of glacigene boulder clays, marine siltstones and clays, and freshwater mudstones and siltstones

with low rank coals. The sequence has a maximum thickness of approximately 3,000 feet and

ranges in age, determined from plant spores, from ( ? ) lowermost Sakmarian to Lower Artinskian.

The glacigenes at the base of the Permian rest on Precambrian rocks; the sequence is overlain by

kaolinitic sands of undetermined age, tentatively Jurassic, and Aptian marine shales and mudstones.

PERMIAN TO CRETACEOUS SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY

BETWEEN LAKE PHILLIPSON AND THE PEAKE AND DENISON

RANGES, SOUTH AUSTBALIA

by N. IL, Lupproox*®

[Read 11 May 1961]

SUMMARY

Examination of seven old wuter bores sunk between 1887 and 1920 in the

area between Lake Phillipson and the nérth-sintth railway line bas established

a well-defined Lower Permian sequence of glacigene boulder clays, ynarine

siltstones amd clays, and freshwater mudstones and. siltstones with low rank

coals, The sequence has a maximum thickness of approximately 3,000 feet

und ranges in age, determined trom plant spores, from (?) lowermost Sakmanian

to Lower Artinskian. The glacigenes al the base of the Permian rest on Pre-

cambrinn rocks: the sequence is overlain by kaolinitie sands of undetermined

age, tentatively Jurassic, and Aptisn marine shales and mndstarws.

1. INTRODUCTION

The area considered in this report lies in the centre of South Australia, in

the north-eastern part of the Central Province (Dunlop and Parkin, 1958, p. 71)

roughly between Lake Phillipson on the west, and the Peake and Denison Ranges

on the north-east, and Coward on the south-east. It has also heen described as

part of the south-western portion of the Great Australian Artesian Basin (Fig. 1).

Although exploratory drilling for underground water commenced as early

as 1881 at Anna Creek, the subsurface stratigraphy of the area was known only

in very weneral terms uutil quile recently, Re-examimation of cores and sludges

from old bores was not possible until 1959 when they were found stored in a

basement of the Engineering and Water Supply Department and subsequently

transferred to the Mints Department, Only government bores are represented

in the collection.

The present report presents lithological and palaeontological data from

wiervexaminution of all available cores and sludges. from Lake Phillipson,

Stuart Range No. 1, Stnart Range No. 2, Boorthanna (Duff Creek), Anna

Creck, Coorie Appa, and Margaret Creek Bores.

2, PREVIOUS WORK

Lithological logs of mast of the bores were published in annual reports of

the Engincer-in-Chief tor the years in which the bores were sunk,

The presence of coal directed must interest towards Lake Phillipson Bore,

of which stratigraphic interpretations were subsequently published first by

Brown (1905, p. G), who implied that the bore in progress at 3117 feet was

still in Cretuceous sediments similar to those of the Great Artesian Basin. A

contrary view was apparently held by the Conservator of Water at the time

(see Appendix T). Howchin (1925, p. 212) suggested a Triassic i Jurassic )

age for the interval 1400 to 1950 fect in Boorthanna Bore. Jack (1930, p. 10,

* Palacontologist, Geolugioul Survey of South Australia. Published with the permissior

of the Director of Mines,

Trans. Roy. Sec, S. Aust, (1961), Vol, 85.

68 N, H. LUDBROOK

OODNADATTA

|: PEAKE —

3 AND

if DENISON

BOORTHANNA 35 dic aia

(DUFF CREEK) \?2

sTuART {[ NO2e

28° RANGE —|N

Se ANNA

@iCREEK

0.le

Leake Phillipson © @ LA

MARGARET

KE CREEK @

PHILLIPSON

@ COORIE

APPA

Bores___®A

asa° |

SCALE hes MILES

CREEK

Del BF.

\BADELAIDE

Fig. 1,

Locality plan of bores

PERMIAN AND CREYACKOUS SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY 69

pl. 2, pl. 3) correlated the coal measures in Lake Phillipson with the Triassic

Leigh Creek Coal Measures, and recognized the possibility of pre-Jurassic beds

in Boovthanna. Ward (1946, p. 64) and Campana and Wilson (1955, p. 27)

did not differ significantly from Jack, while Chugg (1957, p. 7) referring mainly

to Boorthanna considered the possibility of a glacial origin for most of the

Boorthanna scdiments. Dickinson (1952, p. 89) interpreted the analysis of

coul in Lake Phillipson as signifying a post-Triassic age for the coal-bearing

strata.

Tt was nol until a suite of samples from Lake Phillipson was sent to Mr.

B. 0. Balme of the University of Western Australia that a firm basis for corre-

lation was established (Balme, 1957, pp. 61-62) and the presence of over 2000

feet of Permian sediments was recognized in Lake Phillipson Bore,

The Lower Permian sequence established by Mr. Balme for Lake Phillip-

son Bore provides the background for the present study,

At the end of 1960 ut the request of Clarence River Oil Exploration Lid.

and Exoil Pty. Ltd, the writer began examining for microfossils all available

deep bores in the area, Simultaneously with the commencement of the work,

Myr. W. J. Greer of Delhi Austrilian Petroleum [itd. informed the writer that

on June 10, 1960, Mr. J. Harrison of Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd, had noted

“traces of forams” between 2280 and 2300 feet when logging Lake Phillipson

Bore. This was the first indication of a marine horizon in the Permian of the

bore and greatly stimulated the search for foraminifera in other wells which

might intersect the Permian west of the Peake-Denison ridge and the north-

south railway line.

The generous cooperation of Mr. B, E. Balme throughout the investigation

is most eratefully acknowledged.

3. STRATIGRAPHIC SEQUENCE

The stratigraphic sequence penetrated in the seven bores examined is well

defined and consists of the following units:

Maximnm thickness

feet

Lower Cretaceous

Aptian mudstones and limestone tas vs oss .. 220

“Jurassic” (age uncertain)

Non-marine gritty and kaolinitic sands bn vo BAT

Lower Permian

(a) Lower Artinskian to Upper Sakmarian freshwater mud-

stones with coal and some sandstone _ 964

(b) Sukmarian freshwater carbonaceous siltstones and mud-

stones with some sandstone ‘on tos 1830

(ce) Lower Salanarian marine mudstones and siltstones 288

(d) Glacigene boulder clays of presumed lowermost Suk-

Miahiun age mn 766

? Palaeozoic or Proterozoic dolemitic grit = a! =

Proterozoic chucolate shale and sand oy at Sar ek ee

Granite basement id = a = i

4. GRANITE BASEMENT

Lake Phillipson Bore was the only well to penetrate to basement. At 3140

the boring entered pegmatitic granite. Drilling continued to 3161 feet in this

franite “to satisfy the Government Geologist!” (see Appendix 1).

70 N. HW, LUDBROOK

5. PROTEROZOIC CHOCOLATE AND GREY SHALE AND SAND

At 1104 feet Coorie Appa Bore entered blue-grey and then chucolate shales

with buff incoherent sand beds lithologically similar to those intersected in the

deeper bores at Maralinga (I,udbrook, 1961). These are considered to be non-

marine sediments of the Marinoan Series. Drilling was continued to 1858 feet

in the series,

6, PALAEOZOIC OR PROTEROZOIC DOLOMITIC GRIT

The bedrock of Anna Creek Bore is a crystalline rock consisting of felspar

and quartz grains in a dolomitic matrix. Petrologicul description of this rock

is contained in Australian Mineral Development Laboratories reports P 25/61,

P 26/6).

7. LOWER PERMIAN

(1) Boulder clays

The lowermost beds of the Permian are boulder clays intersected in Luke

Phillipson between 2438 and 3140 feet, Coorie Appa between 270) and 104 eet,

and below 149 feet in Margaret Creek Bore. They exhibit a characteristic

light blue-grey colour when being washed and mostly carry pebbles and

boulders. from various sources. In Margaret Creek Bore the glacigenes have

clueolate shale bands similar to those al Hallett Cove and in Minlaton Bore,

Yorke Peninsula, where the glaciers travelled over chocolate shales of the

Upper Proteroznic.

The age of the glaciation may at present be dated only from the marine

horizon gt the top, regarded by Mr. Balme as of probable Lywer Permian

(Lower Sakmaian) Age, Foraminifera have so far been found only within

the upper part of the glacigenes at 2438 fect in Lake Phillipson Bore as. in

Miata Bove, In Stansbury Bore they also occur near the base of the boulder

clays.

, if the glacigenes are to be regarded as Permian, they may at present be

placed in the lowermost Sakmarian,

(2) Lower Sukmarian marine mudstones and siltstones

Tn upward sequence the boulder clays give way 10 marine partly calcareous

mudstone and siltstone marked at first by the occurrence of vecasional foramini-

fera, principally Ammodisous and Hyperamming, For the most part, the

foraminifera are poorly preserved arenaceous species representing a very cold

Water environment. Considering the small amount of cure or sludge available

for examination they are fairly abundant at certain levels, The most abondant

assemblage occurred iu the glauconitic siltstones at 2088 feet at the bottom of

Boorthinna Bore where an assemblage dominated by Hyperarinina aciculd

Parr) contained cf. Hippoerepinella biaperta Crespin, Thuramminoides phialac-

Monte Plummer, Ammodiscus conahensis Crespin, ef. Ammovertella inclusa

(Custiman and Waters), Ammobacnilites cf, woolnoughi Crespin and Pare.

Trochammina spp., and (?) Polytaxis sp.

The mudstones in which they ocent in Lake Phillipson Bore are too com-

pa¢ted and do not break down readily enough in water for the foraminifera

to be easily recovered without damage. Theiv abundance may he judged from

the Fact that they are easily visible under the microscope on the surface of the

core fragieuts.

The marine horizon occurs between 2269 and 2438 feet in Lake Phillipson,

1800 and 2088 feet in Boorthanna and between 30 and 270 feet in Coorie Appa.

Ir is also probally represented between 711 and 502 [eet in Anna Creek where

PERMIAN AND CRETACEOUS SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY val

LAKE STUART STUART BOORTHANNA

PHILLIPSON RANGE NO.| RANGE NO2 DUFF CREEK)

1908 fe20 (eit

AL 44oFT RL40GFT

(Estesated From trngropty)

SRETACEOUs

Lowen

TWIRAR

’ tnd

tower emi, mC |-—

Artinskian

Sakmartan 372

332

Srtinskist

Lower

lowermost

Artin ikea

é =a

Sakmuarien = | ta

Sakmanan

plac igenes

ai Sakmarar

iva ,

Sakmarian

6o/

63"

Lowernost

. fia

Sdemariate

| Sshmanse 202

Salenuriart Mroterozaie

ge tings (Warinoan)

2 !

feud

ul Boe,

b 1940.

{pon

2088

+ wets

: |

Lower

Sakmarian Lj

bal

z= hr soa

Lawermas? <

Sabmsrnan a

= 400

giecigenes u

=| L

COLUMNAR SECTIONS

BORES BETWEEN LAKE PHILLIPSON °

AND PEAKE AND DENISON RANGES

Det AE WHludbedos 196i

‘ig. 2. Columnar sections of bores,

72 N. H. LUDBROOK

unidentified spines aud teeth occur in calcareous carbonaceons sandstone and

siltstone. Uutortunately, very little core is available from this bore, from which

the drillers logged “clay rock and shells” between 771 and 784 feet. Both the

spincs and teeth may belong to freshwater vertebrates.

(3) Sokmarian freshwater carbonaceous silfstones and

mudstones with some sandstone

Above the marine horizon there occurs a fairly monotonous sequence of

highly carbonaceous siltstones and mudstones with an abundant microflora,

Wushings of the mudstones in the interval usually carry large megaspores

which Mr. Balme has tentatively identified in correspondence as lycapod megu-

spores. close to 4 form described from the Lower Permian of Brazil and the

Belgian Conga,

The interval represented from 430 to 2269 fect in Lake Phillipson Bore was

tentatively dated as Sakmarian equivalent to part of the Grant Formation

(Balme, 1957, p. 62),

(4) Lower Artinskian to Upper Sakmarian fipsheater

mudstones and sandstone ivith coal

The uppermost part of the Lower Permian sequence is. best represented in

Lake Phillipson Bore between 166 and 430 feet by mudstones, shales and fine

sandstones interbedded with low rank coal, No coal bands occur in any of the

other bores, but the interval is probably represented below 447 feet in Stuart

Range No. 1, below 248 feet in Stuatt Range No, 2 and between 162 and about

400 feet in Boorthanna.

8. NON-MARINE GRITTY SANDS AND KAOLINITIC SANDS OF

UNCERTAIN AGE (“JURASSIC”)

The Lower Pennian beds are overlain by bull and light grey kaolinitic sands

and gravel characterized by abundant grey quartz grit und pebbles. The age

of these sediments is not known with certuinty as they are apparently com-

pletely unfossiliferous. They have been mapped as Jurassic and doubtinlly

considered as Permian or Permian reworked in the Mesozoic (Ludbrook, 1961).

9. LOWER CRETACEOUS

Aptian shales, mudstones and limestones equivalent to the lower part of

the Rama Formation in the Great Artesian Basin were ititersected in Lake Phil-

lipson, Stuart Range No, 1, Stuart Range No, 2, and Margaret Creek, at the top

of the section. Except for Stuart Range No. 1 which passed through 220 teet

of fossiliferous Aptian, the Lower Crefaccous is thin and represented by fess

than 80 fect of sediments with a foruminiferal assembluge characteristic of the

Lower Aptian: Haplophragmoides echapmani,, Uaplophragmoides dickinson,

Textularia anacooraensis and associated species. The assemblage is represented

abundantly in Lake Phillipson at 87 feet.

Boulder horizons occur within the shales, the origin of which is in some

donbt but is at present accepted as representing reworking of Permian gluci-

genes rather than as evidence af Lower Cretaceous glaciation.

I. EVALUATION OF DATA

The seven bores examined have provided entirely mew data on the Lower

Permian geological history of a remote part of South Australia. Glaciation

commenced in eéarliest Permian (or late Carboniferous) times and the region

was Tobably extensively glaciated, although only three bores — Lake Phillip-

PERMIAN AN CRETACEOUS SUBSURFACL, STRATIGRAPHY 74

son, Coorie Appa and Margaret Creek —intersected the boulder clays. 'T'o-

muds the end of the glaciation overdeepening scems to have allowed Lower

Sakmarian seas to gain access to the area and the glacigenes with occasional

foraminifera near the top grade into marine sediments with fairly abundant

arenaceous foraminifera,

The sourec and mode of entry of the sea is an important problem await-

ing solution. Marine Permian sediments occur in a similar way on Yorke

Peninsula near the top of the glacigenes intersected im Minlaton (Jardbrook,

157) and Stansbury Bores, but there is at present no evidence of connection

during the Permian between Yorke Peninsula and the Lake Phillipson-Peake

and Denison area 450 miles to the north-west with the stable shield of Eyre

Penmsula between. The possibility of marine Permian sedimeuts occurring in

the South Australian part of the Creat Artesian Basin connecting with the

Bowen Basin cannot at present be overlooked, but no positive evidence has been

obtained so far. The only. Permian sediments intersected in Delhi-Frome-Santos

Tunamincka No. 1 Well were freshwater coal-bearing strata of Upper Permian

(Kunguriam-Kazanian) age. Unless part of the so-called “Jurassic” kaolinitic

sandstones are equivalent to these beds, there is uo Upper Permian represented

in the present bores.

However, to the west of Lake Phillipson and into Western Australia lies

the Officer Basin, as yet completely unexplored helow the surface. One is

templed to consider the adiiittedly remote possibility of Permian sediments

aecurring, in the Officer Basin and connecting by means of a north-westerly

trough in the direction of the Wilkinson-Mackintosh Ranges to the Canning

Basin.

Marine conditions were succeeded by lacustrine conditions during the

Sakmarian grading into coal measures towards the Artinskian, Apparently a

righ {lora existed at this time.

The columnar sections on Fig, 2 are arranged in order:

(1) from Lake Phillipson ta Stuart Range No, 2 along a north-easterly line

ahout 50 miles long;

(2) from Boorthanna to Margaret Creek about 75 miles in a south-south-

easterly direction.

ti, DETAILS OF THIF BORES

Lakt: Prnmuceson Bore

Cure Completed 1905

Depth (feet)

Oy Ure 4h Red surface: soil and kaokar.

4 — 15° 4% Red brown medium ferruginous sand with gypsim,

Ls 4"— 25' 9") Fine te coarse red to red-brown sand, gritty at 25 feet, calearcous, with

ery, subroundec! ¢yuarty grains,

28 Bp aolor Light grey choy with lirianitic nodides and facetted pebbles of quourtzite

up to GO mm. long. Washings consist mainhy of lirmonite, a few angular

quatts grains, gypsum, some glauconite, There is an assemblave of

Aplian arenaceous foraminifera dominated by Textularia sp. £ snd

Siphotextulavia sp, 2,

ay'Lo’— 45° Grey clay with pebbles to 70 mm., all with somewhat flat surfaces, and

linonitic lryers.

45° — 60 3" Light grey mudstone with Muplophkragmoides chapmani, Ammobaculites

sp. 3, Trochammina minuta and other arenaccoux species.

he see V0? Cream clay,

THO" 100 Grey mudstone with fine angulur quartz grains, limonite, pebbles iat

$9'O" ond atmoidant arenaccous foraminifera including Haplophrag-

meides thapmani, Haplophragmoides clickinsoni and Textulutia ana-

couraensis, This assemblage occurs in the lower part of the Aptian.

rie)

Core

Depth (fect)

10?

166'1

174’

180’

— 16610"

or 174+’ 5"

5"— 180’ a

2°— 198'10”

198°10"— 227° 97

227"

256°

276°

281"

297"

g" 256" 3”

ar, 276' $”

§"— 280' 5”

5 3297" 5 isa

1’— 30310"

BOVLO"— SLL"

| BLOLI"~ 31270"

312'1

368"

O"— 322!

— 366’

— 377'10"

377/10"— 393’ 2”

383’

427’

450"

he 437° Lr

1"— 430°

— 436°10"

436’ L)"— 45110"

451'10"— 466° 1”

466’

472°

483’

510'

Sil"

542’

610!

G24

863"

S70’

1007"

100m"

145°

1"— 472" 3”

3 463°

— 510" 3"

a” 511 3"

3" 542" 4"

a”— 610!

— 62!

— 74d’ 6°

Gr 863"

— 870"

—L00T' 6"

6”"—1009°

1459"

—L607’

N, H. LUDBROOK

Buff gritty kaolinitic sand with vourse subangulur quartz, felspar, coarse

grey quartz, fine to mediuin angular quartz,

Coal,

Grey carbonaceous mudstone, with fine angulur quartz grains, abundant

plant remains and fine mica,

Grey siltstone with abundant fine angular quarlz, some coarse grains to

grit size, earthy, with carbonaceous matter;

Grey carbonaveous mudstone.

Coal.

Light grey carbonaceous mudstone with pyrite.

Coal.

Grey carbonaceous mudstone.

Grey catrbonaccous shale.

Grey carbonaceous mudstone with fine angular quartz grains, abundant

plant remains, muscovite.

Coal.

Grey sandy siltstone with abundant angular gnartz rains, inuseoylic,

biotite, chlorite, carbonaceous matter,

Grey very fire silly sandstone with fine angular quartz grains, muscovite,

chlorite, carbonaceous matter, pyrite,

Light grey fine sandy clay with fine angular quartz grains, curbonuceous

matter.

Coal.

Grey carbonaceous siltstone with fine angular quartz grains, muscovite,

and abundant plant remains invluding Iycopod anegaspores.

Grey carbonaceaus mudstone,

Grey. silistone, very carbonaceous, with abundant plant remains, fine

angular quarts grains, niica. Sample offervesces very strongly in

sodium carhonate sylution. Lycopod meyaspores.

Grey carbonaceous mudstone consisting when washed almost entirely of

fresh-losking brown plant fragments.

Grey siltstone with pyrite nodules, fine angulur quartz grains, onrtthy

carbonaceous matter and fine muscovite. ;

Coal shale, consisting mostly of earthy coal fragments.

Grey carhonaceons sandy siltstone with abundant fine angular quartz

wrains, coaly matter, some céarse subrounded «arty. Lycopod mega-

spores.

Dark grey carbonaceous mudstone with pyrite nodwes ta 115 mm, in

length.

Dark grey coal shale.

Light grey mudstone with fine augular quartz grains, abundant mus~

covite, bintite, chlorite, carhonaccons matter. Lyeopod megaspores.

Grey siltstone with fine angular quartz. grains, carbonaceous matter,

niuseovite, biotite, chlorite, very fresh plant frayments, pyrite nodules,

Lycopod megaspores,

Grey irregularly laminated mudlstone, fine angular quartz grains, abu

dant fine muscovite, brown plant fragments. Lycopud megaspores.

Dark grey carbonaceous siltstone with fine angular quarts grains; mius-

eovite, sbrasilint hrown plant fragments.

Brown-grey carbonaceous siltstone with abundant plant remains, car-

bonaceous matter, muscovite,

Grey meditwm quartz sandstone with angular interlocking grains, mus-

covite, chlorite, biotite, carbonaceous matter, silty patches,

Grey hard sandy siltstone with abundant carhonaccous matter, chlorite,

flat-bedded with fine angular quartz grains, abundant red brown jecks

of Jimonite,

Grey bari sandstone with fine to medium angular interlocking grains,

carbonaceous matter, muscovite.

Brown-grey siltstone, with fine angular quartz grains, carbonaceoiis

matter, nimscovite, reddish limonite flecks,

Brown-prey hard sandy carhenaceous siltstone with coarse subrounded

quarlz grains scattered throughont the brown silty matrix, abundant

inuseovite; yellowish patches apparently due fo Jess humic matter,

Arkosie.

PERMIAN AND CRETACEOUS SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY 75

Core

Depth (feet)

1607" = =1777"

1777" = -2216'

8216" —2269°

2269 2283"

2283" = -2310'

2310’ 2312"

2312" 2340"

2340" 2357"

2557 2818"

2818"

2818" = -29507'

2950’ —29080'

2980" =—2990)"

2990" = -314(

340 =3161'

av — 100’

100° — 166’10"

166’10"— 430"

430" 744’

744' 9269"

2269 —2357'

23577 ~314n°

S14()’ ~316l'

Cuttings

Depth (feet)

Goo

7 12

yw = 4t'

4° — 76’

To — 82’

g2" — Li’

11h) — 163°

1633' -— 199°

19g" — 201"

201’ — 210’

aly — 211

21 — 220°

220" — 223°

Grey carbonaceous siltstone, hard, fine even-grained with fine mica, car-

houaceous matter.

Dark grey hard carbonaceous mudstone with small leaf impression, con-

choidal fracture at 2040’, abundant carbonaceous matter at 2070’: lamin-

ated at 2115".

Dark grey hard and even-grained siltstone with carhonaccous fragments,

pyrite.

Dark grey hard fine cven-grained siltstone with carbonaceous fragments

in patches, pyritic patches. Scattered Hyperammina.

Blie-grey carbonaceous. mudstone, compacted, with arenaceous fora-

minifera, particularly Hypermnamina scattered fairly abundantly through-

out the rock and visible on broken surfaces: ef. Hippodrepinella sp.,

ef. Hyperamniina aciculu (Parr), Thurummina phialaeformis Plummer,

Ammoadiseus multicinctus Crespin and Parr, Ammodiscus onehensis

Crespin, Ammovertella inclusa (Cushman and Waters).

Hard grey compacted caleareous laminated mudstone, finc- and even-

grained, with fine silica, clay material and calcite,

Dark grey unstratified hard sandy mudstone with abundant coarse

quuitts grains in a fine matrix somewhat caleureous, mud pellets, small

pebbles, pink garnet.

Light grey compact fine-grained claystone with calcite veinlets, con-

choidal fracture,

Blue-grey boulder clay—fine-grained siltstone and claystone with fine

quartz grains in a clayey matrix, garmet, Ammodiscus at 2438’.

Grey crystalline limestone sandy in parts with mica, quartz grains.

Grey boulder clay with red sandstone pebbles, grains of quariz scat-

tered itreynlarly through the matrix, grains of ferruginized quartz,

Grey shale (boulder clay) with calearecms partings abundant grit grains

of quartz, red ferruginized quartz grains.

Grey caleureous sandstone with grit size quartz grains in a calcareous

cement, pink garnet, iron-stiined quartz.

Grey compacted clay with scattered quartz grains, small pebbles mostly

from granite bedrock,

Granite basement.

Stratigraphic Summary

Lower Aptian (marine).

“Jurassic” (non-marine),

Lower Artinskian-Upper Sakmarian (freshwater).

Sakmarian (freshwater).

Lower Sakmarian (freshwater).

Lower Sakmarian (marine).

Lowermost Sakmarian (glacial),

Granite basement.

Stuarr Rance No. lL

Drilled 1919

Surface silicifed clay and sandstone with some calcite.

Brown marive shale. with dark red ferrnginized clay with Biacnarina

lpeblichae, Laplonhragmiides sp. 1. Vernenilinaides sp. 1.

Light grey mindstone, with ferriginized clay.

Light grey mudstone with both ferruginized and grey clav.

Light grey kaolinizged mudstone.

Grey calcareous glanenitic siltstone.

Dark grey pyritic, siltstene with calcareous foraniinitera including abun-

dant Bulimina sp, 2,

Dark grey yery pyritie siltstone with Trechammina minula and Mar-

yinulina marreensis.

Grey cone-in-cone limestone and siltstone.

Dark grey pyritie shale.

Grey glauconitic and pyritic siltstone and limestone,

Grey mudstane.

Fine light grey-brown friable pyritic sand.

76 N. H, LUDBROOK

Cuttings

Depth (feet)

223° — 224° 6 Buff sand with limonite.

224’ 6"— 295’ Coarse buff sand with rounded pitted grains and angular grams,

295° — 447’ Gritty and fine kaolinitic sand,

447° — 458! Sandstone and cual.

458° - 61l' Dark grey carbonaceous mudstone with fine quartz grains and. carhona-

eeous mutter. Lycopod megaspores.

611’ ~— 615’ Dark grey carbonaceous micaceous siltstane, sandy and felspathic.

615° — 668" Dark grey carbonaccous mudstone with pyrite and lycopod megaspores.

Stratigraphic Summury

Oo — 220° AplUian (marine).

B20" — AAT’ “Jurassic” (non-marine )—may he Permian in part.

447’ == 668’ Lower Artinskian-Sakmarian (freshwater).

Records show this bore as 485 feet deep, but boring conlinued to 668’ and samples.

were kept fo that level.

Stuart RANGE No. 2

Drilled 1920

Cuttings

Depth (feet)

Vo. Af Red surfuee clayey soil,

4 - 16 Grey gypscous shale, very weathered and ferruginized.,

ie —-— 2g Grey kaolinized shale, weathered and ferruginized with subangular

quartz, glauconite, kaolin and poorly preserved foraminifera including

Textularia anaceoraenstis.

29° = «(33 Light buff grey mutdstonc, ferruginized with glauconile and angular

quartz and a Lower Aptian foraminiferal assemblage including Haplo-

phragmoides chapmuni and Textularia anacoaraensts.

33° = 44 6" Cone-in-caone limestone and calcareous shale,

44' 6" AT Grey fine sandstone with brown inineral yrains.

oy Ls? i Grey-brown gritty sandstone.

5l’ — 54 Sandstone and gravel with grains lo 10 mm, of bhic-grey quartz, pink

quartzite,

54’ OAS Light bull coarse quartz sand with subanyular grains,

64° — 76" Coarse pravel with pebbles to 40 mm, of various origins.

768° — 86 Light cream-buff kaolinitioe sand with medium quartz grains—arkosie.

86° — 195' Gravel with miscellaneous pebbles, mostly blue-grey quartz, some

facetted, medium subangular quartz, felspar.

195’ — 20d" Light brown sand with fairly well sorted subangilar medium quartz

grains.

204" = 224)" Grey-bulf gritty sand, kaolinitic, with bluc-grey quartz grains, and

raeeithion subangular lear quartz.

230" = 253° Light grey-bulf medium sand with coarse mostly angular to subangular

qnartz, greyish and clear, pink garnet, siderite, felspur. j

953’ — 343? Grey mudstone, with prit size pebbles af various origins, pyrite, felspar,

subangular quartz, garnet, iron minerals, plant fragments, opaline quartz:

343° — 486" Grey-builf felspathic sand, with course to fine angular to roamded quartz

grains, felspar, pyrite.

No samples were kept from below 486 fect.

Strativraphic Summary

— 44 6" Lower Aptian (marine),

44’ B°— 253° “Jurassic” (non-marine)—may be Permian in part,

253' — 456° Lower Artinskian-Sakmarian (freshwater).

456’ = -1000" No samples, but presumed Sakmarian-

BoortHanna (Durr CREEK)

Drilled 1911

Cattings

Depth (fect) ;

yo— 35 Chogolute clayey surface soil, with couse angular quartz grains, iron-

stone fragmicnts and quartzite.

o5' = 45° Buff clayey gritty sand with fresh [clspar,

PERMIAN AND CRETACEOUS SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY 77

Depth ect)

epth (fect

45° = TO

77 0"

is || co: |e

96 -— 117

ll?’ —- Lov

134" — 162’

182’ — 1&5

Ish’ - 187’

187° —197'

197" = — 250’

350° — 300°

300) = 400"

400" = — B00"

600" 1100"

1100’ =—1295"

ino 1474"

1474" -1600"

160 1625’

16257 —1A00"

1800 1900"

1900" = =—1950!

I9gg" = —2000'

2000’) —2088'

25’ = =— 162’

162") —1800'

1800' =—2088*

Core

Depth (feet)

Oo = 18

ws - 34

B34 — 40

407 = S500

Licht red-brown fine clayey sand and grit wilh fresh felspar and nica,

Light hrown fine clayey sancl.

Oll-white clayey gritty sand and coarse gril with blue-grey quartz.

Grey mudstone with small pebbles.

Light buff argillaceans sandstone, kaolinitic and micaceous with fine

angular quartz and some grit grains.

White kaolinitic sand and gravel with small blue-grey quartz pebbles

about 10 inm.

Grey siltstone with a few grit size pebbles, coal fragments, mica, some

pyrite. Lycopod megaspures.

Grey coarse quartz grit with abundant grit size grains, mostly subangular

to angular and of srey quartz, opaline quartz, siderite.

Light buff coarse kaolinitic sandstone.

Grey siltstone with quarle-pyrite averepates, subrounded tn subuncular

quartz to grit size, breken quartzite pebble, coaly mattor, biotite. fclspar,

siderite, pink gamet. Lycopod megaspores.

Grey sity mudstone with medium angular quartz chlorite, pink garnet,

hiptite, pyrite.

As above with plant fraginents and pyrite averegates to 5 mm.

Grey siltstone with abundant qnartz-pyrite aggregates as above.

As above, with [tme to medium angular quartz, pyrite,

As ahove, with pyrite aggregates, quartzite.

Grey calearcous siltstone with carbonaccous. matter, very fine quartz

grains in a caleareous matrix, fragments of quartzite, rounded quartz

rains.

Brey carbonaceous mudstone with coarse rounded ynurtz medivm tu fine

angular quartz. carbonaceous sillstone.

Dark grey calearcons and carhonaccous siltstome with very fine angular

quartz, pyrite muscovite, bictile, coarse rounded to subrounded quartz,

calcareous cement.

Dark grey highly carbonaceous siltstone with fine mica und foramini-

fera at 1800'— Hyperammina sp., Textularia sp., 2 Pelytaxis sp., Thuram-

ming phialacformis Plummer.

Dark grey carbonaceous siltstone with coarse subrounded quartz grains

and foraminifera. The foraminifera are common but badly preserved,

and identification for the most part would be hazardous. The assemblage

inchudes cf, Hippocrepinella biaperta Crespin, Wyperamunine cf. acicula

(Parr) and Thuranzning phialaeformis Planner.

Dark grey carbonaceous siltstone as above with calcareous patches and

numerous badby preserved foraminifera,

Brown sandy carbonaceous siltstone with fine muscovite, foraminifera

Ayperammina sp., ef Bippucrepinella sp, Uhurammina phialaeformis.

Dark prey glauconitic sillstone with fine to medium: quartz grains, pyrite,

pale green glauconite, some plant fragments. Alnmdant foratoimifera

including Lyperammina acicula (Parr), Thurammina plhialacfarmis

Plummer, Amrmodiseus nonahensis Crespin, cf Ammoveriella incliusa

(Cushman and Waters), and species of Ammobaculites, (2) Polytuxis,

Trochammine.

Stratigraphic Summary

“Jurassic —(nonsmarine ).

Lower Artinskian-Sakmarian (freshwater),

Lower Sakmarian (marine).

ANNA CREEK

Drilled 1587 (Railway Bore)

No samples.

Yellow micaceous siltstone with fine angular quartz. pink garnet, mus-

covite,

Dark grey very carbonaccous mudstone with abundant plant remains.

Very dark grey carbonaceous mudstone with abundant plant remains,

Lycapod megaspores,

Core

Depth (leet)

S00) — Til’

Til’ — 802°

802’ — 825’

825' — 988

vv + 7iL'

Jil’ — 825°

- 825’ = — :‘988"

Cuttings

Depth (feet)

ov = «10’

10’ — 20°

a | eet

30° = 50°

i) or 5108

cu - «70

TO" - 8&0

80° = «120°

120° — 130’

130 => «146’

146° ~ 156’

156’) — 166"

166’ =—— 196°

196 — 216°

216 = 256"

23a" = — 280’

280" = = 320°

Bay — 428°

428" — 436’

436" — 503°

503" — 528°

N, H. LUDBROOK

Very dark grey laminated carbonavcous sandy siltstone with abundunt

plant remains, Lycopod megaspores, Moulds about 10 mm, Jong of

(?). pelecypoda.

Grey calcareous and carbonaceous banded sandstone and siltstone with

some glauconite, a soled pebble, unidentified spines and vertebrate teeth,

Dark grey Jaminated carbonaceous siltstone. —

Hard dense pyritic and calcareous felspathic: rack,

Stratigraphic Summary

Lower Artinskian-Sakmarian (freshwater),

Lower Sakmarian (? marine).

Palaeozoie or Proterazoic,

Coortre APPA

Drilled 1895

Yellowish gritty clayey sand with angular to subangular quart. grains,

Cream fine to medium micaceous clayey sand with fine augular quartz

grains, ubundant muscovite, and carbonaceous matter,

Light grey kaalinitte sand with coarse quartz grains, muscovile, pyrite,

srey quuirtz pebbles to LS mm.

Light grey calcareous gritly clay with coarse grit pebbles of various

kinds, mostly quartz but same porphyry, qnartzvite, pyrite, Fragment

of a foraminifer.

Grey calcareous clay with mostly medium to coarse angular to sub-

angular quartz, pyrite, Rare foraminifera Hyperammina acicula,

Grey calearcous clay, with unsorted quartz grains fine ta coarse and

mostly angudar with fractured and pitted surfaces, abundant pyrite and

felspar. AHyperammina acicula present,

Grey pebbly caleareous clay with small pebbles of various kinds—milky

and prey quartz, felspar, limestone, pyrite.

Grey gritty calearcous clay with fine calcareous sandstone. Hyperam-

ming ucieule (1 fragment). j

Grey grilty calcareous clay with abundant grey grit pebbles, mostly

subangular felspar, quartzite, pyrite, calcareous sandstone. One speci-

men each of Ammodiscus oonahensis and Hyperammina acicula.

Grey gritty calcareous clay with grey quartz. subangular quartz grains,

abundant calcareous sandstone fragments, pyrite. One broken Hyperam-

mina.

Grey clay with sandstone pebbles 15 mm. long and smaller pebbles

of diverse origin, pyrite, angular to rounded quartz grains, pink garnet.

Grey clay with small grit size pebbles of diverse origin, mostly angular

grey qnartz and grey liniestone.

Grey clay with grit size grains, mostly grey quartz but some pink quart-

wile, granite, felipat. limestone, pyrite,

Grey calewreous gritty clay with abundant grit grains mostly augular to

subancular grey quartz, felspar, pyrite, pink gamet, Foraminifera

present ~ cf. Lugtonia sp.. Ammodliscus oonahensis.

Grey pebbly clay with angular grey quartz pebbles, felspar.

Grey caleareous gritty clay with rounded to subrounded quartz to grit

sine.

Grey calcareous and pyritic clay with fine to medium and seme coarse

rounded to subronnded quartz, pyrite, pink garnet.

Grey calearcous and pytitic clay with pyrite quartz aggregutes to 25 mm,

long; caleareons sandstone, medium subangular quartz, pyrites, garnet,

smoky und grey quartz.

Grey sand and clay with snbromded quartz grains, pyrite, biotite,

Grey pytitic sandy clay with medium subrounded quartz grains, abun-

dant pyrite, garnet,

Light grey fine inegherent sandstoné with some clay, subrounded te

subangular quartz, garnet, chlorite, pyrite.

PERMIAN AND CRETACEOUS SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY 79

52k = 540)’

54 — TB

573°) — 660°

660" — 663’

663' = GGT’ &”

667' &"— 674’

674 ” ~6Y2"

oy2' — 768’

768 = — 792°

794’ = —1036°

1036’ -1104*

1104" —-1 858

yy - 3

30" — «870

270° ~1104°

110d’ +1858'

Cuttings

Depth (fevt)

yy o gg

ar — Rr

yee 19!

ly OO! OY

is = 38’

38 — 5

Sl’ — 128’

128’ =~ 149"

149° — 168’

168 = — 200°

200° — B01'

B01’ = 35a"

353’ = =— 460°

460° — 691' 3”

vy — 3s

a3” — 149"

149° - 691’ 3"

Light grey conglomerate with medium guattz snbrounded to rounded

wilh pilted surtuces. Pebbles of various kinds to 50 sam.

Butt medium quarts sand, fairly well sorted, with medium sulbanygular

to subrounded grains, garnet, pyrite,

Fine light grey sand and sandy elay with fine angular quartz grains,

pyrite, garnet. Caleareous sandstone boulder at 657-66) fect.

Light grey calcareous sandy clay with medium angular to subrounded

quartz, angnlar fine quartz, abundanl pyrite cubes.

Light erey-bulf medley quartz sand with subrounded grains and

pebbles of quartzite: and siliceous metasedinent.

Light prey mudstone with fine angular ty medium subangular quartz,

yrite, garnet.

rey irrevularly Jaminated clay and fine sandstone.

Light wrey fine slightly clavey sand with garnet, pyrite and pebbles

af various kinds to 60 mm,

Blue-grey gravelly sandy siltsoue with cvarse urey quartz to gravel size,

subrounded medium to coarsi: clear quartz, pyrite, garnet in a fine

clay matrix.

Grey grit in clayey matrix with pebbles to 25 mm, Pebbles of various

kinds, granite, quartzite, limestune, pyrite.

Blue-mey shale—washings mainly light brown and grey fine mudstone,

subangular and snbrounded quartz, calvite, pyrite,

Chocolate caleareous shale with bulf sand interealationys at L464-1474,

1489-1497, 1840-1858 feet.

Stratigraphic Summary

“Jurassic” (non-rnarine ).

Lower Sakanarian (inurine).

Lowermost Sakmarian (vlacigenes),

Proterozoic (Marmoan).

MarcArer Creek

Drilled 1897

Reed surface clayey soil,

Yellowish gypseous clay.

Brown lateritic ironstone und vellow weathered siltstone with snica,

vlauconite, fine angular quartz.

Ferruginised calcareous siltstone,

Grey flaky mmdstone, with fine anvulur quartz grains, abundant muisco-

vite, glauconite, plant remains, felspar. Rich in Aptian foraminifera,

including Maplophragmoides chapmunt, Haplophragmaides diekinsoni,

Ammobaculites sp, 3 and associated arenaceous species,

Fine white micaccous sand with fine angular quartz, muscovite, felspay,

pyrile. A small foraminiferal fauna which may have been ‘introduced

from overlying strata during drilling,

Grey brown sand with pebbles to 50 wim. white sandstone and buff

arkosic sand.

Arkosic grit and gravel,

Dark blue grey daky mudstone, with abundant pyrite, coarse rounded

to subrounded clear quartz grains.

Chocolate finé-etuined imudstone (shale),

Grey calcareous mudstone with calcite yeius; blue grey clay, fine

matrix with rounded quartz griins.

Light gyey-buff fine incoherent sandsttme with meditun subrounded

lo rounded well sorted quartz grains with pitted surfaces, pink garnet.

Grey sandy clay (boulder clay) with abundant rounded quartz grains

with etched surfaces. calcite, pyrite, slate, quartzite.

Light buff fine to mediwn incoherent quartz sand with angular to sub-

tounded quarta yruins, very little clay, pink garnet, pyrite. Caleareous

at 555-560, 619-648 feet.

Stratigraphic Summary

Aptian (imarinc),

“Jurassic” (mou-iitrine ),

Lowermost Sakroarian ( glavigenes).

&0) N, H. LUDBROOK

REFERENCES

Baume, B. E., 1957. Upper Palaeozoie Microfloras in Sediments from the Lake Phillipson

Bore, South Australia, Aust, Journ, Sci, 20 (2), pp. 61-62.

Brown, H, Y. L., 1905. Report on Geological Explorations in the West and North-West of

South Australia, S.A, Parl, Pap. No. 71, pp. 1-11, map.

Campana, B., and Witson, RB. B., 1955, ‘Tillites and Related Glacial Topography of South

Australia, Eclog. geol. Helvetiae, 48 (1), pp. 1-30, text figs. 1-18, pls. 1-4.

Cuuce, RB, I, 1957. The Hydrology of Portion of the Great Artesian Basin near the Peake and

Denison Ranges. S$.A. Geol. Sury, Rept. Inyest., No. 10, pp. 1-27, figs. 1-3.

Dickinson, S. B,, 1952. The Gondwana System in South Australia. Rept. of Internat. geol.

Congr. 19th Algiers, 1952; Symposium sur les series de Gondwana, pp. 89-90.

Duxxop, P., and Parxtin, I,. W., in Glaessner, M. F., and Parkin, L. W., 1958. The Geology

of South Australia. Journ. Geol. Soc. Aust., 5 (2), pp. 70-79, fig. 18,

Howcuw, W., 1928. The Building of Australia and the Succession of Life--Part 2, Mesozoic

and Cainozoic. Government Printer, Adelaide,

Jack, R. L,, 1930. Geological Structure and other Factors in Relation to Underground Water

Supply in Portions of South Australia. Geol. Surv. $. Aust. Bull. 14, pp. 1-48, pls. 14,

Lupphook, Ni, Bia Bea Permian Foraminifera in South Australia, Aust. Journ. Sci., 19

: pp. 161-162.

Lupsroox, N. H., 1961. Subsurface Stratigraphy of the Maralinga Area, South Australia.

Trans, Ray, Soc, $, Aust,, 84, pp. 51-59, figs, 1, 2.

Wann, L. K., 1946. The Occurrence, Composition, Testing and Utilization of Underground

Water in South Australia, and the Search for Further Supplies. Geol. Surv. S$. Aust,

Bull, 23, pp. 1-281, figs. 1-40, pls. 1-6.

APPENDIX I.

Gopy of Letter from J. W. Jones, Conservator of Water, to W. Howchin.

1th March, 1908.

W. Howchin, Esq.,

Lecturer in Geology,

The University of Adelaide.

Dear Sir,

You have always expressed your interest in the Lake Phillipson Bore, earlier samples

from which I showed you and Professor Gregory some time ago.

The Boring is now practically completed with the result that it is bottomed in Syenite

at aliout 3150 feet. The extremely hard rock has been penetrated 6 feet 6 inches and boring

is going to 20 feet in the rock to satisfy the Govt. Geologist.

I send samples from 2928 ft, and 3124 ft. the latter showing small pieces of the syenite

and indicating what might he expected a litthe deeper and what actually was found —the

bed rock of syenite.

You will remember that I have alwavs held that we have never had the marine blue

shale of the Artesian Basin,

Faithfully yours,

JAMES W, JONES.

A NEW SPECIES AND SOME NEW RECORDS IN THE GENUS CLOACJNA

(NEMATODA : STRONGYLOIDEA) FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

Cloacina setonicis sp. nov, is described from Setonix brachyurus from Rottnest Island, Western

Australia. It differs from C. bancroftorum and C. thetidis in the presence of teeth in the oesophagus.

Four species are recorded from Macropus robustus from near Marble Bar, namely: C. communis, C.

parva, C. hydriformis, and C. magnipapillata. C. magna is considered a synomym of C. communis.

A NEW SPECIES AND SOME NEW RECORDS IN THE GENUS

CLOACINA (NEMATODA ;STRONGYLOIDEA) FROM WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

by Patricia M. Mawson®

[Read 8 June 1961]

SUMMARY

Cleacin setanicis sp. noy, is described fron Setonix brachyurus trom Rott-

nest Island, Western Anstralia. It differs tram G. bancraftnrum and C. thetidis

in the presence of teeth in the oesophagus. Four species are recorded from

Mecropus robustus from near Marble Bar, namely: C. communis, C. parva,

QC, hydriformis, and C. magnipapilluta, C. magne is considered a synomym of

C. communis,

INTRODUCTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The nematodes recorded below were very kindly sent to the author by Dr,

Shelley Barker of the Zoology Department of the University of Western Aus-

tralia (from Setonix brachyurus) and Dr, K, H, M. Kaley then of the C.S.LR.0.

Wild Life Division (from Maeropus robtstus).

The four species of Cloacina, C. communis, C. magnipapillata, C. hydr-

formis, and C, parva which haye been identified from Macropus robustus, have

each been compared with para-type material in the Helminthological Collection of

the Zoology Department of the University of Adelaide. They agree with the

original descriptions, but in the first two listed, teeth have been obseryed in the

aesophagus; in the other two these are absent. Discussion and description of

these teeth is deferred to a separate study (Mawson, 1961, $4).

Cloacina setonicis, sp. nov,

(Figs. 1-5)

Host and Locality: Sefonix brachyurus, Rottnest Island, Western Australia.

Short stout worms, tapering in oesophageal and tail regions, Males 3-5-4:2

mm. long, 350-400. wide, females up to 7-7 mm, long, and to 600” maximum

breadth, Six lips and six elements of leaf crown distinct, Four submedian papil-

lae small, each of two segments; lateral papillac very small. Buceal ring about

204 long, 1004 diameter in male, 130, in female, with symmetrically undulating

anterior and posterior borders. Tumen of anterfor end of oesophagus very wide

in all specimens, with two circles each of three backwurdly directed teeth, pro-

jecting from the wall of ocsophagus Into lumen. Nerve ring lies just anterior

to mid-length of oesophagus, at same level as Jong thread-like cervical papillae;

exerctory pore just behind this,

Tail of female conical and sharply poimted, about 35y long. Vulva 100.

in front of anus, and vagina about twice as long as tail, Eggs about 120, by

80u.,

Spicules unusually Jong, 1/1-4-1/1-7 of body Tength, except in one speci-

men in which this proportion is 1/3. Gubernaculum heart-shaped, weakly de-

veloped. Bursa large, ventral Iobes joined ventrally, dorsal Jobe only slightly

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. (1961), Vol. 85.

§2 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

separated from Jaterals, and with only slight median indentation. Arrangement

of rays shown in Figs. 3 and 4. Prebursal papillae present.

The new species closely resembles C. bancreftorum Johnston and Maw-

son (1939, 133) and C, thetidis Johnston and Mawson (1939, 532) in the shape

of the oesophagus and the character of the head, but differs from them in spicule

length and in the presence of teeth. The type specimens of these two species

have been examined, and teeth do not appear to be present.

Cloacina parva Johnston and Mawson

Johnston und Mawson, 1938, 282. Macropus robustus, Petrogale penicillata lateralis, Central

Australia.

Host and Locality: Macropus robustius, near Marble Bar, Western Australia.

The single male is 8-5 mm. long with oesophagus 1/13 and spicule 1/2-3 of

body length; the six females are 6-8-11-5 mm. long, with oesophagus 1/13-1/16

of body length. No teeth were observed in the oesophagus.

Cloacina magnipapillata Johnston and Mawson

Johnston. and Mawson, 1939, 540. Macropus major, M. rufus, New South Walcs.

Johnston and Mawson, 1939, 307. M. major, Victoria.

Host and Locality: Macropus robustus, near Marble Bar, Western Australia.

About thirty worms are present. Males measure 5-9-8-3 mm. in length;

oesophagus 1/7‘5-1/13, and spicules 1/2-1/2-6 of body length. Females are

NEW SPECIES AND RECORDS IN GENUS CLOACINA &3

6-0-12-8 mm. long, with oesophagus 1/10-1/16 of body Jength. There is a

slight enlargement of the oesophagus just in front of the nerve ring, and three

teeth project into the lumen in this region. These structures will be described

later (Mawson, 1961, 83),

Cloacina communis Johnston and Mawson

Syn, Cloucina magna Jolinston and Miaayson.

Johnston and Mawson, 1938, 275, 277, Macrapus tvbustus, Central Anstrulia.

Johnston and Mawson, 1939, 133. Lrotemnaden parryi (s. Mueropies parryi), Queensland.

Johnston arid Mawson, 1940, 97. 1, nuijor melunops, Petrogale xanthopus, South Australia.

Jobnston und Mawson, 1940, 468. .M. major, New South Wales,

Host and Locality: Macrepus robustus, near Marble Bar, Western Australia.

This species is easily recognised bevause of the Jarve size and distinctive

shape, both of the whole body, especially the female, and of the oesophagus.

C@. magna Johnston and Mawson was described from the same host and from

the same locality as the type of C. communis. Tt is now thought after com-

parison of the original material, that the very slight differences observed be-

tween the species aré insignificant, and only one species is concerned. C. com-

munis bas page priority, Three females are present in the new material. They

arc 38-40 mm. long, the cesophayus 1/14:0-1/14-3 of the body length. 'I'ceth

wre present in both paratype and fresh material, lying in three groups one

behind the other where the oesophagus widens towards the basal bulb. These

will be more fully described Jater.

Cloacina hydriformis Johnston and Mawson

Johnston ancl Mawson, 1938. 273, Petrogala peneilluta lateralis, Central Australia.

Johnston und Mawson, 1940, 97. Macropus major melanaps, South Australia.

Host aud Locality; Macropus robustus, near Marble Bar, Western Australia.

Cloacina hydriformis may be recognised by the large outstanding sub-

median cephalic papillac, and by the shape of the buccal riny, which is thin-

walled with out-turnced anterior margin. Only females are present in this col-

lection, They agree with the orivinal description, and no tecth have been ob-

served in the fresh material. They are rather longer than the tvpe specimens,

7-0-7-5 mm., with oesophagus 1/16+2-1/15-7 of the body Jength.

REFERENCES

Jeunsron, I. H,, and Mawson, 2. M., 1938. Strongyle Nematodes from Central Australian

Kangaroos amd Wallabies. Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust, 62 (2), pp, 263-286.

Jounston, T. AL. und Mawson, P. M,, 1938, Strongyle Nematodes from Queensland Marsn-

pials. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 63 (1), pp. 121-148.

Jounston, ‘FL, and Mawson, P. M.. 1938. Strongyle Nematodes from Marsupials in New

South Wales, Prac, Linn, Soc, N.S.W., 64, pp, 513-536.

Jeounsron, Tl’, He, and Mawson, P.M. 1939. Some Nematodes from Victorian and Western

Australian Marsupials. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63 (2), pp. 307-310.

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1940. Nematodes from: South Australian Marsupials.

Trans, Rov. Sot. S, Aust, 64 (1), pp. 95-100.

Jonnsion, I. H.. and Mawson, P. M., 1940. New and Known Nematodes from Australian

Marsupials. Prope. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.,, 65. pp, 468-476,

Mawson, P. M.. 1961, A Note on the Ocourrence of Ovsophogeal Tooth in Species of the

Genus Cloudina (Nematada: Strongyloidea). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 85, pp. 84-89.

A NOTE ON THE OCCURRENCE OF OESOPHAGEAL TEETH IN SPECIES

OF THE GENUS CLOACINA (NEMATODA: STRONGYLOIDEA)

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

It has been found that in some species of Cloacina teeth project from the lining of the oesophagus

into the lumen. Each tooth lies in the mid-line of a sector of the oesophagus. In each species the

number, arrangement and position of the teeth is constant. There is no evidence that they serve as

outlets for oesophageal glands.

A NOTE ON THE OCCURRENCE OF OESOPHAGEAL

TEETH IN SPECIES OF THE GENUS CLOACINA

(NEMATODA ; STRONGYLOIDEA)

by Paraicra M. Mawson?

[Read 5 fine 1961]

SUMMARY

It hxs been found that in some species of Cloacinu teeth project from the

lining of the ocsophagus inte the lumen, Each tooth lies in the mid-line of a

sector of the vesophagus. In each species. the number, arrangement and position

of the teeth is constant. There is na evidence that they serve as outlets for

ovsuphageal glands.

INTRODUCTION AND METHODS

In a recent study of the nematodes from the Western Australian wallaby,

Setonix brachyurus, a new species, Cloacina selonicis, was identified and de-

scribed LMatvsbt 1961). In this species teeth were noted projecting into the

lumen of the oesophagus near ity anterior end. Such teeth do not appear ic

have been described tram other Trichoneminae, nor, indeed, from any other

nematode, other than at the anterior end projecting intu the buccal cavity. The

question arises, are they present, hut nnohserved, in other species of the same

genus? Preliminary investigations into this possibility have shown that teeth

are present in some species, not in others, Examination has heen made of the

paratypes of some Cloacina spp. and of sume freshly obtained Cloucine spp.,

as well as of some species of related genera,

lf teeth he present they can be seen in an entire mount of a fresh specimen

cleared in Jactophenol. In specimens which have been preserved for a long

time and are dark, it is necessary to clear with gum chloral or Berlese’s fluid

(both of which are excellent media for showing cuticular structures) and some-

times to make a separate mount of the oesophagus, In anv case, this last was

done wherever possible, as the tecth may be seen much more distinctly. To find

the relation of the teeth to the wall and lumen of the oesophagus, sections were

made, mostly transverse sections in series, Some were made from paraffin em-

bedded specimens using a microtome, others with a fine knife under the dissect-

ing microscope. These latter had the advantage that it was possible to make

the cut at the angle and in the position desired, which, with curved worms, is

almost impossible with the microtome. The hand-cut sections were made about

30-40, thick, aud were mounted in Berlese’s fluid. Though some of the material

was stained with Delafield’s haematoxylin no attempt has heen made at any

real study of the histology, The vesophagus of some of the freshly obtained

specimens was left for about 12 hours in 10 p.c. potassium hydroxide solution,

s that all but the chitinous lining was destroyed, leaving the teeth (if present)

very clearly visible.

DESCRIPTION OF TEETH

In many Cloacina species, if not in all, the lining of the cesophagus appears

in whole mounts to be wneven. In section this is seen to be duc to the undulat-

ing nature of the radial arms of the lumen, rather than to any particular thick-

* Zoology Department, University of Adelaide.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1961), Vol, 85,

SG PATRICIA M. MAWSON

ening of the lining, This uneven appearance is seen alsy in other strongyles; it

has been described, for example, by Immink (1924) for Strongylus edentatus.

In the Australian genera Zoniolaimus and Pharyngostrongylus the lining usually

does not give this appearance, The structures which are now identified as teeth

in Cloucina spp. are very much more definite than these projections and cannot

possibly be: mistaken for them. The teeth occur only in some species and in

tliese they are arranged {n a characteristic way and in a constant position in

the aesophagus, Even in the few species so far examined It is elear that the

presence and arrangement of the teeth ure a feature of value in identification

of the species,

The. structure of the oesophagus of Cloacing spp. is very similar to that of

ather strongyles in which it has been described, but there are differences in

the position and number of the longitudinal thickenings on the lining of each

section, Typically, in the anterior part the lamen is wide with pinchcd angles.

and the lining of more or less even thickness. Further back the lumen is rela-

lively smaller and more tri-radiate, and the lining develops the longitudinal rads

or thickenings. apparently formed by fusion of a rod ftom each of adjzeent

sectors. The longitudinal canal seen in some nematodes at the outer end of

cach radius of the hinen has not been seen in any of the Cloaciut spp. examined,

In species in which a tooth is prescat, the tooth projects into an enlarge-

ment of the lumen which is sometimes reflected in w slight swelling af the whole

vesophagus. The tooth is the shape of a rase thorn, projecting either forward,

ar, more rarcly, backward, into the lumen. Each tooth is formed in the midline

of the seetor involved from the greatly thickened cuticular lining, the project-

ing point balanced in ease of large teeth by an extension of the thickening into

the oesophageal tissuc.

[Lis nol clear whether the tooth is of functional importance, There docs not

appear to be any outlet through it for glandular secretion, certainly no duct

has been found similar to that in Ancylostoma spp. There is no evidence that

the tecth are movable; they are always at the same angle in different specimwns

of a species. They might help in some way to regulate the flow of ocsophageal

contents, but their appearance does not suggest that they would form efficient

valves, If their action is merely abrasive, the presence of a point is unexplained.

From the few species so far studied, it appears that teeth may occur in wrt:

of three regions of the oesophagns, and that in each region the character of

the tooth is slightly different-

1. At the anterior end, close to the month, e.g, C. setonicis. In this species

the teeth are small.

2. Just in front of the nerve ring, ¢.g. C, magnipapillata, C. macropodis, C.

longispiculata. In these the teeth are of medium to large size and the

routs not pronounced; the vesophagus is swollen itt the region of the

teeth,

3. Well behind the nerve ring, just in front of the terminal oesophageal

swelling, e.g. C. communis, C, sp. ing. i these the teeth are larger,

more numevous, and with well developed basal processes; the oesn-

phagns is swollen in the region of the teeth,

SPECIES IN WHICH TEETH ARF NOT PRESENT

Both fresh material and paratype specimens haye been examined of

C. hydriformis Johnston and Mawson 1938, anid C, parva Johnston and Mawsen

1939, and no teeth have been observed. They appear to be absent also in the

paratype specimens of C. hbancroftorum Johnston and Mawson 1939, and C

theticdiy Jolmsten and Mawson 1939, and although these are long-preserved

ORSOPHAGEAL TEETH IN THE GENUS CLOACINA 87

specimens, they are in such good condition that it is thought that, if present,

they would be seen. Some other species which have been examined but in

whuch teeth are apparently absent, are Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. and M. 1938,

200

Fig. !. Cloacina setonicis, T.S. of oesophagus near unterior end. Figs.

2-5. C. magnipapillata. 2, anterior end of body; 3, ocsophagus in region

of prencural bulge; 4 and 5, sections of oesophagus at levels indicated on

Fig. 3 by lines A and B respectively. Figs. 6-7. C. longispiculata. 6,

anterior end of bady; 7, oesophagus in region of preneural bulge, Figs.

8-9. ©. macrapodis, 8, anterior end of hody; 9, oesophagus in yegion

of preneural bulge. Figs. 3, 4 and 5 to same scale; Figs, 1, 7 and 9 to

same scale.

P, beta J. and M. 1938, Labiostrongylus longispiculata Wood 1929, L. eugenii

J. and M. 1940, and Trichonema spp. from a local horse, all of which were studied

as fresh material, and Quilonia sp., long preserved, from a zoo elephant,

83 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

SPECIES IN WHICH ‘TEETH HAVE BEEN FOUND

Cloacina setonicis Mawson (1961, 81) (Fig, 1)

Type material was examined when newly preserved. Six small, backwardly

directed tecth are present, arranged in two circles each of three teeth, the most

anterior just behind the buccal capsule, the second a short distance behind this.

Profile views of teeth in the oesophagus are given in Figs. 1 and 2 of the original

description.

Figs, 10-14. Cloacing communis. 10, anterior end; 11, pre-bulbar region

of oesophagus; 12, 13 and 14, transverse sections through oesophagus at

levels shown on Fig. 10 by lines at A, B and C respectively. Figs, 12

and 13 te game scale, Figs, 15-16, Cloacina sp, mg. 15, oesophagus; 16,

prebulbar region of oesophagus.

Cloacina magnipapillata Johuston and Mawson (1939, 530) (Figs. 2-5)

Fresh material belonging to this species has now been obtained from

Macropus robustus from Western Australia, About thirty worms have been

examined and teeth are clearly present in all, in exactly similar position and

arrangement in all specimens. They lie in a slight swelling of the oesophagus

just in front of the nerve ring. There are three teeth, the larger of which comes

from the dorsal sector of the oesophagus and lies just in front of the other

two, which are subyentral.

Paratype specimens of this species have also been examined, They are very

datk with age. Teeth ure not distinct, but there is a suggestive swelling of the

outline of the oesophagus in front of the nerve ring, and an interruption of the

central line of the oesophagus in this region.

OESOPHAGEAL TEETH IN THE GENUS CLOACINA 89

Cloacina longispiculata Johnston and Mawson (1939, 131) (Figs. 6-7)

Paratype material has been examined, but no fresh material is available.

When cleared in Berlese’s Huid, there appears to be a single small tooth lying

just anterior to the nerve ring in a slight swelling of the oesophagus.

Cloacina macropodis Johnston and Mawson (1939, 278) (igs. 8-9)

No fresh material is available of this species, In paratype specimens a tooth

is clearly present, lying just anterior to the nerve ring. The appearance of the

oesophagus in this species is very similar to that of C. longispiculata, but the

species may be distinguished by the shape and size of the sub-median cephulic

papillae, and by the very long spicules in C. longispiculata.

Cloacina communis Johnston and Mawson (1938, 275) (Figs. 10-14)

Fresh and paratype specimens haye been cxamined and teeth are distinct in

cleared specimens, There are three successive groups of three teeth each, the

hindcrmost group lying where the vcsophagus widens towards the terminal

bulb; at the level of each group the oesophagus is slightly wider. The teeth

are large with well-developed basal thickenings,

Cloacina sp. ing. (Figs. 15-16)

Some worms belonging to a species resembling C. frequens and C, ernabella

have been found in Macropus robustus from Marble Bar in Western Australia.

As only females are present, the species cannot be identified, The dentition in

these is, however, su distinctive that a figure has been included here. There

are about fifteen teeth lying where the oesophagus begins to widen posteriorly.

They are arranged in roughly five groups closely succeeding one another. The

teeth are mostly large with well-developed basal structures, and point forward,

but at least two are small.

REFERENCES

Immunck, B. D. C. My 1424. On the Microscopical anatomy of the Digestive System of

Strongylus edentntus Looss. Arch. Anat., 3 (4-6), pp. 281-356.

Jornston, 'T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1938. Strongyle Nematocles from Central Australian

Kangaroos and Wallabies. Trans, Roy. Sac. 8. Aust., 62 (2), pp. 263-266,

Jousston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1939, Strongyle Nematodes from Queensland Mur-

supials. Trans, Roy, Soc, S. Aust, 68 (1) pp, 121-148. ,

Jomnsron, 'T, H., and Mawson, P. M., 1938. Strongyle Nematodes from. Marsupials in New

South Wales. Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 64, pp. 513-536,

Mawson, P. M., 1961. A New Species and Some New Records in the Genus Cloaecine

(Nematoda: Sttongyloidea) from Western Australia, Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 85,

pp. 61-35.

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN THE INGLEWOOD DISTRICT,

MOUNT LOFTY RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

THEIR DISTRIBUTION IN RELATION TO MICRO-ENVIRONMENT

BY HELENE A. MARTIN

Summary

A study of a dry sclerophyll forest has been undertaken with the object of relating minor variations

in the plant communities to certain environmental factors. Five communities were recognised and

these were classified as three plant types and two associations. The species of Eucalyptus concerned

were FE. obliqua, E. elaeophora and E. fasciculosa. The environmental factors investigated included

rainfall, insolation, soil profile, soil fertility and soil moisture. The range of variation both in the

vegetation and in the environment was relatively small and, in fact, both presented graded series

rather than discontinuities. It proved difficult to establish any significant correlations. However, one

community, the E. obliquu-E. elaeophora type, was observed to possess the highest rate of

evapotranspiration and a second community, E. elaeophora type was associated with soils of

relatively high fertility.

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN THE INGLEWOOD DISTRICT,

MOUNT LOFTY RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

THEIR DISTRIBUTION IN RELATION TO MICRO-ENVIRONMENT

Tenenr A. Marrin!

[Read 8 June 1961]

SUMMARY

A study of a dry sclerophyll forest has been undertaken with the object

of relating minor yariations in the plant communities to certain environmental

factors. Five communities were recognised and these were classified as three

plant types and. two associations, ‘he species of Eusalyntiis concerned were

E. obliqua, E. elucephoru and EB. fasciculosa,

The environmental factors investigated inchided rainfall, insolation, soil

profile, soil fertility and soil moisture.

The range of yariation both in the vegetation aid in the environment was

relatively. small and, in fact, both presented graded series sather than diseon-

tinuities, It proved difficult to establish any significant correlations. Tow-

ever, ene community, the E. oblique-B. clacaphara type, was observed to possess

the highest rate of evapotranspiration and a second cammunity, K. elacuphora

type was associated with soily of relatively high fortility,

INTRODUCTION

The dry sclerophyll forest near Adelaide covers an extensive region and

exlubits many variations both in the dominant upper stratum and understory.

An earlier comprehensive study by Adamson and Osborn (1924) recognised

four main communities within the Strmgybark Forest, viz. forests on quartzitic

soils, forests on ironstone soils, gully forests and “box” forests. Within these four

forest communities there were smaller changes associated with habitat differ.

ences, particularly in the understory. For example, within the forests on

quartzitic soils (Eucalyptus obliqua domimant) threc such changes were noted,

in (1) communities on lower hills and open slopes, (2) communities on southern

protected slopes and high plateaux, and (3) communities on sleep rocky slopes,

Each contained some species characteristic of the particular habitat. Within

the “box” (E. elacaphora) forests, two facies occurred in the undergrowth, one

of Epacrids and Hakeas and the other with Lepidosperma semiteres abundant

(Adamson and Osborn, 1924). Later workers, Specht und Perry (1948), made

an extensive stady of part of the Mount Lofty Ranges, coneentvating on the

distribution of dominant trees, They discussed formations and their distribu-

tion in relation to environment and noted that the undershrubs varied with every

micro-habitat, independently of the dominant trees. The understory was not

studied in great detail, but the authors pointed out the need for “further inyes-

tigation... af the individual species of the lower stratum”.

At Breakneck Hill, Inglewood (about 16 miles N.E. of Adelaide), there is a

complex patchy distribution of many species frequent in the dry sclerophyll

forest formation of the Adelaide Hills. The various communities present wre

characteristic of major variations noted in this formation by the previous workers

1 Department of Botany, The University of Adelaide, new Department of Biology and

Bofany, University of British Columbia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. (1961), Vol. 85.

92 HELENE A, MARTIN

(loc, cit,). Consequently, this particular locality was studied with the hope ot

finding some explanation for the observed distributions,

The area selected for study is approximately one mile square and situ-

ated on a broad north-south ridge, With an elevation of 1,000 to 1,400 feet, the

ridges are comparatively Hat-topped with steeply sloping sides. The small

streams dissecting the region form the upper reaches of tributaries to the Little

Para River, Fig, 1 shows the general location of the area and the topography

can be seen in Fig. 15.

THE VEGETATION

The dominant tree species are the mesophancrophytes, Eucalyptus obliqua,*

E, elaeophora and E, fasciculosa, Most of the trees are regrowths from old

stumps (see Plate 1A) since woodcutters periodically work in the district. An

Sony

i pount GAWLER

INGLEWOOD gg Pkersbrook,

Teatree oF

QAdelaide

fal

{gdp

atthe

Fig. 1. Map showing the location of the area studied,

oceasional old tree or burnt-out shell indicates trees of quite large dimensions,

three or four feet in diameter. Today, the majority are only about a foot in

diameter and 12 to 20 fect high, This agrees with the findings of Webb (1952).

The average density is about 400 trees per acre (5 trees per plot of LO yards

square) and the structure is that of an open, low-growing forest. This

stunted appearance is accentuated by the nature of EL, elaeophora itself which

can either oceur as a large tree or develop a “mallee-like” habit (Adamson and

Osborn, 1924), the latter more often on rocky ridges (Wood, 1937).

*-The identification and nomenclature follows Black (1943-57). A collection of gpeci-

mens has been lodged with the State Herbarium of South Australia, Botanic Garden, Adelaide,

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 93

Beneath the trees, there is a layer of sclerophyllous shrubs, nanophanero-

phytes, up to four feet in height and composed of Xanthorrhoea semiplana,

Hakea rostrata, Leptospermum myrsinoides and occasionally Casuarina muel-

leriana and Pultenaca daphnoides, Sometimes these shrubs grow so closely and

densely that they form an almost impenetrable thicket, but usually the individual

bushes are more scattered and discrete and in some localised spots, almost absent

(see Plate 3B).

The third stratum, the ground layer, consists of low sprawling sclerophyllous

shrubs, chamaephytes, various geophytes and hemicryptophytes. The chief ones

[J Sh per clin

[-] 1-7 pee Lan

WS >8 er chime

EUCALYPTUS OBLIQUA

Fig. 2. Eucalyptus obliqua. This species is restricted

to the southern part, on higher elevations, southern

aspects and valleys.

are Hibhertia acicularis, . sericea, Acrotriche serrulata, Platylobium obtusan-

gulum, Lepidosperma semiteres (sce Plate 2A) and Lomandra fibrata. The last-

named species forms a low, continuous grass-like cover, 4 to 6 inches high (see

Plate 1B). True grasses, however, are not common, in keeping with most sclero-

phyllous communities (Wood, 1937), ;

Ot the various ways possible to obtain quantitative data (Goodall, 1952),

the following method was adopted for sampling and recording. Line transects

were run al fiye-chain intervals along the ridge, and orientated perpendicular to

its length so that they ran up hill and down again. The number of species

D4 HELENE A. MARTIN

brushing the legs in every chain was counted. This vave a series of quadrats

one foot to one foot six inches in width and 22 yards long. It was felt

that this particular method was most suited to the problem, in that it would

reveal the nature and range of variation and yield the most information for the

labour involved.

The number of each species per quadrat was then mapped and lines drawn

enclosing areas of equal density. This method is similar to that used by Ilinsky

and Posil’skaya in 1929, who drew “isolines” connecting points at which the fre-

quency of a given species was the same (Goodall, 1952), Pidgeon and Ashby

< Creeks,

C! "| per thn.

|—F per che oa

26 per cha, ‘ oe

EUCALYPTUS ELAEOPHGRA

Fig. 3. Eucalyptus elaeophora. Distribution is wide-

spread and fairly uniform. It tends to be absent from

the southern parts where LE. obliqua is common and

along the narrow creek flats where E. camaldulensis is

dominant.

(1942) constructed isonome maps in which lines joined points of equal per-

centage frequencies, based on the total number of plants present. This

percentage basis enabled the maps to be superimposed, and at any given point,

the total of all species was 100 per cent. The isoline maps constructed

for Inglewood are based on actual numbers since the main interest was the

distribution of the individual species and their correlation with environment.

For the densities and distribution of the major species, see Figs. 2 to 12

inclusive. The only important species not represented here is Lomandra fibrata

which was not recognised or recorded in the earlier part of the work.

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 5

THE COMMUNITIES

The detailed examination of the distributions of numerous species is rather

unwieldy. To facilitate the use of such data, they need to be simplified by

some method of classification, The devices which have been used to classify

and the resultant plant societies are legion (Braun-Blanquet, 1951) and the

merits of each have been much contested. Indeed, it often seems that classifica-

tion is an end in itself,

The most noteworthy attempt at an objective approach is that of Goodall.

In his paper, “The Use of Positive Interspecific Correlation” (Goodall, 1953), he

A Cranks.

E] £1. pak che

1-5 per thm.

‘6 pers thn

EUCALYPTUS. FASGICULOSA

Fig, 4. Eucalyptus fasciculasa is widespread and uni-

form in distribution. It tends to be absent where E.

obliqua and . cameldulensis are dominant.

regards vegetation as being hetcrogeneous, the cause of which is usually habitat

variation. If the distribution of one species is influenced by environmental

differences, it is highly likely that others will be similarly affected, depending

on their tolerances. If two species are common in the same quadrats, then

they will be positively correlated. If one species avoids the habitats where an-

other grows, then they are negatively correlated, Whether two species can be

correlated is tested statistically by preparing a 2 X 2 table and comparing ob-

served occurrences with those expected on a random basis. A x® test is applied,

at an arbitrary level of significance.

26 HELENE A. MARTIN

The 361 quadrats recorded were sorted into five humugenevus groups

using the method of positive interspecitic correlation described by Goodall

(1953). The level of significance chosen was P=0-1 p.c. (x° = 10-827), since

a preliminary trial using P= 1-0 p.c. (x7= 6-635) as employed by Goodall on

the Victorian Mallee gave seventeen communities thus defeating the aim to

produce a workable system of classification (Martin, 1960). The reason for

this difference was the large number of common species, often 10-12, which were

present within each quadrat. Thus the possible number of paired species was

large and interspecific correlations were high,

TABLE 1

Frequeney of the *Specier (4%,

Community Number

]

I Ir Tit IV a

Species (LO7)F ($2) (75) (75) (42)

Rucalyptus oblique GO-1 | Bae 16-0 | VaeT Tl

£, elacepljiore. 62-6 160-0 100-0 64-0 100-0

B. Jusrteulose 27°) 100-0 | 100-0 78:7 4-2

Nantharrhaen semiplana 346 163 56-0 374 23-8

Haken rostretu. 29-9 65-4 100-6 52-0 28-6

Cusuuring muellercana 18-7 23-3 49-3 #B+7 26-2

Leptospermum myrainoides 4005 75-6 100-0 56-0 38-2

Hibbertia aeiewdaris 4-4 100-0 100-0 100-0 19-0

Hi, sericent 52:3 97-6 100-0 773 100-0

Platylobium obtuacngulyin BO-4 51+2 42-7) | 20-0 2-4

Lissanthe strigasa. 16+8 14-6 16-0 | 1764 23-8

Leucopogore vtrgatigs 28-0 41-4 32-0 | 16-0 1-4)

Alerotriche serrulate 58-0) 83-3 G4-0 5 54-6 33-3

Asiroloma humifusum. 45°83 ADT 52-0 | BAG 66-7

Lepidosperma semiteras 3-7 96-3 6-0 100-0 38-3

Dillwynie hispidie 46-7, 46-4 36° 12-0 16-fi

Tetratheca pelosa, 40-2 50-0 | = 36-0 14-7 9-5

Pionelea syatieulaia 81-8 100-0 18-7 20-0 21-4

Grevillen lanandulacea 4-6 3-7 — = —

Spyridium prrvifolinm 13+] O+7 16-0 120 2-4

Acacin pycnantha 31-5 B17 9-3 82°0) 2-3

A. myrtafolee 17-8 8-5 4-0 a0 | 2-4

Al. obhiqnn 1-9 13-4 12-0 V3 | =

Pulienace daphnoides Hog i B4-4 10:7 20-0 ' 4-8

LP. largiflorens 27-1 | 5 a-7 i 46-6 374 21-4

Dasdesica carymbasa 14-0 1-2 1°3 1-3 —

Lanirndinn fibrate abuodint | present present | present tare

* The common, important specics, There are 20 to 3) less common species.

{+ Number of quadrats examined in each community,

Tables 1 and 2 list respectively the frequencies and average densities of

the species and Fig. 13 shows the distribution of the groups.

On examination of the species lists, it can be seen that Community I stands

out from the others in that it has relatively high frequencies of Eucalyptits

ebliqua, Platylobium obtusanzulum and. Pultenaea daphnoides with low values

for the larger shrubs {Xanthorrhoea semiplana, Hakea rostrata, Casuarina muel-

leriana, Leptospermrum myrsinoides). (Sec Plate 1 A and B.) Community V is

also notable in that most species are poorly represented, the only high frequen-

cies being E. elaeophora and to a lesser extent, Astraloma humifusum and Acacia

pycnantha (see Plate 3B), The remaining three Communities, Il, [11 and IV (see

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICY 97

Plates 2 Aand B, 3A), are not as well defined and only a few species show any

marked differences, c.g. Pimelea spathulata: U, 100 p.c., 1 18-7 p.c., IV 20 p.c.

Thus it seems that these three are more closely related to each other, and this is

further shown when mapping the distribution of the communities. Communities

T and V form relatively pure areas with few “strays” of the other communities.

But this is not so with Communities J, If and IV, which present such an ad-

mixture that it is difficult to determine the majority (see Fig. 13). For this

TABLA 2

Mean Density (per chain quadrat)

Conmnounity Number

1 ir itt Iv Vv

Species (LO7)+ (82) (74) (75) (42)

Mucalypius obliqua 4-1 12 0-3 0-6 0-5

HY, elarophore 1-8 345 2-4 1-9 3-3

H. fasoteulosa 0-3 3:1 3:5 27 1-3

Nanthorrhoea semiplane 1-4 5-2 5-9 ed 2-5

Hakea rostrata 1-2 2-7 -6 2+8 [-0

Cusuurinia imuelleriands 0-7 0-7 1-0 1-8 0-9

Leptospermum myrsinoides 4-0 10-4 13-8 595 4-3

Hibbertia acicularis l4-4 12-4 12-6 [3-9 2-5

FT, sericea 503 11-3 12-0 7-9 1345

Platylobium obtusangulurs 70 2-5 1-6 0-9 oJ

Lissanthe strigosa 0-7 a-9 1-0 Q-8 2-4

Leunopagar, dirgu bas 0-7 1-3 0-5 O-4 0-8

derotriche serruluta 1-3 1-4 1-7 [+2 0-6

Astroloma lunvifusum 1-0) 18 1:3 1:6 1+]

Lemidosperma semiteres 1655 14-4 12-1 13-8 4-1

Dilluynia hispida 1-6 L-3 0-9 94 0-7

Petrathect pilose 0-1 1-2 0+7 Q2 0-2

Pimelew apathwlain 1-0 2-7 0-5 Ord 0-6

Grevillea Lavandulaced 2 — os — —

Spyridium parvifoltum 7 0-7 1-2 0-4 —

Acacia pycnantha* 0-7 1-0 0-2 Iog l-4

Acer muyrtifalia 1-2 Q-2 ce OL

A. obligua — 0-8 0-3 0-6 —

Pulienaca daphnoides 3:8 1:3 0:3 0:6 0-1

P. largiftorens 2-6 2.4 2-6 3-3 1-9

Daviesian coryinbosa 0-3 — | — 0: —

Lomeanerey fibrette, abuoadant | present present present rara

* There has been recent ‘wattle stripping’, so those figures are probably too low,

+ Number of quadrats examined in sath community,

reason, the boundaries between these three related communities are drawn as

broken lines and could he considered as subgroups of a larger more diverse

grouping. Ilowever, the classification of these communities will be discussed

in detail later.

It can be seen from the frequencies and densities (Tables 1 and 2) that no

species is confined to any one or two communities. The difference is rather

that one species is relatively abundant or relatively scarce from one community

to the other. The communities are arranged approximately in the order in

which they occur on the map from north to south or following the frequencies

of Eucalyptus obliqua.

98 HELENE A, MARTIN

Community I Frequency of E. obliqua = 69-1 p.c.

Community IL Frequency of E. obliqua = 24-4 p.c.

Community Ill Frequency of E£. obliqua=16-0 p.c.

Community TV Frequency of Ef. obliqua = 14-7 p.c.

Community V Frequency of Li. obliqua= 7:1 p.c.

Fig. 14 shows the density of cach species plotted against the communities in

this order and it can be seen that the continuum (Curtis and McIntosh, 1951,

and Whittaker, 1951) exists through the communities.

Nic = 30> per eh

ee] IH pe an,

XANTHORRHOEA SEMIPLANA

Wig. 5, Xanthorrhoca semiplana. This species is rarely

found in yalleys and reaches its maximum density on

the ridge tops.

CLASSIFICATION

In an attempt to classify thesc five communities, the concepts set out by

Beadle aud Costin (1952) have been followed. These authors stress that vege-

tation should be classified on its inherent characteristics, not on aspects of environ-

ment. The fundamental unit, an association, is defined by these authors as a

climax community with a qualitatively uniform upper stratum, floristically and

structurally. Related associations are grouped into an alliance which takes its

name from the most common species. Alliances are further grouped into forma-

tions. ‘The problem of ccotonal regions, as encountered by Specht and Perry

(1948) is overcome by elevating these communities to unit status.

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 99

However, Eucalyptus species are extremely sensitive to small environmental

changes. This means that a small, local change in. a habitat factor could cause

a change in one or more cucalypt, with little change in any other species. By

BeadJe and Costin’s definition, this small local change becomes a different asso-

ciation. Consequently one obtains innumerable small associations oyer a

relatively small area, rather like Ostvald (1923) who described 164 associations

over 40 square miles (cited by Crocker and Wood, 1947). On the other hand,

Tansley and Chipp (1926) define an association as “the largest unit which

consists of a definite assemblage of species (usually with definite dominants )

EJ | — GF perth

T3173. pel th

713 pals

HAKEA = ROSTRATA

Fig. 6 Hakea rostrata. Distribution roughly cvincides

with that of Xenihorrhoea semipluna, but maximum

densities are not necessarily the same. Hakea rostrata

is present in some valleys.

and a definite habitat”. Wein Adeluide feel that an association should be reason-

ably broad to be of any value, otherwise “association” might just as well be

synonymous with “community”.

Crocker and Wood (1947) define an association as “the constant association

(ic. growing together) of dominant species recurring in similar habitats”, The

term “dominant species” inelades both tree and shrub or herb layer species which

give the community its characteristic look, The association is made up of smaller

units, the type and society. The type is a local change in dominants of the

upper stratum, with little or no change im other dominants. A society is a local

change in lower stratum dominants. It is clear from these definitions that the

100 HELENE A. MARTIN

type is more the fundamental unit and an association is a collection of related

types (Crocker and Wood, 1947, p. 126). Although the definitions of the equiva-

lent terms of Beadle and Costin (1952) on one hand and Crocker and Wood

(1947) on the other, are not the same, the corresponding units approximate fairly

well in fact.

If this last scheme is applied to the objective communities previously deter-

minced by Goodall’s method (1953), the following classification in Table 3 is

obtained,

THE ENVIRONMENT

1. Curatn

The whole of the southern part of South Australia experiences a Mediter-

ranean type climate with summer drought and winter rainfall. January and

February are usually the driest, hottest months with June to August the wettest,

coldest period. The moisture-laden winds come from the south-west and altitude

induces condensation as the air masses rise over the Mt. Lofty Ranges.

TABLE 8

Classification of the Five Objective Communities

Edsphic

Community Society Type | Association | Formation Complex

I Pultenaea BH. oblique

daplnoides-

Platylabiant

obtusengulum

EE. obliqua-

EB. elanaphora

II Pimelea spaihulata-

Pultenaea

largiflorens

HI. elaeaphora- BS, eleeophora Dry

TIt Xunthorrhoes EB, fasciculosa Selerophyll

gemiplana- Forest “Stringybark”

Haken. rostrata-

Leptospermium

myratnowler

IV Lepidosperma

semitares

Vv Hibbertia. sericre- LH. elacaphoera

Arcana nycnanthe

The pertinent aspects of the climate are summarised in Fig. 16, which shows

the mean monthly rainfall, sunlight, evaporation, temperature and frost for a

nearby meteorological station, Mt. Crawford.

Rainfall and insolation, which directly affects evapotranspiration, were

critically examined over the experimental area. ‘

(1) Rainfall, Coote and Cornish (1958) correlated mean monthly rainfall

with position and altitude of observing stations in part of South Australia. By

using the regression coefficients obtained in this analysis, the mean monthly

rainfall can be calculated for any known position and altitude within the Ade-

laide Hills (see Appendix). In this way the mean annual isohyets were con-

structed for this area (see Fig, 15), The accuracy of these coefficients is claimed

to be high and altitude is the chief factor influencing the results.

SGLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 04

The mean monthly rainfall data of four nearby recording stations — namely

Tea Tree Gully, Millbrook, Kersbrook, and Mt, Crawford — were compared with

the estimates calculated from the regression equations of Coote and Cornish

(Martin, 1960). There are discrepancies. which could be due to local factors,

such as. the effect of topography on wind turbulence and consequently rainfall

(Rayson, 1957). The estimated isohyets (Fig, 15) unfortunately ignore these

local factors.

A. statistical analysis of the mean annual rainfall, estimated to fall at 50

sites throughout the area, showed that the rainfall varied significantly from one

\seebs

“1 per chy

[| 1] ner che

12-23 Per oti

ter chr

4 —e |

.EPTOSPERMUM MYRSINGMDES

Fig. 7. Leptaspermum myrsinaides. This spevies is

widespread in distribution with Jarge areas of higher

densities.

community to. another (P Jess than 0-1 p.e.), Communities I and IV received

the highest rainfall (32-26 and 33-61 inches per annum respectively), communi-

ties IL and 111 over an inch less (31-1) and 31-03 inches per aunum respectively),

while community V received the lowest rainfall of 29-89 inches per annum

(see Table 4).

(2) Insolation. With a hilly topography, aspect differences are often im-

portant. In order to determine the insolation received by different slopes the

method used by Rayson (1957) was followed. A scale model of the area was

examined under a solarscope (Phillips, 1949), which simulates the movement

of the sun across the sky. From the shadows the hours of sunlight per day were

HELENE A, MARTIN

102

“SUATARTUGYY UT S1OZOF JUApUadopuUl you pu Ajfowdea aBvI0}s TUNTUTXeUT pure [TUITE ‘UoOTpezeBIA Jo JIMsat aysoduioo ayy Iv odvUIvIpP pur LOYRIIdsuRyOdeATT 4

OAL} JOGO 8q4 JO Yea WOIy Quoroyp ‘duos pany} Y 44

‘INOJ 1YJO oY} SB [TOA Se AMING Taaq Pell 41 JI TAA] UsAS Taq BAVY PTNOM A AQUNMIWOD 444

%Oe ; %L-O % 1-0 Ce {

eT O> —O0-4 %1-0> %LO> |-O-T —O-T —O-L %T-a> APTIQUqol

(ZF0-0—}

éL Fe-F T6-8 ¥6-06 tenes 660°0 BOL O-g 6°9 68-6644 nLoydoanga -T A

280-0—

ér BFS £L'6 88° eZ ABMO'T F20-0 9°01 GG ¥S | y9-8e | péoydoonpa ‘sr AI

(G€G-0—) , weoinaiasns

baa 08-9 18-9 91+ Fz iene ee ) 9F0-0 2-6 OF Bg i 60-1¢ “pi.oydoanya Tl

G60-0—

ras Lb-G 49-8 PPS JOMO'T €60-0 6:6 1G 8F | TT TS IT

(160-0—) waoydoanga * 5

IL 06-& 66-6 LE: GE | aay OUT 6F0-0 8-6 LG APF 92° 8E pniyge “q -DnDIQO * I

Cat) (ued |

(syquour) (tt) (a) WOTeENndsaery (yusTayyooo gvo0 sod TejOL, | WOON-s0g | uoON-aLT | (ur) ToTeDoss y ad &Z, Aqrunura10;

TlOs¥vag asvIo is aseurBid , -od vag WLOIS8d1A0,1) “MCT *B) Tleyarey

BUIMOI § | WMNOLUIXEyY jenucy | Woyerdsuen AQ 19,7 —_'— =

-Od RATT JO O}eY (Aep/smoy) pyAaTTUNng WOT} BIBIEsrLyD

FATAL

S1O}OVT [BJUSUUOITAU Jo Aremaung

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 103

estimated, From Fig, 17 it can be seen that the higher clevations reccive

more insolation than the slopes and valleys, but there is no marked aspect dif-

ferences between the north-east slopes and south-west facing slopes. However,

Figs. 18 and 19 show that the north-east slopes receive the morning sun and the

south-west slopes the afternoon sun, In the morning, when dew is present,

sunlight will cause its evaporation, while in the afternoon it heats the vegetation

and soil directly. In addition, afternoon temperatures are usually higher due to

the lag between insolation and temperature, Therefore, the south-west slope

is not more protected but could be subject to higher temperatures and more

bd pet the

PULTENAEA DAPHNOIDES

Fig, 8. Pultenaca daphnoides, Restricted in urea, the

distribution coincides well with that of EF, cbligua.

drying conditions. Germination usually oceurs in autumn, as soon as the rats

come, and the amount of insolation at these times vould have an important

effect on the different species.

A. statistical analysis shows no significant difference between the five

communities for either pre-noon, post-nven or total sunlight. This is un-

doubtedly so because the variation is so great, as seen in Fig. 20. However,

Fig, 20 also shows an aggregation of some communities, If communities I and

II are grouped aud tested against III, [V and V grouped, then there is a

significant difference for pre-noon sunlight. Im a similar fashion, community

IU is significantly different from the others, grouped together for post-noon,

For the total, communitics TV and V grouped against the others are signi-

104 HELENE A, MARTIN

ficantly different. Table 4 summarises this. The figures in italics form a group

significantly different from those in clarendon and roman at the levels of signi-

ficance shown.

The foregoing estimations of insolation assume continuous sunlight with

no clouds at all. Clouding reduces light intensity but this probably would not

be sufficient to reduce photosynthesis in summer, while in winter it could be

CASUARINA MUELLERIANA

Fig. 9. Casudrina muelleriana, This species is not

widely distributed and is present mainly on the north-

ern aspects. The usual height is 4 feet in stands not

fired for 12 years, but in munch older stunds, it reaches

a height of 12 feet, as found in the most N.E. comer

(see Plate 3A),

limiting. Ilowever, a cloud cover would reduce evaporation and this could

be quite important in summer al times of high water stress.

The conclusion that the ridge is so orientated that aspect only slightly affects

total insolation is supported by some limited soil temperature data. The

temperature was recorded by thermistors (Aitchison, 1952a, 1952b, 1953) placed

at depths of 6, 18 and 36 inches in the soil at four sites located (a) in the

valley, (b) half way up the north-east facing slope, (c) on the ridge top, and

(d) half way down the south-west facing slope. Temperatures were measured

at approximately monthly intervals (Fig. 21).

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT L035

Soil temperature readings one inch below the surface were taken directly

with a thermometer. These readmgs fluctuated throughout the day closely

approximating air temperature.

Statistical analysis shawed no significant difference between plots for the

36 or the 15 inch depths, At the 6 inch depth, the ridge top, site (c), con-

sistently showed significantly higher temperatures than the other three sites

HI@BERTIA AC; CULARS

Fig. 10, Hthhertia acicularis, This species is widely

distributed with Jarge areas of high densities. It is

absent only from the north-west end of the ridge.

(P less than 0-1 pe.) indicating that only the more exposed ridge tops (where

communities IV and V ure found) receive greater insolation.

2, Grorocy

The area under study is situated on an inlier of the Archean complex. highly

metamorphosed, sedimentary rocks, folded and contorted with igneous intru-

sions (Hossfeld, 1935; Spry, 1951). Miles (1950), investigating the site of a

new dam about § miles north of the area, found this inlier to consist of phyllites,

phyllite-schists and felspathic schists, interbedded with quartzitic or sandy

facies, Lenses of quartz feldspar had alsa penetrated the rocks. The exposed

rocks may be case hardened, but sre otherwise soft and crumbly due to weather-

ing. The feldspar content decomposes to kaolin (Miles, 1950) under conditions

consistent with laterilisation (Stephens, personal communication ).

1n6 HELENE A, MARTIN

38, Sors

(1) Morphology of soils, The soils which have formed upon these ancient

phyllites and schists show well differenuiated profiles. The A horizon, a loam,

changes abruptly to the B horizon, a stiff clay, which grades to a soft friable

deoomnpoued rock. Hard rock is usually encountered at a depth of three to

six feet.

The surtuce two or three inches, the Al horizon, is dark grey or grey-

brown in colour due to humus and organic matter. The amount varies from

site to site, but most soils contain relatively little organic matter. The A2

horizon 12 to 15 inches in depth, is typically a clayey loam though some are

sandy or silty textured. Most soils possess a rather fine crumbly structure and

some, particularly the silty textured loams, are very fine and powdery when

dry, All except the sandy A horizons are rather sticky and heavy when wet.

TABLE 3

Means and Regression Coefficients used in Estimation of Rainfall

=,—6-3360 F,—9-478 «= 7-558

Month ¥ b, be by

Jan. 0-97 0-03543 0-02420 4102808

Feb. O47 0- 03604 O- 0211 0: 03091

Mur, 1-08 0.04498 0-01342 =0- 035616

Apr. 1-91 0+ LO9Y 0 03587 0: 143]

May 3-78 (+ L704 (06407 — (2448

Jone 3°37 | 0-227] 0: O8011 02930

duly 3-18 | 03190 60-1165 —0-2358

Awan 3-13 +2023 0-0n716 —0- 1966

Hopt. 2-67 | 0-157 i 0-06813 =O: 1372

Oct. 310 0-1110 003526 — 0 1043

Nov. 1-34 | 0 -08330) | 0- 0120 - 0-06128

Den. -11 (04144 001560 —0-02198

A consistent feature of the A horizon is the accumulation of pebbles and

gravel both on the surface and distributed throughout the horizon, Generally,

the stones are the most resistant fragments of the parent rock, often showing

iron stainings. The size of the fragments ranges from gravel to pieces a foot

in diameter, sometimes giving the impression that hed-rock is close to the

surface. However, after prising away several large rock slabs the normal B

horizon extends down for two or three feet more. Lateritic gravel can be

found in places, but it is mot abundant over the arex selected for intensive

study. The B horizon, almost without exception, contains few rock fragments.

As much as 30 to 40 per cent. rock by weight is common in the A horizon,

while the B horizon rarely conlains more than 5 to LO per cent.

The B horizon is a stiff clay with very little structure which dries to form

hard, solid clods and becomes very sticky when wet, The colours are mainly

brown, reddish brown and brick red, occasionally yellow brown. Red mottlings

are common, particularly in the upper half, but often the whole horizon presents

a complex mottled pattern in red, yellow and brown. The colour gradually

changes with depth, becoming more yellow, and this is. usually associated with

an increase in sand and coarse material due to more of the soft, friable decom-

posed parent rock. Just above hard bed-rock, many profiles show an accumu-

Jation of kaolin, three or four inches in depth.

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 107

Where the slope is steeper (roughly 20 to 40 degrees), on either side of

the hill, the profile with A and B horizons, as described, may not always be

developed. Instead, the soil is shallow, 12 or I8 inches deep and skeletal,

showing no differentiation. This soil, however, is similar to the A horizou of the

deeper, differentiated profiles. Outerops of rock are common in such parts

sometimes in the form of small cliffs.

Another type of soil ocenrs along the alluvial creek flats which are only

narrow strips in this instance. The A horizon can be much deeper and more

irrecular, probably due to periodic flooding and silt deposition. These soils

have not been further studied since they are atypical and small in area. The

vegetation associated with the alluvial soils is also qnite different — fewer

HIBSERTIA =BeERILEA

Fig. 11. Hihbertia sericea. Distribution is widespread.

The regions of higher densities are usually on the ridges.

sclerophyll species and more grasses, often with Eucalyptus camaldulensis as

the dominant,

Ut is clear from the foregoing descriptions that these soils show many of

the features associated with laterilisatiou. The lateritic gravel, the abundant

iron stainings, the red mottlings of the B horizon and the accumulations of

kaolin in the deeper layers, together with low fertility and acid reaction, are all

consistent with laterite formation. The majority of the soils undoubtedly belong

to the great soil group, lateritic podsolic soils (Stephens, 1953), formed in past

ages (Pliocene?) when the climate was more humid, but variously truncated in

more recent times,

108 HELENE A, MARTIN

The arca being studied came within a soil survey made by Jackson (1957).

Under his classification these soils fall within the Mount Gawler Soil Associa-

tion which is confined to the rugged, hilly country with frequent rock outcrops,

(2) Fertility of soils. It is well known that lateritic podsolic soils are not

fertile, and sclerophyllous vegetation is generally regarded as indicative of a

soil with a low muitrient content. Working with pastures on this type of soil,

Trumble and Donald (1938) found that yield was proportional to phosphorus

added, and recommended a dressing of 2 cwt. of superphosphate per acre

LEPIDOSPCRMA SEMITERES

Hig. 12. Lepidusperma semiteres. This species covers

most of the area, but is absent from the nocthery ends

of the ridges, The densities are higher to the south,

yearly. However, some pastures did not flourish on this treatment and Ander-

gon (1946) found that the addition of 1 to 2 oz. per acre of molybdenum trioxide

was nevessary, particularly for a good growth of legumes. Also, analytical

data on the Mount Gawler Soil Association showed 0-006 to 0-023 per cent.

total phosphorus and 0-03 to 0-20 per cent. total nitrogen (Jackson, 1957),

Thus it was decided to investigate soil fertility to see if variations in this factor

influenced the distribution of sclerophyllous species.

For the estimation of fertility, there are several approaches, One is chemi-

cal analysis, but this is very laborious, particularly if a number of soils are

to be estimated, and the results can give a false picture. The amount of a

nutrient available to the plant may vary from that estimated chemically and

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 109

species differ in their ability to utilize the different forms of an element (Russell,

1950, and Moore, 1959). A second method makes use of some plant as an

indicator. With this approach, the productivity results from the integration of

many factors of the soil, chemical and physical. There are limitations with

+0 40

Qnpane ;

akee

Soopee

+40 ME

20 et70ec0°0 pooy

Natt

gates,

“Type & Society

Erabliqua~ E.elaeophora,

E.elaeophora—E-fasciculosa

Pimelea—Tefratheca

Evslaeophora—E.fasciculosa

Hakea —Xanthorrhoen

E, Alaeophota—Efasciculosa

Lepidosperma

F.@laeophara

Hbbertia sericea,

—— THE COMMUNITIES. ——

Fig. 13. The distribution of the objective communities.

this method, too, and the results are influenced by the indicator species chosen

and conditions during the experiment. However, with the same species and

environment for all samples, the results from one soil can be compared with

those of another. Moore (1959) has used this method to determine the nutrient

status of soils from several natural communitics in New South Wales. This

biological method was chosen, using oats as the indicator species.

L1O HELENE A, MARTIN

Large samples of soil were collected from 120 random sites, from the

surface down to 9 inches, The soil was air-dried, sieved and 1,600 g. put into

6-inch Hower pots, with three replicates for cach soil. Kach pot was seeded

with oats, Mulga variety, which were allowed to grow for 9 wecks, the soil

moisture content being kept at approximately 60 per cent. saturation through-

out the trial. The tops of the oats were then harvested, and the results expressed

as dry weight per plant.

™

”“

Density (No per chain quadrate)

t oF iit z

The Communities

Fig. 14. The Continuum. The density is plotted against the communities, arranged in

order from south to north. Key to species: A, Hibbertia sericea, B, Leptospermum myrsi-

noides; C, Lepidosperma semiteres; D, Eucalyptus elaeophora; E, Hibbertia acieularis; ¥,

Eucalyptus fusciculosa; G, Eucalyptus obliqua; A, Xanthorrhuea semiplana; J, Pultenaea

largiflorens; J, Acacia pycnantha; K, Hukew rostrata; L, Casuarina muelleriana; M, Pultcnaca

daphnoides; and N; Platylobitun obtusangulume.

The results were grouped into the respective communities and an analysis

of variance showed that oat plants grown on soil from community V were

significantly larger than those grown on soil from the rest of the area (Table 4).

Increased growth, however, need not be due to fertility alone. It was noted

that the texture of the A horizon was often sandy or silty loam in soils where

greater growth occurred. When a 2 X 2 test was applied on these soils ayainst

clayey loam soils and the higher growth class and the lower growth classes, a

very significant correlation of y° = 45-04 was obtained. Thus, increased growth

could have been due to a better texture which may have allowed greater root

development, water penetration, or some other factor beside soil fertility.

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 111

4, Water RELATIONSHIPS

In this climate, with long summer droughts, water, or rather the lack of it,

is perhaps the must important single environmental factor. From the end of

October onwards, rain falls only in light sporadic showers and during this time

plants depend largely on what water there may be stored in the soil. The

Creeks

200° - Contours

—32— Isohyéts

Scale

tochn.

es;

Fig. 15. Map showing contours and estimated annual rainfall isohyets. Tt can be seen

that altitude is the main factor influencing rainfall, estimated by these means.

amount of reserve soil moisture depends chiefly on the preceeding winter rain-

fall. In a good season, the whole profile reaches field capacity and water drains

away into the substratum. However, in a poor season with rainfall well below

average, the wetting front may not penetrate right down the full depth of

profile. This means that the soil five or six feet deep may not receive any water

112 HELENE. A. MARTIN

for two or more years, depending on the seasons. An experiment was designed

to investigate the soil moisture, the rate at which it was depleted, and if possible,

differences from one community to another.

The soil moisture was measured over the central-ridge and the actual

evapotranspiration evaluated for each of the five communities (Martin, 1961).

It was found that community I possessed significantly higher cvyapotranspiration

than all the others, viz.

Community I: Log (2-4—I,,) = 0-264—0:051 (W— 2-63),

Communities I+ 0£+1V+V: Log (2-4—h,) =0-261— 0-036 (W— 3-29).

Although the index of evapotranspiration (1) has been plotted against avail-

(lect daylight heurat

274 a a0

. ry

$e Ss

as np =

3 é 58 ze

ive == qi =

e wel YS | ged =

= 432 : 5

50 40 ea, a

ea] 5 2

Sp.

Evap. sfeniel

20 if a t)

IF M A M J Sd ws yo J

Manta Month

Fig. 16. Rainfall, Mean Temperature, Frequency of Frasts.? Evaporatian (Ew — 21 & «d.)

and Percentage Sunlight. All the data was obtained From Mount Crawford, except sunlight,

which applies to the Waite Agricultural Research Institute. * The number of frosts are the

figures for 1957.

able water (W), the same values of evaporation from a free water surface were

used for all five communities; Hence the actual cyapotranspiration shows the

same relative difference as that for the index.

From soil moisture, rainfall and evapotranspiration, the water regime was

followed, month by month (Martin, 1961), The result was that every plot in

cominunity T, showing the higher evapotranspiration, exhausted the soil mois-

ture completely and had to survive onc month of drought. This was not so for

communities IT, f11, 1V or V, which by virtue of their lower evapotranspiration,

dissipated the supply more slowly and thus did nat create a dreught for them-

selyes. The data are summarised in Table 4.

A conspicuous feature of the data was the occurrence of community IT on

soils with less available water, i.e. a lower maximum storage capacity. It seems

fogical to conclude that if the supply of water is less, then a longer drought

will ensue. However, this is not so since the actual evapotranspiration is

restricted uceording to the water supply. Thus a site with a maximum storage

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 113

capacity of 2 inches loses much less water by evapotranspiration than one with

a 6-6 inch capacity, even though the rates are the same (Martin, 1961). The

length of the drought is the result of the rate of evapotranspiration and not

the maximum storage capacity.

~=< Crag ks.

[_ TP Hewes

| 0 | | hours

9 — 10 hous

7 ~ & hous

SUNLIGHT — YEARLY MEAN

Fig, 17. Yearly Mean Sunlight or Insolation. There is practically no difference

in uspect from one side of the ridge to the other. The top of the ridge receives

roore insolation.

All the foregoing remarks apply to the soil above bedrock. Particularly at

the sites with shallow soil, 1 to 2 feet decp, it is obvious that tree roots are not

confined to the soil alone. Observations at Mount Crawford Forest (Woods,

1958) show that tree roots penetrate the country rock, a soft schist or gneiss

114 HELENE A. MARTIN

with bedding planes which dip at 30 to 80 degrees. Whether the water rcla-

tionships of roots in rock fissures is comparable to roots in soil is a matter for

conjecture, as precise data would be very difficult to obtain. In any case, an

additional unknown amount of water could be available in the country rock.

The figures given in Table 4 apply to an averaye year and do not indicate the

effect of critical drought periods, In years with below average rainfall, the soil

may not reach maximum storage capacity so that during the following summer

moisture reserves become depleted much earlier. At Mount Crawford, Woods

(1958) found that if another such year followed, then drought deaths were high

and many trees were permanently damaged so that they failed to respond when

Creear

2 — B hows per vay

te — bcs per elt

= A hours per day

ger day

PRE-NOON SUNLIGHT — YEARLY TMP AN

Fig. 18. Yearly Meun Pre-noon Sunlight. ‘The north-

eastern side of the ridge receives the morning sunlight

when temperatures are lower.

good rains came. In addition, deaths due to drought were more frequent on the

exposed ridges with shallower soils than on more protected slopes and deeper

soils. Of course these observations were for the introduced Pinus radiata, but

the native vegetation would be subject to similar stresses, Thus the critical

drought years could be more important than the many average years.

The effect of drought would always be greater in community I because

the higher evapotranspiration depletes the moisture reserves more rapidly. Con-

sequently these plants of community T are subject to greater stresses and must

of needs be more drought resistant than the other communities which conserve

SCLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 115.

the available moisture by a lower evapotranspiration as well as growing on

deeper soils with a greater storage capacity, though this does not affect the

length of drought directly.

DISCUSSION

The original aim of this study was to find some explanation of the distribu-

tion of sclerophyllous species observed in the field. Each major species was

recorded by means of isoline maps. The communities were objectively deter-

mined and classified. Various environmental factors were recorded within the

communities and compared from one to another community.

> Creeks

[| 5-6 hours per day

ne 4-5 hous per doy

3-4 hows per dey

POST-NOON SUNLIGHT — YEARLY MEAN

Fig. 19. Yearly Mean Post-noon Sunlight. The south-

western slape receives the afternaan sunlight when

temperatures are higher.

In the objective method used to determine the communitics, the results

depend to some extent on the standards chosen. With the values originally

used by Goodall (1953) of P=1-0 p.c., seventeen communities were obtained

—a completely unworkable result. By udjusting the level of significance to

P=0-1 p.c,, only five communitics were obtained and these could be classified

satisfactorily. But this was based purely on the presence or absence of a

species, Had some allowance been made for the abundance of a species, e.g.

above or helow the mean, the results could have been different again. How-

116 NELENE A. MARTIN

ever, it is unlikely that the pattern of the communitics would have been radic-

ally altered since these objective methods delimit communities which are real

and recognisable in the field, In a subjective estimation, community [ with its

Eucalyptus obliqua aud abundance of small shrubs is easily recognised. Com-

munity V is distinguished by its paucity of many species. Community IL with

the higher densities of large shrubs is also easy to recognise, but this is not so

with IL and 1V, which do not differ greatly from III. In the field it is possible to

subjectively group these three together into one large community,

T The community

@ The mean

~-4The Standard deviation

‘

Hours of Sunlight

Mean post-noon

38 40 42 446 46 48 SD S52 Oh 36 36

Mean pre-noon Hours of Sunlight

Fig. 20. Yearly Mean Insolation Received by the Com-

munities, Communities 1, II and Ill receive less than

TV and VV. ‘Vhere is a wide variation.

The five communities have heen classified into three types:

(1) E. obliqua-L). elaeophora type with community 1;

(2) E, elaeophora-E. fasciculosa type with communities I, I and IV,

each of which is a society;

(3) E, elacophora type with community: V.

The three types were further classified into two associations:

(1) E. obliqua association containing the E, obliqna-K. elacophora type; and

(2) RF. elaeophora association with the remaining two types, viz. the E,

elaeophora-E. fasciculosa type and the E. elaecophora type.

Can these communitics be explained on the basis of the environmental

factors studied? Table 4 summarises the statistical differences which have been

detected, The figures in italics form a class significantly different from those

in clarendon and roman type.

Thus community I receives a higher rainfall and less sumlight, particularly

pre-noon. Although no figures are available, the temperature and evaporation

would be less since insolation is less, especially for the pre-noon period, Hence

the cnvironment for this community is more mesic. But, the vegetation possesses

a higher rate of transpiration and depletes the water supply earlier so that it

must survive one month of drought. ‘This is rather paradoxical in that a more

mesic vegetation scems to he inherently or physiologically more drought resis-

tant as well. The effect of the higher rate of evapotranspiration is even more

SGLEROPHYLL COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 117

significant with regards to scedling establishment. The conditions of drought

created by the members of community T, already in possession of the area, may

well prove too rigorous for large numbers of would-be invaders (Martin, 1961),

The maximum storage capacity is less, though this has no direct effect on the

drought period. In addition, the soil fertility is low.

Communities ITI, UI and 1V are not easily separated since they possess

the same lower rate of evapatranspiration, the same maximum storage capacity

and the same low soil fertility. With the lower evapotranspiration, the stared

moisture is not completely exhausted and hence there is no drought period at all

in an average year, However, communitics If and IL receive less rainfall but less

insolation as well. Community III with the greatest density of Jarge shrubs

is particularly notable in that the post-noon insolation, when temperatures and

50 —-—Air temperature

s--->- Tin, depth, mean of all plots

Bin: depth, mean of plots ABO

—— Gin.depth plot c i

see eeelBin depth, mean of all plots

no oe3 Bin, dépth, mean of all plots

°C)

‘

Soil Temperature

Month

Fig. 21. Yearly Soil Temperature Regime, The curves

arc the means of all plots except for the 6-inch level

where plot © is sigmficantly higher than the others.

exaporation are higher, is markedly less. Community IV, on the other hand,

receives a greater rainfall and w greater amount of insolation which would

reduce its cflectiveness by increasing temperature and evaporation. It is

interesting to note that the floristics of conmmnity TV are in many ways inter-

mediate between ILI and V. Tn the respect of insolation and presumably tem-

perature and evaporation, community LV is similar to V. The fact that these

three communities, 1, Il and LV, ave difficult to separate on environmental

facturs is not surprising since they ate classified as societies within the same type.

Community V is quite distinctive from the others. The rainfall is in a class

ou its own, lower than any of the others and soil fertility is higher. In view

of the higher fertility, it is not surprising that the floristics of this community

show certain affinities with the savannah woodland — sclerophyll forest tran-

silion communities. The typical sclerophyll species are much reduced in mum-

ber and Acacia pycnuntha, a savannah woodland species, is more common. The

insolation, and heuce temperature and evaporation, is also higher. While the

measnred rate of evapotranspiration is the same as that for IJ, IIT and IV,

La HELENE A, MARTIN

evidence (Specht, 1957) indicates that Lad this community been burnt as well

as the «thers, the cate would be even lower (Martin, 1961). Because of the

lawer evapotranspiration, there is no drought period and the maximum storage

capacity is net different from I, TT and IV.

The communities were originally arranged along a continuum based ou

the floristies, A continuum cam be seen in many of these environmental factors

which, in.a broad sense, parallels the Anristic continuum, The raintall is higher

to the south, decreasing to the north. It is the reverse for insolatiou, lower

to the south and higher to the north.

All these calculations have been made for the central ridge only. Would

they upply to the whole area originally surveyed? They would apply to the

communities which were well represented on the central ridge, viz. 1, I] and V.

However, communities Tt and particularly TV, may show some differences if

the broad north-east ridge is included. Figs. 13 and 15 indiqute that the mean

rainfall for community IV would be reduced considerably while the insolation

would be ut Jeast as great. For community ILl, though the total insolation may

not he chanved by much, the pre-noon and postnoon ratio would be different

(Fig, 20). The vate of eviarpotrauspiration would be the same since this is

largely: determined by the vegetation.

These results indieate that there are no marked environmental differences

governing the communities, but rather a trend or difference in degree. Still,

the differences between the communities themselves are not great cither,

Statistical differences do not automatically indicate the cause of observed

phenomena and other factors which do not lend themselves to measurement

and analysis. could huve quite an important bearing on the question. “There is

evidence that at one time the tree canopy was much better developed — hetore

white men started their activities in the district. With the removal of trees,

increysed light would stimulate the understory and increase the density af

sclerophyllous species. Whether there has been differential cutting out of the

trees «nd whether the sclerophyllous species. respond differentially is a matter

for conjecture. Another factor is the chance dispersal and establishment of a

species which then excludes or prevents other species from growing there even

though the environmental conditions are fayourable. ‘Chis could easily be the

sase with the dense Xanthorrhoea semiplana stands, and possibly with the sward

of Lepidosperma scmiteres and Lomandra fibrata.

This objective study reveals many interesting facts about the vegeta-

tion, but only partly answers the question as to the cause of the observed dis-

tributions, The answer may lie in some important undiscovered factor but the

communities are more likely to be the result of many integrated [acets of the

environment. When studied one ata time. the conplex relationships ot diverse

factors are hard to detect.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Lam indebted to the late Professor |, G, Wood and Dr, R. L, Speelit for then

wnstinted guidance throughout. To many uthers who have helped iu many

ways, L owe my thanks,

REFERENCES

Apastson, B.S. and Ospory, ‘I. G. 6. 1924. The Eeology of the Faralyptns Porests of

the Maint Lofty Bunges (Adelaide District), South Australia Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.

Aust., 48, pp, 87-144. .

Arcumon, G. D., 1952a. Some Aspocts of the Desipn and Stiulaclization 6£ Tastriunents

far the Measuring of Sot! Temperature and Soil Moisture. ©.$.LK.0, Aust., Div, Soils

Teeh. Mem... No. 17/52.

SCLEROPHYLE, COMMUNITIES IN INGLEWOOD DISTRICT 1p

AreHison, G, D., 1952b, ‘The Use of Plastic Materials for the Protection of Inslrumunts

Installed in the Soil. C.S.1.R.O. Aust.. Div. Soils Tech. Mem., No, 18/52.

A:cuson, G, D,, 1953. Simplified Measurements of Soil Temperature and af Soil Moisture,

Aust, J. Appl. Sci, 4, pp, 418-426,

ANDERSON, A. J., 1946. Molybdenum in Relation to Pastire Tnprovement in Sauth Ars-

tralia, J. Conn. Sei. Industr. Res. Aust., 19, pp, 1-15.

Brapue, N. C. W., and Costrs, A. B., 1942. Eeological Classification and Noamnclature,

Proe. Linn. Suc. NSW, 77. pp. G1-42..

Buack, J, M., (943-57. “Flara of South Australia.” Valimes 1-4, ad Edittan, ((Govern-

iment Printer, Adelaide, )

Beara-Beanqurr, J, 1951. Pilanzensoziologische Einheiten ind ihre Klassifizieryng. Vege-

tutio, a pp. is6- 133,

Goo, G, G. and Consusn, B.A. 1958. The Correlation of Monthly Rainfall with Position

and Gee ptf Obseevint Siations in South Australia, C.S..A.0, Aust), Div, Math,

Stat., ‘Teeh, No. 4.

Cupexen, K, L., an Woon, J J. G., 1947, Some Historical Influences on the Development of

the South Australian eeliakes Communities and their Bearing on Concepts und

Classificution in Eeulovy. Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust, T1, pp. 91-L36,

Cunt, J. T., and Melyrosyw, BR. P., 1951. An Upland Forest Guntinnum in the Prairie

Porest Burtler Region of Wisconsin, Ecology, 32, pp. 476-496,

Goanarr, D, W., 1952. Quantitative Aspects of Plint Distribution. Bio), Rey.. 27, pp.

do4- 245,

Gacvatr, D. W., 1053. Objective Methads for the Classifeation ot pennies l. The

Use of Positive Interspecific Correlation, Aust. J, Bot, 1, pp, 39-63

Hossrety, P.S,, 1935. The Geology of Purt of the North Mount Lofty Ranges: Trans. Koy,

Soc, S, ‘Aust., 59, pp. 16-67.

Jackson, £. A. 1957. A Survey of the Soils and their Utilisation in Portion of the Mt¢ Juaty

Ranges. Sonth Australia, C.S.1-B.O. Aust., Div. Soils, Soils and Land Use Series, No. 2

Mawr, Herene A. 1980, Sclerophyll Communities at the Inglewood District, tekrat

Laity Tanges: ‘Their Distribution: in Relation to Micro-lnvironment. University ot

Adelaide, M.Sc, Thesis.

Marais, Henenp A. L9GL. Are Mest: Gommuimities Less Drought Reststant? .A Stady jn

Moisture Kelationships of Dry Sclerophyll Forest at Inglewood, South Australia, — (In

press.

Mines, K. i, 1950. Geolugy af the Soull Para Dion Peojoct, S$. Aust, Geol. Survey. Bull,

No. 24.

Mone, C. W. E,, 195%, The Nutrient Status of the Sofls af Some Natrral Mant Gommuni-

ties on the Southern Tablelands of New South Wales. Ecology, 40, Ps 337-340,

PHiriars, BR. OL, 1949 The Solerscape Gonna, (Aust) Expt, Bld. Stat. Tech, Mem. Ne.

166.

Proceon, T, M. and Agnpy, M,, 1942. A New Quantitative Method of Analysis of Plunt

Cornmmunities. Anst. 7. “Bulk. 5, pp. 1p-21.

Raysen, Patarera, 1987, Dark Jaland Meath (Ninety-Mile Plain, South Australia). i The

Jollet, uf Mierotupograpliy on Climate, Soils, and Vewetution. Aust. J. Bob, 5, pp.

46-102

Resyxyn., 1, J., 1950. Soil Conditions and Plant Growth (Bightl: Edition), Tongraans.

Sproat, RB. L., 1957. Dark Island Heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, Seth Australia), Vo ‘The

Water Relationships in Heath Vayetation ane Pastures an the Makin Sand, Aust. J, Bat.,

5, pp. 151-172.

Seecav, Ro L., and Perny, Ro A. 1948, The Phint Ecology of Part ol the Moant Lafty

Runges, (1). ‘Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 72, pn. 91-132,

Seny, AJ TL, LOS). ‘he Archean Comples at Noughton, South Anstralia. Trans. Roy, See.

S. Aust., 74. pp. 115-134.

Srermmuens, C. C.. 1953, A Manual of Australian Suils, -C.S...R.0, Aust.

Tanstey, A. G. and Chee, Vb, 19268, Aims and) Methods in the Study of Vegetation.

London,

‘Tnustox, PE C., and Wowanw, C. M., 1938. The Relation of Phosphate to ihe Develop-

ment of Seeded Pasture on Pousolised Sanel, Coun, Set. Tadustr. Res, Amst, Bull, No.

116.

Wenn, L. J. 1952. An Keoloyicul Survey in Part oof the Tanglewood Area near Adelaide,

South Australia. ( Unpublished.)

Wurrraken, R.A, 1951. A Criticism of Plant Association and Climatic Cliinax Goneepts.

Northwest Sci, 2 25, pp. 17-51,

Woon, J. G.. 1937. The Vegetation of South Australia. Governinent Printer, Adelaide.

Woons: R. ¥., 1958, A Dendrolowicn! Study in Pinus tadiata it the Adelaide Hilly. (S.A,

Government Woods and Forests Department—unpublished. )

120 HELENE A. MARTIN

APPENDIX

The Estimation of Mean Monthly Rainfall

For the calculation of mean monthly rainfall, the form of the regression co-

efficient was as follows:

Y= Vy + bi (x, —X;) + bs (xe — Xo) ++ bs (Xa — Xs) (Coote and Cornish, 1958).

where Y is the rainfall in inches (for the particular location),

b,, be, bg are the regression coefficients for altitude, latitude and longitude

respectively;

X1, Xz, Xs are the values for altitude (in 100 ft. units), latitude and longitude

respectively. Latitude and longitude were in 10~-1 degree units after

subtracting the whole number of degrees, c.g. 138-5625 deg. = 5-625;

¥, X1, Xx, X, are the corresponding means of all stations.

Dr. E. A. Cornish kindly supplied the regression coefficients and means

which are given in Table 5,

Heuens A, Manrrin Puare L (A anv B)

A, The coppiced habit of Eucalyptus obliqua which is cut periodically can be seen clearly,

The bases of the trunks are blackened! die to a bushfire some 44 years previously. ‘The

understory consists olf the erass-like Lomendra fibrata, Mibbertia acicularis «nd sual

plunts of Platylobium obtusangulun: (Couuniunity 1),

B, Part of the understory seen in Plate TAL Lamenedra fibrate forms a “wrass-like sward”

with some Hibbertia acieularis, a lithe Lepidesperma semiteres and ii small plant ol

Platylobinm obtusangulum (near ruler),

“Trans. Roy, Sac, §,A.", Vol. 85,

Henune A, Marvin Prate 2 (A anp B)

A. Old tussocks of Lepidosperma semiteres are seen in this unburnat region with leal Jitter

and dead twigs. Other species present are Ilibbertia aciculariy and H, sericea (Cum-

munity IL),

B. The trees are FE. elacaplora with sone EF. faseieulosa. The understory consists of ahun-

dant Nanthorrhoea xemiplana aud Hakea rostrata with occasional Leptospermum

muyrsinoides and only a few small shrubs, mainly Mibbertia spp. (Community HL or IL).

“Trans, Roy. Soc. $.A.", Vol. $5.

Hruene A, Martin PLare 3 (A AnD B)

A. This plate shows a

stand of old Casu-

urina imuelleriana

which has not been

burnt for 25 years

or more, ‘The pro-

portion of dead

material on the

plant is high, some

being quite dead

(foreground). This

spot is located in

Community TV, the

north-east corner

B, Part of the low, ground covering layer, rather sparse in this instanee. The species are

Hibbertia sericea and L acieularis with an occasional Lissunthe strigusa and Lepido-

sperma semiteres, the latter as very small plants, Large shrubs are absent here (Com-

inunity V),

“Trans, Rov. Soc. S.A.", Vol. $5.

FIELD RELATIONSHIPS OF THE ANABAMA GRANITE

BY R. C. MIRAMS

Summary

The Anabama Granite intrudes and metamorphoses the Adelaide System in the southern section of

the Olary 4-mile military sheet. This granite is distinct from and younger than other granites

described elsewhere in the Olary Province. The field relationships of the granite to the surrounding

Adelaide System and to the associated dykes and rnetamorphism are discussed.

FIELD RELATIONSIVPS OF Titik ANABAMA GRANITE

by R. C. Mrrams*

[Read 8 June 1961]

SUMMARY

The Anabania Granite intrudes and metarnorphoses the Adeluide System in

the squthetn section of the Olary 4-mile military sheet. Vhis granite is distinct

from. and younger than other granites deseribed elsewhere in the Olary Pro-

vince, The field relationships cf the granite to the surrounding Adelaide System

and ta the associated dykes and imetamorphism are discussed.

INTRODUCTION

The Anabama Granite outcrops in the southern portion of the Olary 4-mile.

sheet across the boundary of the Manunda and Anabamua J-mile sheets (Fig. 1).

The granite is exposed sporadically through superficial deposits over an area

20 miles by an average of 5 miles (Fig. 2), most of which lies on the Anabama

l-mile sheet. In mapping the Manunda 1-mile sheet (Mirams, 1960) it became

evident that mapping of portion of the Anabama |-mile sheet would be neces--

sary to determine the relationship of the granite to the Adelaide System. Con-

Seanently detailed mapping of the western portion of the intrusion was under-

taken.

A review of published material suggested crystalline recks to be an Archaean

core in a major anticlinal structure. The State maps (Sprigg, 1953a, 1953b)

showed the granite massif and Archacan metasediments occupying an anticlinal

structure, Sprigg (1954, p, 12) discussed the occurrence under the heading

of Willyama Complex without mentioning the granite. On p. 16 he states, “Near

Anabama IIill, swarms of granite dykes have risen through the local Sturtian

uachuignmtty’s but in the text does not relate these dykes to the Anabama

oTanite,

Petrological examinations have been carried out by officers of the Aus-

tralian Mineral Development Labhoratorics and the reports are included in the

Appendix.

THE GRANITK

The massif includes a yariety of rock types ranyving from coarse-grained

porphyritic or pegmatitic, to fine-grained dense leucoeratic rock. he predo-

minant rock type is a medium- to coarse-grained, unstressed granite. Im places

a weak foliation is observed in weathered material, but this is not typical of the

granite. In addilion, there are marginal variations due to incomplete assimi-

lation of the Adelaide System country rock. These are seen along the northern

contact near Gap East Well (Netley Gap Station) where quartzites, resistant

to assimilation, form enbayments in the granite. Similar rock types found away

from the contact are thought to be due to the proximity of the roof of the granite

mass. Where rafts of sediments are found within the intrusive no clear boundary

* Geological Survey of South Australia, ‘published with the permission of the Director

of Mines,

Truns. Roy. Soc. §. Aust. (1961), Vol. 85.

(22 Rh, €. MIRAMS

cau be defined. The contact zone, vlten only a few feet wide, grades fram

granite to a quartz muscovite rock resembling a greisen.

STRUCTURAL RELATIONSHIPS OF THE GRANITE

The granite intrudes the folded Sturtian Series of the Adelaide System in

the deepest part of a synclinal trough (the Anabama Synclinc), The area

examined in detail (Fig. 1) is in the vicinity of the (northern) contact with

the lawer and interglacial sequence. The mapping shows that the granite worth

of Netley Hill intrudes the southern limb of a synelinal trough running east-

nucth-east from Ovratan Rock, Netley Hill consists of greisenized rocks of

varying composition. These rocks do not appear to have been disturbed dur-

ing the intrusion and now appear as un crosional remnant of a roof pendant

within the granite mass,

The structure of the area strongly suggests that the Netley Hill “greissen™

imitcrops represent the metamorphosed quartzitic phase of the lower glacial

tillite (Sturt Tillite). These “greisen” are similar to those found at Anabamu

Hill and near Gorge Well. The latter are interpreted as the outcrop of the

same horizon on the other linh of the Anabama syncline. ‘This interpretation is

supported by the presence of Upper Torrensian (?) slates between this range

and the Willyama Complex outcropping ta the south-east.

RELATIONSHUP WITH NEAREST INTRUSIVE GRANITES

This is the only granite massif in the Olary region known to intrude the

Adelaide System, Several unstressed intrusive granites are known in the Olary

Provinee to the north-east, but none ure known to intrude the Proterozoic. Cam-

pana (1958, p. 42) states that no granitic rocks related to the early Palaeozvic

orogenic cycle have heen recognized in the Olary Province, although hydrv-

thermal veins, related to this eyele, are widespread.

[t is likely that the Anabama Granite is genetically related to the granites

wutcreapping near ‘Truro-Mannum-Monarto, and Palmer, Uowever, detailed

comparisons have not been attempted by the writer. Superficial similarities

with features of the Mannum Granite (Goode. 1927; Alderman, 1929) have

heen voted, namely;

(1) Composition; dominantly pink orthoclase with quartz plagioclase and bivtite.

(2) Prominent outcrops may be interpreted as small cupolas belonging ta a

larger massif.

(3) Alderman suggests the Mannum Granite may not agree in composition with

the granite mass from which it may be an offshoot, Similar discrepancies

it composition are evident between specimens taken from the Anubsarna

Granite near Netley Gap and near Anabama Hut.

DYKES

The regional distribution of the dyke snite has been outlined by Sprigg

(lon, cit, p. 17), who suggested that they may have been emplaced abnve a

eep-seated magma chamber.

Four phases of dyke activity have been recognized neay Gap East Well.

(1) Lamprophyres

These dykes ure probably older than a metasomatie phuse of the granite

now found to outcrop nearby. Near the granite they are cut by later pegma-

ties und intermediate dykes and have not been found mtruding the granite,

The dykes are medium-grained, micuceous rocks of basic camposition, They

are described in thin scction P603/59 and P606/59 in the petrological deserfp-

tions appended.

FIELD RELATIONSHIPS OF ANABAMA GRANITE 123

: f 3

| Leigh Greek

\ |

: i

. A

\) = = = -

~MANUNDA r

Morgan 34°

Renmark J

i\ y Aver |

Pan Ny j

iz $ |

1G Hi

Iz |

a :

k 2 _ _384|

Murray Brid jo

ay i ge | Gg

| >

~~ ae

SCALE IN MILES .

a2 0 32 64 96 Walsele

—— — 3 y ile

DE AOe | | 2 Hl

Fig, 1. Locality plan, showing location of Manunda I-mile geological sheet and the

Anabama Granite.

124 A, G. MIRAMS

(2) Legmatitic-leucocratic dykes

These grade from normal coarse pegmatites to fine-grained Jeucocratic

dykes, There is more than one phase of these dykes as they are seen to intrude

one another. They are found intruding the granite and along the contact as

well us intruding the Sturtian sediments.

(3) Intermediate dykes

Light grey-green dykes described petrologically as “Iron-alkali rich igneous

rocks metamorphosed to the Jower greenschist facies”, (P1022/59, P1023/50. )

These dykes can be traced back into the granite as intrusions. They also cut

the peginatites. and micrapegmatites,

(4) Pale grey-green felspar porphyries

These may be the same phase as (3) but have a very fine-grained ground

mass speckled with coarse white felspar crystals,

Intense metasomatic activity predates the (stage (3)) dyke intrusions.

Where these dykes intrude what is now “greisen” they have not been subjected

to the intense metasomatism thal has altered the sediments.

The dykes are not affected by ihe folding of the Adelaide System, but buve

been subjected to the stress which induced a low grade metamorphism in the

adjacent sediments.

METAMORPIUSM OF ADELAIDE SYSTEM

The metamorphic effects of the intrusion on the Adelaide System are ex-

tremely variable. The rocks above the pranite mass have been extensively

metasomatized and in veneral converted to quartz muscovite rocks akin to

ercisen. As stuted earlier, where granite is found adjacent to greisen there

is no clear line of demarcation,

To the west, where the granite is probably at shallow depth, a tongue of

metamorphosed Sturtian rocks extends south-west crossing the Lilydule-

Mununda road south of Oratan Rock.

The presence of younger granite at moderate depths could also explain the

incipient metamorphism and numerous quartz veins of the Adelaide System to

the west on Manunda I-mile sheet. The same granite is the probable source

of the felspathic alteration and metasomatic addition of Uitanium and boron

in the upper glacial sequence near Old Grampus Ruins, Manunda Station.

The north contact shows low grade metamorphism (P604/59) (P605/59),

with restricted development of hornfels. The dykes have been metamorphosed

to a similar facies (lower greenschist) as ihe country rock suggesting that this

phase of metamorphism postdates the igneous activity.

The metasomatized Adelaide System rocks at Anabama Hill are those ap-

pearing as Archaean (Willyama Series) on the State Map, Willyama rocks

ocenr at “The Brothers”, two hills farther to the south and do not appear on

the State Map.

CONCLUSION

The Anabama granite is a post-Sturtian intrusive body probably of early

Palaeozoic age. The granite intrudes a major syncline. The emplacement is

thought to be a dry intrusion accumpanied by overhead metasomatic replace-

mnent as there is little evidence of the temperatures expected from a normal

intrusive melt, The granite is related to the orogenic cyele that folded the

Adelaide System and developed towards the end of the cycle.

FIELD RELATIONSHIPS OF ANABAMA GRANITE

*dorojno syueis) euvgeuy ay} Furmoys ][oA4 eq deg jo yyos uvyyd yeolBoposy +g “Ary

Pad PAU {BA

oa tip 0ag 4o dip pue ayn s

Soren AY MOY

ay. yetedb of

SAYAD ALE/P2AULIAL LY

pe aNyWosowe?

ALIdOLD

SHOOW SAISNELNI

ee UlagsAg aplejapy

POSOYPLOUELAY

~WALSAS BOIC/APY

SS SDUER PLIT{IETID

Vinee adits SIYEL 8 UNUAY

qNag9a 7

TWH AATLAN

oat

SNIVHD NI 31VOS

126 hh. C, MIRAMS

REFERENCES

AvpermMaANn, A, R., 1929. Magmatic Differentiation at Mannum, South Avtstralia. Trans

Roy. Soe. S. Aust, 53, pp, 249-257,

Campana, 7., (958. In Campana and King. Revional Geology and Mineral Resources of the

Olary Province. Part 1, Regional Geology Bull; geol, Sury, S. Aust, 84

Coove, B. F., 1927. The Mannum Granite. ‘lrans. Roy. Sov, 8. Aust. 51, pp. 126-128.

Minams, R. C., 1960. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Manunda I inchs] mile

(1.63,360), Geol, Sury. 5, Aust, Military Survey Map Reference No. 732, Zone 6,

Sprice, R. C., 19534. Geological Map ‘South Australia, 1 inch/32 miles. Geol. Surv. §-

Aust. (ed, R. C, Sprigg).

Sprice. RK. C., 1953b, Structural Geological Map, South Australia, L inch/32. miles. Gvol.

Surv. S$. Aust. (ad. R, OG. Sprigg),

Spruce, KR. C., 1954, In Dickinson and others. Uranium Deposits in South Australia. Tull.

geol. Surv. §, Aust, 30.

APPENDIX

Petrological reports on specimens from the Anabama Granite and assaci-

ated rocks submitted by the writer and others are included. ‘The reports are

grouped in the manner the rock types are treated in the text, namely:

Granite Specimens.

Dyke Specimens,

Metasomatic Rock Specimens.

Metamorphic Rock Specimens.

Ree

Granite SPECIMENS

P674/58, Location: 9 miles WSW of Anabama Hut. Collected by: B. P.

Thomson. Examined by: M. J. Bucknell.

This leaec-adamellite lias two generations of crystals. The larger grains

arc of strained quartz, microcline (sometimes with microperthite}, orthoclase,

and minor albite-oligoclase, The latter has norinal zoning. Myrmekitic textures,

with radiating exsolution bodies of potussiec felspar, or muscovite, occur locally.

The grain size of the larger crystals is 1-4 mnn.

Interstitially, there are 100-500 micron crystals of strained quartz, micro-

eline, and iron-rich biotite; the biotite has opaque ferruginous matter intcr-

Jeaved or occurring as isometric grains.

This rock is of the same general type and composition as the Crocker Well

alaskite, although some of the latter appear to be more sodic. The textures of

the Crocker Well series are also variable. but some are similar to P674/58.

It should be mentioned that many of the coarser felspar grains enclose

rounded quarts crystals, and may be therefore of metasomatic origin.

P1175/59, Location: Mulga Paddock, Manunda Station. Collected by: R. C.

Mirams. Examined by: M. J. Bucknell

Composition:

Quartz, 1-3 nun. — - — 90 pier

Sericite (after felspar), 1-5 mm. patches .... 30: pc.

Muscovile (Fe-bearing), 0-3-I mm. across — 5 p.e.

Residual felspar se! — tie Cin! 3 pc.

Goethite/opaques 7 _ .. ILpe.

Texture: The quartz grains are stressed and occur mainly in aggregates.

Both the sericite and muscovite are unusual in having a high refractive index.

They form the green patches seen in hand specimen, and are probably iron-

bearing, The coarser muscovite also has inter-leaved opaque grains. This mica

is probably due to hydrothermal alteration.

Classification: Granite, subject to stress and hydrothermal changes.

P606/60. Lacation: Gorge Well, Lilydale Station. Collected by: R. C. Mirams.

Examined by: R. F. la Ganza and R. A. Both.

WIELD RELATIONSHIPS OF ANABAMA GRANITE Laz

The constituents of this rock are quartz 40 p.c., microcline and perthite 40

p.c., homblende 15 p.c., biotite 5 p.c., and minor epidote, sphene and muscovite:

The rock is a granite which has reacted with the country rock to form

epidote and sphene. Large grains of microcline and perthite (1 mm. wide) con-

tam inclusions of quartz and muscovite and are commonly silicified and seri-

citized. The quartz grains exhibit a wide range of size and are irregular in

shape, displaying no stress.

P607/60. Location: Gorge Well, Lilydale Station. Collected by: R. C. Mirarus,

Uxamined by: R, ¥, La Ganza and R. A. Both,

The: constituents of this rock are quartz 40 p.c., muscovite and kaolin 30 p.e.,

microcline 15 p.c., albite 15 p.c., and minor biotite,

The rock is a coarse-grained granite with the felspar extensively altered to

sericite and kaolin, the plagioclase being the must altered. The quartz forms

irregular grains witb no signs of stress,

DyKE SPrciMENS

Lamprophyres.

P603/59. Location: Hall mile SW Cap East Well, Netley Gap Station, Col-

lected by: R. C. Mirams. Examined hy: M, J. Bucknell.

Composition;

Biotite, 100 x 500 microns — - =: ww 30 p.c.

Hornblende, up to 5X) microns ; 30 p.e,

Quartz, 50-250 microns vel wow OO Pe.

ante, 50-250 microns .. i 5 pc.

Sphene- m 2} wos

Apatite e y. ae 12 pc,

Potash Felspar —-

Epidote Hes

Opaque ..... be Sati anes trace

Zircon -

Muscovite

Texture: The amphibole, which is sodic, is irregular in form and distribution,

The larger grains have inclusions of quartz and felspar. The golden-brown

biotite sccurs in flakes arranged at random. There are inclusions of rounded

sphene (with pleochroic haloes) and opaque grains. Sphene also occurs with

the quartz and felspar, as do the scmihedral apatite crystals,

Classification: Related to the lamprophyres, although few of the character-

istics of that type are present (compare P606/59). The shortage of felspar is

due to the consumption of alkalis in the biotite and hornblende that were

formed first, There may have been extensive hybridization,

P606/59. Location; Magpie Paddock, Netley Grap Station. Collected by:

R. C. Mirams: Examined by: M. J. Bucknell.

Composition:

Biotite, 20 x 100 microns-1 mm. sanst wen AO pee

Albitc-oligoclase, 30 microns. . . 85 pcr

Opaques associated with biotite — .... we PAC

Quartz, 30 microns __.... . 8s pe

‘

Texture: The biotite forms idiomurphic (monoclinic) crystals and laths of

various sizes. These are often corroded, and have a marked zoning with dark

central and outer margins and an intermediate zone which is pink to orange

and almost non-pleochroic, Sometimes the central dark zone is missing, The

zones are sharply defined. The smaller laths are locally parallel exhibiting

flow-texture. Locally there are concentrations of biotite, after basic xenoliths.

125 Rh. ©, MIRAMS

Classification: Lamprophyre (var. Kersantite). The rock exhibits nearly all

the characteristic features of this group as described in the literature. f is

probably a hybrid.

This rock differs from a lamprophyre trom Radium Hill (P$35/58-TS4058 )

in the following ways;

(1) Twice as much biotite.

(2) Felspar is plagioclase instead of orthoclase. The Radium Hill rock

appears to have very little soda.

(3) Absence of apatite,

606/59 is distinguished from P603/59 by:

(1) More soda and potash,

(2) Abundant hornblende im the latter,

Intermediate

P1022/59, Location: Half mile SW Gap East Well, Netley Gap Station, Col-

lected by: R. C. Mirams. Examined by: M, J. Bucknell.

Conrposition: Sericitized K-felspar and sanssuritized plagioclase, with

epidnte ( pistacite), chlorite (Fe-Me=2:1), apatite, iran oxides, and traces of

hypersthene,

Texture: The original plagioclase is grannlar, and the K-felspar often forms

monoclinic euhedra, which may have grown under subsequent metasomatissn.

Both types of felspar are highly altered. Chlorite forms fan-shaped aggregates

and apatite oceurs as euhedral rods and prisms.

Classification: The original rock was an iron-alkali-rich basic igneous rock

probably a norite. At some stage potassium metasomatism may have occurred,

The rock was then metamorphosed to a low level of the greenschist facies under

high water pressure, causing the retrograde development of chlorite, sericite,

and sxussurite (epidote and albite),

P1023/59, Location: Two miles SW Netley Gap ILS. on Manunda Ruud.

Collected bi: R. C. Mirams, Examined by: M. J. Bucknell,

This was originally a later-stage derivative of the magma that produced

MU. 45. There is abundant quartz, mure serivite, and less epidote,

Classification: lron-alkali-rich intermediate tgneous rock, metamorphosed to

lower greenschist facies.

MetAsomatic Rock Specimens

P455/58. Location; Anabama Hill. Collected by: M. N. Hiern. Examined by.

N. Chebotarey,

This is a completely felspufhised quartz-muscovite rock which may be con-

sidered to be the result of the mctasomatic replacement of a sedimentary rock.

In thin section it presents a granoblastic mass of felspar, quartz and colourless

mica. The felspar is a prominent constituent which forms about 60 p.c. of the

rock. It consists of recrystallized microperthitic mass: thickly crowded with

finely disseminated iron minerals, Minor constituents include quartz, tending ta

be porphyroblastie and large crystals of muscovite. scattered at random through

the rock. There are numerous cavities which are filled with crystals of jarasite,

trimmed. around by amorphous colloform silica, Large patches of barite and

limenite may be scen occasionally. The other rock is a granoblastie quartz

muscovite rock which may have originated from a gritty sediment. The rock

consists of a recrystallized groundmass of quartz in which are embedded idio-

blasts of muscovite and porphyroblasts of quartz. The muscovite occurs as large

and ragved terminated crystals full of inclusions of quartz. The fine cavities of

the rock are encrusted with crystals of colourless mica or limonite.

FIELD RELATIONSHIPS OF ANABAMA GRANITE 129

P673/58, Location: Two miles SSW Oratan Rock, Manundi Station, Collected

by; B. P. Thomson. Examined by: M. J. Bucknell.

A felspathic or felspathic sandstone las been metamorphosed to the amphi-

bolite facies. Most of the rock is an interlocking mosaic of quartz, the individual

grains varying from 0-25-2:35 mm, in diameter, Orthoclase and minor olivoclase

occur interstitially: they may have been part of the original sediment, but if

formed by metamorphism (of pclitic matter) or metasomatism, a temperature

high in the facies is indicated. Diopside and actinolite hornblende are often

associated, and may have developed from dolomitie material. Accessories in-

clude apatite, partly euhedral sphene, zircon, zolsite and ferruginous opaques.

These minerals are often totally enclosed in quartz. The sphene is particularly

abundant. aod when enclosed by the amphibole it forms a pleschroie halo in

the latter, The presence of sphene indicates a partly calcareous matrix and

defines the facies (sphene does not occur in the granulite facies).

PYM/S9. Location: Malf mile NW Grampus Ruins, Manunda Station , Col-

lected by: B,C, Mirams. Examined by: M. J. Bucknell,

Composition: Quartz and tourmaline, with lesser orthoclase and minvr

rutile sphene.

Texture: Quartz is very coarse, and has partly replaced the orthoclase. Bath

minerals have been partly replaced by tourmaline. This mineral is usually

colourless dravite, but some crystals are zoned, with a centre pleochroic fron

pale pink-vlive green. It occurs in patches of 2-200 micron grains, eficlosing

scattered residuals of quartz and felspar.

Golden-yellow rutile forms Targe crystals enclused by quartz.

Classification: Metasomatic. The boron concentrated here may also be

responsible for the authivenic tourmaline ocentring ¢lstwhere,

P&IL/GO, Location: Gorge Well Section, Lilydale Station. Collected by: Th. C.

Mitams. Lyamined by; R. F. La Ganza and BR. A, Bath,

The constituents af this. rock are tremolite-actinolite 60 p.c., quartz 20 p-c.,

garnet (almandinc) 10 p.c, and epizoisite 10 p.c.

A marked lineation is present with numerous angen representing por-

phyroblasts of epizoisite and garnet in incipient growth. The quartz commonly

forins vroups of small, irregular grains.

The rack has been raised to the amphibolite facies and probably represents

a tormer basic igneous rock.

P602/60. Location: Gorge Well Section, Lilydale Station. Collected by: Th. C.

Mirams, Examined. by: R. F- La Ganza and R. A. Both.

The constituents of this rock are quartz 40 p.c., tremolite 30 p.c.. plagioclase

20 p.c., biotite 10 p.c.. and minor epidote.

The rock fs essentially equigranular with an average grain size of 75 microns,

the grains having irregular shapes. .A weak lineation is evident.

The rock in its present state probably represents an impure calcareous saml-

stone raised by metamorphism toa the amphibolite Facies.

P603/60. Location; Gorve Well Section, Lilydale Station. Collected by; R. C.

Mirams, Examined by: R. F, La Ganza and BR. A, Both.

The constituents of this rock are augite 40. p.c., quin'tz 30 p.c., plagioclase

2b p.c., potash felspar 10 p.c., and minor epidote and uralite.

A marked banded texture is displayed with bands of fine-grained (75

microns) augite alternating with much coarser bands of quartz unt felspur. ‘The

plagioclase is probably Jabradorite and has altered to epidote In some instances,

Augite displays alteration to uralite.

The rock is a pyroxene gneiss representing the granulite facies.

130 R. C. MIRAMS

P604/60. Location: Gorge Well Section, Lilydale Station. Collected by: RB. C.

Mirams. Examined by: R. F, La Ganza and BR. A. Both.

The constituents ef this rock are quartz 40 p.c., clinopyroxene 35 p.c.,

labradorite 25 p.c,, sphene 5 p.c., and minor hornblende,

The rock is essentially an aggregate of irregular grains showing no apparent

lineation. The average grain size of the quartz is 600 microns and that of the

others 150 microns. The plagioclase Jacks twinning and the quartz shows no

signs of stress, Partial replacement of clinopyroxene by hornblende is evident.

The rock is indicative of the pyroxenc-hornfels facies and was probably a

ruther basic rock which has heen silicified at a temperature of 600-700° C.

P605/60. Location: Gorge Well Section, Lilydale Station. Collected by: R, C,

Mirams. Examined by: R. F. La Ganza and RB, A, Both.

The constituents of this rock are quartz 45 p.c., oliogoclase 40 p.c., clino-

pyroxene 13 p.c., and minor hornblende and sphene.

The grains form an irregular aggregate, no banding or lineation being dis-

played, The quartz varies in grain size from 50) to 800 microns, The oligoclase

rarely displays twinning and commonly forms grains approximately 600 microns

in diameter which are, more often than not, partially siliciied. Clinopyroxene

aa grains 50-600 inicrons in diameter and appears altered locally to horm-

ence.

The rock probably represents an impure acid igneous rock or a high-grade

metamorphic rock.

MetaMorpnic Rock SPECIMENS

P604/39. Location: Half mile SW of Gap East Well, Netley Gap Station, Col+

lected by: R. C. Mirams. Examined by: M, J. Bucknell,

Composition;

Quartz, 30-60 microns _. a = .. 45 pe.

Biotite, interstitial i be von a 30 pe.

Chlorite, interstitial —- = or .. 20 pre.

Oxides, 20-100 microns { ec Ose 2-3 p.c.

Tourmaline (blue-green) _- = ... traces

Apatite

Texture: The rock has a weak schistosity at a low angle to the original

bedding, This gives a scalloped surface to the hand specimen (compare M.U,

15, p. 10) (Report No. NPNC 155/59.) Quartz is elongated parallel to the

schistosity.

The distribution of biotite and chlorite is patchy, with curved contacts

betwen parts rich in biotite, avid adjacent parts witli no biotite but some

chlorite. }

The oxides are usually disseminated, but locally occur in rows at an angle

to the schistosity (ie, along the original bedding planes). The grains are

often cuhedral, and good octahedral outlines can be seen, indicating magnetite.

Classification: Semi-pelitic siltstone. Metamorphic changes are due mainly

to pressure ( greenschist facies).

P605/59. Location: Half mile SW of Gap East Well, Netley Gap Station. Col-

lected by: R. C. Mirams, Exantined by: M. J. Bucknell.

Composition:

Coarse quartz, 200-800 microns _ _ ope.

Fine quartz, 30-20) microns... fo oe OO Die

Biotite sah fs wh Be 20 p.c.

Wornblende (blue), 30-150 microns... 20 pc,

Albite, 30-100 microns... 3 pc,

FIELD RELATIONSHIPS OF ANABAMA GRANITE 13]

Texture: The quartz grains above 200 microns vary from round to angular,

and are all stressed. Biotite and hornblende (probably sodic) are mainly dis-

seminated. However, there are lenticles containing an aggregate of cither

biotite or hornblende, and much of the felspar is associated with these.

Classification: A semi-pelitic siltstone or sandstone originally. Meta-

morphism is to a higher temperature (low amphibolite facies) than in P604/59,

but stress is still important. The lenticles may be due to a “basic front” asso-

ciated with the granite.

DESCRIPTION OF TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA),

WITH REMARKS ON CHAETOTAXY AND GEOGRAPHICAL

DISTRIBUTION

BY R. V. SOUTHCOTT

Summary

Two new Australian species of Smarididae (Acarina) are described, each from the adult and

nymphal instars. These are Smarts cooperi, n. sp., from South Australia and Western Australia, and

Fessonia taylori, n. sp., from New South Wales, thus increasing the known Australian fauna of each

genus to two species. Distinguishing characters are given and some additional features of the

chaetotaxy of the Smarididae described. A coding system of general applicability for the chaetotaxy

of these and other mites is given. Comment is made upon the distribution of Smaris in Australia and

elsewhere.

DESCRIPTION OF TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE

(ACARINA), WITH REMARKS ON CHAETOTAXY AND GEOGRAPHICAL

DISTRIBUTION

by R. V, Sourncorr

(Read LO August 1961)

SUMMARY

Two new Australian species of Smarididae (Acarina) ure deseribed, each

from the adult and nymphal instars. These are Smaris cooperi, a. sp., from

South Australia and Western Australia, and Fessonia taylori, n. sp., from New

South Wales, thus increasing the known Australian fauna of cach genus to bwo

species. Dislinguishing characters are given and some additional features of the

chaetotaxy of the Smarididae deseribed.

A coding system of general upplicability for the chaetotaxy of these and

other mites is given.

Comment is made upon the distribution of Smaris ia Australia and clse-

where;

INTRODUCTION

Previously the genera Srwris Latreille, 1796, and Fessonia Heyden, 1826,

have each contained one known Australian species, these being Smaris pro-

minens (Banks, 1916) and Fessonia australiensis Southcott, 1946 (Womersley

and Southcott (1941), Southcott (1946a, 1960) ), In the present paper a further

species of each genus will be described from Australia, these being Smaris

cooperi, n, sp, from South Australia and Western Australia, and Fessonia taylori,

n. sp. from New South Wales. The generic terms will be used in the sense of

the author's (1961b) revision of the Erythraeoidea, and the descriptive terms

will be as used there and in the author's study (1962) of the North American

and other Smarididae.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF SMARIS

Smaris cooperi n, sp.

Vigs. 1-6

Description of adult female (Figs, 1-5) (from the holotype ACA1733).

Colour in life reddish. Animal of normal smaridid shape, with a slender nasus

and with the idiosoma provided with sclerotized plates. Idivsoma 9902 long

tu tip of nasus, by 540% wide where widest, at the “shoulders” at about the

level of the midsensillary point of the erista.

Anterior dorsal scutum as figured (Figs. 1, 2, 3), with narrow anterior

projection on ta the nasus, and circular posterior part, the whole scutum thus

pyriform in outline, 515, long by 335 wide, enclosing the eyes and sensillary

areas. The anterior dorsal scutum has a slight oenlar projection near the eyes

on each side.

Hyes 2+ 2, each lateral pair arising from @ lightly sclerotized ocular boss;

anterior eye the larger, about 38,, across, directed anterolaterally, the posterior

about 26, across, directed posteroluterally. The ocular boss carries 7-8 normal

dorsal idiosomalae (seobalae) and is placed near the edge of the scutum as

figured (Fig, 2).

Trans, Roy, Soc, S, Aust, (1961), Vol, 35,

SOUTHCOTT

from above; C,

posterior pole af

A, entire, dorsal view, to

— a

§ 2

seu

‘o.= to

oo “

~~ o8

fae

EES

£e

= e

een

co ,

S55

Roe

ie &

£.Ss

aah

Ass

% m

roe

EEE

tj AB

idiosoma,

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA) 135

Fig. 2. Smariv cooperi, no sp. Adult female (bolatype). Dorsal view of propodosoma

und adjacent structures,

136 R, V. SOUTHCOTT

Anterior sensillary boss lightly sclerotized, with 5 scobalae (ACA1733,

1734), Anterior sensillae slender, tapering, ciliated throughout, the ciliations

small in proximal third, more distally the ciliations are longer, but over the

distal half remain fairly constant in length and distribution, Posterior sensil-

lary boss lightly sclerotized, without scobalae; posterior scutal sensillae similar

spent _ op

SEW St

Fig. 3. Smaris cooperi, u, sp. Adult female (holotype), Posterigr sensillary arca of

anterior dorsal scutum and adjacent structures:

to anterior sensillae. Scobalae of anterior dorsal scutum arise from the side of

a circular or oval pit. In places among these are much smaller pits. Between

the anterior and posterior sensillae there is a narrow strip of scutum devoid

of seta-pits, and thus a crista is outlined upon the scutum,

The standard data of the type and paratype specimens are as follows:

AdSens PSens SBa SBy TSD DS

Holotype ACALT33

{S. Aust.) 104 104 41 24 235 22-30)

Paratype ACALT34

(S. Aust.) ea, 100 ca, 116 44 25 280 20-32

Paratype ACALT37

(W. Aust.) 83 ST 51 23 238 20-32

Posterior dorsal scutum of female large, elliptical, anterior margin a little

Hattencd, 266, long by 2304 wide.

i i u | an y

A S #8 $ = x B =< |

cae & =} wa "

ae s & | =

—epopd pe / — cal ait

j wight

trochanter

4p 4

Rs i

—30'8'7 {

su 00 a F

vais |

4 :

ee | ;

Vv ;

rd rT aT uo

oat sad

aneeacy

Shue Hd

ote ) te

cate Au ht

Sprayer

} nies ak

dye zh M

Ae uur

ae ate

ef jr &

Les Ke % 4 wy SeGell- ved i

at Ka W G

ig A — sensola %

y ye wet SSF

Ge 7k

1 HE Vested,

gos

“Laie

Ah ae Left ge nu -

2) tie WH

be - Tr Spent buat oe

wr Spm wd

Fig. 4. A, diagrarn of transverse section of arthropod limb to show conventions used

in the system of coding setae introduced in iis paper. The limb has anterior, pus-

terior, dorsal and ventrai surfaces (a, p, d, v respectively). ‘The circle represents the

circumference of the section and is divided into 8 equal segments, a, ad, «, pd, .,. .

respectively, and the projections of thesé upon vertical and horizontal tangential planes

are shown. T and U represent the positions of setae T and U in Fig, 4 B. Sce text

for further explanation. B-D, Smaris coopert, n. sp, Adult female (holotype), parts

of various limbs: B, proximal part of right leg U, from aboye; C, posterior surface of

left leg IV, showing part of femur and genu; D, tip of left leg IV, posterior aspect,

showing tarsus TV and part af tibia LV. Figs. B-D show the application al the

chaetotaxice coding system, explaincd further in text,

148 kK. V. SOUTHCOTT

Dorsal idivsarnal setae (seobalac) have a dorsul Hange or tecturt setae

that is fusifimm or clavate and which has about I) transverse rows of spicules,

these tending alsw tu form into longitcings columns, The transverse ruws have

up to 5 or 6 spicules. The carinal llange expands into a wide plate, each lateral

edge with 3-2 large serrations (see Fig, 1 B, C, D). The dorsal setue yary con-

siderably im size, The posterior setac are large, as are also some near the ASens

and anterior to the PSens. Tho scutal scobalae are mostly smaller than those

from the striate cuticle (ic, the non-seutal dorsal idiasomalae). Setae from the

upper surface of coxac I are to 6p long.

Venter normal for genus, external genitalia and anus normal. The more

petipheral ventralae similar to dorsalac, but smaller and proportionally less

elongate; the more central ventralac have the carinal servations lengthened so

Hiat the setae tend to resemble the typical bushy smaritid central ventralae with

long ciliutions, Specialized scobalac ot jamus. and external yenitalia are like

fir-cones with pointed bracts; setae of labial edges of genitalia (“labialac™)

pointed, slender, slightly ciliated with adnate ciliations, and many of the labidlae

are angled, resembling, an angled dagger.

Legs normal; lengths (including truchanter to lips of tarsal claws): T 980,

11 500.4, 1525p, TV 850.. Tarsus 1 2054 long by G4. across, tibia 1 230 long.

Tarsus [IV 119 long by 50, high, tibia TV 209,, 217p long. (Tarsal lengths

exclusive of claws and pedicle.) Leg setae as figured, the distribution appear-

ing normal (see Figs, 1, 4 B-D). Pedoscobalae similar lo dorsal idiosomalae.

but distally along the legs these sctae hecome more elongate and pointed, Kuch

pedoscobala has an ovoid depression surrounding the seta-hase (annulus), with

the neuter end pointing distally along the leg; this is a normal feature in adult,

nymiphal and larval Exvthraeoidea, and is Mlustrated in Fig. 4 B, C for S. coopert

as well as in Fig. 7 | for Fessonia taylori. A vestigiala is present distally upon

tihia IE (see Fig. 4 B) (coding VsGell,95d* ),

* This systam of coding here intraduced, is based upon the classification of setae clabor-

ated dy the author (1961b) in his seview of the Ervthraeoidea, including chactotaxy and

other aspects. As used in this exuinple, Ws = vestigiala, Ge = genu, 1=Ieg M1, +95 indi-

watey Ghat this seta is found on « coordinate $5/100 ulong the length of the seginent con-

cerned, measuring distully between the two chitinous end-points, und d=dorsal. It is

propused to use similarly the following: Se — seolala, Se =sensala, So = sulenwidala, ‘$s =

sensilla, St—setr of uncdedined type, Si=sinuala, Sx — supmenxala, Su = supraonychiala,

‘Ta = tactala (senbala), Ma =tamulns (famala), Cp = compangla. for various types of setie:

LIV ta incieate the lewss Pu for ile palp; Gx = voxa, Tr = trochanter, Fe =femur, ‘Ti -

Hhia. Ty = tarsits. Lor the limb sepments: a > anterior, ad — unterodersal, av = anteroventeal.

c= dorsal. p = posterior, pd = posteradorsal, pv = postereventral, v > ventral, for position

ground the circumference of w transverse section of 3 liinb segment; b= left, T= right.

These toms aml concepts are explained hy the guthor (1961) (exeept for sinuala, which

is introduced iv another paper (1961a)) where the subject is treated trom an historieul

wewpoint, ‘Lhe system and code incorporate proposals und terms from other avthors but

the system, of letlering proposed here is new, ancl may use letters in a. different way fram

those used hy other authors, It is hoped that this system of coding will pravide a methad

of general availability among the Acarins, and will be sinple ta use, Vations other exanphes

GE its use Will be made in the present paper, particularly in Fig 4 BD, ;

Some Further conmnent is neeessury upon the use of the eircumferential positions of

setae. The emetimference of a transverse Section af a linth seement is treated as a circle,

and divided iInta S segments, a, ad, al, .. (as shown im Fig. 4 A). each subtencling an

angle of 45° at the centre, The projections of these sownents upon tangential planes is

showa there, thus MN indicating the dorsal tangential plane. Jn general tt will be found

thut ft the erythracoid leg, os well as for many other Acarina, the code as given ju the

example above will specify a sinvle seta, Tn certain circumstances, eg. where more thin

one sett answers to the coding, then it anay be necessary to introduce o further specification

and eode symbol. "Thus the radial cooreinate siguested by the author (1961b) conkl be

boeel, sir some equivalent of it. Thus if the two setae Jabelled T and Uo upon genu U0 in

Fig. 4 B were both ended SeGell.71ipd (actually Uo is coded ScGelL.-71d, hut this exaruple

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA) 139

Sensalue of the legs: typical tromibiform-type spinalae are present upun the

dovsal aspects ot the telotemora, genua and tibiae (Fig. 4 B, C). The tarsi

sury the supraonychialue und other modified setac as figured (Fig. 4D). In

addition to the normal spinalae the telofemur carries posterodursally at its distal

end a ciliated sensory seta which is presumably a modified spinala or “cupathid”.

As its affinities are uncertain, it is here called, non-committally, a “sensifemorala”

(Fig. 4 B, code SeFelf,95d). Similar setae upon genu If and femur IV are

shown in Figs 4 B, C respectively.

Gnathusomu normal for family. as figured (Fig. 5). Paslpal seobalae slender,

pointed, ciliated, tectuin setae not expanded.

Description of Nymph (Tig. 6 A-D) (from ACAI738, supplemented from

ACA1739). Colour not recorded. Animal of normal nymphul smaridid build,

with a short slender nasus and moderately sclerotized plates. Idiosoma 710

long by 5154 wide (the specimen is somewhat swollen in the Hoyer's vliloeu!

hydrate medium used as a mowntant).

Anterior dorsal scutum as figured. somewhat quadrangular with anteriur

projection on to the nasus, and with rounded angles, 310. long by 215, wide,

enclosing the eyes and sensillary areas. There is a slight ocular projection of

the secutum edge near the eye-basses.

is given since there isi no suilable pair of setae in Fig. 4 ta Olustrute this principle) then a

further specification would he necessary. The positions of setae T and U are represented

Uiugrammatically in Fig. “| A, Using seta T as an example, since caleuluting the radial

coordinate from a slide specimen would require determining, e.g. the proportion WR/AMN,

it wwnld be simpler tu use sich a proportion as tlie further coordinate (the proportion being

specified as either across the a-p diameter af the section, or acrass the d-y dijwmeter). Thos,

Fa =O and p= 7-00, we have lor setae T and U the following eorline:

T seGell.7ipd(.76p),

U SeGell.71d(.65p),

where the coordinates in brackets refer to the projectign alone MIN (or NO). Tt will be

noted the code Teltter p is required. within the brackets. since if the leg were lying ‘Teac

on its side on the slide, ane would have to use the d-y projection,

Tf (e.g an the case of seta T) we cull the sep distance x (4 = 0, p= 1.00) (MR in Pig,

4A) and the d-y distance (NS) y (d —0, ~— 1.0), we have, For 9 circular cross-section:

(x—2)2 1 (B8—y)2 = (8)3,

Hence for x = .76, y — 0729,

unl for »= 415, » = 0231.

Thas if the d-y projection is used the same setae T and U comld be coder! thus:

Tt SeGelL-7ipe(.0ty),

U S$eGell.7Ld( 02+)

(dn the case where the Linky trumsverse seclions are markedly non-iiroular it would in genersl

he best to specify coordinates in whatever is the aie usual attitude for legs to ussnric on

a slide. Tn the Synatididae there is a tendency tor a leg ta appsar vertically compressed

(i. height greater than width), at least in same segments, and thus it may be tmbre con-

venient fo use the d-v projection, parttonkiurly with detached legs on a slide.)

A similar convention can be osed to cade the type and positian for the idiosomal setae.

‘Vis, scobala Win Fig. @ A may be coded as LSeDo76w{ 6686p). Tere L = left et the

median sagittal plane, Do — dorsal, .76w means that WK/DK—0.76 (WK=z, Dk =w),

66p mens that AK/AP= 0,66 (AK --x. AP> p) (see Fig. 6 E). This coding could be

abbreviuted to LDo(.76, .66), A similar coding could be nsed far the ventral setae (Ve =

ventral), It will be: noted that in this convention the distance from the median sayithil

pline is coded before the a-p coordinate, TF the animal is regarded as having the a-p length

as in a N-S direction, then D-E mins in a W-E direction, The code proposed thus follows

the erdinary grid convention of placing “castings” before “northings’. Te will be sited

also that the same applies with the systen proposed for the leg coordinates,

This idiosomal coding system is likely to be of most use where setae are nomerais anil

are not capable af being specifind clearly by relation to other structures, as happens with

the idiosomalae: of many of the Erythraevidea and Trombidicidea, particularly tn the 5-legged

stuges. ‘To what extent these coordinates change during the duration of that instar [ran

growth due to feeding is not clearly known, and will require further study,

R, V. SOUTHCOTT

140

Gnathe-

A, from

==s

ot ee

Ses

Adult fem

fully extended, showing details of intern

above: B, from below.

Smaris cooperi, 1. sp.

Fig.

soma,

rat

300

400

san

Mig. GB. Smaris cooperi, n. sp. Nymph. A, entire, dorsal view, to scale on left (idiosoma a

little swollen by the mountant); be, d indicate the setae illustrated in Fig. 6 B, C, D respec-

lively: W indicates a seta used to ilhistrate a system of coordinates and cading explained

in the text and in Fig. 6 E. B-D, dorsal idiosomal scolmulac, to scale on right: B. lateral

view of a seta on the nasus; CG, lateral view of 2 seta near posteriny dorsal seutim: D, dorsal

and ventral aspects (ic. tectal and carinal) of a seta near the yosterior dorsal scutum., E,

diagram to explain convention of coding proposed for idiosomal setac (seo text); W indi-

cates seta W in Fig, 6 A,

142 RV. SOLTHOCOTY

yes 2+ 2, as described in adnit; anterior 27p across, posterior 20 avross.

Deulur boss carries two normal dorsal scobalae,

Anterior sensillary boss lightly sclerotized, unterior sensillae as described

for adult, Posterior sensillary boss lightly sclerotized, without scobalae, posterior

sevisillae as described for adult.

The anterior dorsal seutum has a reticular pattern made of small polygonal

pits, except between the sensillary areas, and which thereby indicates a crista

within the scntum. The scobalae of the anterior dorsal scutum originate from

the sides of rather large circular or rounded-polyyonul pits sct among the

smaller polygonal pits; the small pits are devoid of setae. The scutal scobalac

are similar to the other dorsul idiosomal scobalae.

The standard duta of the specimen (ACA1735) are:

Astens PStus ska SBp Isb DS

70 md 25 \6 f4l 2-42

Posterior dorsal scutum small, lying transversely at junction of podosoma

and opisthosoma, length 85, width 108, with reticular patterning frony poly-

yonal pits as in the anterior dorsal seutum, but without any unpatterned median

strip, and in addition with normal dorsal scobalae arising from larger rounded

pits as in the anterior scutum,

Dorsal idiosomal setae (scobalae) resemble those of adult but are less

chitinized, the tectum setue (dorsal Hange of seta) almost parallel-sided, slightly

clavate avd distally blunted, the spiruled tending to be more ixregularly dis-

tributed, The carinal flange is narrower than in the adult, parallel-sided but

wilh 5-6 coarse serrations Which project only a little beyond the tectum setae

(Fig. 6 BD). Idiosomalae fairly uniform in size over the dorsum, this state-

ment referring also to the scutal scobalae.

Venter (from ACAL738 and ACAI739); the anterior ventral plate which

normally encloses the fused lateral coxa £ and If of each side tends to be

divided. Ventralae similar to those of adult. Urvulva normal for nymphal

erythracoid. Anus normal. '

Legs normal, similar to adult, Leg lengths (including trochanter ind to

tips of tarsal claws): I 630; ML 403p, M11 415p, [IV 530%, Tarsus I 125, lone

by 41, high; tibia | 154y long; tarsus 1V 73 long hy 26, high; tibia TV 45,

lony (tarsal lengths exclusive of claws and pedicles), Leg setae similar to those

of adult, the pattern of specialized sensalae being simpler.

Gnathosoma normal (not much extruded in the specimens available for

study). Palpal scobalae slender, pointed, ciliated. Tibial claw falciform,

simple. fairly strong;

Loealities: South Australia, two specimens: (1) Muston, Kangaroo Island,

in mass (site near the post office), 23 August 1943 (extracted subsequently by

Berlese funnel), H. M. Cooper; register number ACA1733, holotype, in South

Australian Museum collection. (2) Hindmarsh Falls, in moss, 135-25 Ovctoher

IH51L (extracted by Berlese funnel), R. V. Svutheatlt; ACAI74, paratype, in

author's collection,

Western Australia: Warren National Park, in moss in kasri (Eucalyptus

diversicolor F. y. M.) and undeyshrub forest, L mile west of Pemberton, 26

November 1980 (extracted subsequently by Berlese funnel), P. F. Aitken, 3 speci-

mens: one adult female (register number ACA1737) and two nymphs (register

yumbers ACAL738 and ACA1739), in South Australian Muscum collection. Mr.

Agtken reports (personal communication, 1961) that the moss was gruwing on

rotting fallen tree-trumks in the dense wet sclerophyll forest.

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA! 444

Nomenclature, The species is dedicated to its original collector, Mr. IT. M,

Couper, a meticulous student of the aboriginal archeology and white explora-

tion of South Australia, particularly of Kangaroo Island, who has callected

biological specimens including Acurina in various South Australian loculities

Smaris copperi o. sp. was referred to earlier by the present author as “an

undescribed species from South Australia” (Southeott, 1961b, p. 424, Une LL),

This was written hefore the Western Australian specimens had heen colloctedd.

THE SYSTEMATICS OF SMARIS IN AUSTRALIA

Smuvis cooperi n, sp, is a striking species, there heing no specics with a

comparable dorsal idiosomal scobala that the writer has seen among Austrelian,

North and Central American or African members of the genus he has studied.

nor tas heen described from these regions or from Europe. The species may

be distinguished from the other Australian species, S. praminens (Banks, 1916)

thus:

A, Adults

Dorsal idiosomal setae ovoid, bhinted terminally, with the edge of the carinal

flange (i.e. ventral plate of these setac) of seta divided into about 6 teeth

which do not project beyond edge of tectum setae {dorsal Hange); dorsal

idiosomal setae 15-20, long S. prominens (Banks )

Dorsal idjosomulue spindle-shaped or samewhut clavate, bhinted terminally.

Edge of carinal flange divided into 3 or 4 coarse serrations whieh project

bevond edge of tectum setae. Dorsal setue more variable in size,

B2-dah ORE we ce. Ae So ed ee . 5, enopert n. sp,

B. Nymphs

Dersal idiosomal sctae lanecolate in outline, distally tapering smoothly to iw

point; carinal flange narrow-lanceolale with regular serrations; not project-

ing beyond edge of tectum setac, Dorsal sctae 18-20, long

5, prominens (Banks)

Dorsal idiosomal setae almost parallel-sided, the outline of the tectum setae

sliglitly cluvate, seta terminally blunted. Carinal fange broad, proximally

dis broad as tectum setac and with serrations, which in the proximal part

ef the seta project beyond the edge af the tectum setae. Dorsal setae

20-42n Jong tt __. 8. cooperi n. sp.

REMABKS ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF TITE GENUS

SMARIS IN AUSTRALIA

Ve genus Smaris is widely distributed, occurring in Europe. South Africa,

North and Central America, Australia and possibly South America (Southcott,

1961b, 1962), Previously the only species known from Australia has been

Smaris prominens (Banks, 1916), which is widely distributed in the eustern

half of Australia, it being recorded by Womersley and Southcott (1941) From

New South Wales, Victoria and South Australia, and by Suutheott (1960, p. 159)

from north Qneensland. The description of Srmuris coopert a. sp, thus in-

creases the known Australian species to two,

At the present time Smaris cooperi is known from only three localities re-

corded above, these beiug Kangaroo Island in South Austvalia and Hindmarsh

Falls on the adjacent mainlund, and from the south-western corer of Western

Australia, Hindmarsh Falls are near the southern. end of the Mt. Lofty Ranges,

toward Encounter Bay, and a gap of only 9 miles separates Kangaroo Island

from the mainland, It is believed that this gap, Backstairs Passage, has origin-

ated during recent (Tertigry) yeological times (Campana et al., 1954; Glaessner

and Parkin, 1958), and thus from a distributional viewpoint, Kangaroo Island

1d4 k. VY. SOUTHCOTT

may be regarded as the continuation of the Mt. Lofty Ranges. However, it

is probable that during the last glaciation at the end of the Pleistocene the

sea-level sank with the world-wide regression and a land conneetion re-existed.

With the passing of that epoch, about 10,000 years B.P., Kangaroo Island

begun again to be separated from the mainland (Tindale, 1957, p. 6).

Swaris prominens has not so far been recorded from Kangarou Island, but

so far collecting for this mite has been sporadic and not many records have

bec made for its localities of occurrencé over the whole of Australia, The

vnly locality which has been extensively surveyed for it is the Glen Osmond

region near Adelaide, at the edge of the Me. Lofty Ranges (see Womersley

und Southeott, 1941). This species has also been recorded from the southern

endl af the Mt, Lofty Ranges, at Myporiga and Encounter Bay (loc, cit,), Thus

it is evident that, speaking broadly, the two species are sympatric at the southern

end of the Mt. Lofty Ranges. Possibly wider distributions aud more extensive

overlapping will be revealed by further collecting.

Adults and nymphs of the Smarididae are predators on small insects and

uther arthropods, ancl are found in damp sitvatiuns. Only a few larvae have

heen deseribed, and of these only two species have been successfully correlated

with the adult or nyrmphal stages by rearing in captivity, these species heing

Suis prominens and Spheaerotarsus leptopilus Womersley aud Soutleatt, L94l.

Smaris prominens is the only species for which a suitable larval host is known:

the larvae having been found to parasitize only small Psocoptera of the families

Troctidae and Lepidepsocidae (see Womersloy and Southeott (1941); Sauth-

eott (1960, 1961 a, b)). Neither the adults or nymphs of the Smarididae, nar

the small Psocoptera so far found to be suitable laryal hosts appear to be likely

tu be distributed by wind over any but short distances (many other inseels have

been examined for eetoparurasitic larval Prostigmata by the author and others

in Australia; no other hasts of larval Smarididac have been found), It must

le adinitted, however, that the possibility of wind distribution of smaridid mites

cannot be entirely disregarded, Thus if a yravid female mite were in a suitable

mist crack on a picec of bark on a eucalypt (such sites being favonred by

these mites) it is hy no means impossible that W piewe of such burk could be

stripped off and carried a considerable distance by a hich wind, and the same

could apply for the appropriate psocopteran hosts. Perhaps. however, tua much

should not be made of such a possibility, since if the transportation of fragments

of enealypts (such as are commonly the product of high winds, involving bark,

leayes, blossoms and fruit) were of any great significance one might reason-

ably expect to find a very scattered <listibution of eucalypt species, particularly

those with small fruits and leaves and with # tall habit.

The sharp division between much of the flora and fuunu of the western

aud eastern halves of the Australian continent is notewarthy, this applying not

only to plants that are nnlikely to be spread hy wind-distributton and purel

terrestrial animals, but applies also to c.g. a oumber of flying insects whic

would appear to be capable of heing transported by winds over consideruble

distuneces, and far which 4 suitable food-supply is available, The works of Grass

(1954, 1955, 1957), Crocker and Wood (1947), and Mackerras (1960) may be

instanced as discussing the isolating mechanisms which have ovenrred with

various of the Anstralian flora and fauna.

It is not at digit knowu af what zeological period the family Smaricdlidae

originated, or the genus Smeris or its species, Apart from a number of

erythracoid mites described from the Baltic amber (Oligocene) the vnly fossil

erythracoid is a larval mite from the Cretaceous amber uf Canada, not ideal

for description, and referred to briefly by Ewing (1937). The positino of that

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAF, (ACARINA) 145

mite within the Erythracvidea is not known; it is discussed by the author else-

where (1961b), Some of the erythracuid mites are ectoparasitic in the larval

stage upoo scorpions and other arachnids, but the majorily are ectoparasites

lipon insects, the relations in some cases being suggestive of host-spectficity, but

not in others (see Sontheatt (1946b; 1961a, p. 174)).

The finding uf a new species of Smarts, 8. cooperi, in Western Australia

and South Australia, indicates therefore a link between the faunas of those

two regions, Little ur no collecting has been done for Acarina over the arid

zone between these regions. However, since Smarididac usually favour damp

situations it would appear likely that the distribution of S$. coopert is disoan-

tinuous. Various examples could be quoted which suggest u link between the

terrestrial faunas of the south-western corner of Western Australia and, fur

example, Kangacoo Island. The author is indebted ta Mr. B. C. Cotton far

pointing out that the Australian land snail genns Botkriembryen Pilsbry, 1894,

has many species in the suuth-west of Western Australia, one extending across

the Nullarbor Plain. The only other recorded distribution. uf that genus is

(Cotton, 1957, pp. 123-4, 1959, p, 415 (personal communication, 1961) ) of two

species (B, angasianes Pieitter, 1864, on Eyre Peninsula, and B. mustersi Cox,

1867. on Eyre and Yorke Peninsulas, South Australia, B. spencerl Tate, 1894, fron

Central Australia, and a further species, B. decresiensis Cotton, 1940, from Kan-

garao Island, Since these are dry-lanel forms, it would appear that the passible

distribution uf the genus by, for example, eggs or juveniles in mudd on the feet

of waterbirds, is unlikely. Thus, B, decresiensis was originally found in dry

sittations pon the cliff-tops at Cape Cassini, Kangarvo Island, by its collevtor,

Mr. TH. M. Cooper (H. M. Conper, personal communication, 1961) at the archeo-

logical canip-site recorded by Cooper (1960, p, 488),

Many other instances of links between the suuth-west of Western Australia

and Kangaroo Island and the adjacent mainland vf South Australia could be

given. The position with regard to the Hora is diseussed in Crocker antl Woul

(1947), larlier Wood (1930, p. 127) had concluded:

“The flora of this Gulf Region [of South Australia] is composed almost

equally of migrant species from the western and eastern centres of distri-

bution in Australia, together with §2 endemic species out of a total of 637

species, The migration from the west was earlier than migration from the

east; and the Southland, represented at present by Kangaroo Island and the

sunklands of the gulfs, formed the chicf means of passage through which

the species of westerly origin passed. The migration of specics from the

castern centre occurred chiefly after the separation of the Eyre Peninsula,

and the gulfs have proved a barricr to westerly mivration of these species.”

Similarly, we may expect that many of the affinities of the terrestrial Fauna

of Kangaroo Island will be with the adjacent South Australian mainland and the

eastern part of the Australian continent. To quote a single instance within the

author's experience we muy refer to the scorpion Urodacus abruptus Pocock,

1885. This species is recorded by Clanert (1923) and Southcott (1955) from

Kangaroo Island, and on the Australian mainland extends from South Australia

through Victoria and New South Wales. tn south-western Australia the related

Uradacus nevachollandiae Peters, 1861, replaces it, und this species extends as

far east as Eucla (Glanert, 1925). This genus of scorpions (Urodacus Peters,

1861) consist of burrowing spevics only, and it may he accepted they have

migrated solely along land-bridges. Even at the present Ume the possibility of

long transportation of members of this genus by human agency in sand or sail

appears very small.

| 4ti kK. ¥, SOLTHCOTT

It may be concluded that the distributions of Smaris cooperi and Smaris

praminens in Australia, as far as they are at present known, are consistent

with the viewpoint that 8, cooperi could zepresent a species distnbuted from the

south-western corner of the continent, and that 8S. prominens could represent a

species distributed from a centre in the eastern half of the continent.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF FESSONIA

Fessonia taylori n. sp.

Figs, 7-10

Description of adult (probably female) (Tigs. 7, 8) (from the holotype

ACAI1735). Colour in Tife reddish. Animal of normal smaridid shape and

sa a short nasus.. Idiosoma S75, long to tip of nasus by 465, wide where

widest.

Crista normal for genus, the anteriur sensillae placed 2359 hehind the

pasus and just posterior to the eves. The standard data are:

4 Seng VPSene SBay, SBp isp DS

Oo 42 26 26 1us 20-41

Auterior sensillie slender, lightly cillated throughout. ciliatons louver in

distal half of seta; posterior sensillae similar, ,

Byes 2-+ 2, the umterior the larger, 324 ueross, posterior 244 across and

placed a little lateral to the anterior eye.

Dorsal idiosomalae (seuhbalae) brawn, oval to clavate, blunted terminally,

the longest setae being near the tip of the nasus or at the posterior pole of

the idiosama, and in these longest setae the widest point of the tectum setae

is more than 3/4 along the length of the seta. Tectum setae with 4-6 columns

of euarse serrations or spicules, these not linked to each other, with their two

median columns. nsually regular, the other columims may be somewhat less

regular, Spicules about 28-40 in number aver tectum setae. Carinal flange

narrow, its lateral edge with about 10-12 pointed strong ciliations.

Venter normal. The more peripheral ventral setae resemble the dorsil

scobalae, but are rather simplified (Fig. 7 F, G) while the more central scobalue

ure the usual céntral ventral smaridid scobalae, with a compuct centre trom

which arise long bushy ciliations (Fig, 7 H, I). Internal gonitalia not clearly

scen, but appear to be of female type.

Legs of normal size and shape for the genus. Leg lengths (inelnding

trochanter to tip of tarsal claws), 1 1140p, IL 640,, TET 690p, TV 1030.2, ‘Tarsus

1 185, long by 68, high, tibia I 255, long, tarsus IV 140, long by 41, high,

thia LV 270 long. (Tarsal lengths exclude claws aud pedicle.) Tarsal claws

normal, ciliated obliquely along their sides,

Setation of legs in general smilar to that of Smaris, Pedoscobalae (except

distally on tibiae and tarsi) similar to the idiosomalae, but tend to be more

slender, as is usually the case in the Erythraeoidea. Also as is usual in the

Erythrueoidea the annulus or seta-base of the pedoscobala is set in a small

ovoid depression; a number of these are illustrated in Fig. 7 J. The middle

segments of the Jegs carry normal Trombidiformes-type spinalae, as in Smaris,

Several such arc shown in Fig. 7 J on genu [V and tibia IV and one such is

coded as SpGclV.68d.* In addition to the spinalae the legs carry some ciliated

sensalae, Some of these are ilhistrated in Fig. 7 |, two being shown upon

telofernur IV and coded as SeFelV.90d and SeFeIV,95d, and others upan the

genu IV are shown, these latter being coded as SeGelV.46pd. ScGel V 48pd,

SeGelV.84pd and SeGelV.94d.

* See the explanation of the coding system earlier in the present paper.

F Ay

HN hs a & : 0

yk bi ‘ ‘4 A ii ;

om ae Arhy 4k fa

nyu Yh te i Wt Ay 4 t

iF bas va

a Mp ars Aes

i i Veg 8S

wat) f yah iF.

oe SES

Spirata d

Sp fell BTL ~ | i

Yee, ©

reo eee ms

Syrnat erica a ah y ~~ ety . belofe mat

Sekelt 904

Te Fel -9ay

Gensigeaulia

Sele fy,

Stainpqenuectas

Shee a pl Jia

Sy caver ha”

Shur Wb

Seleleat 43

SGD!

Q eS

1 — Spoaale W fen Mk amo le

Sproat Ssh ee Pee avancn |

Mee tact bie (hicti femoral)

left pO “Sorstg-an)

Ke Se Ge l-Shy

Fig. 7. Fessonia teylori, n, sp, Adult female (holotype), A, dorsal view. entire, to scale

on left. B-L, various idiosomalae, to scale on right: B, C, dorsal idiosomalae near posterior

sensillary area; D, E, posterior dorsal idiusomalae; F, a ventral idiosomala from tectal (left)

and carinal (right) aspects; G, H, I, further ventral idiosomalae. J, posterior aspect of left

genu IY, and part of telofomur TV and tibia TV, to show features of chaetotasy (see in

text for explanation of chaetotaxic coding) (to scale on right),

SOUTHCOTT

Rh.

148

fear

4 4 gerne

Dorsal view of propodosoma show-

and adjacent structures.

Adult, holatyp

hparts.

ing crista, mout

Fessonia taylori, ni

Fig. 8,

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA) 149

AY 4,

WN. Py A

hi 4

~~ :

Joo

=>% .

7-2

mie ?

‘

wes

Tig. 9. Fessonia taylori, u, sp. Nymph. A, dorsal view, entire, to scale on Jeft. B-E,

dorsal idiosomal setae, to scale on right: B, C, two setae near posterior sensillary arca;

D, E, two setae near posterior pole af idiosoma.

150 h, V, SOUTHCOTT

Cnathosoma normal, as figured (Fig. 8), Palpal scobalae slender, ciliated.

Description of nymph (Figs. 9, 10) (from ACA1736). Colour in fife

reddish. Animal similar to adult but smaller and of more slender proportions,

(The specimen studied has the idiosoma somewhat swollen by the polyvinyl

aleohol-lactophenol monntant used.) Idiosoma 7935p. long to tip of nasus, by

515y wide, Crista normal for genus, ASens placed [60 behind tip of nasus.

Standard data are:

ASong Pens SHa, Sip TSD bs

56 83 16 20 V3 {4-42

Sensillae similar to adult,

Eyes similar to adult, anterior 22, across, posterior 16, acriss.

Dorsal idiosomal scobalae similar to those of adult, but tending to be more

slender,

Venter appears normal, but not clearly seen in the preparation, which

is dorsum uppermost.

Legs normal, of the usual slender nymphal smaridid proportions. Leg

lengths (including trochanter to tip of tarsal claws) I 800., 1 4304, LUT 440p,

IV 700n. Tarsus [ 128, lone by dl, bigh, thhia [ 185,~ long, tarsus IV 96,

long by 32p high, tibia 1V 183, long (tarsus measured without claws or pedicle ).

Tarsal claws as for adult.

Gnathosoma normal, similar to adult. Palp and setation as described for

adult.

Locality; National Park, Audley, New South Wales, 12. September, 1943,

under leaf litter on damp soil in eucalypt. forest along south bank of Kangaroo

Creek. one adult (ACA1735) and one nymph (ACA1736) (RB. V. Southcott).

Remarks. on Nomenclature: This new species is dedicated to the late Mr.

F. H. Taylor, 1886-1945, formerly Entomologist. School of Public Health and

Tropical Medicine. Department of Health, Commonwealth of Anstralia, and

University of Sydney, in gratitude for encouragement and many kindnesses,

THE SYSTEMATICS OF FESSONIA IN AUSTRALIA

Fessonia taylori n. sp. is quite distinct from the only other Australian Fes-

sonia that has been described, &. australiensis Southcott, 1946, the latter known

from the adult only. The adults of these two specics mav he separated by the

following key;

Dorsal idiosomalae lancevlate-cluyate, mostly with the widest point of the tectum

selae ahout 2/3 along seta; with 6-S well-defined regular columus of linked

pointed spicules over the proximal 2/3 of the tectum, these cohimns then

tending to break up more distally, being in the distal 1/3 of the tectum

short, blunted and irregularly arranged, unlinked, Posterior dorsal scobalae

18-33, long. Palpal scobalae clongate-lanceolate, ciliated... 4... ~-

F, australiensis Sonthcatt, [946-

Dorsal idiosomalae clavate, blunted, and in the more posterior setae, which are

the more clavate. the widest point of the tectum setae is more than 3/4

along the seta. Tectum setae with 4-6 columns of coarse (serrate) spicules,

net linked to each other, and of which the two median colunms are usually

regular, the more Jateral columns tending to be less regular. Dorsal scobalae

20-4I pp, long. Palpal scobalae slender, ciliated... F. taylori n. sp.

No attempt to key the nymphs will he made here as the nymph of P’. cres-

traliensis has not as yet been observed from Australia,

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA) WL

Tig. 10. Fessonia taylori, n. sp. Nymph. Dorsal view of propodosoma, showing

crista, mouthparts, and adjacent structures,

152 RB. ¥, SOUTHCOTT

A NOTE ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF

FESSONIA AUSTRALIENSIS

The type locality of F. dustraliensis was Mataranka, Northern ‘Territory

(see Southcott, 1946), The author has also in his collection an adult specimen

of F, australiensis collected at Montalbion, Irvinebank, north Queensland, in

litter and soil at base of Eucalyptus sp., at the edge of a large dam, 11 October,

1944 (R. V, Southcott), The author has also seen specimens of this species

from India, Burma, China and Mexico from other collections, which will be

recorded further elsewhere.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

In addition to the acknowledgments made in the text for material collected

und information on field data, the author wishes to plage on record his: arati-

tude to the following, with whom he has discussed particularly the geographical

factors in the distribution of the Australian fauna and flora: Mr. P. FY Aitken, Mr.

H. M. Cooper, Mr, B. C. Cotton. Dr. B. Daily, Mr. G. F. Gross and Mr. F. J.

Mitchell. The author wishes to thank also the Acting Director, South Australian

Museum, for permission to study Museum material.

REFERENCES

Banks, N., 1916. Acuriins front Australian and Tasmanian Ants ane Ant-nests. Trans, Roy

Soc, 5. Aust., 40, pp, 224-240).

Cameana, B,, Winson, BH, and Wiriter, A. W. G.. 1954. ‘The Geology of the Jorvis anc

Yankalilla Military Sheets. Explanation of the Geological Maps, Gool. Survey of

South Australia, Report of Investigations, Nu, 3, pp. 2, 1.

Cooren, H. M., 1960. The Archaeology of Kangaroo Island, South Australia Reo, S. Aust.

Mus., 13 (4), pp. 481-503, a

Corron, B. C., 1940. The Land Shells of Kangaroo Island. §. Aust. Nat. 20 (4), pp, 40-12,

Cotton, B. C,, 1957, Records of Uncommon Southern Australian Mollises, Kee. 5. Aust

Mas., 13 (1), pp. 117-130.

Corronx, B. C., 1959. Senth Australian Mollusca, Archieogastropoda. Handb. Fauna and

Flora S, Aust. Govt, Printer, Adelaide. pp. 1-449.

Cox, J, ©, 1867. Characters of Four New Species of Australian Lond-Shells. Proc. Zool.

Soc, Lond., pp, 39-40.

Ceocyrr, KR. L., snd Woon, J. G., 1947. Some Histovical Influences on the Development

of the South Australian Vegetation Communities and Their Bearing on Concepts and

Classifications in Ecology. Trans: Roy, Soc, $, Aust, 71 (1), pp. 91-136.

Ewe, H. E., 1937. Insects and Arachnids from Canacian Amber: Arachnida, Order Acarina.

Vai. Toronto Stud. Geol., 40, pp. 56-62,

Giagsssen. M. FL, and Pankoy, L. W. (Editors), 1958. The Geolagy of South Australia.

J. Geol. Soc. Aust., 5 (2), pp, 16, 116,

Graume, L.. $925. The Flora and Fanmma of Nuyts Archipelago and the luvestigator Group.

No. 17—The Scorpions, with Descriptions of Some Species trem other Localities in

Sonth Australia, Trams. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, pp. 85-97,

Gross, G. F., 1954. A Revision of the Flower Bugs (Hetoroptern Anthocoridae) of the Aus-

tralian and Adjacent Pacific Regions. Tut I. Ree, 8. Anst. Mus, IL (2), pp. 120-164,

Gross, G, ¥., 1955. A Revision of the Flower Bugs (IWetcroptera Anthoeoridac) of the Aus-

tralian and Adjacent Pacific Regions, Part IT, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 11 (4), pp. 409-433,

Goss, C.F. 1957. A Revision of the Flower Bugs (Heteroptera Anthocoridae) of the Aus-

tralian and Adjacent Pacific Regions. Part Ifl, Rec. S, Aust. Mus., 13 (1), pp. 131-142.

Taepaye, T., 19397, A Basic List of Land Mollusca of Australia, Aust. Zoologist, 8 (4), pp.

287-333 (first Part). ;

Mackennas, I. M., 1960. The Sabanidac (Diptera) of Australia, IT, Subfamily Pango-

niinae, Tribe Scionini and Supplement ty Pangoniini. Aust. J. Zool, 8 (1), pp. 1-192,

Pures, --, 16fl, MowuatsBer, Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 411, teste S$. A, Neave, 1940, Nomen

élatoy Zoalogicus, Val. 4, p. 618.

Preirren, L., 1864. Deseriptions of "Ten New Species of Land-Shells from the Collection

of George French Angas, Esq, Proc, Zool. Soe,, Lond. (for 1863, published 1864. teste

Wwedale, L937, p. 312), pp, 526-529,

TWO NEW AUSTRALIAN SMARIDIDAE (ACARINA) 153

Pirspry, H. A., 1894, Note on Liparus. Nautilus, 8 (3), pp. 35-36.

Pocock, R. 1, 1888, The Species of the Genus Urodacus Contained in the Collection of the

British (Natural History) Museum. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., 6th Ser., Vol. 2, pp. 169-175.

Soutucotr, R. V., 1946a. On the Family Smarididae (Acarina). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.

Wales, 70 (3-4), pp. 173-178,

Soutucorr, R. V., 1946b, Studies on Australian Erythraeidae (Acarina). Proc. Linn. Sac,

N.S. Wales, 71 (1-2), pp. 6-48.

Sourscorr, R, V., 1955. Some Observations on the Biology, Including Mating and Other

Behaviour, of the Australian Scorpion Urodacus abruptus Pocock. Trans. Roy, Soc. §.

Aust., 78, pp. 145-154.

Sourncort, R. V., 1960, Notes on the Genus Sphaerotursus (Acarina: Smarididae). Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 83, pp. 149-161,

Soutucott, R, V., 196la. Notes on the Genus Cueculisoma (Acarina: Erythracidae) with

Comments on the Biology of the Erythracoidca. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 84, pp.

163-178.

Soutucorr, R. V., 1961b.". Studies on the Systematics and Biology of the Erythraeoidea

(Acarina ), with a Critical Revision of the Genera and Subfamilies. Aust. J. Zool., 9 (3),

. 367-610.

Gousegrns R. V., 1962, The Smarididae (Acarina) of North and Central America and

Some Other Countries (in press).

Tate, R., 1894. Brief Diagnoses of Mollusca from Central Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S.

Aust., 18, pp. 191-194.

Tinpate, N. B. 1957. Culture Succession in South-Eastern Australia from Late Pleistocene

to the Present. Kec. §. Aust. Mus., 13 (1), pp. 1-49. ;

Womenstey, H., and Souracorr, R, V., 1941. Notes on the Smarididae (Acarina) of Aus-

tralia and New Zealand. Trans. Roy. Soc. $, Aust., 65 (1), pp. 61-78.

Woon, J. G, 1930, An Analysis of the vegetation of Kangaroo Island and the Adjacent

Peninusulas, Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 54, pp. 105-139.

* Contains a full bibliography of the family.

THE PLANT ECOLOGY OF THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

2. THE DISTRIBUTION OF EUCALYPTUS ELAEOPHORA

BY R. L. SPECHT, P. F. BROWNELL AND P. N, HEWITT

Summary

Eucalyptus elaeophora has a disjunct distribution pattern in south-eastern Australia, extending in a

discontinuous arc in the highlands from northern New South Wales, through Victoria, into the

Mount Lofty Ranges of South Australia and northward into the Flinders Ranges. The distribution of

the species is examined in the Mount Lofty Ranges and discussed in relation to climatic and edaphic

factors. In South Australia the species is found in the dry sclerophyll forest formation on yery

infertile soils developed from a wide variety of rocks — residual Tertiary laterites, Aldgate

sandstone, Stonyfell Quartzite, Archaean schists and gneisses and even phyllites where the soil is

highly leached. The climate of the area is of Mediterranean type with cool (mean July temperature

45° F.), wet winters alternating with hot (mean January temperature 65° F.), dry summers, Within

this area E. elaeophora is widespread between the 27 and 36 inch isohyets. Small pockets are found

in rainfall areas as low as 23 inches per annum, where infertile soil 1s found with a high water-

retaining capacity. The species in South Australia appears to have reached its maximum southward

distribution in the Mount Lofty Ranges. The ecological limits, thus defined for the Mount Lofty

Ranges, are compared with those found for other areas within Australia. As the species extends

from a region of winter rainfalll to one where summer rain predominates, corrections had to be

made, In all areas, foliage growth is greatest during summer; soil moisture stored from winter rains

is utilized during this growth period; some 25 p.c. of the winter rainfall is lost by evapotranspiration

before growth occurs. After this correction, the predominantly winter rainfall range (27 to 36 inches

per annum) of the Mount Lofty Ranges is equivalent to that in the Monaro Region of New South

Wales (19 to 26 inches per annum) where summer rainfall predominates. [f these limits are correct,

the species is unlikely to occur in wetter areas (as high as 48 inches per annurn) as recorded in the

Dandenong Ranges, Victoria; this observation could be due to the difficulty of distinguishing

E. elaeophora from E. goniocalyx, with which it hybridises. The distributions of the other eucalypts

in the area are compared with those found to the south of the Torrens Gorge. The disjunct

distribution of E. baxteri - Black Hill, Mount Gawler, Tanunda Creek - is of interest.

THE PLANT ECOLOGY OF THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

2. THE DISTRIBUTION OF EUCALYPTUS ELAEOPHORA

by R, L. Srecur,t P. FB. Brownenr® axp P. N, Wewrrr?

(Read 10 August 1961)

SUMMARY

Eucalyptus elacophore has a disjunct distribution pattern in south-eastern

Austrulia, extending in a discontinuous are in the hiehlands from northern

New South Wales, lhrough Victoria, into the Mount Lofty Ranges of South

Austrulia and northward into the Flinders Ranges. The distribution of the

species 1s examined in the Mount Lufty Ranges and discussed in relation to

climatic and edaphic factors.

In South Australia the species is Found in the drv selerophyll forest forma-

tion on very infertile soils developed from a wide variety of rocks — residual

Tertiary Jaterites, Aldgate: sandstone, Stonytell Quartzite, Archaean schists and

gneisses and eyen phyllites where the soil is highly leached. The climale of

the area is of Mediterranean type with cool (mean July temperature 45° F.),

wet winters alternating with hot (mean January temperature 65° T.), dry

summers. Within this area EF. elaeuphore is widespread between the 27 and 36

inch isohyets. Simall pockets are found in rainfall aveas us low as 23 inches

per annum, where infertife soil is found with a high water-retaining capacity,

The species in South Australia appears to have reached its waxinum southward

distribution in the Mount Lofty Ranges.

The ecological limits, thas defined for the Mount Lofty Ranges, are come

pared with those found for other areas within Australia, As the species extends

from 4 region of winter rainfall to one where sunnner rain predorninates, cor-

rections had to be made. In all areas, foliage growth is greatest during sammer;

soil moisture storecl from winter rains is utilized duting this growth period;

some 25 pe, of the winter rainfall is lost by cvapotranspiration before erowth

occurs. After this correction, the predominantly winter rainfall range (27 to 36

inches per annum) of the Mmimt Lofty Ranges is equivalent to that in the

Monaro Region of New Suuth Wales (19 to 26 sehen per annum) where

summer ralifall predominates.

it these limits are correct, the species is unlikely to oceur in wetter arcas

(as high as 48 inches per annum) as recorded in the Dandenong Ranges,

Victoria; this observation could be thie toa the diffientty of distinguishing E.

elaeophora from E. goniocalyx, with which it hybridises.

The distributions of the other encalypts in the vtea ure compared with those

finmel to the south of the Torrens Gorge.

The disjunct distribution of &, baxteri-- Black Hill, Momt Gawler,

Tanunda Creek—is of tnterest.

INTRODUCTION

In the first paper in this series on the plant ecology of the Monnt Lofty

Ranges, Specht and Perry (1948) discussed the distribution of Eucalyptus

species between the Torrens Gorge and Port Noarlunga. In this area, nine

species were found in extensive and complex patterns of distribution which

enabled the authors to preserihe on the basis of soil nutrients and climate, geo-

1Formerly of the Department of Botany, University of Adelaide; present address,

Botany. Department, University of Melbourne,

+“ Department of Botany, University of Adelaide.

*Formerly of the Department of Botany, University of Adclaide; present address,

Botany Department. University of Western Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1961), Vol, 85,

156 KL. SPEGHI, 2. F. BROWNELL, PON. HEWISL

graphical limits for each species. AS Hucalypfus elaeeplora F, Muell. appearel

in only the sost wortherly portion of the area mapped, and was known to be

common farther north, 2 more comprehensive study of this species was de-

ferred. This paper presents the results of this later investizution.

Adamson and Osborn Sica gave an excellent introductory account of

the distribution of EK, elacophora. They indicated (1) that the southern buund-

ary of the species was just south of the Torrens Gorge; (2) that the forests

avcued oh rugged hills with shallow, stony soils formed from metamorphosed

Archuean (then considered to be Pre-Cambrian) rocks, notably hard schists,

crystalline quartzites and gncisses; and (3) that Jess water was available in

forests of E. eleeaphora than in the EF, ebliqua forests to the south, Winter

mists, commen in the Ranges to the south of the E. elagaphora zone, would

indnuue wetter conditions favouring E, oblique even im areas of similar rainfall,

viz. 30 to 35 inches per annum where E. elaeophora was found.

Wood (1930) reiterated the above conclusions and later (1937) in his

honk. “The Vegetation of South Australia”, added a little further Information on

its distribution — “from about Mount Crawford southwards to the ‘Torrens

Gorge’, the general distribution of the Archacozoic rocks —and noted that the

sail formed from these rocks is shallow, somewhat podsolized and that, in some

areas. lateritic residuals may be found,

Specht and. Perry (1948), as mentioned above, nated the presenee of KE,

é@laenphoru south of the Torrens Gorge, and indicated that it was found in

podsolic soils developed over the “Stonyfell quartzite” on Black Till and ou

suils, erroneously termed Fervimiorphic soils, develaped over Archacan schists

and gneisses,

In a recent soil survey, Jackson (1957) made some general remarks on the

vegetation. Ue noted that both £. obliqgua and E. elagophora were the must

common trees in the selerophyll forests he exammed (see atea ©, Fig. 1). The

two species were co-dominant in serubs north of Millbrook Reservoir, on the

Mount Gawler, Millbrook, Kershbronk, Mount Gould and Horse Gully soil asso-

ciations, To the east of the longitude of Birdwood, on the Birdwood soil asse-

ciation, E, elacophore was co-dominant with FE, fasciculosa while E. olsliqnea

was sole dominant in selerophyll forests on the Lobcthal and Kangaroo Creck

sail associations on the south boundary of the Hundred of Talinya.

This new evidence of Jackson together with the detailed maps presented in

this paper enables a much broader picture of the distribution of M, elaeopharit

in the Mount Lofty Ranges Lo emerge than Adamson and Oshorn could possibly

have seen in their reconnaissance survey almost forty years ago.

The main area selected for study extended from the Torrens Gorge in the

south to Mount Gawler in the north, from Golden Crove in the west to Mount

Gould in the east (see area A, Fig. 1), This was chosen, because it was a

Inaiewl extension of Specht and Perry's original survey, and also because it

showed an excellent sequence of rocks uf Archaeozoic and Pre-Cambrian aye

(Toirensian series) varying greatly in mincral composition (Sprigg et al., 1951),

As well, deep Eocene sands are found on the western boundary of the area

Welow the Eden scarp in the Anstey Hill region,

A smaller area, the Barossa Goldfields, mapped by one of we (P.\-H.) was

chosen because it illustrates the most northerly limits wf E. elaeophore in the

Mount Lofty Ranges, an area where the rocks mentioned above are largely

masked hy Tertiary Jaterttey und deep sands (Campana and Whittle, 1953),

A mapping procedure similar to that used hy Specht and Perry (1948) was

used in this survey; namely, the distribution of the Eucalyptus species on every

ridge and valley was projected onto contour maps (Military Ordnance maps)

DISTRIBUTION of FORMATIONS

Ory Seerraphyil Forest

Soveaidh Woudiand

‘Sevainely

Eke haters

imi eu

Fig. 1. Map showing the distilitioy oF phant furjtions, savanodh woodland. dry sclern-

phvll forest gud savanhal. between the Torrens Gorge ancl Mie BKayossa Valley, We ise

hotion oF both £, ehkweophore and EB. factor! within Gee dry suluriphydl forest ix indicate,

Detailed yegutution maps re Areas A wid 8) are tueluded in this paper (see Figs. 3 and 4)-

Areu B iy discussed] hy Specht and Ferry (L948). Sail surveys of fackeuy (E957) snd

Nartheote wo cdeMony (1957) and Northcote (1989) Gover the circa gidicated bar Areas C,

Kaw F onepeuiveke

(161) Uosxpur

SUOIPBIOO8

TWH 9@8FLASW

Quesee(d JUNUTL

-3V

spseyos OOpUTUD YT

(LE6T) SOOT

aq pues ayoayyoN

(6861) ©799HI20 NC

(696 L) eIGDYWON

(§G81) eqoaq TON

(SPG1) Auag a dqoeds

(L861) vosyonp

TWOLPBUTY UTD [IOG

equip, — sumdy

syog — o\BA vapryy

pssoaeg,

. LOS

dnois jlos peureuuy

Sulaeg [los paurenuy

‘ATIUIRT «=: B}UESRIOUT

x3 8Tospod

OTUeP El PRNp wary

uore

-oossP {) poomparg

saps

YI, DPUNWUI ZT,

pua aasuayayy “VAT

sappy Handa y,

(F261)

ssudg a uostyoqry

(661) 87004440 NT

WOLIHMOSSY asIperET

Apmarey esuriiq ey

SLD IUIIOT

SIUAUA PAS PULLISNIDT

(€e61) wo” y ANT

(BRAT) Aateg 3 qyseda

(L161) Hosyor pe

pueg ssundg yaar

4 UOLpAVEL

ple Ajsuoms jo

spuye snoatpis deeq

WoR

“1L00s8y “G poomMpatg

Spuns

BUISMAN) @UIIOA

(LeG1) Hosyper

oy iT

(GSAT

(weit

{6961

) eqooysa0 Ny

) HqooTAG NY

) 840077 9.40 KY

61) sJOoYQON

KR. L. SPECHT, P. F. BROWNELL, P. N. HEWITT

SUOTI BOSSY

gypRz0UINy) “SUaLIOy,

sarjimey

asumquy ‘Aneypjeg

F Sates wreArTig

ATOR] TAUIBO.T YY |

Aymaey Bieg

spsodaqy jowinyy yy

(GE6T) 40044.L0 fT

(GEL) eyO9q710N

(6E61) APOOTTFAONT

(dnoz# pos pamreunun)

egy spuuey ecioonm jC

Aytuey

oBA eura-eddoy |

(dnosa pros pourruun) |

yy AjTarep edqgoouny |

susaday powungy py |

im)

pail

bru

is)

ADTEMIOFAYT

qu surddeyy prog

[Bueyeyy Ju,

LOMVULIO PUBTPOOA, TeUTRARS

158

aoldaaley

qm Suddeyy piog

(euSeTeyy uae’

uoTyeuTIOg Jsealog [Aydorapg Aa

“splos pre AFopooH 07 worqeyat Tit SUOL}BuA0; pueppoos yHuTEAes pre isesoy [AYdosapos Aap yo worngtaysicy

TL @TAVe

159

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANGES

(LEGT) Mosque

(BEET) 8709}. NT

(RTH) Atteg a aypodg

mary

~RINOSsy pooAkapauy

A[TULR] PLOJS|TT AA

(snuEqs

yuernt Ysty YqLA)

sjospod umomg ADT

(,a2edadys wogyditio py.

fiyeautsof) sapignter

sagn2o0ssn

prep says aepepphiyg

“S8149S UNLTUTLLO J,

SARS! PUows() Uap

(SFUT) Sted ap qydadg

(LeG1) wosyore |

(6E61) B1OHOTPISONT

(6461) 8I0944I0N

(8461) Auieg sp qyvedg

(LeGT} Wosyaes

“10.118 18 04 OF UAOUH MON +

‘THOLPRIDOSSY POOMPAI, SN] UT SUOTPVIOOSSR [IOS QoUTYSTP eeITY} SaUTEULOD (LGBT) WoswpoRe’ xy

(FG) “72 72 ejoaTIAION tq Pequosap ssay} OF ATTUTTS STIOs Z1@UG]TOS POsTPOTOS ore sppsupjOy) BssouvRg ayy UT spose Apueg ‘spuys

Ayny evap, ¥8T-9A0ry) Ueploy v3 04 paqye au Aeyy, (ecg _) GOVE pup sty Aq Bowe ssuudg qLMeg eyg UL pourexs Ajuonbesqny ataM eselLy, »

{jos ongdaoutteg, |

SUGIPRIONSSY YOOIQ |

“TTL tape) “FN,

Idk

Sells los peurBunyy

TIS

dnoid jlos paweuny)

(snyeqs yuerrpnu

AGT YWA) spospod

umoiq AT) “oor

oorRsuBy ‘Rao

sassiauds pun spsviypog

SOPLRIOSSD

pUDd sapzpeund paywior |

“8929S UDISUALLOT,

|Cerd “a1 gg <jypeyures)

sapuphyd-

wanogtT pun szaddpp

(P61) Aung Py qynedg

(LE61) eyOoyyLO NY

(snqBq4s8

quo YsNy yyTAt)

sjospod mmoiq Aart)

OIYBUIg

“Ulo) LOS WH TL

“SUSSY YRoID

iced -ul ge>|reyarey) [(SP6L) Sateq 2 qypedg

soni

(LEGT) 2JO0T WON

(L¢61) wosyove

WOLyBUit]

“UHO,) TOS AVAL ILL

u0Ty

-RIDOSSY W poomparg

seyizprenb

[BI8[EYS PUB sLOSpOT

UOTy

{1egT) wosyor¢ | aarpny purunyseuog | vaneg pun dadily) (L@6T) Wosypee | -eIMosBY pmo‘ “ay szizpionh yafkuoig

| “‘soqizzenb

i sagewuwopop TBI9]9ys. puw spospog

quounvag pun |(R$61) L1t0g 3 FyOedg “IATA

(#61) Aaz9g wy qraody

aSSOyT WLIOT,

anonjUuopy “pRquinjshy

(161) wossou

Toossy ATTY) osr0A,

ueseyoay

Hor

OMOZGL

UB IAY UTEOB TT

auopspuns agin]

161) RB. L, SPECHT, FL F. BROWNELL, BP. N. HEWITT

ufter u detailed ground survey, As the density of the species has heen greatly

altered by fire, woodcutting and clearing, no attempt was made to indicate the

relative dominance of the vurious species, only the presence of a specics in any

arga was delineated.

A reconnaissance soil survey of the areas studied was made, but as Jack-

sun's soil survey (1957) overlaps half of onr area, it is redundant to publish

wu map. Divergent interpretations and notes on the area outside his survey

will be noted in the text.

DISTRIBUTION OF PLANT FORMATIONS

ly urder ta soe the distribution of £, elacophora in the Mount Lofty Ranves

in perspective the distribution of the two major plant formations, dry sclerophyll

forest and savannah woodland, was mapped throughout the area concerned hy

means uf aerial photographs and ground reconnuissunce.

In Fig. 1 the limits of the dry sclorophyll Forests ase shown from the

Barossa Valley (Tanunda) in the north to Lobethal in the south, from the cde

of the Ranges in the west to Mount Pleasant in the east. The formation dues

not appear to extend into areas of the Mount Lofty Ranges to the east of

longitude 139°03’ E,

Adamson and Osbom (1924) noted trees 60 to 70 feet in height, but usually

the cucalypts were somewhat smaller. In the drier limit (20 to 25 inches per

annum) the eucalypts, usually £. fasciculosa, are stunted, twisted and scattered;

the formation is a tall sclerophyll shrub woodland (Wood and Williams, 1960).

This is particularly so on the deep Tertiary sands between Golden Grove, Tea

Tree Gully and Highbury Ueprigs eft al, 195L), and again on the sands extend-

ing from the Barossa Goldfields through Sandy Creek and along the eastern

edge af the Barossa Valley (Campana and Whittle, 1953). Here the soils show

characteristics, such as a0 increase in sodium in the clay complex, typical of

sdlods and solodized solemetz sails (Northcote ef al. 1954), Associated with

these soils, it is not surprismg to find certain mallee species (I. incrassata -

Section 46, Hundred af Maorovoroo; £, gracilis — Barossa Goldfields) appearing

together with Melaleuca uncinata and Baeckea behrii amonyst the usual ussem-

blage of undershrubs. These stands approach a sclerophyll mallee subforma-

tion (Wood and Williams, 1960). This subformation formerly extended some

distance to the north of Fig. 1, but is now largely cleared for vineyurds.

In general, the dey sclerophyll forest formation or auy of its variants is

restricted in its distribution, The savannah woodland formation ts muely more

widespread, [hn addition to the two major plant formations, dry sclerophyll

forest and savannah woodland, there are small areas of savannah associated

with the following soils; Wiesenboden-Lyndach, grey and brown soils of heavy

festive — Tanunda and grey and brown soils of heavy texture ~ Altona (see

Tuhle 1, Northeote, 1959). These are indicated in Fig. I.

TOPOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY

Aspects of the physicgraphy and geology of the area over which Mucalyptns

elacephora is distvibuted (Fig. 1) have been examined by muny geologists aver

the lust eighty years, Earlier work by Scoular (1579, 1850_ 1582), Brown oud

Woodwood (1855), Iloawchin (1906, 1915, 1926), Benson (1909), Llossfeld

(1925, 1935), Enyland (1935), und Alderman (1938, 1942) provided a sound

basis for the more reecnt and comprehensive studies of Sprigg (1945, 1946), Spry

(1931), Sprigg ef al. (1951) and Campana and Whittle (1953, 1955). Most

of the geological strata of the area are of Archaean or Pre-Cumbriaun (Torren-

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANGES 161

sian Series) age. The Archuean recks, yarious schists and gneisses, form the

corg of Fhe ranges and are offen masked by deep beds of Pre-Cambrtin sancd-

stones, grits, quartzites, limestone and phyllites. In some areas, especially cast

of the Willlamstown-Lynadoch fantt line, regional metamorphism has altered

these rocks t6 epidote quartzites, saccharoidal quartzites, marbles, scricite

schists, knotted schists, ete,

During the carly Palaeozoic these beds were extensively folded, viz. Hum-

bug Serub arid Lookout Tower (Warren Reservoir) anticlines; Gould Creek,

Williamstown (along Williamstown-Lyndoch road) and Mount Crawford-

Baressa Range synelines. Subsequently they were extensively pencplained

until little relief was apparent other thun the monadnock steuctures of Mounts

Lofty, Barker, Torrens, Gawler, Crawford, Pewsey Vale Peak and Kitchener.

Meandering streams such as the Onkaparinga, Torrens, North Para and South

Para rivers drained the landscape,

Farly in the Tertiary (Eocene) considerable depths of sands, clay and

ferruginous gravel were deposited in the beds of lakes and strearns on the low-

lying countryside, These non-mirine sediments, ax well as the older rocks, were

subsequently subjected to widespread lateritisation which formed irunstune

crusts resistant to erosion,

Tertiary (Miocene-Pleistocene) tectonic movements rejuvenated the relief

by a general uplift of the hills of the area, Differential block-faulting, related

to the Early Palaeozoic folding, has produced the present orggraphy. In the

area under discussion, the scarps produced by the Para, Fden und Kitchener

Faults dominate the landscape, Considerable erosion by the antecedent

streams (Onkaparinga, Torrens and Para Rivers) and many later ones have

dissected the fault blucks so formed into the present topography. ‘The rate

af clissection is inHuenced by the nature of the rack; racks such as quartzites,

sandstones and yprits resist erosion to produce vugged topography which con-

trasts with the rounded ridges with gentle slopes produced from more easily

weathered tocks.

The laterilic duricrust has also resisted erosion on the plateau surface of

some fault-blocks, e.g. around Paracombe, Tlumbug Scrub and even in small

arcas On the slopes of the former monadnock, Mount Gawler, but, in general,

the laterite has been completely dissected, A general picture of the topo-

graphy can be gained from Fig. 2 on which contours for the 500 feet levels

are indicated. The former monadnock, Mout Kitchener (1,965 feet), Mount

Pewsey Vale Peak (2,064 feet), Mount Crawford (1,844 feet). Mount Guwler

(1,779 teet), Mount Lofty (2,384 feet) and Mount Torrens (1,913 feet) domin-

ate the landscape.

Considerable areas of the Eocene lacustrine deposits are now seen from

the Barossa Valley south-westwards into the Barossa Goldfields district. South

of this district they are found in smull, dissected areas formerly continuons with

the Golden Grove-Paradise area where considerable deposits are still obyituts.

At Paradise they disappear beneath the Upper Eocene marine strata, A similar

arca may be seen in the old lake basin east of Mount Crawford,

Elsewhere the underlying Pre-Cambrian and Archaean tocks have been

exposed, ‘Che Archavan is prominent in the anticline running from the Torrens

Gorge south of Mount Gawler through the Humbug Serul area as far north

as the Barossa Goldfields. Areas. of Archacan rock near Inglewood and Kers-

brook are apparently “gruwulifes derived from lime-magnesia rich sediments by

high-prade regional metamorphism combined with potash and soda metasomat-

ism” (Spry, 1951). These areas were formerly called “Houghton dinrite” by

Benson (1909).

162 R. L, SPECHT, P, 7. BROWNELL, BF. N. HEWIT'T

34°30"

— RAINFALL MAP —

Oo -5A0! = isac' ~2zpo0t

> 200c'

[=]

i 500! |cCoD

(pp0'-|sD0" @. Rai ange

32°40

34745!

aprsol

met Golden

ad Grere

Chan of Ponds

Bours sche

34°5$!

pas*’to!

r3a%5s°

Fig. 2. Rainfall-altitide map of the urea shown in Fig. 1:

WS EUC. ODORATA [33] CASUARINA STRICTA = EUC. OBLIQUA

EUC, LEUCOXYLON Le] CALLITRIS PREISSI| [+ «| EUC. BAXTER|

HU EUC. VIMINALTS ACACIA PYCNANTHA EUC, FASCICULOSA DR

U//. ;

4 EUC, CAMALDULENS!S BANKSIA MARGINATA EUC, ELAEOPHORA

Mt Gawler

TA A TN WATS GE

We yo

ra ffF

Ns,

SX ; (a3

/) my

a5 x AAA

! @ x a y, Wy ie Ny SN

YEW / P?

/ / \\ O 9%

ghnstays HiA@ 7 B

INTL ANT)

y S ® @a i acombe. a/

ane | VMs Je ® : ee,

a oe]

— VEGETATION MAP—

Miles

oO | 2

Sas eee

hig 3, Dehuled vegetation map of area A shown ia Vig. 1. Gvid referenees an the Adelaide doin ordigiiee qrap sie idiot

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANGES Ltis

The basal beds of the Pre-Cambrian rocks (Aldgate sandstone) cuterop

both on the east and the west of these Archaean rocks. The same basal racks,

though highly metamorphosed, alsu outerop along the aniiclinal ridge just

west of the Warren Reservoir (the Lookout Tower Anticlinc),

Considerable depths of slates and phyllites interspersed with many bands

of quartzite and some shallow beds of limestone or dolomite ate prominent in

the younger Pre-Cauibrian autcrops, Ecologically the narrow outcrops of the

Castambul, Montacute and Beaumont dolomites are of little significance. How-

ever, the many quartzitie beds, especially the thick Stonyfell quartzite, play a

large part in the distribution of the vegetation. North of the Torrens Gorge

and west of the Archaean rocks, quartzite outcrops along the Eden scarp in

quite considerable areas; north of the latitude of Golden Grove, however, the

outerops are reduced to narrow bands usually too thin to be of much ecological

significance. To the east of the Archacan core, three major quartzitic outcrops

are found running roughly north and south — one ridge through the Mount

Gould area and two ridges from Mount Crawford forest southward. One of

the latter vuns towards Lobethal and the other towards Mount Torrens, Similar

ridges, though much metamorphosed, may he seen to the north of the Mount

Crawford Forest where they form the backbones of the Mount Crawford-

Barossa Range area.

Palaeozoic schists und schistose quartzites of the Kanmantoo. Series are

prominent on the eastern edge of the area. Granitic rocks have intruded through

them in the Mount Kitchener and Tanunda Creek area.

From the broad ecological viewpoint, there are two major gcoloyical

groups, One group of rocks supports a dry sclerophyl) forest and/or wood-

land formation, viz.:

Cauenozvic . . Tertiary laterites.

Eocene lacustrine sands.

Early Palaeozoic .. Mount Kitchener and Tanunda Creek granites.

Pre-Cambrian . Aldgate sandstone.

(Torrension Series) . Stonyfell quartzites,

Other quartzitic beds if not greatly mternsixed

with slates or phyllites,

Archaean — Schists, gneisses and augen-yneisses-

The other group of rocks supports a savannah woodland formation, viz.

Cacnezcic G Recent alluvial Hoodplains.

Focene marls (near Paradise),

Early Palacozvic .. Kanmantoo schists and schistose quartzites.

Pre-Cambrian . Castambul. Montacute and Beaumont dolo-

mites.

(Torrensian Series) . Lower and Upper phyllites with their minor

quartzitic bands,

Glen Osmond slates.

Archaean .. Granulites (formerly called “Houghton

diorite”).

SOILS

The diverse geological formations mentioned above have had a marked

influence on the soils to be found in the area. Since Specht and Perry published

their ecological suryey in 1948, a number of soil surveys has been made in the

Mount Lotty Ranges, viz. Rix and Hutton (1953), Aitchison and Sprigg (1954),

Northcote et al, (1954), Clarke (1957), Jackson (1957), Northcote and de Mooy

(1957), and Northcote (1959). Table 1 summarises the soil-geological relation-

, P. N. HEWITT

P. F. BROWNELL,

R. L. SPECHT,

164

C0-0=d 28 JuROyIUsIs gyou='"oe NL

“pasn BRA 4S0q OUTZeTTYyNG og ‘penbotin o10a. Aoyy aay fpenbe o1aM saoueeA oTT[M 4884-3 Aq 4ILO poTareo aoM SoSATRUY yy

‘los “3 OOL/'ainbe--wW 4

«eh o[qeasueyoxny (at

aS oyeosuvyoxg, (ut

aS] o[quosuuyox yy (1

«8O aqvasuerpxg (1

SUOL]BO aIqResuUBYpx

% ION SP eploypgy)

Jo SIBS 9qNpOS [BIOT,

(37%) UIMIsseqo,¢

Cd %) snaoydsoyg

(*N.%) WesoaqIN

ESN 930-+F ST-0 él PSO: 8-0 18 €-0

WW: > 860: 82-0 ral 680° 89-0 “OLE & -0

SN Tee: 8€-1 ar ILI: + 68-T LE € -0

10->d 8TE-+ 80-E ra SII: GL Le € -0

SN 1100+ + 900-0 LI 1z00- 800-0 OF aro

ton 1300+ F9T0-0 1T 8E00- + EZ0-0 OF ar-0

ton 890° ST-0 8 SF0-+ 68-0 1G & -0

10° >d @6000+ 400-0 6L 100: = 980-0 ¥E ZL-0

10+ >d FOLO’ FFL0-0 8L SZL0- Lat 65 a1-0

10->d L90-F O4+S 9% ZIL- + LF-9 oe Z1-0

qe queOyrUusig UvEUI JO IOI prepuvIg pue uve], | serduues | UeeUT Jo Joly paepuRig pues uvey | sopdures (soTpour)

BOUSIOU TT 4 & uoynuoy Ihydosapg fac jo "ON “UOUDULLO WT PUDIPOO 44 YOUUORVOS jo‘on | yideq frog

Aqsedoig peowimyy

‘sesuey Aqjor] GUNOP 84} UL SUCIgRULIO] puL[pooM YeUURARS puB Jao} PAYdosepes Arp uLoay sopdures [los Jo sasATeue peoTUEyD

‘6 GIAVL

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOVTY RANGES 165

ships found by these authors aud compares them with the broad classification

used by Speeht and Perry. Lt is obvious that the two plant formations of the

area are fourtd on 4» wide variety vf soil associations. In 1948, Specht and Perry

analysed some 23 soi prutiles, osnally only subdivided into A and B horizons,

fur texture, hydrogen ion concentrations, phosphorus and nitrogen. These pre-

liminary analyses indicated that nutrient status of the soil controlled the distri-

bution of the two plant formations found in the area. The dry sclorophy]l forest

was found on those soils of Jow nutrient status (as indicated by phosphorus

and nitrogen levels); the savannah woodland on soils with higher fertility,

Detailed soil surveys of subsequent workers have been accompanied by

comprehensive mechanical and chemical analyses af typical profiles by the

Soil Cheinisiry Section of the Soils Division of C.S.LN-O. Ft is possible now

fo contrast the fertility of soils of these two formations with much greater pre-

cision, As most of Specht and Perry's analyses were made on the surface twelve

inches of soil, comparable values were calculated from the more recent data.

The levels thus calculated though lower thun those of shallower layers of soil,

showed the same order of difference as that observed in the surface two or three

inches, Some analyses (siamely, exchangeable cations, percentage potassium)

had been made on only the surkice two or three inches of soil, The data, thus

computed, are presented in Table 2.

Values for hydrogen ion concentration, nitrogen, phosphorus, exchangeable

caleium and potassium for soils of the savannah woodland formation are signifi-

cantly higher than those of the dry sclerophyll forests, Other analyses (total

potassium, total soluble salts, chlorides, exchungeable magnesium and sodium),

although they appear lower in soils of the dry sclerophyll forest formation, are

not significantly different. In effect, the hypothesis of Specht and Perry (1448)

that the savannah woodland is Funnd on soils af bigher fertility than that nf fhe

dry sclerophyll Forest is confirmed, :

CLIMATIA

Recently Coote and Cornish (1958) made a detailed statistical analysis

of the rainfall of the Mount Lofty Ranges. A elose correlation between rain-

fall, altitude, latitude and longitude was shown. From this they were able to

construct maps of the mean monthly rainfall of the Ranges,

Unfortunately they did not compute mean annual isohyets. Using their

monthly regression equations (sec Martin, 1960), mean annual raintall was

calculated for every 5-second latitude and longitude intersectinn of the aves-

These figures, plus the infrequent rain-giuge records, were used ta Construct

the annual raintall-topography map of Vie. 2. The high peaks of ME Kitchener,

Mi. Pewsey Vale, Mt. Gawler and the country to the south of Millbrook Reser

voir induce the highest rainfall (33 tm 40 inches per annum) of the area. Much

lower annual rainfall (less thar 20 inches per annum) occurs on the lowlands

to the west and north as well as in the rain shadow towards the east.

As indicated in the first paper in this series (Specht and Perry, 1948), this

rainfall has a well-marked winter maxitnum, coinciding with low temperatures

(mean July temperature is 45° F.), alternating with a summer mininuun when

temperatures are high (mean January temperature is 635° F.). ‘This is a typical

Mediterranean climate.

Distribution of the two plant formations, dry sclerophyll forest and savannah

woodland, is litthe Influenced by climate in this area hiihaine Figs. | and 2).

The Castaumbul-Lobetiu! area may be an exception where the higher rainfall

(greater than 35 inches per annum) may have markedly influenced the fertility

VEGETATION MAP — BAROSSA GOLDFIELDS

‘AN Im) OO OF

9M op 80000

A .

\ —Joood s

Wa) Fee 2 9 é \We ®

%5 8 ANN o ® :

OX a oy @ BA

@oa\Ip paog BO tA)

Ap 9000 0|0 OG 5/000 ON, \?

Fi ogoonooooaou g hb 0 00 0/

§ Blo coc one do/0g

\ eV @) e7990 C00 CHG/O

@® j/ob000000 0000

pom ag00q90008 o\O

Yaosgoooa0acnu 0 G_o4

ooboagap o°0

Ba 84

=] €UC ODORATA ls A

al , EUC, FASCICULOSA

PS var ANGUSTIFOLIA °

(with E. fase|culosa)

EUG, LEUCOXYLON EUC, ELAEOPHORA

(with some E. fasciculosa)

///) EUC. CAMALDULENSIS [9 | EUC, GRACILIS

(with €, fasciculosa)

EUC, HEMIPHLOIA [Fe]

LALEUCA UNCINATA

var, MICROCARPA = MELALEY M

[| CASUARINA STRICTA *.,)| BAECKEA BEHRII

Miles

CALLITRIS PREISSII © + (

_ ah —___1

Fig. 4. Detailed yegetation map of Harossa Goldfields, Area D of

Fig. I. Grid references on a ri inilitary ordnance map are

indicated.

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANGES 187

of soils such as Lobethal and Kanyaroo Creek associations im favour of the dry

scleropliyll forest (see Specht and Perry, 1948, p. 103).

However, distribution of individual species within each plant formation

4s peuhety influenced by climate, especially microclimate, as will be shewn

WlOW,

DISTRIBUTION OF EUCALYPTUS ELAKOPHORA

(1) in the Mount Lofty Ranges

The distribution of Eucalyptus elacophora in the Mt. Lolty Ranges is indi-

cated in Fig. 1, The species does extend w short distance outside this boundary,

hut always as an insignificant part of the community and then often represented

by trees which suggest that they are hybrids of E, elaeophora and E. visinalis

(probably not eyen pure £. viminalis but hybrids hetween it and E, aremaphloia

(Prvor, 1955b) —formerly considered as E. viminalis var. huberiana by Bur-

bidge, 1947). Such Jimited areas of these hybrid forms may be seen on the

Tertiary luterites just west of Tungkillo (Jat, 34°52’S., long. 139°00'E.). on the

narrow quurtaite outerop ramming north from Mt. Torrens ta the River Torrens,

aid on the narrow, metamorphosed quartzite ridges just north nf Mennt

Crawford. This information is contrary to that of Jacksou (1957, p. 13). who

stated that L. elaeaphora was co-dominant with E. fasciculosa to the east of

the longitude of Birdwood, #, elaeophora is really quite rare in this area,

In all areas, 2. elacophare is found ouly in the dry selerophyll forcst forma-

lion, Within that formation, it appears to be much more widespread than

originally thought (Adamson and Osborm, 1924; Wood, 1937), being found on

Tertiary laterites, Aldgate sandstone, Stonyfell quartzites us well as the Archaeun

schists and gneisses. Small pockets of the specics also extend onto the ply ilites

of low nutrient status i presumably leached by the rainfall greater than 35 inches

pre unum), though these pockets are rare, In fact, the species may he find

an all rovks supporting a dry sclerophyll forest mentioned ir: Table 2, except

the deep Eocene lacustrine sands and the Mount Kitehener-Tanunda Creek

granites, The deep sands are found on the drier limit of the species thus pre-

chiding: its establishment. The Tanunda Creck Granites appear to be the most

infertile soils of the area, possibly too infertile to support FE, claeaphera, only

emarled E. baxleri and Xantharrhova semiplana growimy, there.

It is clear from Tig. 3 that the distribution of F. elacophora overlaps that

ot E, obliqua, £, fuscieulosa, and even the small area of EL. baxteri on the

western slopes of Mount Gawler, Because of this overlap, the mean soil data

shown in Table 2 for the dry scleropliyll forest, were almost identical with

those for the component eucalypt species.*

The rainfall limits of E, elaeophora are well defmed on the map, On the

drier limit, the species is first found in isolated pockets amongst 12. fusciculosa

on the skeletal quartzites on top of the Eden scarp (Anstey’s Lill-Golden Grove).

‘The species seems to oceur in the wetter habitats of gullies and southerly slopes,

This area lies approximately along the 27-28 inch annual isohyet. Not far to

the east of the escarpment the soil profile becomes well developed on qnartzites

allied to those on the scarp. Here J¢. elaeuphora is widespread, sometimes co-

dominant with E. fasciculosa, somelimes in almost pure stands.

Farther cast, 2, claeophora extends into the wetter areas of the Archacozoic

racks (with or without lateritic remnants), In the Paracombe area it again

*'The limited soil date far E. haxteri were the only exceptions; percentage nitregen

(Q(47), perventage phosphormms (0004), exchangeable calcium (2°12 milli-cquivalcuts

pce) and exchangeable magnesium (0-5 milli-aquivulents qe.) were half to twe+thirds

that af the mean for the formation F. élacophore was absent from all these: sails.

168 KR. L. SPECHT, P. PF. BROWNELL, P. N. WEWITT

forms almost pure stands, mixed occusionally with trees of E. fasciculosa, Tow-

ever, in the wettest part of the area around the massif of Mount Gawler, the

species is greatly admixed with EF, fasctculosa and cspecially with E. obliqua.

On these Archacozoic rocks, E. fasciculosa is mainly found with E, elagophora

on shallow soils usually with a northerly aspect. On deeper soils FE. obliqua is

found co-dominant with £. elaeophera and forms almost pure stands in the

wettest sites on the east side of Mount Gawler and on the ridge to the west of

Millbrook Reservoir. It is apparent then that the upper ramfull limit of E.

elaeophora in the area is 35 to 36 inches per annum.

The lower rainfall limit of 27-28 inches per annum shown on Fig. 3 may be

a litle high. The species is present in small areas of deep infertile soil on the

Tertiary

a Lateritie

x Soils

7 Barossian

= Complex

Quartzites Be

k- & wy te ALR GUR

< Sandstones SOLS SS, MATURE PODSOLS

A OO

Be eA bak RED BROWN GREY BROWN “GREY BROWN

_ ® Sturhan EARTHS PODSOLS . PODSOLS

es tine {HIGH NUTRIENT) (LOW — NUTRIENT)

DEGRADED

= Limestone PEHOAHAS

= NO LIMESTONE

IS 20) 25 3a 35 40 45

RAINFALL iN INCHES

Fig. 5, Diagram ilustrating the distribution of Eucalyptus elaeophora in relation to

sails and rainfall. The figure is alterad slightly from that given by Specht and Perry

(1948); the schists and tneisses of the Barossian Complex are found in rainfall areas

as low as 23 inches per dnnum. Hatching from right to Jeft (downwards) indicates

presence on south-facing aspects only, Cross hatching indicates presence on Lath

aspects. Broken horizontal lines indicate presence only on soils of high water-retaining

vapacity,

Barossa Goldfields (Fig, 4), where. although meteorological records are scanty,

the rainfall may be as low as 23 inches per annum. Here, however, the soil

probably has better water-relationships than those found in areas of similar

rainfall on Fig, 3, as it is a deep suil with a clay-loam, A horizon.

It appears then that E, elaeophora can grow on a wide range of infertile

soils which characteristically support a dry sclerophyll forest. Exceedingly low

fertility nay exclude the specics for it is not found on deep sands or on soils

developed from Tanunda Creek granites where E. baxteri or E. faseiculosa

survive. In general, the species extends from approximately 27 to 36 inches of

rainfall per annum, although it may be found in drier areas (ay low ag 23 inches

per annum) in moist pockets. This. distribution is summarized in Fig. 5.

These climatic and edaphic limits give some chies which may explain

why KE. elaeophora is not found farther to the sonth, Much of the Ranges

169:

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANGES

‘STIOS UIT pue

; “BIIDJNA INOYFNo1py spepiqey aetip oynt spussxe

néoydoanja ‘y fpakoams veae aya jo [jRyVIwA TMUIUTET oYp St SIT) ‘NORMAL AYOT “PAT AYA UW) PURs ayy Jo Ga4UAD OY? doy UIFSUEPIBIEYD eve 1] prOpAeuZy

“FAL JO S804) ASpuLpYysiy ayy wi ovaydoanps “gq jo seus [augan qe Weg, sayany on [EK ‘any | nMoyeFuony ,, RUTPaWMOTUY y ov seanqeredua} pepavvey,

HOL-SP (E261) aBpoy | aqRps aod ‘so91s AySoyy ‘eT sayaut Ne-BT | “(4805 OOO'E 40) GUO'S-O0E jeueuss) | 89715 TLV

(FEGT) UEOD s}osougy] *(qa0y

A-0LOF (8661) odd | pus spospod pourwap [aM | ‘wd soysut 92-6L | O00" - OO") SpURLysary WOTROS] OrRMOTY

“(ya0y

‘quotacdopiaop apyousd 000'2-G0G‘T) sedoys qsve

AeOL-r (661) Oro0;~ | OTT YW [los Aoypeys | ‘wd ssyaui tg-e¢ | puv yjmos — spunyargy BULIBATY “S

“(qaoy

OUL'LQ0g) eFuRy suo

| | -uspuacy fo sqaadse qa

“WAZOUSEIA pure UWON ‘SILO POP

‘(uo Apues pues UrROT “SUNS BSE PUB apEpATT fo

A0o-eF (eget) prog | Ags) spospod ‘pros pRaIopATy | wed seydur gp-ay08 | kodoys deoys pue soBpry | seewey Suouapueg

(sprog

| sraded “8: B|C/EnoOABy WO aaMop ey

dateco-er | aI} 772 7a yvady | ‘soynoyR] “spIOs oLfospog | ABUL) urd seyour yEe-te | (7 OO8'L-008) SPUelYysry | setuey AqyoT nmoy

“(]tosqns !

| Avia WAG Treo, Apes) |

4T-OL-LF | (GEG) teasMooYy | sjospod ‘jios — pRqoTaay ‘wd Souatll O€-LZ | (je28] OOE'L) SPURTTERIE, | SITET OaRTD Wreqsa AA

-ayizzienb rel (Sats atpy saATEy

exch BF (OFG1) BuasUoOg | Mor sTospod “Pos peyapayR_ | SeyoUL OZ Weyy doywary | oF YF HOYT) SpuRTqaoy | saepullg wreyqynog

renh ptasterttat (ad QEy, S19

(quay 8 Arey

49° SuIpNpour apis

*SOTanoo ns: Uisyyiow uo syeed

(‘WoT}RATIMATLUOD ‘(seqizqjaenb aig o7 loo QOe*Z UOIg | ¢) PuNog wuad[rM

vOc8L-0 Jeunsisd) aeyoorg | punog) syoja yor ur} ‘ed gayout gg ‘xoudchy ispuelysryy | sulpunoedams sity qsny ‘ot

(drenue p

pur Amp) . ;

ainyeredure4 oomeleyay plog samuary [peyurey: Aydaasodoy, 7 AQI[ROO"T oyBag

Ajyquour

user

‘oIpRaysny Jo aired snowPa ui pioydoanjs snjdhjwong Jo VoNNiaystp oy} Suyporpwo09 sroqoyy prauowUOT AU

RTA E

170 K. L. SPECHT, P. F. BROWNELL, PL, N. HEWITT

to the south, centred around the Mount Lofty massif, have a rainfall

greater than 35 inches per annum (Specht and Perry, 1948, p, 93), The

only areas which support the dry sclerophyll forest formation to the west

of the isohyet are (1) Black Hill, (2) Rocky Hill, Movialta, (3) Stonyfell Ridge,

until the Eden-Moana Fault Black is reached at Belair (Specht and Perry, 1948,

p. 115). &. elagophora is found in small pockets on Black Hill, not on the dricr

side where the soil is predominantly steep, skeletal quartzite, and thus a drier

habitat than is at first apparent, but on the mature podsolic soils developed on

the eastern side of the hill, Such mature podsols are rare ou the west side ot

Fig. 6. Distribution of Fucalyptus claeophora throughout Australia. The areas 1 <0

4 in South Australia are discussed by Specht e al. (this paper), Boomsma (1949),

Boomsma (1946), and Boomsma. (1960), respectively. The distribution in ihe eastern

States is mainly after Clifford (1953).

Rocky Hill and Stonyfell Ridge where the rainfall is less than 35 inches per

annum. In addition to the eflect of distance on the availability of seed, it is

unlikely that these sites are suitable habitats for germination and establishment

of E. elagophora.

Suitable soils are even less common on the eastern sides of the Ranges in

areas where the rainfall falls below 35 inches per annum (Fig. 2). Small ridges

like Mount Charles and Mount Barker are found, but they are so isolated from

E. elaeophora stands that the species has not yet established itself. To the

north of its present distribution in the Mount Lofty Ranges, both the soils

(solonized sands in the Barossa Valley and very infertile soils on Tanunda Creck

granites) and the climate appear to be so unsuitable as to preclude further

spread of the species,

PLANT BCOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANCES 471

It appears then that this relic specics has effectively occupied most suitable

sites within the area and is prevented from expanding both to the north und the

south by unfavourable climate and soils,

(2) In Other Localities in Australia

Fig. 6 indicates the scattered distribution of L. elacophora throughout Aus-

tralia, Ttis found in disjunet areus extending in an are from the highlands oeur

Queensland, through New South Wales, Victoria to the Mount Lofty Ranges

und then up into the Flinders Ranges. The species is thus one of the many

examples which indicate that major climatic changes have occurred in Australia

in the not-so-distant past (Crocker and Wood, 1947),

Some environmental factors which may control the distribution of the

species in these disjunct areas are summarized in Table 3. In all areas noted

in this table, &. elaeophora is found in either a dry sclerophyll forest formation

ur in closely allied communities, It is usually found on ridges, always on inter-

tile podsalic or related soils, the depth of which depends largely on the rainfull,

wu. deeper soils on the drier sites; shallow, skeletal, or exposed soils on the

wetter sites, In all cases, the soils are well-drained.

As Rodger (1953) indicated, E. elacaphora is found in a wide range of

climates from Mediterranean type with winter rainfall (South Australia),

through a climate where rainfall is uniform throughout the year (Victoria

southern New South Wales), to a climate where summer rainfall tends to pre-

daminate (northern New Sonth Wales),

In many areas, the highest rainfall where £. elacophore occurs is far below

its upper limit, e.g. in Flinders Ranges, Clare Hills, and $.K. Riverina, WTow-

ever, i the Mount Lofty Nanges, and the Monaro Region, the upper rainfall

jimit is certainly reached, Jt can be seen in Table 3 that under conditions of

winter rainfall the EB. elaeophera generally oceurs in areas receiving a higher

mean annual rainfall than it does under conditions of uniform or summer rain-

full ineidence, e.g, the limits of mean annual rainfall for the distribution of L,

elaeophora in the Mount Lofty Ranges (winter rainfall incidence) and in the

Monro Region (uniform vaintall incidence) are compared below:

Mean Annual Rainfall (in. ) Ratio Mewn Annual Rainfall

Mount Lofty Monaro Region Monaro Region Mt. Lofty

Lower Limit 27 19 0-73

Upper Limit. 36 36 (72

A possible exception to the above is the reported acenrrence by Clifford

(1953) of E. elweophora in areas in the Dandenong Ranges, Victoria, with

nnitorm rainfall incidence reeciving up to 48 inches mean annual rainfall. How-

ever. E. elacophora lhybridises freely with L£. vonivoulyx, a species Common in

wetter areas, (hus making it diffienlt ta determine the limits of the bwo species

{Clifford and Binet, 1954). The upper limit of the mean annual rainfall given

by Clifford (1953) may be too high.

The mean annual raintall probably gives a poor indication of the water

available at any particular time of the year for the maintenance of stands of

&. claeophora. VWucalypts generally make most active foliage growth in the

summer (Specht und Rayson, 1957; Burbidge, 1960) und losses of moisture due

to transpiration are highest at this period (Martin, L960). It would,, therefore.

be expected that the amounts of water available (as rain and stored soil mois-

ture) would he more critical at this time of year than al any other for the main-

tenance of stands of EF. e¢laeophora. Thus, the amounts of available water at

euch month in localities where E, ¢laeophora occurs under conditions of different

172 R. L. SPECHT, P. FP. BROWNELL. P. 6. HEWITT

raintall incidence have been calculated by the method used by Martin (1960)

and are shown in Fig. 7.

Tt has been necessary. to use the relationship established by Martin (1960)

between amount of available water and the Index of Evapotranspiration in

communities of E. elacophora in the Mount Lofty Ranges throughout all caleu-

lations, as, due to lack of data, the relationship has not been determined in ather

areas, In all these calculations it has been assumed that up to four inches of

water can be stored within the root zone without loss by drainage.

Tt can be seen in Fig. 7 that at Queanbeyan or at Tarcutta (uniform rain-

fall incidence) the amounts of available water during the summer months (viz.

January, February and March) are about twice as great as at Mount Crawford

ar at Clare (winter rainfall incidence), even though the mean annual rainfall

at the sites of E. elaeophora at Mount Crawford (28 inches) or at Clare (27-30

inches )* is greater than at Queanbeyan (22 inches) or at Tarcutta (26 inches),

tn winter rainfall areas with a mean annual rainfall Jess than Mount Craw-

ford, it is conceivable that the amuunt of available water during the summer

months may fall too low to support growth of FB, elacophara. Summer rainfall,

however, cnables this species to grow in areas of even lower annual precipitation,

DISTRIBUTION OF OTHER EUCALYPTS

All the other encalypts found north mf the Torrens George have distribution

patterns almost identical with those indicated by Specht and Perry (1948) fur

the area to the south.

A. Spectes of the Sacannah Woodland

1, Lucalyptus odorata is found in only the north-west corner of Fig. 3

(Section 2165, Hd. Yatala, with a few isulated trees also in Sections 2180 and

5575). However, in the drier habitats to the west of the area, it is the dominant

tree in the savannah woodland formation,

Te is common along the uncleared areas of the Para scarp (e.g, Sections

8102-5, 2108, 2110, 2114-6, 2l44, 2152 and 2284, Td, Yatala, as well as areas to

the nurth), aud in small pockets on the Para Fault Block (Sections 2148, 2167

ani 1560, [Id. Yatala), which have escaped agricultural devclopment. Much af

this area lies within the 20 to 25-inch isohyets ou reayonably tertile soils. In

tle areas under survey, the species rarely extends into sites with vainfall as high

ws 30 inches per annum, as was noted by Specht and Perry further to the

south, e.g. into the Belair National Park. The small stands in Sections 2186 and

recorded by Pryor, 1955a, in the vicinity of Burnside) in Sections 5461 and 3476,

Ha. Yatala, were the only trees observed in the higher rainfall zone (25-30 inches

yer annum). This was vot surprising as most of the fertile soils of this zune

were deep, alluvial soils probably with a high water-retaining capacity, quite

unlike the shallow, almost skeletal, soils of National Park.

2. Eucalyptus leucoxylon is a coramon tree in the savaamali woodland forma-

tion between the 25 to 30 inch isohyets (Figs, 3 and 4). Here the spzcics

* The mean annual rainfall estimated by Boomsma (1949) for the actual’ sites af EF.

elaeophora in the Western Clare Hills, given above. is greater than that recorded at Clare,

from where the nican monthly data wore ubtamed for the valculatian of the available water

at each mooth. The difference between the means of annual rainfall at Clare ancl at the

actual situs of E, elacophora can be attabuted te difterences: in their altitudes. This tapa-

graphic effeet would be mach more significant in the winter months when most of the ria

is reoolved in this district, and the effect in summer months world be almost negligible.

The wamounts of available water al each month during the summer would, therefore, be ex-

pected to he approximately Ue sanve at Clare as at the actual sites of KM. elaeophora.

forms pure stands over the rolling countryside of the Para Fault Block and

again on the broad, fertile ridges of the Eden Fault Block. The deeper soils of

these broad ridges, as mentioned above, have a high water-retaining capacity,

thus excluding £. odorata in favour of E. leucoxylon.

(inches )

AVAILABLE MOISTURE

contrast to the sharply dissected topography further south where shallow soils

and aspect play a large part in the distribution of the two species in this climatic

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANGES

‘ Tarcutta

“Queanbeyan

Mount ~

Crawtord

\Clare

J FM AM JJ AS ON OD

MONTH

Fig. 7. The amounts of available moisture (rainfall plus stored

moisture) in localities where E. elaeophora occurs. ‘The amounts

of available moisture for each month were calculated by the method

used by Martin (1960). The relationship between the amount of

available water and Index of Evapotranspiration in communities of

E, elaeophora in the Mount Lofty Ranges established by Martin

(1960) was used in all calculations, owing to lack of data from

other arcas. It was assumed that up to four inchcs of water could

be stored within the root zone withont loss by drainage.

zone (Specht and Perry, 1948).

In areas with rainfall greater than 30 inches per annum, the species is re-

stricted to exposed ridge tops, the rest of the savannah wvodland is dominated

by E, camaldulensis.

This is markedly in

174 K, L, SUECHT, PF, BROWNELL. a. N. HEWITT

The species is also found in the more fertile valleys of the Archaeuzoie

cumplex, especially around Mount Gawler, where the vegetation is typically

a dry selerophyll forest formation. This distribution is identical with the stands

ol £, leweexylon tonguing into the dry sclerophyll forest at Blewitt Springs to

the south (Specht and Perry, 1948),

3. Eucalyptus viminalis is almost invariably found on southern aspects

within the 30 to 36 inch isohyets, in habitats identical with those in which it is

found south of the Torrens Gorge. Its distribution north of the Torrens Gorge

is markedly restricted, F. camaldulensis appears to occupy all suitable habitats.

‘The hybrid, £. viminalts x £, dromaphloia (Pryor, 1955b), formerly referred

tu us Ky viminalis var. huberiana, is found on the quartzitic ridges running north

from Mount Torrens and again north of Mount Crawford. These hybrids are

in communities allied to a dry sclerophyll forest and appear to replace E£,

rlacophora, care trees of which may be found amony the hybrids.

4, Eucalyptus camaldulensis confined to stream-heds below 27 inches per

aunium spreads ont over both north and south aspects of most hills with rain-

fall between 27 to 35 Inches per annum. As the headwaters of the Torrens and

Para Rivers lie within this rainfall belt, much of the savannal: woodland of the

wea is dominated by /. camaldulensis, with only small pockets of E. leucoxytem

und E vineinelis,

The enyironmental range is identical with that indicated by Specht and

Perry | 1948),

5. Nucalyptus hemiphloia var, microvarpa. Three specimens of this tree

were found to the north of the Uurossa Reservoir (Fig. 4),

6. Callttris preisstii Numerons small stands of this species occur on the

shallaw Eocene lacustrine sands in the Golden Grove. and Barossa Goldfield

areus (Pigs. 3.und 4). In both areas the anmual rainfall is about 25 inches.

Wi. Species of the Dry Sclerophyll Fevest

1, Eucalyptus fusciculosa occurs in ahnost pure stands in the dry sclero-

pliyll forest formation on the infertile Golden Grove lacustrine sands, the

quartaitic soil of the Eden (Ansteys Hill) scarp, and tho literitic soils of the

Barossa Coldfields. Above a rainfall of 30 inches per annum, the species is inter-

nixed with L. elaeophora and_E. obliqua. In the wettest locality east of Mount

Cawler (approximately 36 inches per annum) the species is only a minor com-

ponent in the exposed habitats of the E. oblique forest.

This distribution is similar to that observed by Specht and Perry (1945)

ts the south of the Torrens Gorge.

2, Eucalyptus baxteri was found by Specht and Perry (1948) to vecupy

only the mast impoverished soils where the rainfall was above 30 inches per

annum, Such» habitats. are rare north of the Torrens Gorge. One small area

of lacustrine sandstone is found on the eastern slopes of Mount Gawler; the

Tanundis Creek granites are alse very low in nutrients. E, baxteri is found on

both these sites (Fig. 1), and, as vet, has not been recorded anywhere else in

the dry selerophyll forest of this area,

The disjunet distribution af this species is of note: Black FLill, Mount

GCuwler, Tanunda Creek.

3. Eucalyptus obliqua, noted by Specht and Perry (1948) as being present

vnly uhove 33 inch isahyet (widespread above 35 inches per atmum) on infertile

soils, occupies similar habitats on the Archaeoznie rocks from the River Torrens

youll) of Millbrook Reservoir to Momt Gawler. On the ridge ty the west oF

Milfirook Reservoir and on the eastern slopes of Mount Gawler the species is

almost Ehe sole tree of the dry scleropbyll forest. Flsewhere, below 35 inches

per annum, it is co-dominant with E. elaeaphora and E. fasienlose.

PLANT ECOLOGY OF MOUNT LOFTY RANGES 175

C, Species of the Sclerophyll Shrub Woodland { Mallee )

1. Euealytus odorata var. angustifalia was recorded by Specht and Perry

(1948) irom two small arcas on sandy, detrital soils at the foot of Black Hill.

The same “whipstick mallec” is found in several stands in the Barossa Goldfields

(Fig. 4), on sandy soils and almost identical rainfall (25 inches per annum),

2. Eucalyptus wracills. This species, together with Melaleuca uncinata, is

faire on the solodic sands of Rocene lacustrine origin im the Barossa Goldfields

(Fig. 4),

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The authors wish to thank Mr. K, M. Cellier, Division of Mathematical

Statisties, C.8.J.R.O., Adelaide, for help and advice in the statistical analysis

of the data shown in Table 2; Mr. B. Mason,’Geovraphy Department, University

af Adelaide, for guidance in the snalysis of climatological data; and Mr, K. H.

Nestheate, Division of Soils. C.S.1,.R,0., Adelaide, for help in the preparation of

able LL,

REFERENCES

Anamson, R. S., and Osxons, T..G, B, 1924, The Beolowy of the Euealypins Forests of ihe

Mount Lofty Ranges [Adelaide District), South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. §, Aust.,

48. pp. 87-144.

Atropson, G. D., and Srrice, R. C., 1954. The Soils and Cedlugy of Adelaide and Suburbs.

$, Aust. Dept. Mines Bull. No. 32,

Appsraman, A, BK. 1938 Augen —Gneisses in the Mumbuy Serub Area. Sonth Austilie:

Trans.. Roy, Soc. S, Aust, 62, pp, 168-L81,

AtverMan, A, R,. 1942, Sillimonite, Kyanite and Clay Deposits oear Williamstown, South

Australia, Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Anst., 66, pn. 3-14,

Benson, W. N., 1909. Petrographic notes on Certain Pre-Cambrian Rocks of the Mount

lofty Ranges, with Special Relerence to the Gealagy of thy Honuhton District, Trans.

Ray. Soc. $. Aust, 33, pp. 101-140.

Boomsara, C. D.. 1946. The Vegetatuni of the Southern Flindess Ranges, South Australia,

‘Frans, Ray. Soc, S. Aust,, 70, pp. 259-276,

Boomsma, C, D,, 1949. The Ecology of the Western Clare Hills, South Australia, ‘lrans,

Roy. Soc. $. Aust, 72, pp. 216-22).

Boomsma, CG. D., 1960. Notes on the Genus Evealyptus in South Australia, Trans, Roy. Suc

S, Aust. 83, pp, 195-198.

Brown, H. ¥. L., and Woonwoon, IH. P,, 1885, Geological Map of Barossa and Para Wirra,

S. Anst. Parl, Pap. No, 178,

Tawumer, Naney T., 1947, Key to the South Australian Species of Eucalyptus L’Herit.

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 71, pp. 137-147.

Bunnince, pla T., 1960. The Phytogeography of the Australian Region, Aust. J. Bot,,

8, pp. 75-212.

Campana, B.. and Wirtz, A. W. C., 1953. Ceologicul Map of the Gawler Military Shect.

S. Aust. Dept. Mines Geolovical Atlas of South Australia.

Cameana, B, 1955. The Geology of the Gawler Military Sheet, Explmation of the Guu-

logical Map. S. Aust, Dept. Mines Report of Investigations No. 4

Quanke, A, K, P., 1957. The Laboratory Examination of Soils from TIunidreds of ‘alana

and part Fara Wirra, Caunty Adelaide, S.A. G.S.1.R.0. (Aust.). Div. of Suilk. Div.

Ren, 9/57.

Curronp, H.'f., 1953. On the Distribution of the Species of Eucalyptus im the Region at

the Dandenong Hange. Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 65, pp. 30-55.

Curronv, H. T., and Binet, F. E., 1954, <A Quantitative Study of a Presumed Hybrid

Swarm between Eucalyptus claeophora and E, gontocalyx, Aust. J. Bot.,.2, pp, 325-336.

Coorn, G, G., aud Gonnisn, E. A., 1958. The Correlation of Monthly Rainfall with Position

and Altitude of observing Stations in South Australia. C\8.1-R.0, (Aust.), Diy, Math.

Stat. Tech. Pap. No, 4,

Cosirm, A. B,, 1954. A Study of the Eeosystems of the Monaro Region of New South Wales.

Government Printer, Sydney,

Crocker, BR, L., ancl Woon, |. G,, 1947 Some Historical Influences on the Development of

the South Australiim Vegetation Communities and their Benring on Concepts and

Classification in Ecology. Trans. Roy. Soe. S, Aust,, 71, pp. 81-136.

196 tt. L. SPECHT, P. F BROWNELL, P. N. HEWLIT

FeNuLANU, N., 1035. Petrographie Notes on Intrusions of the Houghton Magma in the

Mount Lofty Ranges. rans, Roy, Soc, 8. Aust., 59, pp. L-15. | ‘

Hossruio, FP. 5.. 1925. The Tanunda Creek Granite and its Field Relations. Trans, Roy,

Soc. S. Aust. 49, pp. 191-197,

Hossvkup, P. S., 1935, ‘the Geology of Part of the North Mount Lofty Ranges, Trans. Hoy,

Soc, 5. Aust., 59, pp, 16-67, J

Howerm, W., 1906. Geoloyy of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Part I. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.

Aust, 30, pp. 227-262,

Nowentn, W,, i915, A Geological Sketeh-map, with Descriptive Notes on the Upper and

Lower ‘Torrens Limestoncs in the Type District, ‘Trans, Roy, Sec, $, Aust, 39, pp. 1-15,

Howema, W., 1926, The Geology of the Barossa Ranges und Neighbourhood in Relation

to the Geological Axis of the Country, Trans. Roy. Soc, 5, Aust., 50, pp. 1-16.

Jacgson, E, A,, 1957, A Survey of the Soils and Their Utilization in Portion of the Mount

0, 21,

Maxttn, Hevene A.. 1960. Sclerophyll Comimunities at the Tnglewood District, Mount Lofty

Ranges - Their Distribntion in Relation to Micro-environment. M.Sc. 'lhesis, University

of Adelaide.

Moon, C, W.E.. 1953, The Vegetation of the South-Eastern Riverina, New South Wales. L.

_ ‘The Climax Communities. Aust. J. Bot., 1, pp. 485-547.

Nurriucerr, K. H., and Moox, C. J. ne, 1957, Sails and Laud Use iu the Barossa District,

South Australia, Part A, The Angaston-Springton Area, Part B. The Tanunda Creek

Triwl Hill Area, €.S.0.R.0, (Aust.), Div, Soils and Lanl Use Setics No, 22

Nowrncorr, K, H., Russsnn, J. S., aud Weurs, C. B., 1954. Soils and Lantl Use in the

Vearossu District, South Australia. Fone 1, The Nurtootpa Area, -C.5,,A.0, (Aust),

Div. Soils, Soils and Land Use Series Np. 13.

Norrucote, K. H., 1959. Soils and Lind Use in the Barossa District, South Australla, "The

Tanunda-Williamstown Area, C.S.LK.0. (Aust), Div. Soils, Soils and Land Use

Series No, 32.

Pryon, L. D.. 1838. The Botany, Forestry and Zoolucy of the Australian Capital ‘Lerritory

on wi Ecological Basis, Government Printer, Canherra,

Pavox, L. D., 1955a. A Hybrid Swarm between Fucalyples odorata Behr and #uculyptus

leacoxylon F. Muell. Trans, Roy. Suc. $. Aust, 78, pp. 92-96,

Payon, L. D., 1955b. The Genetic and Systematic Status of Eucdlypéus huberiana Naudin,

E viminalis Labill., and F. eromaphioia Pryor und Willis. Trans. Hoy, Soc. 8. Aust.

78, pp. 156-164,

Lutty Ranges of South Australia, S. Aust, Land Tax Dept, Bull. Ne, 1,

Ronren, G J., 1953, ‘The Natural Qecurrence of the Eucalypts, Corn, Aust. Forestry aud

Timber Bureau Leatet No. 63,

Scouran, G., 1879, The Geology of the Wundred of Munnu Para. Pact, 1. ‘Vhe Newer Ser-

titty Deposits. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust, 2. pp. G0-TCL

Scounran, G., L880, The Geology of the Hundred of Munno Para. Parl I. The Lpper

i aears and Fundamental Rocks and Economics. Trans, Ray, Soc, $ Aust, 3, pp

OG-[ 28,

Scounsn, G.. 1462. The Geology of the Neighbourhood of Gawler, Trans. Roy, Soc. 8,

Aust,. 5, pp, 57-72,

Srecur, BK. L., and Penny, BR, A, 1948. The Mant Ecology af part of the Mount Lofty

Kanges (1). ‘Trans, Roy, Soo. 8. Aust. 72, pp, 91-193.

Seneut, R. L., and Raysox. Panera, 1957. Dark Tsland Heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, Seuth

Australia). 1. Definition of the Ecosystem, Aust. J. But, 5. pp. 59-85,

Spruce, KR. C., 1945. Some Aspects of the Geomorphology of Portion of the Mount Lofty

Ranges. Trans. Rov, Soe, 5, Aust,, 69, pp, 277-302.

Sruce, KH. C., 1946. Reconnuissanes Geological Survey of Partion of the Wostern Escarp-

ment of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Trans. Rey. Sac. S, Aust, 70, pp. SLU-347

Syaicn, BR, CG. Wrertne, A. W, G., aud Canepanwa, B., 1057, Geologicul Map of the Ade-

luide Military Sheet. ‘S. Aust. Dept. Mines, Ceological Adas of South Australis.

Semy, A. H.. 1951, The Archaean Complex at Houghton, Sonth Australia, Trans, Ney, Sov,

&. Aust, 74, pp. 115-134,

Woop, I. G. 1930. An Anilysis of the Vegetation of Kangaroo Island and the Adjacent

Peninsnfas, “Trans, Roy. Soo. 5. Aust., 54, pp. 105-139, ‘

Woon, J. G., 1937, The Vegetation of South Australia Government Printer, Adelaide,

Woon, J, G., and Wintians, RK. J,, L960. “Vegetation” in The Australian Environment Thitd

Edition, pn. 67-b4.

FLORA CONSERVATION IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

I. THE PRESERVATION OF PLANT FORMATIONS AND ASSOCIATIONS

RECORDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. L. SPECHT

Summary

The reasons for maintaining adequate flora reserves are examined from agricultural, economic,

research, educational, aesthetic and historical points of view. The difficulties of maintaining these

reserves against fires, contamination by agricultural fertilizers, invasion of weeds are discussed. The

major flora reserves in South Australia are tabulated and the extent of preservation of the plant

formations and associations recorded in this State is examined. The major deficiences in the present

system of flora reserves are indicated,

VIZ.: -

(1) Coastal complex -mangrove vegetation

(2) Dry sclerophyll forest formation

(1) Eucalyptus rubida (candlebark gum ) association

(1) E. cladocalyx ( sugar gum ) association

(ili) BE. ovata ( swamp gum ) - Xanthorrhoea australis association

(3) Savannah woodland formation

(1) Casuarina luehmannii ( bull-oak ) association

( ii.) Eucalyptus microcarpa (box ) association

( ili) E. largiflorens (river box ) association

(iv ) Callitris propinqua ( native pine ) association

(v) All other associations, although found on reserves, are in jeopardy from invading species.

( 4) Tussock grassland formation

(1) Gahnia trifida ( cutting grass ) -Cladium filum (thatching grass ) association.

(11) Lomandra dura-Lornandru multiflora (iron grass ) association

( 5.) Sclerophyllous mallee sub-formation-Form A ( mallee-broombush )

(1) Eucalyptus cneorifolia ( Kangaroo Island mallee) -Melaleuca uncinata( broombush) association

( 6) Mallee sub-formation

(1) Eucalyptus oleosa ( giant red mallee ) -E. pileata ( white mallee ) association

(7) Low layered woodland (arid woodland) formation

(1) Acacia sowdenii (rnyall) association

( ii) Acacia aneura (mulga .) association

(ii ) Acacia brachystachya ( umbrella mulga ) association

( iv ) Acacia linophylla association

( v ) Eremophila-Dodonaea-Cussia association

(8) Shrub steppe formation

(1) Atriplex vesicaria ( bladder saltbush ) association

(ii ) Kochia sedifolia ( bluebush ) association

( iil ) Kochia astrotricha ( pearl bush ) association

(9) Semi-arid tussock grassland

(1) Astrebla ( Mitchell grass) association

( 10) Desert zone complex

FLORA CONSERVATION IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

I. THE PRESERVATION OF PLANT FORMATIONS AND

ASSOCIATIONS RECORDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by RK. L. Speceut!

(with collaboration from J. B, Cleland?)

(Read 10 August 1961)

SUMMARY

The reasons for maintaining adequate flora reserves ave examined from agri-

cultural, economic, research, educational, aesthetic and historical points of view.

The difficulties of maintaining these reserves against fires, contamination by

agricultural fertilizers, invasion of weeds are discussed.

The major flora reserves ia South Australia are tabulated and the extent

of preservation of the plant formations and associations recorded in this State

is examined,

The major deficiences in the present system of flura reseryes are indicated,

viz.2—

(1) Coastal complex — mangrove vegetation

(2) Dry sclerophyll forest formation

(i) Eucalyptus rubida (candlebark gum) association

(ii) E, eladocalyx (sugar gum) association

(iii) E. ovata (swamp vum)—Xanthorrhoea australis association

(3) Savannah woodland formation

(i) Casuarina luechmannit (bull-oak) association

(ii) Eucalyptus microcarpa (box) association

(iii) £. largiflorens (river box) assaciation

(iv) Callitvis propingqua (native pine) association

(v) All other associations, although found on reserves, are in jeopardy

from invading species.

(4) Tussock grassland formation

(i) Gahnia trifida (cutting grass)—Claditum filam (thatching grass)

association.

(4i) Lomandra dura-Lomandra multiflora (iron prass) association

(5) Sclerophyllous anallee sub-formation—Form A (mallee-broombush )

(i) Eucalyptus cneorifolia (Kangaroo Island mallee)—Melalenca uncinate

(broombush ) association

(6) Mallee sub-formation

(i) Eucalyptus oleosa (giant red mallee)—E,. pileata (while mallee) assn-

ciation

(7) Low layered woodland (arid woodland) formation

(i) Acacia sowdenit (ryall) association

(ii) Acacia aneuvra (mulga) association

(iii) Acacia brachystuchya (umbrella mulga) association

(iv) Acacia Tinephylla association

(v) Eremophila-Dodonaea-Cassia assaciatian

(8) Shrub steppe formation

(i) Atriplex vesicaria (bladder saltbush) association

(ii) Kochia sedifolia (bhuichush) association

(iii) Kochia astratricha (pearl bush) association

(9) Semi-arid tussock grassland

(i) Astrebla (Mitchell grass) association

(10) Desert zone complex

1 Formerly Department of Botany, University of Adelaide. Present address; Department

of Botany, University of Melbourne.

2 hieaiel of the Commissioners of the National Park and Wild Life Reserves, South

Australia.

Trans. Roy, Suc. 8, Aust, (1961), Vol. 85.

178 RK, L, SPECHT

PART 1, REASONS FOR MAINTAINING ADEQUATE RESERVES

In the natural state, plants and animals live in a delicate balance with their

environment. Any smal] change in environment will upset this balance and

often lead to the partial or complcte destruction of one or more of the component

plants or animals of the community. Scientists now refer to this complex inter-

relationship between plants, animals, soils and climate as an ecosystem; they are

just beginning to know a little about the delicate adjustments necessary to

maintain the stalus quo. The plants, many different species each with its own

preference for soil und micto-climate, are the key to the ecosystem; they pro-

duce foodstuffs from stumlight, foodstuffs not only necessary for themselves but

(1) for all the bacteria, fungi, worms and microscopic organisms of the litter

and soil, (2) for all the animals and birds which browse on the plants ar sup

nectar from their flowers. All are dependent the one on the other; upset one,

upset the whole ecosystem — often even the soil structure and fertility will be

subtly changed. Change the environment by either slightly altering (1) the

soil fertility or (2) amount of soil moisture, and many of the original plants

will fail to survive. They may be replaced by alien introductions, usually weeds

or foreign grasses and herbs. The whole ecosystem can be disrupted by intro-

duced birds and animals which kill out native plants and animals,

Within the limits of our knowledge—which, in many cases, is extremely

shallow — we could preserve many of our native plants in Botanic Gardens, our

larger animals and birds in Zoological Gardens. But our Botanic Gardens are

far too small for such a programme, the Zoos cannot hape to preserve the multi-

tude of insects, spiders, worms, microscopic animals which abound in the field.

Also Botanic Gardens and Zoological Gardens are not desizned to preserve suils

which, as mentioned above, ate so delicately in equilibrium with the plant and

animal] communities.

The ecosystem (plant, animal, soil) can he preserved for posterity only in

natural reserves.

If no such areas are preserved, our descendants will be deprived of the

following:

(1) Virgin Soils for Agricultural Research.

The study of soil in its uatural state enables an appreciation of the changes

wrought by good or bud agriculture on its structure and fertility, e.g., the de-

clining wheat yield in many parts of South Australia. in spite of fertilizers

Reserves an Eyre Peninsula: Reserve in Mid-North:

1, Fd, Plinders 13. Seven Till

2 Hel. Lake Wangary Reserves in Flinders Ranges:

3. Has. Hincks, Nicholls, Murlone and Out 14, Alligator Gorge, Marubray Creek

of Hundreds 15, Wilpena Pound

4. Hds. Hambidge and Ont of Thmdreds Reserve in Arid North-East:

5. lid. Minnipa 16, Koonumore Vegetation Reserve:

6. Pearson Islands Reserves in South-East;

Reserves on Kangeroo Istand: \7, Fairview Wild Life Reserve

7. Flinders Chase 14, Hds. Archibald, Makin

Reserces in Mt. Lofty Ranzes: Heserves in Murray Mallee:

6. National Park, Belair 19, Ikd. Billiatt

9, Obelisk Estate, Mt. Lefty Summit and 30, Hd. Peebinga

Waterfall Gully 31. Chatineey’s Line

10, Horsach Gully

11. Morialta Falls

13. Parn Wirra National Park

Th Ty ny T

136 137 138° 139° Pe

136" 135" |

=a" aT \4

ee @: |

tf |

-32" Le

1a |

36°

cas

38°

134° 135° 196" 137" 138° 139" 140" val

— | L ro _| 1

Fig. 1. Map of the Southern Portion of South Australia showing the Major National Parks

and Reserves Preserving both Flora and Fauna.

180 R. L. SPECHT

(Cornish, 1949) may be due to a deterioration in soil structure. It is essential

to have virgin soils for comparison to see where agriculture has gone wrong,

(2) Sources of Economie Animals, Plants, Fungi and Bacteria.

(a) Reserves provide a reservoir of seed of native plants which, now con-

sidered valueless, may eventually become valuable cconomic plants yielding

druys, rubber, oils, ete., e.g, Duboisia, a native Australian plant, yiclds the drugs

hyoseyamine anc hyoscine.

(bh) A reservoir of fungi and bacteria which, like plants, can yield valuable

drugs, e.g. Penicillium.

or insect pests, c.g. Cactoblastis and prickly pear.

(3) Opportunities for Ecological Research.

Reserves afford the chance to understand the “web of life” — the ecosystem —

results of which could haye farveaching effects on human geography,

(4) Yertiary Educational Facilities,

Reserves form an important training ground for university sbidents in

xadlogy, botany, ayriculture und forestry, e.g, the Archibald-Makin, National

Park, Belair, Obelisk Estate and Koonamore Vegetation Reserves’ are important

training areas for botany, forestry and agricultural students at the present day —

just as important as laboratory fucilities at the University.

(5) Aesthetic Appreciation of Nature.

An appreciation of the wealth and beanty of owr native Hora and fauna is

afforded by reserves.

(6) Historical Stuclies.

An appreciation of the trials faced by our early settlers in opening up the

country can be quickly gained by a study of the original country.

Altogether, there are good scientific, economic, aesthetic and social reasons

for preserving our native flora, fauna and soils. Australia is as yet a young

country and the botanist, zoologist and soil scientist find thernmselves witnessing

the destruction of the flora, fauna and soil before it has been satisfactorily

studied und classified, Many problems, botanical, zoological and pedological

have not yet been solved and many of these have an important bearing on the

economy of the country.

Australia is in a unique position as regards Flora and Fauna conservation,

It is the only continent where man did not develop agriculture or animal hus-

bandry. The nomadic, hunting aborigines little disturbed the ecosystem. All

other continents have suffered severcly at the hand of man, And yet the appre-

elation of Australia’s natural heritage, its preservation for posterity is continually

buwing before the greed of man. his lust for a little inore land to develop for

pasture or crop and yet, though filling his pocket, scarcely improving the

economy of Australia.

PART [f. DIFFICULTIES OF MAINTAINING FLORA RESERVES

1. Fire,

Wanton firing of reseryes often occurs under the pretext that—

(a) the reserve harbours versnin; and

(h) itis a potential fire hazard for neighbouring farms and houses.

At least in dry sclerophyll forest, sclerophyllous mallee and heath forma-

‘ions, the flora is fire resistant. In fact, the wealth of diverse species appears to

FLORA GGNSERVATION IN S.A- 1E.3

be maintained by irregular firing (Specht, Rayson and Jackman, 1958), Low-

ever, too frequent firing can have the reverse effect because the segencraling

species have not had time to set seed. The fire resistance of other communities

has not been investigated.

2, Lffect of Fertilizers.

The dry sclerophyll forest, sclerophyllous mallee and heath formations all

occut on soils markedly deficient im phosphorus.

Fertilizers, especially superphosphate, have a marked effect on the vegeta-

tion of these deficient soils. Weed species from adjacent farmlands — seeds are

atten blown in from farms many miles away—can become established in the

more fertile soil and compete vigorously with the native vegetation. The estah-

lished native species grow vigorously on applivalian of superphosphate and

complete their life-eycle more rapidly, but are nnable. to re-establish themselves

due to (a) the unfavourable “toxic effect” of the fertilizer on their seedlings,

as well as (b) the competition from the alien weeds (Specht, in press, 19BL),

The native vepetation eventually disappears,

There is a danger that superphosphate spread either by super-spreaders or

aerial top-dressing will influence the reserves, especially tor some distance from

the’ margins. Even dust storrns blowing enriched soil from neighbouring

firms onto the area will eventually affect the vegetation.

Fertilizers have similar effects on other plant formations. Alien plants

have casily invaded the savannah woodland, tussock grassland anc mallec forma-

lions, where the soil fertility is favourable to their growth, There many of the

original native species can exist in compctition with the aliens. Jlowever. as

soon as fertilizers are applied, the aliens (:many spring armuals) often Brow

fuster than the native species and use up most of the soil moisture long before

the native species can begin their summer growth and death inevitably results.

3. Alien Species.

These are almost impossible to exclude from any formations (see 2 ahave).

Incvitably they alter the original sttuctuce and vormposition of the community,

A, Rabbits.

Rabbits are probably the worst vermin. This is cspecially obvious in the

arid and semi-arid conimunities where regeneration of the native species is

after prechided by rabbit plagues destroying all seedlings and ring-harking the

adult plants (vide Koonamore Vegetation Resevve—~Waod, 1936). It is essential

tn net and maintain rescrves with rabbit-proof cnclosures and, if possible, destroy

all existing colonies of rabbits,

5, Roads and Tracks.

Roads and tracks through reserves, unless policed, enable illicit woud-cutting

and collection of economic species (yielding essential oils, brush for fenves,

horticultural species, ete,). As well, illegal shooting is facilitated, ‘The dumping

of rubbish (a source of added fertility—see 2 above) invariably oceurs.

General Remarks.

fa) Reserves should be fenecd to exclude rabbits and other vermin.

ib} The ii to % mile around the edge should be considered as waste and —

a “buffer zone” where the ecosystem may be disrupted by enriched dust, weeds

and pests blown in from the neighbuuriug farms.

fe) Fires should be reduced to the minimum, not because of their effect an

the flora, which is oflen fire resistant, but because of the destruction of the

fiuuna, both large and small.

(d) Tracks and roads should be kept to a minimum and, if possible, policed.

R. L. SPECHT

182

uevaIng yStinay,

SIATOSOY OFT P[LAA pus

yVg euoVRN JO SdouolssruNMO;

seArTesay AFT PILM pus

yaR /RUCIEN JO SusuorssTUrULO)

pABOY RIO, T Fy Buna

BINYNIIGY JO saystulryy |

AANGMIWTy JO LePSTATAL

9aq4 tO

“wo SIOStApy vine a BIOyy

a7 }1UL

“wo ALOSIApY Bune 2 BLOT

gaq}1UL

WO) ALOSLAPY Bune 2 BOTT

9aqgtar

-ulog, ArosIApY BUNET FY Blo,

Bay}

-uloy) AUOSTApY Bune WD BIOL

oazytUr

“m0 ATosIaApy vunEy x BIOL

994] Tur

-utoy ALostaApy Bunt 9 BIOL

aqgTUl

-mi0;) ALIOSIAPY Bune YP eioLT

Jouquog

O89"SET

OOL'F

TOF

G6 Fe

06°38

OTO'EL

OS I'L

0596S

og6 se

Froe’+

F1z9°9s

eLUd ‘T9TTd

‘CLL = *#S019d

: “G86 “PRK ERE

‘696 TE69d ‘VEGI “Z6Id “FEE

GLZE 'SLBE ‘Lz Javed “Bgz ‘88%

626 “O8S

‘roc snd ‘szaquime uolaas ONT

SIOCPUITLLE WOTZIOS ONY

Gye

La ‘The “LEL ‘1é “#1

FL-ZI ‘9 ‘@ “6 3

SpIsPepYy "PH

Mal eed ‘PH

Spleppy "PH

Sspeipunzy jo

NG ZW preuogaryy ‘essoy “spy_T

edu ‘pH

spaipuny jo 91g

asprquey “PH

speapunyy Jo in(¢

suo ‘PH

S]TOUOIN “PH

sfourHy “PH

Arvesuv ay vy “pH

Saopulpyy "PH

(oprepapy

Aqunop) = syRISAT HSNO O sf

(eprejepy Ayunoep)

seq [PUOMeN BTW Bed “G

‘ (oprelEepy

Ayunog) arepog reg pRueHUN -|

sabuvy fyfory qunopy

(WoAdetTD AyUTIOD) aseyH sLopurpT

punjsy codpiuvy

dnoaxy

IOFRAYSOAUT ‘EPUL[S] UOSIVOT ¢2°9

ayuny ay Ayunog ‘¢

sloaugp AQUNOS) -p

stoauep Ayunoy *¢

Suapult,y Agunog *

ssaput,g AqUNOD *T

pynsumag sig

(soa98) vary

sroquUumu uoIoeg

poxpunyy

(1 qv, — vypasny ymos

Aqipeoory

fo dow ayy uo paqworpur s. saasasas pun sysnd asayy fo uorngiasip ayy )

VIIVULSOVY HLINOS NI YuOTH ONIAYESHYd

SHAUASHH ANY SYUVd TIVNOLLVN HYO!VW ‘TIT LHVd

183

FLORA CONSERVATION IN S.A,

aplepspy jo Apsieary

neat IsuUN4a fp,

nRaing IsTMay,

NeBING, IBLE,

TEN

saAIesey AIVT PITAL Pue

BIR PRUOYBN, JO Supi9 ss

aay }TUr

“m0 AJOSIApPY vuneg pues ero[

Fey FTOE

-ai07) AIOSTAPY wunegy puw vropa

SeAIeseY OFT PILM PUS

YAR pRuUCTyeN Jo sraworssTuIUC

SOAINSOY OJVT PILAA PUR

yeVq jRuCTeN Jo sravossrarMED

TRaIng ysunoy,

nramg qsnnoay,

TeBMTET ISNT,

Teaingd yshnay,

OFS‘61

ecl'¢

HOO'EG

ONO'S

OTST

OOF

09's

FOR

Wd “Old ‘Nid “Wd

901

18 ‘O€ “tLe

GLE PUB LLG ‘SANG

‘OFS ‘CES “TER ‘TRS “REF “LOI

¥ *g

OL ‘6

8% JO pus YyNos ‘RE

ROS

TSTL “OSTL “fOTI9d “616

CCR “FIRId “ESSId ‘ESR4d

‘OCRIT “SER “GERTL ‘OTSIL

O86

Fer

OOS

“SQAdQSaI BIOT] se popawBesr aq saFu0] ou uva syiosoyy

ANSUD] T [BUSTA ANU ‘SOATASe BOY] SY PassEya eq []8 WR KoyQ 4eYy7 pois}]R opyyt) OS “JON se "YANOY. *eqLosey eunsesy | fQuoVeN panty AYRE) »

‘SAlOSUd BIOL B SY OS}e pepavdar aq AV SPURTSI Syd Jey} PUBLUTeU ay] LTO, payepost OF JY “Spag, pue syeULTUY AGy Aremoueyg v ATUO ATRIOWO s%

spsipunyy fo ng Yay

wyooreg, ‘DH

SpapuNngL Jo Ing, GAN

RauIqeog "PH

BNE "PH

Buysely “PH

UREA “PH

PIRAUPIY "PH

JOoquINpoOoO AA py

e1BID 'PH

epleepy “PH

aprreppy ‘PH

splyjepy “PH

esunedexudg ‘pH

aprepepy “PH

(uoqgAry Aqunos)

GAleseyT UOTRJeFsA sIOUTRUOO

UYDASNE YIN TN Pree

(auroag Aqinoy)

OB104) LOPS Fx

(auieayy Aguno;))

oF10g) You Aaiqureyys,'s

(aoquney, yy uosUe yy

semume)) punog = euedyt vs’ [

sobuny suapurpy

SOPURTG AQULOY ‘€

sopueyg AquNOY *Z

(qanag Arto, >) aurT s.AaoumeYQ *T

aap yy finninpr

mryaupng Aquno|D

wng-ipnog aaddL sy

({Jeuuopaeyy ApuToD)

BATABOY BJT PTLAA AotAareyy

ISO - YNZ Lanoy

STH WA0g

YON POA

(aprerepy

AQum0;)) Ayu TJatsa0 Fy “S

(opizapy

Aymog) SRA RYRNOP LA F

(epreepy

Ayano) 8]ME) BBO

{aprejepy

Ayunog) warumg AoT "IITs

Lars Sar

POPU[SUT JOU BAe GALASAY OTT PITAL MOTAIEY WO ‘jo ‘MOORR] JO Sore QOL puy oseyD suapuUlyy UO WOTPRIIHVA SOsUYT[YOSIA Jo Bowe QOH‘g sug 1

‘punog BusdyiAd JO Sopls Of} UO TOTYNANRSA ayy Aq] palaAod Bore oY Jo oPBUINET ge

.nymrsnp fo sumo vounzaia, ., (S661) Swe ‘CYT Aq deur wogy paqeayeg

Pert 42-808 000°ORE TROL

TIN TEN 000°6 seHBL WBS

(sqaosop pues ‘Ysnq sudraaod)

DIN TN O0c'GS Hquesep Apuus pur Auopg xaeduros qiesecy

{rors ‘opydowatyg-Diseny)

€T-0 ee oLE o00'se SYTOS jRISTAYS yeuueavs quays |) dydoaajag

GX [EN OoY BE ‘age ‘SULBO] JwasecyT (BSRIT ][OYOVT) PUBpSsVLI spoossng pLyre-lweg

TENT [N 00¢°L9 “YIs “SUIBOT LaISOC] (raze “ysnqonq “ysnqypes) oddogs qnayy

Tru qsouaypy Get o00°89 poompepurs agyRy ‘ro Your ‘“eANTW (g)

TIN UN o0s‘é YyBqyoog (z)

TN TIN, onu's 1eaty (1)

“je ‘SO8PLI puvs pues sUIROT Itaseqy PUyppoom poro<R[ sOrT

spurs possay

co- 1 Q -1G ooge “TOY RAL ‘paysizaaodurt dO sauinp pues doaq yaeoy

ba (wpofesianip va ‘qniws

py €Q0¢ 9-O1E o00*e g[tos Aquoqseull] par pur Sols moypeys ~aU|PRUL AOe[ET) ‘yy eAypedur shoyAqdampag

oO (npoecaen

a banapyppayy-DipssDiIUe = “TSM ULOO.AY

iI 6 F-FRE QOOTTT SSUNp PUBS PUL spues PoeZjod -aaT[UME yLosaqT) “Wo ooypeur snoypAydorajoy

4 (aznapad "ap-nseajo “ay

y UU Jsowypy T-0 OOS TE [los (9a]]}RUA) PazZmuopos MALOAg ‘so [BUL GPNPM-vayBUL pat Juels) 8ayfepy

i=] (‘O18 ‘oov EME sy “atamg)

TW TEX O0eT BOPUS|[TY UO BOs | BIG}Oyg eSBId WOT (G)

pm ysouwpy piu gsouryy ane (suletl TOY 3oRTq) SYULZpUsA popoop Ty SBEHUs BUTYDeYJ—sseIB suNyIND (TL)

pliepsse1a spoossny,

‘age ‘oangxog LAner (ums per ‘euuew ‘anjq ‘qupureddad)

CZ “0 6-08 000'R Jo s]108 Ava ‘SBSSO0 Baa SU) Tee (EAN Od Poy puURl[PooAL YVUIBATY

69-S €-RIL QUT + ‘aye ‘syospod ompuazey 'syospo (qsasoF Sanq Asuras) yoroy Aydosapos Arey

t 9-¢ é ‘aga SpeypUOlOY Seysuen ypeg (z)

6 ye 74 é aM pP paws yeqeoy uoLeFea guney (T)

: XujMULoD [BqSUo;y

pBAdesel (sep 'hs) (goqrur +B} yles slaysAsoan Jolepy

aReyuaIe par lesa. BIpeajsoy qynoeg UT

Bale PSIBULLysy Role eyeunxoidd F

(P a7Qn, Ui paywsauinua sarsasat DUnvL pun DdoY [YO sopnjaUus ayqo] SVyz)

a VWITVUCSAV ALNOS NI

SHAUHSAU VNAVE ONY VUO1H NI GHAHHSHHd SNOLLYNYOd LNVTd TYdIONTad SH.

%é@ GTAVL

FLORA CONSERVATION IN S.A. 185

PART IV. THE PRESERVATION OF PLANT FORMATIONS AND

ASSOCIATIONS RECORDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

According to Wood in his chapter on “The Vegetation of South Australia” in

“Introducing South Australia” (1958), the vegetation of this State may be con-

sidered under the following sitb-divisions;

Coastal complex.

Dry sclerophyll forest formation,

Savannah woodland formation.

Tussock grassland.

Seleraphyllous mallee (mallee-broombush), mallee-heath and heath

sub-formations.

Mallee sub-formation.

Low layered woodland (arid woodland),

Shrub steppe.

Desert complex.

Deen gb cbo

‘

I. Tix: Coasrar, CoMpLex,

(1) Description.

The coastline of South Austraha consists of sand dunes, mud flats and cliffs,

each with its characteristic vegetation,

The pioneer plant on the seaward side of unstable dunes is a creeping prass,

Spinifex. hirsutus, which hinds the soil sufficiently to allow rushes, chiefly Scirpus

nodosus and Lepidesperma gladiatum, to colonize the dune faces. These stabi-

lize the soil and provide sufficient humus for a composite shrub (Olearia axillaris)

tu establish itself, and a shrubland is eventually established in which common

plants are Acacia sophorae (coastal wattle), Myoporum insulare (boobyalla)

and Leucopogon parviflorus.

On mud flats the mangrove, Avicennia marina var. resinifera, may occur

within the limits of daily tidal scour with salt marsh showing zonation beyond.

Two dwarf shrublands of samphires occur with decreasing salt content, domin-

ated respectively by Arthrocnemum arbuscula aad Arthrocnemum halecnemoides,

With rising level of the swamp and consequent decrease in salt content these are

replaced successively in some districts by communities dominated by the salt

grasses Sporobolus virginicus and Distiohlis spicata, and in other districts by

the saltbush, Atriplex paludosa. In semi-saline swamps near the mouths of

freshwater rivers, Melaleuce halmaturortim (paper-bark tea-tree), forms a

fringing forest, and with decreasing salt content a zonation occurs in which the

chief species are successively Salicornia australis (samphire) and Suaede aus-

tralis, Juneus nuritimus (rush). Selliera radicans and Distichlis spicata.

(2) Preservation,

(i) Coastal dune vegetation. Aerial photographs of the reserve in the

Hundred of Flinders indicate that approximutely 1,730 acres of coastal dune:

are preserved along its southern boundary.

Onc hopes that the disputed Younghusband Peninsula on the seaward side

of the Coorang, the waters of which are already a Bird Sanctuary, will eventually

he included as a Reserve. This area of coastal dune. almost untouched, affords

a unique comparison with the dunes preserved on Eyre Peninsula as well as in

eastern and western Australia, with which there are considerable floristic dif-

ferences.

(ii) Coastal cliff vegetation is satisfactorily preserved in Flinders Chase

(Kangaroo Island), Hd. Flinders (Eyre Peninsula), and Pearson Islands (Hyre

Peninsula ).

1aG fi, L, SPECHT

(iii) About 2,000 acres of samphires and related vegetation (especially

Atriplex paludosa and Melaleuca halmaturoruim) are preserved on the Pearson

Islands (Eyre Peninsula); another 320 acres are preserved on the Fairview Wild

Lile Reserve.

(iv) The mangrove (Avicennia) is nowhere preserved.

(3) References.

Osborn (1923), Osborn and Wood (1923), Wood (1937), Fenner and Cle-

land (1935), Crocker (1844), Rix (private communication, 1961).

2. Duy Scienoriuviy, Forrsr FoRMstion,

(1) Deseription.

This is a community of plants dominated by trees of farest form, ie, with

flat crowns and with bole usually greater in height than the depth of the erown,

the crowns muinly continuous. A well-developed layer of shrubs is present

but grasses and herbs: are rare or absent.

Dry sclerophyll forest occurs in the wettest parts of the Mt. Lofty Ranges

and in the South-Kast and in more restricted localities in the southern Flinders

Ranges, in Southern Eyre Peninsula and on Kangaroo Island on acidic, usually

podsolized soils, low im nutrient statis, especially in phosphorus, and sometimes

tow in copper, zinc, molybdenum and potassium. The chief dominants are

the stringybarks, Eucalyptus obliqua (messmate) and Eucalyptus baxteri (brown

stringybark ), the former occurring in wetter habitats with slightly higher nutrient

status than the Jatter in the Mt. Lofty Ranges, the South-East and Kangaroo

Island. Euealypius claeophora (bastard box) oceurs on podsolized soils in the

Me. Lofty and Flinders Ranges; Eucalyptns fasciculosa (pink gum) occupies

the driest portion of the dry sclerophyll forest zone. Eucalyptus cladoculyx

(sugar gum) is the dominant on Eyre Peninsula and in parts of the Flinders

Ranges and Kangaroo Island; Encalypius cosmophylla (cup gum) is more light-

demanding than other forest dominants in the Mt. Lofty Ranges and on Kan-

carou Island. |

The ehief undershrubs vary from place to place, independently of the tree

species, in response to changes in the micro-habitat and previous history. The

characteristic species are Acacia myrtifolia (wattle), Pultenuea daphnoices

(native broom), Xantherrhoca semiplana (grass trec), Leplospermum scoprtritem

(tea tree), Epacris impresse (death) and Hakea rostrata (needlebush ).

Aliens are few in these closed communities, but in the Mt. Lofty Ranges

Cytisus canariensis (broom) and Ulex europdeus (gorse) are common along

ruudsides,

(2) Preservation,

Approximately 3,000 acres of dry sclcrophyll forest formation are preserved

in the Mt. Lofty Ranges (ull five reserves); possibly half of Flinders Chase,"

70,000 acres, supports this formation; 1400 acres are found on Fairview Wild

Life Reserve, at least 1,000 acres on the Hundreds Archibald-Makin Reserve

and 14 acres at Seven ITills, A small. arca may be present in the Alliguter

Gorge Reserve, In all, wbout 75,700 acres of this formation may be preserved

ity South Australia,

(4) Buealyptus rubida association, a relic community, is preserved only at

the castern edge of the Obelisk Estate. In this arca it is in great danger of

extinction from roadside invaders.

* Unfortunately, this estimate must he regarded with suspicion until an ceolugival survey

his been made of this important reserve.

FLORA CONSERVATION IN S.A, 187

Gi) Eucalyptus obliqua dominated. assuciations (may have E. haxteri, ',

cosmophylla, E, fasciculusa or E. elacophora as co-dominant trees ),

These communities ure formd in reserves in the Mt. Lofty Ranges (viz,

Belair National Park, Obelisk Estate, Morialta), as well as in limited areas on

Flinders Chase, Mixed communitics of E. obliqua and E, elacophora, north of

the Torrens Gorge, are not preserved, The relic tree-lern, Todea barhava, and

assouiated swamp flora are preserved on Obelisk Estate,

(iii) Eucalyptus baxteri dominated associations (may have Ff. obliqua, 1.

viminalis var. huberiana, F. cosmophylla, E. diversifolia. as co-dominant trees).

These assuciations are found in reserves in Mt. Lofty Ranges (Obelisk

Ustate and Morialta), Flinders Chase, north-eust of Keith (Archibald-Makin

Reserve), and on Fairview Wild Life Reserve.

(iy) Eucalyptus fasciculosa dominated associations (may have E. baxter,

E, elaeophora or Ek. leucaxylon as co-dominant trees) are found in reserves of

Mt. Lofty Ranyes (Belair National Park, Morialta and Para Wirra), and in re-

serve near Keith (Hd. Archibald-Makin), possibly Flinders Chuse, and on

Fairview Wild Life Reserve.

(v) Eucalyptus elueopliora dominated associations (may have F. fasciculosa,

E, obliqua or bE. cladocalyx as co<lominant trees )-

These associations are preserved only on the Para Wirra Reserve of Mt.

Lofty Ranges: they may be present in Mambray Creek-Allizator Gorge Reserves

wt Lower Flinders Ranges,

(vi) Lucalyptus cladocalyx dominated associations (may have EB. elavophora

us vo-dominant tree),

This tree is found in hoth dry sclerophyll forests and savannah woodland

formations, Tt oecurs in the latter furmation on Flinders Chase.

The dry sclerophyll forest forination of EF. clidocalyx securs m the Lower

Flinders Ranges {doubttully preserved in Mambray Creek-Alligator Gorge area)

id Lower Eyre Peninsula (no reserve).

(vii) Lucelyptus macrorrhyncha association.

This castern Australian species occurs in a relic stand uear Seven Lills.

Fourteen acres of the stand are preserved on Section 568, Hundred of Clare,

(viii) Lucalyptus ovata-Xanthorrhoea australis association.

The assoctation found in the Lower South-East is not preserved.

Nucalypius otata probably occurs in Flinders Chase.

(3) References,

Adamson and Osborn (1924), Wood (1930), Woud Shee Baldwin and

Crocker (1941), Crocker (1944), Boomsma (1946), Crocker (19462), Specht

aud Perry (1948), Boomsma (1949), Masterman (1950), Coaldrake (1951),

Specht (1953), Rayson (1957), French (1958), Smith (1960), Martin cieet)

Speeht, Brownell and Hewitt (1961), Rix (private communication, 1961

3, Savanna Wooptanp ForM Arion,

(1) Description.

Savannah woodland is dominated by trees of woodland form, i. with

rounded crowns and with boles in which the height is usnally less than the

depth of the crown. The crowns are not continuous, but tree distribution is

mid-dense to open, Small trees and shrubs are poorly developed or absent, but

a herbaceous stratum in which grasses are prominent is well developed. Geo-

phytes (plants perennating by means of underground organs) are scasonally

prominent,

168 kh, L, SPECHT

The woodlands cecur on a variety of suils, characteristically un red-brown

carths and terra rossas, but also sometimes on clay podsols, slightly higher in

nutrient status than those carrying dry sclerophyll forest. The relatively high

nutrient requirements of grasses (e.g. cereals) ave well known. In the Mi.

Lolty Ranges division between dry sclerophyll forest on soils derived from

quartzites or laterite; and suvannah woodland on soils derived from slates and

phyllites is frequent and sharp. The vegetation of the Adelaide Plains was

originally savannah woodland.

The dominant tree specics in South Australia, in order of increasing avail-

able water in the soil, are Casuarina stricta (sheoak), Eucalyptus odorata (pep-

permint), Eucalyptus leucoxylon (blue yam), Eucalyptus camaldulensis (xed

gum) and Eucalyptus virninalis (manna gum).

Nutive grasses were originally present, chiefly species of Danthonia ( wal-

laby yrasses) and Themed australis (kangaroo grass), but have mostly clisap-

peared under grazing or under competition by more aggressive introduced

grasses chiefly from the Mediterranean region.

Especially in the Mt. Lofty Ranges, these open woodlands have been in-

vaded by alien shrubs, which tend to alter the original open facies of the cum-

mimities, The chief alien shnibs are Olea europea (olive), Chrysanthemoides

monilifera (a yellow flowered composite from South Africa) and Lavandula

stoechas (lavender),

(2) Preservation,

About 2,800 acres of savannah woodland are preserved in the Mt. Lotty

Ranges, some area being present on each of the reserves. Uowever, as this

formation is a) easily developed for tourist facilities and (b) readily invaded

by introduced plants, the preservation of the formation in this avea appeacs

donmed to failure, ,

Much of the Mambray Creck-Alligator Gorge area (about 200 aeres) is

covered by this furmation, also the basin of Wilpena Pound (possibly 2,000

acres). The tormation is nearer its natural state in these two. reserves than in

any thers,

About 7,000 acres of the formation is found on the reserves on Eyre Penin-

sula — 4,000 acres in Hd. Lake Wangary, 2,000 acres on Pearson Island and

possibly 1,000 acres in Hd. Flinders, These reserves are located on the drier

limit of the range of the savannah woodland formation; the vegetation (Casuarina

séiricla-Melaleuca pubescens association) is by na means typical, as it becomes

raore scrubby and merges into sclerophyllous mallee formation.

(i) Eucalyptus camaldulensis association is found on reserves in Mt. Lofty

Ranges (Belair National Park, Obclisk Estate, Para Wirra), Wilpena Pound and

Mambray Creck,

(41) Eucalyplus leucoxylon-B. viminalis association is found on reserves uf

Mt, Lofty Ranges (Belair National Park, Obelisk Estate, Morialta, Para Wirra).

(iii) Eucalyptus odorata assogiation (and related association of E. celei-

eutrix and L. microcurpa) oceurs on reserves in Mt. Lolty Ranges (Belair

National Park and Morialtu).

No reserve contains the box (E, microcarpa) found in the Lower Flinders

Ranges.

(iv) Casuarina stricta-Melaleuca jabescens associalion is preserved un

Fyre Peninsula (Hd. Flinders, (id. Lake Wangary and Pearson Islands).

(v) Eucalyptus cladocalyx association is preserved on Flinders Chase,

(vi) Casuarina luehmannii: association.

FLORA CONSERVATION IN §.A, 189

This community is found on the grey soils of heavy texture, east of Border-

town and Frances. it is preserved neither in South Australia nor in the eastern

States where it is more widespread.

(vii) Eucalyptus largiflorens association.

The river box is nol protected in South Australia — except possibly in small

Bird Sauetuaries ulung the River Murray.

(viii) Callitris propinque association,

Probably not protected. anywhere in South Australia,

(ix) Callitris glauca association.

Occurs in the Flinders Ranges (on Wilpena Pound and Mambray Creek

reserves ).

(3) References.

Osborn (1923), Adamson and Oshorn (1924), Wood (1930), Wood reat

Baldwin and Crocker (1941), Cracker (1944), Boomsma (1946), Jessup (1946),

Tiver (1946), Specht and Perry (1948), Boomsma (1949), Boomsma {Sere

Specht (1951), Specht (1953), French (1958), Lothian (1960), Smith (1960

Specht, Brownell and Hewitt (1961).

4, Tussoce Grassnann Formation.

(1) Description.

(i) Gahnia trifida-Cladium. filum association on Rendzina Plains of Lower

South-East. his tussock grassland (or actually a sedge land) may be an arti-

fact produced by man. Formerly the low trec, Banksia marginata, appeared to

be common over these plains. Now large tussocks of cutting grass (Guhnia),

thatching grass (Cladiwm) and the white tussock grass (Poa caespitosi) are

frequent in poorly drained and unploughed parts of the plains.

(ii) Lomendra dura-Lomandra multiflora (irongrass) association.

This tussock grassland (actually not a grass but a member of the family

Liliaceae) is widespread in the severely trost affected highland country from

near Burra to Peterborough. The community extends sovthward in small areas

on the eastern side of the Mt, Lofty Ranges as far south as Langhorne Creek.

in most areas, and particularly in the south, it grades into the Cosuarina stricta

savannah woodland, Cuasuarinn may have been more widespread over the

Lomandra stands before settlement, although carly records are consistent con-

cerning the treeless nature of the country,

(2) Preservation,

The Gehnia-Cladium association is found in limited areas on reserves in

Hds. Flinders and Lake Wanyary (Eyre Peninsula). Only a small arca (on

Fairview Wild Life Reserve) of this association is preserved in the Lower

South-East, where it formerly occupied must of the Rendzina Plains.

The Lomandra association, although very extensive. is not preserved.

(3) References.

Wood (1937), Crocker (1944), Stephens et al. (1945), Jessup (1946),

Jessup (1948).

5. Scterorvuyittous MaLune —Foum A (Mallee Broombush), Mallee Heath and

Heath Sub-formations.

(1) Description.

These three vegetation sub-formations are best considered together, though

their structure vuries, ‘Fley occur in the Upper South-East, on Eyre Peninsula

and on Kangaroo Island, but the best known occurrence is in the Coonalypn

10 HR. L. SPECHT

Downs in the first-named area, where the communities, especially mallee broom-

bushi, are being replaced by extensive pasture deyelapment.

The soils consist of varying depths of sand over a solonized clay. As the

depth of sand changes so does the available water status of the soils and the

plant communities show a concomitant gradation, Mallee braombnsh occurs

when the sand is less than 18 inches deep; as the sand deepens beyond 18

inches, heath elements become prominent until Mallee heath is: general at a

depth of 30 inches. When the sand is more than 48 inches decp, the mallee

disappears and heath alone continues. These plant communities, with their

accompanying soils, form a complex repetition pattern over large areas.

Mallee hroombush is a vegetation type dominated by low trees of Eucalyptus

species, with many stems arising from an underground root stock (“Mallees”)

and with a mid-dense layer of sclerophyllous leaved shrubs. The dormant

specics is Eucalyptus incrassata, which occurs in clumps, but on Kangaroo

Island Eucalyptus cneorifoliw (a main source of local Eucalyptus oil) is locally

dominant. The chief shrub is Melalenea uncinata (broombush), but other

sclerophyllous species Occur beneath them with rather open spacing. In drier

regions, Callitris verrucosa and C. canescens (sand pines) are commonly tound

with Melaleuca uneinata.

Mallee heath and heath consist of very dense assemblages of sclerophyllons

shrubs and undershrubs, many with heath-like leaves. varyiny in height from

1-5 feet. These communities are rich in species, but the dominants are Banksia

ornata, Casuarina pusilla (sheoak) and Xanthorrhoea australis (grass tree). In

mallee heath, Eucalyptus leptophylla oecurs in scattered clumps,

(2) Preservation.

(i) Sclerophyllous mallee — Form A (mallee broombush )-

Vhis sub-formation has distinctive, but allied, associations in its widespread

geographical localities, viz: :

(u) £. inerassata-L. leplophylla-Melalened neinata association in the Upper

South-Rast, with Callitris verrucosa cn-dominant in drier areas towards

the River Murray.

(hb) E. inerassuta-E., leptophylla-L. flocktoniae-Melaleuca uncinata assncia-

tion in Eyre Peninsula: with Colliteis verrucosa co-dominant in drier

areas.

(e) EB, flockfoniae-E. dumosa-Melaleuca aunecinata asscciation in Eyre

Peninsula..

(cL) Eucalyptus eneorifolia-Melaleucd uncineta association on Kangaroo

Island.

The first ussociution ceeurs in the reserve north-east of Keith (4,000 acres in

Hals. Archibald-Makin) and again on Chaunceys Line reserve (3,000 nerves).

The drier form of the asyociation (with Callitris verrucosa) is common in the

reserves in lds, Peebinga and Billiatt (5,000 and 56,000 acres respectively).

The second and third associations are preserved in the two lurge reserves

in C, Jervois, Eyre Peninsula (55,000 acres in Hds. Hineks-Murlong, ete., and

94,000 acres in Hds. Hambidge, etc.).

‘The fourth association, containing the churacteristic Kangaroo Island

mallee (E. enearifolia), is nat protected,

(ii) Mallee Heath (Eucalyptus leptophylla — heath).

Preserved in reserve north-east of Keith (2,000 acres),

FLORA CONSERVATION IN S.A, 11

(iii) Meath.

Various forms of this treeless sub-formation ‘exist:

(au) The reserve north-east of Keith contains Nanthorrhoca australis and

Banksia ornata-Casuurina pusilla type (37,000 acres).

(b) Areas Of Casuarina rielerlana-Lapphcepermluen coriuceum type are

found in both reserves in County Jervois (Eyre Peninsula),

or without the sedge Cladium filum), is preserved on Fairview Wild

Life: Reserve in the South-East (230 acres).

(3) References.

Wood (1980), Wood (1937), Baldwin and Crocker (1941), Crocker (1944).

Crocker (1946a), Jessup (1946), Northcote and Tucker (1948), Couldrake

(1951), Specht (1951), Specht and Rayson (1957), Rayson (1957), French

(1958), Smith (1960). Rix (private communication, 1961),

6. ScLERoriy.Lous: MaLice — Fons B.

(1) Description.

Two associations dominated by low, mallee-like trees of Eucalyptus casmu-

phylla, E. diversifolie wand ullied species (E. rugosa. LE. conglobata, E. baxteri)

are intermediate between the dry sclerophyll forest und sclerophyllous mallee

(Form A). Understorey species common to each of these formations may be

present in this sub-formation,

(2) Preservation.

The !. cosmophylla communitics are preserved on Flinders Chase and Belair

National Park; the £. diversifolia communities on three reserves on Eyre Penin-

sula (33,000 aeres in Hd, Flinders, a small area in IId. Lake Wangary, 78,000

acres in Hd. Nicholls and Section 365, Ont of Hundreds of County Jervois),

about 60,000 acres in Flinders Chase and 4,000 acres in the reserve north-east

of Keith (Hd. Arechibald-Makin).

The record (Lothian, rea) of Eneoalypius diversifalia for the side walls

of Wilpena Pound, Flinders Ranges, should be corrected to E.. morrisii.

(3) References.

Adamson and Osborn (1924), Wood (1930), Wood (1937), Baldwin and

Crocker (1941), Crocker (1044), Crocker (19461), Jessup (1946), Specht and

Perry (1948), Northeate and Tueker (1948), Masterman (1950), Coaldrake

(1951), Specht (1951), Specht (1953), French (1958). Smith (1960).

7, MABE Sup-FORMATION,

(L) Description.

Mallee consists of cucalypts of mallce habit but with a discontinnons shruh

layer, sometimes very open, and with a ground layer, which is scasonal, of

grasses, annuals and ephemeral plants.

‘The chief species towards the wetter side of its range are. eucalyptus anceps

and Eucalyptus dumosa, and towards the drier side, Eucalyptus oleosa and

Eucalyptus gracilis, Melaleuca pubescens (black tea tree) also oeeurs, and

when the soils are lighter and deeper Callitris propingua (native pine) occurs,

In the wetter range the shrubs are sclerophyllous (Acacia spp. being prominent),

but towards the drier range the shrubs have hairy, semi-suceulent leaves, the

thief being species of Atriplex (salt bushes) and Kochia (blue bushes). Essen-

tially, the mallee is transitional between the sclerophyllous leaved communities

of the south and the semi-succulent leayed, chenopodiaceous communities of

arid Australia,

LH BR. L. SPECHT

Mallee occurs on soils alkaline in reaction, containing large quantities of

limestone, often as rubble or as sheet travertine, and with heavy sub-soils with

exchangeable sodium in the clay—a brown, solonized (mallee) soil.

Much of the winter cereals (especially wheat) is grown on soils which

originally carried mallee or savannah woodland.

(2) Preservation.

Although this formation is more characteristic of South Australia than most

other States, n0 adequate reserve has been proclaimed,

Small reserves stich as (a) Coronation Park, Moorlands; (b) Folland Park,

Enfield; ie). Mineepe Research Station (40 acres) have been created, but liave

invariably been damaged by Highways Department camps, pre-school kinder-

ertene, as a stock-shelter, as well as by the inevitable invasion of weeds and

rabbits,

A small ares (Prominent FIill) in Section 364, Out of Hundreds, Eyre Penin-

sula, is the only stand of this mallee sub-formation which is satisfactorily re

served away from these contaminating influences, It should be preserved intact

and undisturbed, if possible.

(3) References,

Wood (1929), Wood (1937), Boomsma (1946), Crocker (19464), Jessup

(1946), Jessup (1948), French (1958).

8. Low Layerep Woevtann (ARw Woonnasn),

(1) Description,

Low layered woodland consists of communities dominated by low trees or

tall shrubs varying in spacing from dense to open; a low shrub stratum is usually

present, rarely continuous but sometimes absent; the shrnbs may he cither

scleraphyllous or with hairy, semi-succulent leaves. A herbaceous layer of

perennial grasses may be present and seasonal herbs und ephemerals are usually

well developed, but may sometimes be absent under dense canopies,

The chief deminants concerned ure Myoporum platycarpum (false sandal-

wood), Acacia sowdenii (myall), Casuarina cristata (black oak), Heteroden-

dron eleifolium (bullock bush), Acacia ancura (mulga), various other Acacia

species and various species of Eremophila (native fuchsias), Dodonaea (hop

bushes), and Cassia (kangaroo bushes), ,

Myoporum platycarpum and Acacia sowdenii accur at the southern limits

of the area, at first admixed with mallee; the former is restricted to the east

and the latter to the west of the Flinders Range, Both occur on loams contain-

ing varying amounts of limestone and are assoeiated typically with a blucbush

(Kochia sedifelia) and saltbushes (Atriplex stipitata and Atriplex vesicearia):

Cassia sturti aud Cassia eremophila (kangaroo bushes) are frequently important

shrubs.

Casuarina cristata and Heterodendron may ocenr with the same genera as

the foregoing, but also with another bluebush (Kochia astrotricha) on soils with

little lime in the profile, and also on sandhills and sandplain where they are nant

associated with bluebushes or salthbushes but chiefly with annuals and

ephemerals. The mulga (Acacia anevra) shows a similar pattern of distribution

and of variety of assoviated plants; in addition, it may occur on rocky hills asso-

ciated with sclerophyllous shrubs. Other Acacia species, e.g. Acacia brachy-

stachya and Acacia linophylla are dominant on sandhills, both with and without

mulga, On rocky hills species of Eremophila, Dedanaea and Cassia may be

deminants in low shrub-woodlands.

FLORA CONSERVATION IN S.A, 193

(2) Preservation.

Apart from the small Koonamore Vegetation Reserve of the University

of Adelaide (960 acres), which preserves communities of—

(i) Myoporum platycarpum-Atriplex cesiearia/A- stipilala;

(ii) Casuarina cristata-Alriplex stipitata;

(iii) Acacia aneura;

(iv) Small stands of Heterudendron olcifolium:

(v) Acacia Burkithi-Kremophila scoparia,

none of the widespread “low layered woodlands” of South Australian arid areas

are preserved.

(3) References.

Osborn, Wood and Paltridge (1935), Wood (1936), Wood (1937), Crocker

and Skewes (1941), Jessup (1948), Jessup (1951),

9. Sirus Srerrer Formation.

(1) Description,

Shrub steppe consists of communities of low shrubs with semi-succulent,

usually hairy leaves, the plants separated by a distance ahout equal to the

diameter of the bush. Perennial grasses may be present and ephemeruls are

prominent scasonally.

The chenopodiaceous: shrubs mentioned in the last formation often cover

areas in which trees are rare or absent; these areas are sometimes extensive, as

in the Nullurbor Plain, or more frequently smaller, interspersed with various

forms. of low layered woodland.

The most important bluebushes are Kochia sedifolia, usually where lime-

stone is clase to the surface, and Kochia astrotricha where there is Jess lime in

the soil, The most widespread saltbush is Atriplex vesicarin, of which several

ecotypes, ar “strains”, occur, some occurring on calcareous svils, whilst others

are found on soils with much less lime, e.g. on hill slopes or on silty food plains.

Various species of Bassia (bindyis) are commonly ussociated with them. After

rains a wealth of composites, cruciters, legumes and grasses occurs, The peren-

nial members of the shrub steppe, as also when they occur in low layered wood-

land, form a valuable fodder reserve for shecp in times of drought; in good

sens the annual plants of the woodlands or water courses are the preferred

aod,

On heavy soils, frequently gibber-coated, between the deserts a modified

form of shrub steppe occurs mixed with areas of Tussock Grassland in which

Astrebla species (Mitchell grasses) occur.

(2) Preservation.

Apart from about two acres of Koachid sedifolia association on Koonamore

Vegetation Reserve, there are no areas in South Australia preserving any of these

arid plant associations.

(3) References.

See Low Layered Woodland above.

10. Desert Zone ComMPLex.

(L) Description.

Desert regions occur when evaporation is greater than precipitation during

euch month of the year. They present a complicated mosaic of plant commu-

nities, Sandy deserts consist of long, parallel sand-ridges with an approximately

constant repetition pattern. Bath dunes and interdunal corridors are vegetated.

194 R. L. SPECHT

The dunes typically carry Zygochloa paradoxu (cane grass) on the crests and

Triodia basedowii (spinifex) qu the lower ridge slopes and on sandy inter-dune

corridors; small shrubs like Hakea Jeucoptera (needlebush) and species of

Grevillea and Mremophila oceur in sandy hollows. Shrub steppe occurs on

clayey-interdunal corridors, 4 restricted ephemeral flora of crucifers and vrasses

is prominent seasoually,

(2) Presercalion,

No reserve in South Australia,

(4) References,

Crocker (1946b), Jessmp (1981),

V. GENERAL CONCLUSIONS

Tt should be the duty of each State to ensure that every major plant forma-

tien aud, if possible, every species within its boundarics is preserved for pos-

terity, Table 2 indicates the situation in the State of South Australia.

It is obvious that there are glaring deficiencies in reserves in South Aus-

tralia. Tt is tortnnate that in most cases it is not too late to armend this situation.

These reserves would not necessarily be tourist attractions like the Barrier

Reef, Ayers Rock, the Grampians, but would have fur more merit scientifically,

economically, aasthctically and socially. They would cover not only our waste

and arid lands, but examples of our first-class country as well, Tf they came to

pass, future gencrations both in South Australia and all over the world would

be high in their praise of the foresight of today’s administration, ‘Vheodore

Roosevelt had this wisdom in the United States. It is now up ta our adminis-

tration to uct befure it is loo late.

The policy of the near future should be to concentrate on finding, avainst

the background of Table 2 data, which vegetation commumities are in danger of

eatinction, and to recommend reserves in areas where they still exist. In certain

causes there is clearly less nrgency (e.g. regarding reserves of the Desert Com-

plex}, but complacency should be avoided. The early formulation of a longer

range detailed policy and its implementation are, of course, highly desirable.

‘The present difficulty is to make specific recommendations. Although de-

tailed descriptions of the distribution of the flora are now available, there is as

yet no corresponding list of specific areas which need complete protection in

order to rectify the deficiencies revealed in Table 2. Such a survey is urgently

required as the next siep in Flora Gouservation in South Australia,

VI, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

This study was undertuken to provide background information for several

bodies interested in Hora conservation in this State, namely:

(a) National Parks and Reserves Sub-Committee for South Australia for

the Australian Academy of Science;

(b) Flora and Fauna Investigation Committee.

: me co-operation of fellow members of these bodies is gratefully ackuow-

ledged.

STnformation on some reserves, especially Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island,

and the reserve in Hundred of Flinders, Eyre Peninsula, is somewhat meagre.

Detiiled information on other reserves was available in published records or

our own notes, Mr. C, E. Rix of the Department of Lands, South Australin,

provided information on Fairview Wild Life Reserve; Mr. D. E, Symon, of the

Waite Agricultural Research Institute, information on Wilpena Pound,

FLORA CONSERVATION IN S.A. 155.

REFERENCES,

Avamson. K. $., and Ossonn, T. GC. B., 1924. The Ecology nf the Eucalyptus Murests of

the Mount Lofty Ranges (Adelaide District). South Australia. ‘rans. Roy. Sou, S.

Aust, 45, pp. 87-144,

Bavowin, J. G., and Crocker, 1. 1, 1941. Soils and Vegelation of Portion of Kangarag

Island, South Australia, ‘Trans, Roy, Soc. $. Aust, 65, pp. 269-275

Buaok, J. M., 1943-57, Vlora of South Australia, Vols, 1-4, 2nd Ed. Govt. Printer, Adelaide.

Boomsma, G, D., 1946. The Vegetation of the Southern Flinders Ranges, South Australia,

Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 70, pp, 259-276.

Hoy, Soc, S. Aust, 72, pp. 216-220.

Australia. Aust, For., 14, pp. §9-1L0.

Comonare, ). F,, 1954, The Climate, Geology, Soils and Plant Ecology of Portion of the

County of Buckingham (Ninety-Mile Plain), South Austealia. ‘C.S.LB.0. (Aust)

Bull, Na. 266,

Counisu, BE. A. 1049. Yield Trendy in the Wheat Belt of South Australia during TSU6-1U41,

Aust. J. Sci. Res., Series B, 2, pp, 83-197,

Chockerk, We. b.. 1044. Sol and Vegetation Relatiowhips in the Lower South-East nF South

Avsitridia, Traus. Ray. Soc, $. Aust, 65, pp. 144-172.

Crockin, KR. L., 19464. An Introdiiction ta the Sails and Vewetution of Fyre Peninsula, South

Australia, Tians, Roy. ‘Sac, S. Aust, TQ, pp. 83-L07,

Cerocxen, KR, L., L946b. The Stinpson Desert Expedlitiim, 1999, Seientitie Repeat Now Ay

The Soils and Vegetation of the Sinipson Desert and its Borders. ‘Iris. Roy, Sue. §.

Aust., 76, pp. 235-258,

Crocerer, R. 0, and Skewes, 1. R., 1941. ‘The Principal Soil and Vexetation Relationships

on Talearerenie Station, North-West South Australia ‘ans. Roy. See, S. Aust, 63,

pp. 44-40,

beaner, C., atid Corcans, J, B. 1955. The Ceography and Botiny of the Adclaile Const,

Roy, Sac, S. Aust. Ficld. Nat. Sect, Publ. No. 3

Fruneu, RJ, 1856, Soils of Eyre Peninsula. S, Aust, Dept. Agric. Bull, No. 457,

Jussov, A, Wo, 1948. The Mealogy of the Area Adjacent to Lakes Alexandrina antl Albert.

‘Trans. Boy. Sov. §. Aust., 70, pp. 5-34.

Jessup, R. Wo 1948, A Vegetation aod Paste Survey of Counties Eyre, Burra and Kimber-

ley, Sowth Australia, "Trans. Huy Sac. 8. Aust., 72, pp. 35-68.

Jessup, R, W., f954. The Soils, Keology and Vegetation of North-West South Australia,

‘Trans, Roy. Soe. 5. Aust., 74, pp. 160-273.

Tatenrieco, W. IL, 1956. Species Distribution over Part of the Cooualpyn Downs, South

Austilia, Aust. J, But. 4, pp. 68-115.

Lonuan, T. 1. N., 1960. “Vegetation”. pp. 22-24 ju “Touring the Flinders Ranges”. Roy.

Automobile Assov. $. Aust.

Maurin, Hevene A., 1961. Sclerophyll Cammunities at the Inglewand District, Mount Lolly

Ranges, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust, 85, pp. 91-118.

Masvenman, Menvinia, 1950. “TWlinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South Austealin’, Georgian

House. Melbourne.

Nontracote, KL 1, and ‘Trorer, 1. M,, 1948. A Soil Survey of the Hundred of Seddon. and

Part of the Hondred of Macgillivruy, Kangaroo Island, South Anstralia. CS... (Aust)

Bull. No. 235.

Osboun, TG, By. 1923. ‘The Flora anid Pina of Nuyts Archipeligo und) the Investigator

Group. No. & The Ecology of Pearson lands, Trans, Roy, Soc, §. Aust, 47, pp.

OF=1 1a,

Osuonn, T, G. By, antl Woon, J. G., 1928. On the Zonittion of the Veyetation in the Part

Wakefield Distriot, with Speotal Reference to the Salinity of the Soil. Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Anst...47. pp. 244-254.

Oseonrn, TT. CG. B. Woon, J. G,, and Parrrmece, T. B,, 1935. On the Climate and Veretation

of the ening Vegetation Reserve to 1931, Proc, Linn, Soc, N,S, Wales, 50, pp.

792-427.

Havson, Pararesa, LUST, Dark Islund Heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, South Australia). I ‘The

Effect of Microtopography ov Climate, Soils and Vegetation. Aust, J, Bat. 5, pp, 86-102,

SHauman, G, TB, und Seecut, R, L., Jan., 1960. Tispection of Flora and Fauna Reserve,

Hundreds of Hincks, Mivlong, Nicholls, aud Seetion 365, Ont of Mhmdreds, Mimeo

Report,

Ssura, D. FL 1960. The Ecolovy and Land Use of Lower Kyre Peninsila, South Australiac

University of Adelaide, M.Ag.Sei, ‘Thesis,

196 R. L, SPECHT

Srecut, R. L., 1951. A Reconnaissance Survey of the Soils and Vegetation of the Hundreds

of Taga. Wirrega, and Stirling of County Buckingham. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 74,

ip. 79-107.

Stee R, L., 1953. The Vegetation of the National Park and Reserves, pp. 29-58 in

“National Park and Reserves”. Govt. Printer, Adelaide.

Sprcut, R. L,, 1961. Dark Island Heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, South Australia). VII, The

Effect of Fertilizers on Composition and Growth, 1950-1960. An Experimental Investi-

gation of Factors Controlling Distribution of Herbaceous and Heath Understorey in

Australia. Aust, J. Bot. (in press),

Specut, R. L., Browne, P. F., and Hewitt, P. N., 1961. The Plant Ecology of Part of

the Mount Lofty Ranges. IU. The Distribution uf Eucalyptus elaeophora, Trans. Roy.

Soc. S, Aust., 85, pp, 155-176,

Specut, R. L., and Pernry, KH. A. 1948. The Plant Ecology of Part of the Mount Lofty Ranges

(1). Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 72, pp. 91-132.

Srecut, R. L., and Rayson, Patricia, 1957. Dark Island Heath (Ninety-Mile Plain, South

Australia). I, Definition of the Ecosystem. Aust, J. Bot., 5, pp. 52-85.

Specut, RK. L., Rayson, Paruicra, and Jackman, Marcaret E., 1938. Dark Island Heath

(Ninety-Mile Plain, South Australia), VI, Pyrie Succession: Changes in Composition,

Coverage, Dry Weight, and Mineral Nutrient Status. Aust. J. Bot., 6, pp. 39-88.

Steruens, C. G., er ar,, 1945. A Soil, Land-Use, and Erosion Survey of Part of County

Victoria, South Australia, C.S.I.R. (Aust.) Bull. No. 188.

Trven, N. S,, 1946, Ecological Survey of the Grasslands of a Portion of the Lower South-East

of South Australia. University of Adelaide, M.Sc. Thesis.

Wiraias R. J., 1955, Vegetation Regions of Australia. Atlas of Australian Resources,

Canberra.

Woop, J. G., 1929. Floristics and Ecology of the Mallee. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53,

pp. 359-378.

Woon, J. G., 1930. An Analysis of the Vegetation of Kangaroo Island and the Adjacent

Peninsulas. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 54, pp. 105-139.

Woon, J. G., 1936. Regeneration of the Vegetation on the Koonamore Vegetation Reserve,

1926 to 1936, Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 60, pp, 96-111,

Woop, ]. G., 1937. “The Vegetation of South Australia”. Govt. Printer, Adelaide.

Woon, J. G., 1958. “The Vegetation of South Australia’, pp. 84-95, in “Introducing South

Australia” (Kd. R. J. Best). Govt, Printer, Adelaide.

SOME MEDUSAE FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA

BY P. L. KRAMP

Summary

A collection of Australian medusae has been sent to me from the South Australian Museum. With

one exception (Solmundella bitentaculata) these medusae were collected at the Great Barrier Reef,

North Queensland, between 20 Dec. 1958 and 19 Feb. 1959, and the collection was accompanied by

notes on the appearance and behaviour of the living specimens and the conditions under which the

catches were made. In the following account I take great pleasure in quoting these valuable and

interesting observations, which were made by Dr. J. H. Barnes during his excursions among the

islands of the Great Barrier Reef. On a previous occasion I have dealt with the Hydromedusae of the

Great Barrier Expedition, 1928-29 (Kramp, 1953). For morphological and taxonomic discussions,

as also for references to the literature, I refer to that paper, though some additional remarks will be

found in the following account. The present collection contains 13 species of Hydromedusae and

three species of Scyphomedusae. Only one of the species has not previously been observed in

Australian waters; it is described below as a new species, Melicertissa orientalis nsp. I am greatly

indebted to Dr. R. V. Southcott, of the South Australian Museum, because he has sent me this

interesting collection.

SOME MEDUSAF FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA

by P. L, Kramep

(Zoological Museum, Copenhagen)

(Communicated by R. V. Southcott)

(Read 14 September 1961)

INTRODUCTION

A collection of Australian medusae has been sent to me from the South

Australian Museum. With one exception (Solmundella hitentaculaia) these

medusae were collected at the Great Barrier Reef, North Queensland, between

20 Dec, 1958 and 19 Feb. 1959, and the collection was accompanied by notes

on the appearance and behaviour of the living specimens and the conditions

under which the catches were mide. In the follywing account | take great

pleasure in quoting these valuable and interesting observations, which were

madc by Dr. J, H. Barnes during his excursions among the islands of the Great

Barrier Reet,

On a previous occasion J have dealt with the [lydromedusae of the Great

Barrier Expedition, 1928-29 (Kramp, 1953). For morphological and taxonomic

discussions, us also for references to the literature, I refer to that paper, though

some additional remarks will be found in the following account,

The present collection contains 13 species of Hydromedusae and three

species of Scyphomedusae, Only one of the species has not previously been

observed in Australian waters; it is described below as a new species, Meli-

certissa. orientalis n,sp.

J am greatly indebted to Dr, R. V, Southeott, of the South Australian

Museum, because he has sent me this interesting collection,

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT,

with Dr, J. H. BARNES’s notes on appearance and

behaviour of the living specimens,

Merga violacea (Agassiz and Mayer)

Pandea violavea. Mayer, 1910, pp. 119, 490, Pl. i, Fig, 7, Pl. 12, Fig. 1, text Tig. 64.

Merga wiolacea Kramp, 1953, p. 265,

Green Island, 8.1.59, one specimen, 6 mm. high and wide.

“Small colourless transparent jellyfish, bulet-shaped, with square opaque

internal structures and eight peripheral tentacles half an inch Jong” (Barnes).

Distribution: Great Barrier Reef, Australia; Fiji Islands; Pacific coast of

Mexico; Nicobar Islands; coasts of India; Mediterranean Sea; Bahama Islands:

Tortugas, Florida.

Leuckartiara gardineri Browne

-Leuckartiara gardineri Browne, 1916, p. 181, Pl. 39, Pig. 4.

Leuckartiara gardineri Kramp, 1953, p. 267.

Green Island, 8.1.59, one specimen.

“The little red stinger. Has a very hiyh colourless and transparent apex,

like a ‘nosecone’, Below this cone the bell is thicker, with bright orange internal

‘Trans. Roy. Suc. 8. Aust. (1961), Vol 35.

igs P.1,, KRAMP

organs and four fong pink tentacles (one inch long) which inllict a surprising

sting. The sting was so sharp that I felt that this tiny creature could not be

the nfender, but was convinced on repeating the experiment. The pain sub-

sided rapidly and no local effects were visible on my leg, The specimen shrank

to two-thirds life size immediately after preservation” (Barnes),

The original deseriptian of this medusa was based upon one single specimen

trom the Amirante Islands in the Indian Ocean (Browne, 1916), and [ have

previously scen two small specimens from the Great Barricr Reel; these are the

only records up to now.

The present specimen is well preserved, 7 mm. high in the preserved con-

dition; the apical projection is 2-3 1mm. high, bluntly conical, The four perra-

dial tentacles are closely spirally coiled and have evidenuy been very long

when extended. They have no ocelli, but cach of the basal bulbs hus an abaxial

endodermal spur which is continued as a narrow canal proceeding immediately

below the exumbrellar epithelinm almost to the top of the apical projection of

the umbrella. Owiny to contraction of the bell the canals are winding in a

wave-like manner. In each quadrant there are five very small tentaculae, exactly

as. deseribed by Browne, the median one slightly larger than the others, which

are decreasiny in size towards both sides; each with a small abaxial, basal ocellus,

The folded gonads wre exactly us figured by Browne, but there is no indi-

cation of a transversal bridge connecting the adradial gonads across the inter-

radial space between them. Examination of more material may prove that this

species does not belong to the genus Leuckartiara, which is characterised by

“Inlerradial gonads, horseshoe-shaped with folds directed perradially”.

In the preserved specimen the walls of the stomach between the gonads

havea bright red colunr right dawn to the mouth lips, whose densely folded

margin is white. The conicsl, basal part of the tentacle bulbs is red with a

median, abaxial white line.

Distribution: Amirante Islands: Great Barvier Reef.

Laodicea indica Browne

Lacie indica Browne, 1905b, p. 136, Pl. 1, Mig. 5, PL 4, Figs. 7-10.

Laodicea indica Kramp, 1953, p, 268,

Green Island, 21,X11,55, 4 specimens, diam. 8-9 mm, — “Colourless and trans-

parent except tor a white cross in the centre, ax seen on a hot eross bun” ( Barnes).

Green Island, 8.1.59, 2 specimens, diam. 9-10 mm.—“Colourless with faint

hie eross-shaped murking and a fringe of numerous tentacles approximately

6 mm. long” (Barnes),

Distribution: Creat Barrier Reef, Australia; Torres Strait: Malayan Archi-

pelaga; Ceylon; Frivandrum coast, India; Gulf of Aden, Arabia,

Melicertissa orientalis n.sp.

Green Island, 21,X1.58) one specimen.

The genus Melicertisse: is characterised as Laodiceidae with eight simple,

narrow radial canals. Hive species are described, Dr, J. Picard i Minnailic }

has informed me ina letter that Melicertissa adriatica. Neppt is identical with

Octogonade mediterranea Zoja, which belongs to the Mitrocomidac. AL. malayica

(Maas) is distingnished hy its very large number of tentacles (ubont 160). The

remaining three species, M. clavigera Tfaeckel, Mf. platyzastra Nair, and M,

mayert Kramp, need sme clisiaission before the identification of the present

specimen can be stated,

The shape of the tentueles and their basal bulbs is similar in all these

species, Slight differences in the structure and position of the gonads may he

SOME MEDUSAE FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA 199

due to their stages of maturity. The width of the stomach and the vaulting of

the umbrella may be dependent on the states of contraction. An adaxial ocellus

is present ut the buse of each tentacle and cordylus in all the species.

There are, however, some distinguishing characters which seem to separate

the three species mentioned above,

M. clawigera was described from the Canary Islands by Haeckel (1879, p.

135, Pl, 8, figs. 8-12). It was 10 mm. in diameter, with § tentacles and 24

cordyli: the stomach was narrow. and the eight mouth lips were very short.

Two small but sexually mature specimens of apparently the same species are

recorded from the Triyandrinm coast, India, by Nair (1951, p, 59),

M. platygastra is described trom a single specimen found at the Trivandrum

coast. Iidia (Nair, 1951, p, 60, Pl. 1, Figs. 16,17), It is 7 mm, in diameter, it has

Figs. Land 2, Melicertissa orientalis n-sp.

Fic. 1, aborsl view. Fig. 2, oral view.

5 tentacles (like M. clavigera). but a somewhat larger number of cordyli, 4-6

in each octant.. The stomach is rather wide, and the species is muinly charac-

terised by its mouth lips, which are long and lanceolate.

Mayer (1910, p. 210, Pl. 24. Vigs. 2, 3) referred specimens from the Tor-

tugas, Florida, to M. clavigera, though they had 16 tentacles (against 8 im M.

clovigera), and there was only one cordylus between successive tentacles: the

mouth lips were yery short. Nair considered these specimens different from

Haeckel’s, and in accordance therewith | provided Mayer's specimens from

Florida with a new name, M. mayeri (Kramp, 1959, p. 139},

In certain regards the present specimen from Australia differs from all

these species. Examination of a greater number of specimens may reveal a

variability whiclt makes it necessary to regard them all as local forms of one

specics, M, clavigera. Provisionally it seems to me, however, more expedient

to keep these species separate and describe the specimen from the Great

Barricr Recf as representative of a new spccies,

200 P, L. KRAMP

Description of the specimen from Great Barrier Reef (Figs, 1-3)—The

umbrella is flatter than a hemisphere; in its present condition, with the margin

bent inward, the diameter is 11 mm. Jelly fairly thick. The stomach is broad

and rather Hat, 4 mm. wide; the mouth is widely open, octagonal, the mouth

rim thin and smooth, with eight faintly indicated lips, The eight radial canals

are continued inwards as eight narraw grooves meeting in the centre of the

dorsal wall of the stomach. Outside the periphery of the stomach the radial

canals are. narrow, laterally compressed. The eight gonads occupy about two-

fifths of the length of the radial canals, somewhat nearer to the ring canal than

to the stomach; they are wavy, lateral bands with about five extensions, almost

lamelliform, perpendicularly to each side. There are 17 marginal tentacles, all

alike, the tentacle bulbs broadly conical with a heart-shaped base. Between

successive tentacles there are 1-3, must frequently 2, cordyli, typically club-

shaped, with a small distal cap of nematocysts. There is a small, black, adaxial

ocellus at the base of each tentacle and cordylus.

Fig. 3. Melicertissa

orientalis n. sp. Gonad

and part of hell margin,

adaxial view.

The present species agrees with M, mayeri in the number of tentacles, but

it has twice as many cordyli. M. clavigera and platygastra have only eight

tentacles, and M. platyyastra is also distinguished by its long, lanceolate mouth

lips. A star-shaped figure in the centre of the stomach seems to be present in

M. clavigera, but apparently not in mayeri and platygastra, Nematocysts in the

cordyli are not mentioned in. the deseriptions of any of the other species; they

are quite distinct in M, occidentalis, but are not indicated even in the enlarged

figures by Haeckel (Pl. 8, Fig. 12) and Mayer (PI. 24, Fig, 3).

As mentioned above, future studies may possibly show that these four

species are identical; but since they are described from four very distant geo-

graphical regions, it would seem rather presumptuous ta disregard the actual

SOME MEDUSAE FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA 21

morphological differences between them and unite ther without decisive

evidence.

Phialucium carolinae (Mayer)

Phialucium curolinae Mayer, 1910, p. 275, Pl, 36, Bigs. 1", 1//,

Phialucium carolinae Kramip, 1953, p. 276, Figs. 2, 3,

(For further synonumy see Kramp, 1953.)

Green Island, 7.1.59, one specimen.

Palm Beach, near Cairns, 19.11.59, one specimen,

The specimen from Green Island is 18 mm. in diameter; it has 6 radial

canals and 45 tentacles which, in the living specimen, were about 6 mm. long,

The tentacles are all alike. Between successive tentacles usually only one very

small rudimentary bulb and two marginal vesicles, but in some instances three

young bulbs, the median one larger than the others, and four marginal vesicles,

The gonads are narrow, along the distal one-third of the radial canals, but not

quite reaching unt to the umbrella margin. It was collected in shallow water at

the north-eastern end of Green ttl:

The specimen from Palm Beach is 14 mm. wide, with 4 radial canals and

about 32 tentacles; it was found “alive but beached’.

Both specimens are stated to be completely colourless when alive.

Distribution: Originally described from the southern parts of the eust coast

of North America. Recorded under different names from several localities in

Indo-West-Pacific waters: India, the Nicobar Islands, the Nias Islands, the

Philippines and Palao Islands, and southern China.

Eirene hexunemalis (Gocttc)

Trenopsis hexunemalis Mayer, 1910, p. 310, Fig. 171.

Eirene hexenemalis Kramp, 1953, p- 281, Fig, 5,

Crecen Island, 6.1.59, one specimen. “Transparent, six spokes, approximately

forty tentacles a quarter inch long” (Barnes). The preserved specimen is 16

mm, in diameter.

Distribution; Widely distributed in the Indian Ocean and western Pacific,

from Zanzibar in Airica to southern Japan.

Eutima curva Browne

Eutima curva Browne, 1905b, p, 138, Pl, 3, Figs. 1-3.

Eutima curca Mayer, 1910; p. 300.

Eutima curve. Kramp, 1953, p. 288.

Green Island, 21.X11.58, two specimens; diameter 14 mm., with 4 tentacles

and 77 marginal warts, peduncle 10 mm. long; diameter 16 mm., with 4 tentacles

and 92 margina)] warts, peduncle 18 mm. long. “In life they were colourless and

completely transparent, but visible because uf their refractile appearance, and

the fact that they were swimming uctively (approsimatcly 4 half knot) against

the tide stream. They had tentacles 4 inches (10 cr.) long before preserva-

tion, but 1 could detect no sting on contact” (Barnes).

Green Island, 8.1.59, two specimens: diameter 1] mm., with 4 tentacles

and 68 marginal warts, peduncle crumpled; diameter 12 mm., with 4 tentacles

and 124 marginal warts, peduncle 9 mm. long. “Tentacles not less than two

inches (5 cm.) long. Tentacles can cause mild transient sting on the thin skin

of a child” (Bares).

In some of the specimens the cirri on the tentacle lulbs are lost.

Distribution: Ceylon; Torres Strait and Great Barrier Reef, Australia.

202 P. L. KRAMP

Aequorea australis Uchida

Aequarea australis Uchida, 1947, p. 307, Fig. 8.

Aequorea australis Kramp, 1953, p. 290, Fig. 7,

Green Island, 20.X1/.58, two specimens.

wreen Island, 21.X1L55, two specimens.

“Blue stripes; present in Jarge numbers” (Barnes).

The preserved specimens are measured as follows;

Diam, 8 mm.,, stomach 3-5 mm., tentacles 17 + 3 young ones, radial canals

18 fully developed, 2 half developed, no gonads.

Diam. 12 mm, stomach 4 mm., tentacles 20, radial canals 16 fully developed,

with tiny gonads.

Diam. 19 mm., stomach 6 mm., tentacles about 24, radial canals 15 fully

developed with well-developed gonads and 7 half developed without gonads.

Diam. 21 mm., stomach ? , tentacles 29, radial canals 22 fully developed

with gonads.

. Distribution: Great Barrier Reef and New Guinea; ? Philippines; southern

China,

Aequorea pensilis: (Eschscholtz)

Aeqiorer pensilis Mayer, 1910, p. 333.

Aequorea pensilis Kramp, £9553, p. 295.

Cairns, at the Esplanade, 5.11.59, one specimen, cliameter 34 mm., stomach

19 mm., 80 radial canals. “Colourless” (Barnes).

Aequorea macrodactyla (Brandt)

Aequorea macroductyla Muyer, 1910, p. 353.

Aequarea maeroductylu Kranp, 1953, p. 294.

Green Island, 29.XI1.58, one specimen (sce below).

Green Island, 7.1.59, tvo specimens: Diam. 12 mm., stomach 5 mm,, with

15 tentacles and about 80 radial canals; diam. 19 mm., stomach 13 mm., with

17 tentacles and about 100 radial canals. “Mauve stripes” (Barnes).

Large numbers were present on Dec, 29th, 1955, and Dr. Barnes has given

an interesting account of the conditions under which they were observed, The

preserved specimen is 32 mm, in diameter, the stomach 19 mm., there are 27

well-developed tentacles and 8 young tentacle bulbs, besides. numerous rudi-

mentary marginal warts; 70 radial canals, all with more or less well-deycloped

gonads.

At first sight | was somewhat in doubt of the identification of this speci-

men. The dimensions and the numbers of tentacles and radial canals present

no objection against referring it to Ae, macrodactyla, but the tentacle bulbs are

not quite as we are accustomed to see them in the preserved specimens, in

which they are usually yery short and broad, with a prominent abayial keel

terminaling above in a short and blunt spur. This is a very characteristic

feature, distinguishing Ae. macrodactyla trom all other species of Aeguorea, In

the present specimen the tentacle bulbs are as shown in Fig, 4, elongated comical,

without a prominent keel, but with a pointed, triangular apical spur. This

slender appewrance, however, is evidently due to the fact that this specimen

is im an uncotnmonly good state of preservation, with particularly well extended

tentacles, some of them more than 4 cm. long and very thin. In life they were

“approximately 3 inches (7-5 cm.) long”. None of the other species of Aequorea

possess tentacle bulbs with abaxial spurs. I do not hesitate, therefore, to refer

this excellently preserved specimen to Ae. maerodactyla.

SOME MEDUSAE FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA 203

Distribution: Widely distributed in the warm parts of the Pacific and Indian

Oceans from America to Africa; also recorded from the southern parts of the

west coast of Africa, from the Patagonian coast of South America and from the

West Indies,

rad, rad.

i) Bey i

r.c.

Fig. 4. Aequorea macrodactyla,

basal bulb of a well-extended ten-

tacle, abaxial view. rad., radial

canals, 7.0., ring canal. vel.,

velum.

Olindias singularis Browne

Olindias singularis Browne, 1905a, p. 737, PI. 57, Vig. 1.

Olindias singularis Mayer, 1910, p. 357.

Olindias singularis Kramp, 1953, p. 298.

Green Island, 8.1.59, one specimen, 26 mm. wide, —“Colourless jellyfish,

bell translucent and colourless, crossed by two lines of white which widen out

a quarter inch (ca. 6 mm,) from the centre. From this point outwards the

lines have wavy brown markings superiorly and yellow focculent masses in-

feriorly, Between these crossed bands, one-sixteenth of an inch (ca. 1% mm.)

from the centre, are four bright red dots. When vicwed from the side these

dots are seen to be columns of red specks running down beside the central tube.

About 40 tentacles hang down one inch (ca, 2-5 cm.) from the periphery, which

carries also seventy to eighty dark grey dots. This specimen was stranded on

the sand but was still alive” (Barnes).

Distribution: Widely distributed in the tropical parts of the Indo-West-

Pacific region.

Liriope tetraphylla (Chamisso and Eysenhardt)

Kramp, 1953, p. 301.

Green Island, 20.X1L58, oné specimen, diameter 8-5 mm,

Distribution: All tropical and subtropical waters.

Solmundella bitentaculata (Quoy and Gaimard)

Kramp, 1953, p. 302.

Holothuria Banks, N.W, Australia, July 1958, one specimen, diameter

5-5 mm.

204 P. L. KRAMP

Distribution: Widely distributed in all the oceans, particularly common in

the sonthern hemisphere.

Nausithoé punctata Kolliker

Green Island, 21.XJ1.58, 5 specimens, 8-9 mm. wide,

Green Island, 8.1.59, one specimen, 8 mm. wide.

“... actively swimming jellyfish, having eight short tentacles (same size

in life as in preservation) and readily visible because of the eight mauve-coloured

areas placed in the radial line of the tentacles. These jellyfish consistently swim

with the tide” (Barnes),

Distribution: Coastal waters of all tropical and warm seas.

Pelagia noctiluca (Forskal)

Green Island. 8.1.59, one specimen, 20 mm. wide, rather crumpled.

“Pale brown jellyfish with eight tentacles, ca, 34 em. long, . . . bright yellow

masses below the bell” (Barnes).

Distribution; Widely distributed in all warm and temperate seas.

Cephea cephea (Forskal)

Cephea cephea Mayer, 1910, m, 654, text Fig. 406,

Green Island. 6.1.59 and 7.1.59, 5 specimens, 10-21 mm. in diameter. Maryin

vertical beyond the deep annular furrow of the exumbrella. The gelatinous

warts in the central part of the exumbrella more or less flattened,

“Jellyfish coloured brownish-purple on top, purple underneath, with finely

scalloped edges and fleshy frond-like mouth arms” (Barnes ).

DR. J. H. BARNES'S OBSERVATION ON THE CONDITIONS UNDER

WHICH THE CATCHES WERE MADE

(with addition of the species collected )

20 Dec. 1958, Green Island. Netted at 6.30 a.m., ten feet from beach on

the N.E. head of Green Island, in two feet of water. (Aequorea australis,

Liriope tetraphylla.)

21 Dee. 1958, Green Island, 7 a.m., shortly before high tide. Clear, bright

morning, light northerly wind causing very small waves. Water exceptionally

clear. Bottom clean sand. Numerous jellyfish were located in a narrow

(? tidal) stream running towards the north-eastern end of Green Island, and

apparently coming from the north. This stream of jellyfish turned castward on

nearing the beach, and follawed the line of the shore about 10 feet out. The

‘cllyfish were concentrated near the surface, in three feet of clear water. (Meli-

certissa orientalis, Laocdicea indica, Eutima curva, Aequorea australis, Nausithoé

punctata. )

29 Dec. 1958, Green Island. Collected just below the surface in fifteen

feet of water at twelve midday, on a full tide. Large numbers present about a

hundred yards off the northem shore. Numerous salps were present amony

the jellyfish, and the latter were ingesting these salps in large numbers. Hot

bright day with a light south-east wind. Northerly wind preceding two days.

A young lad and | swam amongst these jellyfish for twenty minutes without

receiving any sting. (Aeyuorea macrodactyla. )

6 Jan. 1959. Green Island. Collected at 7.30 a.m. in shallow water at

north-eastern end of Green Islund, about fifteen fect from shore, over clear sand.

yen peut morning, tide just before full, wind strong northerly, (Cephea

cephea.

SOME MEDUSAE FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA 205

7 Jan. 1959. Green Island. Collected at 7.30 am., near full tide (extra

high), water very clear, wind light variable northerly, in shallow water at the

north-eastern end of Green Island, over clean sand. (Phialucium carolinae,

Aequorea macrodactyla, Cephea cephea.)

8 Jan, 1959, Green Island. Collected 7.30 a.m., just after full tide in fairly

rough, clean water. Wind northerly. (Merga violucea, Leuckartiara gardineri,

Luaodicea indica, Eirene hexanemalis, Eutima curva, Olindias singularis, Nau-

sithoé punctata, Pelagia noctiluca, )

5 Feb. 1959. Cairns, at the Esplanade. Collected from prawn net at 6.30

p-m., a few feet from the beach, Dull day, very muddy water, strong south-

west wind for five days, tide high. (Aequorea pensilis.)

19 Feb. 1959. Palm Beach, near Cairns. Time about 6.30 p.m., just after

full tide, and following three days of strong northerly wind with high seas.

(Phialucium carolinae, )

REFERENCES

Browne, E. T., 1905a. Hydromednsae. Fauna and Geography cf the Maldive and Lacca-

dive Archipelagocs, vol, 2, part 3,

Browne, E. T., 1905b. Report on the Medtisae Collected by Professor Herdiman at Coylon

in 1902, Rep. Pearl Fish. Manaar, Pt. IV, Suppl. Rep. No. 27.

Haecxr1, E., 1879. Das System der Mcdusen.

Kramep, P. L., 1953. Hydromedusae. Sci. Rep. Great Barrier Reet Exped., Vol. 6, No. 4.

Kuramp, P. L., 1959. The Hydromedusae of the Atlantic Ocean und Adjacent Waters. Dana

Rep., No. 46.

Mayer, A. G., 1810. Medusae of the World,

Nam, K. K., 1951. Medusae of the Trivandrum Coast. Part I, Systematics. Bull, Res. Inst.

Umy. Travancore, Ser. C, Nat. Sci, Vol. 2, Pt. 1.

Ucuma, T., 1947. Some Medusac from the Central Pacific. Journ. Fac. Sei, Hokkaido

Univ., Scr. 6, Zool., Vol. 9.

MITCHELL'S WOMBAT IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

The distribution and status of Phascolomys mitchelli in South Australia are discussed. Material of

the species from the South-Eastern Division of South Australia is compared with that from highland

districts of east Victoria and New South Wales and found to be close thereto. The use of a sub-

specific name based on P. niger Gould /863 to distinguish the former, as done by Iredale and

Troughton, is contraindicated. The status of P. niger is considered and reasons given for sinking the

name or limiting it to varietal usage.

MIICHELL’S WOMBAT IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by H. H. Fixcayson

(Read 14 September 1961)

SUMMARY

The distribution and status of Phascolomys raitehelli in South Australia

are discussed, Material ot the species from the South-Hastern Division of South

Australia is compared with that from highland districts of cast Victoria und

New Sonth Wales and found te be close thereto. The use of 4 sub-specific

name based on P. niger Gould 1863 to distinguish the former, ax done by Irc-

dale and Troughton, is contraindicated, The status of P. niger is considered and

reasons given for sinking the name or limiting it to varietal usage.

In preparing a general account of the hairy-nosed wombat ( Lasiorhinus

latifrons Owen) in South Australia, various matters involving the associated

bare-nosed wombat have come up for consideration. This is the species vari-

ously known in recent years as Vombatus hirsutus Perry, or Vombatus ursinus

platyrhinus Owen, but which earlier was long laown by the well-stabilized

if technically irregular term, Phascolomys mitchelli Owen. Longman (1939)

has given reasons for rejecting Perry's name hirsults and these are accepted by

Tate (1951), and until much more impressive evidence of the distinctness of

platyrhinus is presented, there are obyious advantages in retaining the well-

used and carlier mitchelli, and this course is Followed here.

While L. latifrons is a prorainent and characteristic South Australian animal,

P. mitchelli in this State is a mere outlier of the main eastern population, and

being a much more obscure living creature, its status and distribution are less

known. The chief matters to be discussed in this note are (1) the detailed

distribution in South Australia, (2) the relation of the South Australian popu-

lation to that of Victoria and New South Wales, and (3) the status of Phas-

colomys niger Gould, 1863.

DISTRIBUTION

The main occurrence of Mitchell's Wombat in South Australia lies almost

entirely within the South-Eastern Division of the State, but has a slight north-

western extension into the lakes region at the Murray mouth. The most

southerly record supported by material is at Port Macdonnell on the far south

coast, and the must northerly at Murray Bridge (Wood Jones, 1924), but it is

uncertain whether the latter, being based on two cave skulls, is a true riverine

extension of recent time or is sub-fossil, Apart from this minor incursion, the

species has not heen reported from any part of the truc mallee area, as we

know it here, though many of the Coorong sites are [ringed on the Jandward

side with the mallee-like Eucalyptus angulosum. t know of no records west of

the Murray River,

The South-Eastern Division has its northern boundary at lat. 35°50’ south

approximately, and includes the lands to the south between the Victorian

border and the sea. Its five countics have an arca of about six million acres

and inchide the highest rainfall areas of the State, with mean annual falls rang-

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1961), Vol. 35,

205 FL FINLAYSON

ing from 30 inches in the south to 20 in the north, In strong eontrast to the

eastern habitats cf the species, which Jie for the most part in highland areas

with altitudes ranging up tu 5(Xd) feet or more, the present district is flat and

low-lying, much of it being but little above sea level, and its highest puints

Petcept for a few voleanic cones) are but a fow hundred feet and are to be

ound on the crests of the numerous lines of cousolidated dunes whieh rth fle

country from south to north. Its south-central portion is subject to winter

flooding and the vegetation varies trom extensive low heaths of lepltospermums,

banksias and casuurinus te sclerophyll forest of considerable growth, consisting

mostly of £. obliqua and #, wiviinalis with a floor fairly densely covered with

bracken and low shrubs.

P. mitchelli occurs sporadically at least over most of this area, with the

possible exception of the north-east corner beyond the railway line in the

counties of Cardwell and Buckingham. Its permanent colonies, however, arc

largely restricted to two long, narrow, north-south zones, the first following the

coast aud the second more or less parallel to the Victorian border. The coastal

zone is especially characteristic and presents featuves quite diferent from either

the Jreath or stringy bark forest, Much of it is treeless or sparsely clad with the

so-called dry land titree (Melaleuca pubescens), Linnestone rangelets or byw

cliffs or Guterops are frequent, and the terrain is diversified by swamp and

freshwater Jakes of consideruble extent, and is interlaced by dense jungles of

melalencas and giant cutting grass (Gahnia spp.).. This type of habitat is hest

developed in the 60-mile tract between Konyorong and Rohe, where it may

be LO miles deep or more, and includes portions of the Mt. Burr, Woakwine,

Black and other ranges and the chain of lukes from Lake BKanney to Lake

Tlawden, It is here that the best chance of permanent survival of P. métchellé

in Sauth Austrulia hes, as much of itis comparatively inaccessible and unutilized,

and shelters some huge warrens with great cave-like entrances which ure known

ta have been eecupied for the century or more of European settlement.

Vhe physivgraphical unit most characteristic of the ecology of P, nuiichell

in this part of the country as created by a combination of low limestone cliffs

and breukaways in which the entranees to the warrens are commonly situated,

adjacent to a freshwater swamp or lake-shorc, where the roots of swamp plants

whieh forrn the staple of its diet are easily excavated, and the whole is eom-

monly oecluded by dense, fringing thickets. Such combinations are also found

north of Robe (though in much less depth) theonghoul the coastwise portions

of Macdonnell and along the Jandward side of the Coorong in Cardwell up

tu the south and eastern shores of Lakes Albert and Alexandrina, but the

numbers of wombats fall off considerably as one gocs north, The eastern tract

is much narrower aud does net extend as far north as the coustwise one, and is

considerably less rugged and secluded. Tt extends, with numerous breaks, along

the border country fron Comiy Careline in the south almost to the Tatiana.

The Gave Range and the Gap Range between Padthaway and Nuracuorte are

typioal, but the ealoniés here are smaller and more exposed fo human interfer-

ence than on the coast.

These two main belts of permanent accupation act as reservoirs Fram wirieli,

from time to time, excess wombats are pushed out from overcrowded wurrens

tu exploit new habitats af suitthle charavter in the intervening areas. The pre-

cess is highly selective as to sites aed level beaths. in particular, are seldom,

if ever, colonized. In 1920, for example, wombats from near the inflow uf the

Miuray into Lake Alexandrina invaded.a sandy undulating area of broom and

eallitvls sernb in the Llundred of Seymour between Tailem Bend aud Cuoks

Plains. This is the most northerly occurrence in South Australia of which T

MITCHELL'S WOMBAT IN S.A, 209

have personal knowledge, and in much the most arid surroundings, but it was

short-lived. Similar excursidns from the Coorong give fluctuating wombat popu-

lations to the Jong chain of depressions known Jocally as the Floodwater, which

lies parallel with the Coorong in County Cardwell, and which is vccasionally

flooded with treshwater by un overflow from the lower south-east district, Some

al these colonies ave as much as 17 miles from the coast.

The habits of wombats in these newly established communities are often

somewhat differont from those in the parent colonies. In the latter, especially

when in proximity to settlements, they are generally excessively shy, quite

strictly nocturnal and cryptic in all their movements, and until motor transport

with its. night-lighting of roads and paddocks by headlamps became cammion, it

was not anusual to find settlers who had spent a lifetime in close proximity to

occupied warrens without once sighting the ovenpants. Tt is usually very diffi-

cult to get specimens from these old warrens in deep limestone. The inmates

are wary of traps and pitfalls and will endure long periods of fasting in the

burrows, or break ont throngh a new exit, rather than risk ground that has

been interfered with, and short of bulldozing the whole structure into nibble

anc driving the animals into nets, little will avail,

In about 1930, a relalively new colony was located in the Hundred of

Joanna near the Victorian border. 1} visited it in 1933 and found it situated in

stringy bark forest on a rise of deep sandy soil carrying a heavy growth of

bracken, Burrows were nurcrous oyer an area of two or three acres, aid the

occurrence was utypicul imu that there were no limestone or other rocky out-

crops anywhere in the vieinity, and wombats were much more in evidence than

is usually the case, and bad been doing heavy damage to fencing. With the

aid of a settler and a fox tertier, we were able to obtain four very easily

in a morming’s work. The procedure was to send the dag into the warren

to locate the wombat. On his doing so, the latter attempts to crush the dog

against the roof of the tunnel by butting upwards with his powerlnl hindquarters,

and careless or overeager dogs are sametimes killed in this way, When the

lwo make contact, a muffled uproar ensues, which is easily located al the sir-

face, so that one mav dig directly dawn upon the disputants, release the dog

and secure the wombat, “Lhey struggle yiolently when taken and are extremely

powerful, but make ne attempt to bite jf the head is avoided. ‘They were de-

spateched easily with chlorofarm. In May, one large female was found to he

camrying a naked pouch young.

Most of the burrows here were quite shallow and short, sometimes no

more than two feet deep und ten feet long, but in one case where the wombat

eonld uot be overtaken, Uke buvvow had extended 40 feet from the entrance

and deseended to six feet when the attempt was abandoned. Two years earlier,

this sume settler, nsing the same lechnique (but without the anaesthetic) liad

killed 20 Wombats in this colany within a few weeks.

This is much the wisiest method of obtaining undamaged specimens, but

is mily practicable under the unustial circumstances of the above occurrener

In Hhe high country between Tumbarumba and Batlow in the Tumut distriet of

New South Wales, { have seen P, snitehelli taken very easily by flonding the

warreus by short circuiting the heads nf creeks with a shallow race to the

mouth of a burrow at a lower level,

Increase in land ntilizatinw in the Sowth-Eastern Division of South Australia,

which has been greatly accelerated in recent vears, will inevitably reduce the

tolal wombat population ta some extent. But short of a widespread epidemic

of disease or systemutice persecution with extermination as ils deliberate object,

21) NH. VINLAYSON

(here seems no reason why P, mifefellé should not maintain «a strung hold in this

State indefinitely.

THE RELATION OF THE SOUTIL AUSTRALIAN POPULATION

TO THAT OF VICTORIA AND NEW SOUTH WALES

Although no detailed work has been done which would justify a fixed

opinion on the matter, it is easy at the present time to gain the impression hy

rundom interrogation that P. mitchelli is much less well represented in the

Victorian districts west of Melbourne, than elsewhere in its overall range. In

south-eastern South Australia on the one hand, and in north-eastern Vietoriu,

Gippsland, and south-eastem New South Wales, on the other, the presence of

wombats is universally known to bush naturalists, if only through the evi-

dence of worked warrens, But in such of western Victoria, there seems to be

little or no such knowledge of it. This is substantially true, for example, of

such “likely” areas as the Otway Peninsula and the Grampian Hills, which

abound in what wwuld be considered typical wombat country in this State.

The only recent occurrences known tu me (excepting the immediate vicinity

of the border) are in the (Victorian) Black Range west of the Grampians and

at Bridgewater Bay in the Portlind District, east of the Glenelg River. The

latter js an apparently vigorous colony and stragglers from it have been seen

in the Surrey iver scrubs, twelve miles north, and in earlier years it evidently

had a coastal and sub-coastal extension to the east, as specimens in the National

Museum, Melbourne, come from Port Fairy (1912), Warrnambool (1857), and

Mortlake (1911); other western specimens in the same collection are from Colac

(1866) just north of the Otway Ranges, and Lyonville (1908) on the Dividing

Range,

‘if a discontinuity dves actually exist between the population of New South

Wales and eastern Victoria, on the one hand, anc the South-Eastern Division

Of South Australia on the other, it would tend to support the action of Iredale

and Troughton (1934. p. 34) in applying a sub-specific name to the latter,

theugh. as I shall show, the name used and the characters on which it is based,

haye been erroneously chosen, Meanwhile, as no direct comparisons lave

hitherto been made, I have assembled the relevant material which is available

locally, and done so, with results which are summarized below under the three

heads of dimensions, pelage and cranial characters.

The South Australian material from the South-Eastern Division includes

11 skits and 2] skulls, which are [fully localized and a further five skins and

nine skulls which are from Zoological Garden exhibits in Adelaide and which

are probably of the same precaphve origin as the rest, The Victorian and

New South Wales collections comprise seven skins and eight skulls all fully

lwealized and are from the Wombat Range area south-east of Benalla in north-

east Yictoria and trom the Murray Range area of the Tumut district of New

South Wales, The data quoted and conclusions drawn, are based entirely on

the localized material,

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Reliable dimensions, personally made wpon animals in the Hesh, are avail-

able fur four examples only —three of them from the Joanna colony of South

Australia mentioned above, and one from the Tumut district of New South

Wales. These ate quoted in full below for record purposes (Table 1), but are

nf little use in a comparison of populations, owing ta marked differences of age,

the New South Wales specimen being very aged and emaciated, and the others

MITCHELL'S WOMBAT TN S.A, 211

scarcely adult, Dimensions of total length and pes length have been collected

from the skins examined, but they are so often falsified by distortion, that to

quote them here is to confuse the issue. All that can be said here under this

head is that the average size of the eastern highland animal may be a little

larger than in South Australia. and the feet perhaps proportionally stouter and

with heavier digits and claws, THoweyer, the skull series from South Australia

contains. examples much larger than any belonging to the South Australian skins

examined, and considerably Jarger than the largest eastern skulls available, so

that even in this there is uncertainty.

TABLE L,

South Australia N.5.W.

d : : 3

Young adult.) Sub-udult | Young aclult | Very aged.

Total longth: dorsal contenr B65 rua $25 mm | SOA rain 960 mmo

Tail: from anus G2 Ae 47 —

Tail: from dorsal flexure 28 27 200 =

Cheat. girtits

630 Asa 650 64

Mid girth e

Manus length a) | 68 77 ‘

Nuil of ard digit 22 21 27 3

oe oe

Pes length (s. u.) 43 78 82 Os

Nail of jrel digit } 23 23 27 29

Mar, length » 68 70 70 74

Har, max, breadth ~ 40 38 ab 43

Rhinariwm to eve re 67 72 8A

Eye to car on 0 7 100

Eye, intercanthal width 18 17 18 oo:

Weight in Ibs. 43 | 89 48 5]

External dimensions of Phascolomys intchellé Owen,

PELAGE

In yeneral colour, the South Australian skins, with one exception, are a

comparatively uniform batch of grizzled drab dorsal colour, The basal colour

on the dorsum is a variable brown or drab, rather markedly contrasted with the

terminal (external) effect, which is a blend of brown or drab ticked with the

dull white or ivory of the sub-terminal band and with the black or bistre of

the tips and guards. There is a fairly constant darkening on the crown and

nape and sometimes on the rump, and the back may be irregularly mottled

where the basal colour is locally more in evidence than the grizzling, The facial

areas arc pale drab and less ticked than the back, and there is a patch of greyish

white at the base of the ears. The sides. are grizzled like the back. but paler

and the entire ventrum is externally pale drab or greyish white without grizzling,

except for a variably developed belt across the mid-belly, The ear backs and

dorsum of manus and pes are darkened to a variable brown or drab without

grigaling, Length of coat, density and coarseness all vary within wide limits,

The single exception represents the “yellow” phase of Thomas (1888) and

of Gould (1863, op. cit. pl. 58). The dorsal coat is very short, rather soft and

a uniform pale buffy drab, very obscurely ticked with slightly darker buff. There

is practically no darkening or other differentiation of crown, ear backs, manus

or pes, and the sides and ventrum are much like the back.

212 I, FINLAYSON

‘he “black” phase is absent from the South Australian material examined,

thongh Wood Jones (1924, p, 264) records it as occurring bere. The ear in

all the South Australian specimens is small and normal for Phascolomys.

The eastern batch of seven skins from eust Victoria and New South Wales

are much more variable, but fall into two. camps--four “blacks” and three

grizzled greys. The latter are very similar indeed to the South Australian skins

of the same vategory, but have a denser und somewhat Jonger coat, and yvert-

trally are darker and more grizzled over the mid-belly, though this is wot

constant.

The four “blacks” are erythristic rather than melanistic variants, and are

very uniformly coloured on all surfaces. ‘The entire dorsum is a rich ferm-

ginous umber with a variable overlay of black or bistre. but scarcely any

ticking, The distinction of the basal dorsal colour from the terminal external

valour which is a marked and constant feature of the grey pelage from both

areas, is Very much vedneed und the sides, ventrum, limbs, manus, pes and

ear backs are all coloured much like the back. The coat is sometimes con-

spieuously coarse and bristly on the forebacks and arms. I cannot confirm the

upinion of A. S. le Souef (1926). that the two main colour phases oceur fn

uniform mutually exclusive populations. Both in the Victorian and New South

Wales portions of the callection, “blacks” and greys were taken in close proxim-

ity. There appears to be no cranial distinction whatever between them.

When examples in corresponding phases of pelage are compared, the

yeneral agreement between the eastern specimens here examined und those of

soutl-eastern Sout! Anstralia is quite close in spite of the marked physical

diflerenees in their habitats. With adequate series there js lite doubt that z

considerable praportion of the grey skins from the two areas would he virtually

ideatical,

CraniAL CHaRAcrens

The range und approximate mean for 14 cramal dimensions of tour adult

skulls from east Victoria. and New South Wales, on the one hand, and 13 adult

skulls from the South-Eastern Division of Senth Australia are shown in Table 2.

As more than helf the erania are not sexed, the sexual factor has been ignored

in the group comparison. 'Uhe age criterion generally adopted was the closure

at either one or both of the basicraniol sutures. There is much irregularity

in this closure as between the two sites. Usually the posterior (basicecipital-

basisphenoid) precedes the anteriar (basisphenoid-presphenoid ), hut there are

numerous exceptions, However, the time of closure at either site is sufficiently

delayed to exclude ahvious sub-adults, and is a better guide than the coronal

suture, which is occluded miuch earlier. The values quoted for the basicranial

aml hasifacial axes and the facial index are approximate only as the landmark

when the suture was closed had to be estimated from the general appearance

of the bone and this was sometimes unrevealing,

The range for the South Australian group is invariably wider than for the

eastern four, and provides in every case a + overlap of the latter. The differ-

ener in the means exceeds 2 p.c. iy only bvo values. The length of diastema is

lower (~35 p.c.) in South Australian skulls, and the anterior palatal foramina

wo lower (—17 pee). The latter figure is caleulated upon the muximuim

lenwth observed: but the pair are offen very aneqnally developed and when a

mean value of both is employed, the differenec drops to (— LO p.c.). From

this very unequal sample, therefore, it might be inferred that the South Ans-

tralian skull is metrically very close to that of the Victorian and New South

Wales highlauds, with perhaps a tendency to a slightly shorter muzzle region,

MITCHELL'S WOMBAT IN $.A. 213

and a rather decidedly shorter anterior palatal foramen. It shows no reduction

in overall size, but on the contrary its largest examples somewhat exceed the

largest available from the easter group.

fn non-metrical characters, the skulls from the two groups show very marked

individual variation, though the range of this is necessarily somewhat greater in

the larger South Australian series, and the average age in the eastern group

is somewhat higher. Even so, it is possible to sclect numerous pairs from the

two areas which are virtually identical both in size and structure and this

correspondence would probably be increased if more castern material were

available.

TABLE 2.

Hastern Vietoria South Easter

antl Southern N.S.W.! Sotith Australia NASW. 5, Aust,

4 Advits (35) 18 Adulia (dy) L Adult ) 1 Adult

Greatest length 176-9-186-0 (182-6) | 166-°6-108 +9 (Fats 1) Ts-0 L&T 7

Basal length 148-9-165-0 (161-f) | 148-8-176-9 (161-3) 166-0 161-8

Greatest breadth 129-0-156-0 (133-6) | 121-7-146-5 (134-3) 134-1 185-5

Nasal longth The. TEM (73-6) | GHel. SBS (720) | THe 72-9

Nasuls grontost breadth DA HHH (ABA) | G89. 57-7 (43-9) 33°49 55°99

Least: interorbitul broadth eG 5-5 (57-8) | 520-6598 (58-1) 58-5 5a: 7

‘Lesst intevteraporal breadth! 43°3- 47-2 (40-8) | dle f2-8 (4568) 40-7 43°47

Palate length LOS-O-L1L-a (107-9) | 96-5-119-9 (108-1) Wits 111-3

Diaatema longth S8-1. 44-5 (41-8)| 83-0. 47-9 (84-8) | dad 30-5

Ant. palatal foraminn 2% 18-7 (13-4) -F- t4- (11-1) 13°65 11-0

Raseranial axis 51-3- 52-6 (HL-9) 16-0 58:0 (A0-S) ald AS

Busifieral axis 1NT-5-116 +f (112-3) | 103-8. 120+5 (LEO+8) 116-5 Hil

Voeial index 204+ 7-226 -2 (216-6) | 194-8-2396-5 (217-1) 2G 2 219-8

PuM* 51-0- 53-6 (52-1)! 45-7- 55-h (Al-4) Ale? FAT

Skull diotengiolis of Phescalomnye mitehcllt Gwen.

The slight differences which have been brought to light by this examination

of external and cranial characters are much less impressive than the general

aureement and suggest that the two groups stucied are essentially one population

and that the discontinuity in the range in western Victoria (if real) is of very

recent origin.

Whether such differences as can be made out call for trinomial distinction

may be left for future work on more comprehensive series to decide, but from

what has been done it is obvions that.a name based on P. niger Gould, a form

supposedly of small size, with an car like Lasiorhinus and black coat colour, is

quite unsuitable.

THE STATUS OF PL NIGER GOULD 1863

In 1868, Gould (op. cit. text to Pl, 60) made a brief reference under this

name to a Zoological Gardens exhibit in London of a melanistic bare-nosed

wombat, which was stated to have « long. pointed ear as in Lastorhinus latifrons.

No material of the original specimen is certainly preserved, it was not figured,

and its place of origin was unknown. Attempts have been made to supply all

three of these deficiencies with the result that the name and what it connotes

have fallen into inextricable confusion, Thus:

(1) Thomas (1888, p. 215) selected a specimen “h” of the British Museum

collection as the “probable type of P, niger Gould”. ‘This, however, is an

enormous wombat with a skull of basal length 185 mm., which is far larger

than the largest examples in the collection which I have just examined, which

21d H, FINLAYSON

includes some unusually large crania. This cireumstance conflicts sharply with

the later ideas which cyolyed as to the nature of P. niger which lave tended

to revurd it as a smal! or even dwarfish form.

(2) Tate (1951, p. 7) considered that Gould had figured P. niger in Ivis

Mammals of Austraha, though he admitted that the name was not directly asso-

ciated with any illustration. The two plates 55 and 56 of blackish wornbats in

Gould's work wre both labelled P. vombatus und represent blackish phases of

the Tasmanian wombat (P. tasmaniensis of later authors) which has normally

short ears which are sufficiently well shown, They do not, in my opinion, repre-

sent Gould's P. niger.

(3) Gould (1863, text to plate 60) attempted to make good the deficiency

of lucality by equating P, niger to a blackish form described by the natives to

Angas (1861) as inhabiting the Murray serubs of South Australia and con-

trasted by them with a “big vellow fellow", Here again Gould fell into cunfu-

siun which has been emfounded hy some later commentators. His attempts

to link P. niger with the dark wombat of the river front is defeated by the obvious

identity of this animal with Lasiorhinus latifrons. A Frequent, perhaps even

normal colour of well-nourished young adult Lasiorhinus in fresh pelage is a

dark. blackish grey —the motiled reddish grey skins which are common in enl-

lections are nearly always trom emaciated, aged and fecble wembats which

abound in must warrens and are easily collected by reason of their habit of

basking in a semi-comatose condition on top of the burrow. To the natives, who

are connoisseurs of meat, the “black”-coated examples would hold pride of place

in their accounts to a stranger, while the supernumary “greys” might well be

overlooked. Ne wombat is a permanent denizen of the deep mallee areas

of South Australia, but Lasiorhinus alone does penetrate it from the River

Murray Slats to a depth of a mile or two, in the reaches hetween the Chucka

Bend and Morgan, On the other hand, the “big yellow fellow" fits some phases

ot P. mitehelli quite well and both species would be knuwn to natives who

hunted the lower reaches of the river and the area ahout the Jakes and the

Murray inouth, and who presumably were Angas’s informants. Krefft's record

of P. niger from Ft. Lincoln (infra) and that of R. Tate (1879) trom the Bunda

Platewu of the Eucla district, are prabably both based on the same misconcep-

tion as the abpve,

Ii the century which has elapsed since Gould wrote, no evidence of

recent wombats other than Lasiorhinus latifrons bus been adduceil in the regions

between the Murray and the Western Australian border, except at the southern

extremity of Eyre Peninsula where the rainfall rises ta nearly 20 inches and

reaches the limiting value of the P. mitchell habitats of the South-Eastern

Division of the Stale. The existence here of a small wombat of Phascolomys

type is cunfirmed by the presence of material in the South Australian Museum.

Krefft (1871, 1872) reported the presence of P. niger Gould in the same area,

and although the reeord was probably due ta confusion with L. latifrans, it has

prompted Lredale and Troughton (1934) to postulate the existence of a sub-

species of P. mitchelli corresponding in characters to Gould’s original state-

ments on P, niger as to its melanism and long pointed ear (and to which has

been later added small size as well), and ranging from western Victoria over the

whole of lower Smith Australia ta Eyre Peninsula. This conception, however.

is qulte erroneous and cannot stand, firstly, because bare-nosed wombats are

quite absent from the greater part of the supposed range, and secondly, because

the largest population of P. mitehelli within this range is almost impeccably

normal in its large size, and shart ear, and lias a low incidence of melanism.

MITCHELL'S WOMBAT IN S.A. 215

Clearly, if the name niger is to be used at all, it must be restricted to a small

area at the apex of Eyre Peninsula. I am of opinion, however, that as a taxo-

nomic concept, Gould's P. niger, without material, authentic locality or adequate

description, and constantly susceptible of three interpretations, is altogether

too nebulous to serve any practical purpose of classification, and its retention

(like that of Macropus elegans Lambert in the Macropodidae), will be a

stumbling block to the clarification of wombat terminology in this part of

Australia. It should cither be discarded or reduced to varietal or tetranomial

use, as Tate has done (1951).

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The assistance of the authorities of the National Museum, Melbourne, in

supplying wombat records from the western district of Victoria, is gratefully

acknowledged.

REFERENCES

Axcas, G, F., 1861. Prog, Zaol, Soc, London, pp. 268-271.

Gouxp, J., 1863. “The Mammals of Australia”, 1. Text to Plate 60.

InepaLe, T., and TroucHtos, E. ve G., 1934. “Check List of the Mammals Recorded from

Australia”, Sydney, p, 34.

Krevrr, G., 1871. “Mammals of Anstralia”, text to wombat plate.

Krerrt, G., 1872. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 795-796.

te Sourr, A. S., 1926. “lhe Wild Animals of Australasia”, London, p. 293.

Loneman, H. A., 1939. Mems, Queensland Muscum, 11, pp. 283-287.

Tate, R., 1879. Trans. Phil. Soe. S. Aust., p. 124.

Tater, G. H. H., 1951, Am. Mus Novitates, 1525, p. 2.

British Muscum”, London, pp. 212-215.

Jones, F. Woop, 1924. “The Mammals of South Australia”, pp. 264-266,

MITCHELL'S WOMBAT IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY B. G. FORBES

Summary

Bedded magnesite of the Montacute Dolomite Formation is inferred to have formed in areas of

shallow water marginal to the sea, chiefly because magnesite occurs frequently as a conglomerate

and is closely associated with mud-cracked beds. Most dolomite beds are concluded to be of marine

origin, and thus the formation as a whole formed under paralic conditions. Magnesium carbonate

may have been precipitated by alkaline waters of continental origin reacting with sea water. The

appropriate balance of conditions for the formation of magnesite was achieved most often in the

Copley region where tectonism was at a minimum. Tectonism was greatest in the Port Germein

region. Much less magnesite was formed in this region possibly through dilution by active streams.

Conditions in the Rhynie-Bundaleer region, where little or no magnesite was formed, are thought to

have been largely marine.

MAGNESITE OF TITLE ADELAIDE SYSTEM: A DISCUSSION

OF ITS ORIGIN

by B. G. Foruis*

(Read 14 September 1961)

SUMMARY

Bedded magnesite of thé Montacute Dolomite Formation is inferred to have

formed ity areas of shallaw water marginal to the sea, chiefly because magnesite

oceurs frequently as a conglomerate and is closely assuciated with amud-cracked

beds. Must dolamite beds ave concluded te be of marine origin, and thos the

formation as a whole formed wnder paralic conditions, Magnesium carbonate

may have been precipitated by alkaline walers of continental origin rcacting

with sea water.

The appropriate balance of conditions for the formation of mnaznesita was

achieved mast often in the Copley region where tectonism was at a minimum.

Tectonism was greatest in the Port Germein région. Much jess magnesite was

formed in this region possibly through dilution by active streams. _ Conditions

in the Rhynie-Bundaleer region, where Little or no magnesite was formed, are

thought to have been largely marine,

INTRODUCTION

In a previous paper (1960) I described the petrography and stratigraphy

of the Montacute Dolomite. This Proterozoic formation contains in many places

extensive sedimentary beds of conglomerate composed of magnesite, a mineral

more communly associated with bodies of altered serpentine,

Opinions on the origin of the South Australian magnesite have been given

previously. Sir Douglas Mawson, who was chiefly responsible for recognizing

the magnesite stratigraphically, stated in 1947; “the magnesium-rich sedi-

ments were obviously laid down in shallow, saline land basins”, Spry (1952)

discusses the evidence and suggests an original chemical deposition of Irydro-

mapnesite in a large, shallow basin. Sprigg (1952) uses the tenn “brecciola”,

apparently inferring the transport of fragmental magnesite by turbidity currents.

It is proposed here to offer suggestions, based on the field and laboratory

work briefly reported in the previous paper, on the mode of origin of the sedi-

mentary magnesite, beginning on what appears to be the firmer ground, the

mechanical aspects of the problern, and passing on to chemical aspects, for

which there is little field evidence.

DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENT

Mechanical. Factors

Two very eyident and eritical features of the magnesitic beds are thcir

cunylomerate structure, resembling mud-pellet conglomerates, and their asso-

ciated polygonal cracking. From these it is not unreasonable to infer that

the original sediment was subject to periods of subaerial exposure and erosion

in a continental environment, possibly an arca marginal to the sea.

* Department of Mines, Adelaide. Published. with the permission of the Director of Mines.

Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust, (1961), Vol. 85.

218 Rh. G, FORBES

A few roagnesite beds possess a structure like mud-balls, suggesting the

rolling up of plastic material. An original plasticity is also suggested by the

irreeularly-squeezcd appearance of some magnesite conglomerate fragments.

The rounding of magnesite fragments may be due in larger part lo shaping:

of u plastic substance rather than to wear. This would scerm to apply partieu-

larly to pebbles with thickened margins. Fabrics of some magnesitie rocks are

Mustrated in Figs, 1 to 4.

Th contrast, most dolomite beds show no evidence of erosion or subacrial

expospre, It is concluded that most dolomite is Of Tuarine, although perhaps

shallow-water, origin. The depositional environment of the formation as # whale

may thus be termed puaruatic.

Fig, |. Section normal to bedding in «4 tuagnesite-dolomite rock {von Copley; specimen 12

em. in length. White magnesite pebbles up to 1 em. in length occur in a grey

matrix of sancd- and silt-size dolomite and magnesite, ‘he lower part of the speci

men is ticher in dolomite and sliows wavy bedding.

Fig. 2. Seetion normal to bedding in & magnesite rock from Copley; specinign 9 em. dn

length, The fabric of the rock has bevn revealed by weathering, possibly hydration,

of very fine-grained magnesite, The apparent curling-up and fracturing of the

thin layers may have been duc to mud cracks.

Alternate transgression and regression may be used to explain the reverse

raded bedding structure often found in magnesite conglomerate and arenite

beds. Below is a suggested outline of a cyole of transgression and regression

and associated sedimentation.

It is presimed that while magnesium carbonate, with a little dolomite, is

formed in marginal Jageons. dolomite or caleium carbonate is formed in

the neighbouring shallow sea, When sea level rises, the caleareous

zim migrates inland, In still-stand periods the magnesitic mud, originally de-

posited as normal sedimentary laminae, occasionally suffers dessication, This

lucilitutes subsequent erosion, During the succeeding lowering of sea level

the earlier-deposited magnesium carbonate is reworked and deposited in deeper

water, If regression proceeds far enough, some calcium carbonate or dolamite

will be croded. The finest detritus is deposited farthest from shore, buf as the

shure-line migrates toward deeper water this detritus will be covered by coarser

material.

The spreading effect of an oscillating sea level may also serve in explaining

the widespread and mnifurm nature of what appear to be shallow-water sedi-

ments. Another explanation of the great extent and uniformity of individnal

MAGNRSELE OF ‘THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 219

mugnesite beds along their strike is that this strike may very well be parallel

to the original shore-line.

In areas where it is prominent, arkosic sediment may be expected to aécu-

mulate during regression and become rewurked during transgression.

Chemical Factors

From the previous cousiderations it would scom that the original form of

magnesium carbonate was chemically deposited in shallow basins marginal tu

the sea, The proximity of sea water solves the problem of a source of the

magnesium in magnesite. There remains the question of how mugnesium was

removed from solution eventually to form a carbonate.

Fig. 3. A magnesite conglomerate bed, about 2 fect thick, overlying thin-hedded dolomite

near Atbetcola. Magnesite pebbles are much coarser at the top of the bed than

at its hase.

Fine-grained carbonates, normally calcite and aragonite, are formed in

present-day sea and lake waters. Their deposition is generally attributable tu

loss of dissolved carbon dioxide attendant upon increases in water tempera-

ture, although an increase in pH duc to organic activity could also be effective.

Natural precipitation of magnesium carbonate From present-day saline

waters appears fo be a rare event. Two interesting examples of natural ovvue-

rences are as follows; Alderman and von der Borch (1960) report hydromag-

nesite within the sedimentary dolomite deposits of the South Australian, Cocrong

lagoons: Vital (1951) discovered a colloidal substance containing basic magne-

sium catbonate which was Hoating on the surface and also occurred on the bottom

of Lake Elton, U.S.S,R.. Von der Borch (personal communication) also reports

primary magnesite precipitation in one Coorong lageon,

basic magnesium carbonate may be precipitated from sea water under

normal surface conditions by the addition of alkali or alkali carbonate; Hepburn

{1940) concludes that this basic magnesium carbonate is of variable composi-

tion due to the adsorption of HCO,— ions by colloidal magnesium hydroxide,

220 B. G_. FORBES

Irving (1926) found that 50 p.c. of the dissolved magnesium in sea water was

precipitated by the addition of enough sodium carbonate to produce a pH of

about 10:5; calcium carbonate precipitates at a pH of 8-5 and magnesium

carbonate begins to precipitate at pH 9.

It is thus possible that the magnesite of the Montacute Dolomite was origin-

ally precipitated as such, or precipitated in a hydrated or basic form and con-

verted to magnesite during diagenesis. The precipitating agent is unknown:

possibly alkalis were provided inorganically in marginal playas or a high pH

may have been produced organically. The only evidence of organic activity

is the carbon within dolomite rock.

PALAEOGEOGRAPHY

The original sedimentary environment is hypothetically depicted in general

terms in Fig, 5, which omits the magnesite occurrence near Olary and is based

on a few sparsely scattered points of observation, It is thus probable that the

trug pattern of sedimentation was rather more complicated than that suggested,

Fig. 4, Section normal to bedding in a magnesite-dolomite reck from Copley. What may

represent a mud-ball (above centre) is about & em. across in the section. It is

composed from centre: putward, of magnesite arenite, fine-grained dark-grey dolomite

and curved flakes of white fine-grained magnesite. Elsewhere in the rock angular

fragments of magnesite up to 5 oni. in length ate scattered in 4 matrix of dark-vrey,

fine-grained dolomite. Irregular darker areas are richer in dolomite.

The figure shows in the north an area of weak marginal uplift and to the west

an area of strong uplift. Other minor areas of strong uplift appear near John-

burgh and Adelaide. The depositional basin is divided into areas of parulic

sedimentation without magnesite, paralic sedimentation with magnesite and

marine sedimentation.

The area most favourable for the formation of magnesite appears to have

been centred near Copley, where the greatest proportion occurs, where the

beds are thickest and where the magnesite conglomerate pebbles are largest.

Near Copley, also, sand sedimentation was at a minimum. This favourable area

was terminated to the north near Witchelina, where fine sands formed the

greater part of the deposits. The sands are presumed to have come from a

north-vestern source area of moderate relief, Current bedding structures at

Witchelina and Arkaroola respectively indicate How from north-westerly and

northerly directions. The slumping at’ Witchelina and Arkaroola is in agree-

ment with the depicted outer margin of the depositional area: slumping xt

Copley may be due to a minor variation in relief within the main basin.

MAGNESITE OF TIIE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 221

South of Copley subsidence was stronger and the known depositional area

narrower. Slumping and current bedding structures at Depot Creek suggest

a source for detritus to the west and a downward slope of the depositional

surface to the east. The proportion of magnesite, size of pebbles and thickness

HEE EH

Sy,

WS:

ONS

a“

9 MILES 50

Fig. 5. Hypothetical plan showing areas of uplift and scdimentation during deposition of

the Montacute Dolomite Formation. Postulated areas of marginal uplift (1) are

indicated by crosses; large crosses indicale stronger posilive movement, Area (2)

was devoted to paralic sedimentation unaccompanicd by magnesite, and area (3)

to paralic conditions with magnesite deposition, In area (4) marine conditions

prevailed. Names of the abbreviated lovalities are, from north to south: Witchelina,

Arkaroola, Copley, Hawker, Depot Creek, Mundallio Creek, Johnburgh, Port Germein

Gorge, Beetaloo, Crystal Brook, Bundaleer, Clare, Robertstown, Rhynie, Adelaide,

of beds was less, while proportion and grain-size of sand was greater. In the

north there appears to ie been a suitable balance between the supply of

(Palkaline) continental water and normal marine conditions over a broad and

fairly fat depositional area, By contrast, in the south a stronger marginal uplift

222 5. G. FORBES

possibly upset this balance by too great a supply from streams. Proximity to

an open sea may also have had an adverse effect on the formation of magnesite.

The thinness of the Montacute Dolomite and the absence of magnesite and

detrital sediment from it between Adelaide and Bundaleer suggest that con-

ditions were predominantly marine in this region. Near Adelaide there appears

to have been a small isolated area where prevailed conditions somewhat similar

to those at Copley.

CONCLUSIONS

The gist of this discussion is that the sedimentary magnesite of the Monta-

cute Dolomite Formation most likely formed in unusually alkaline marginal

lagoons, but it is not known how the depositional area became so alkaline.

Whether or not this last question will ever be answered, much more cer-

tainly remains to be learnt about this unusual rock and the formation which

it characterizes.

REFERENCES

Auprnman, A. R., and vow pen Boncn, C, C., 1960, Occurrence of Hydrumagnesite in Sedi-

ments in South Australia. Nature, Lond,, 188, p. 931.

Forses, B, G., 1960. Magnesite of the Adelaide System: Petrography and. Descriptive

stratigraphy. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 83, pp. 1-9.

Hersurn, J. BR. 1, 1940. The Chemical Nature of Precipitated Basic Magnesium Carbonate.

J. chem. Soc., 1940, pp. 96-99.

Invinc, L., 1926. The Precipitation of Caleiurn and Magnesium from Sea Water, J. Mar.

biol, Ass. U.K.. 14, pp. 441-446.

Mawson, D., 1947. The Adelaide Series as Developed along the Western Margin of the

Flinders Ranges. Trans, Roy. Soc. §, Aust, 71, pp. 259-280.

Spricc, BR, C,, 1952. Sedimentation in the Adelaide Geosyncline and the Formation of the

Continental Terrace. Sir Douglas Mawson Anniv. Vol., Univ. of Adelaide, pp. 153-159.

Spry, A, H., 1952. Sediments of the Adelaide System in the Mount Plantagenet Area, South

Australia, Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 75, pp. 164-180),

Virat, D. A., 1951. On the Question of Carbonate Formation in Lake Elton, C.R. Acad.

Sci,, U-R,S.S., 80. pp, 937-939,

MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY, DUNCAN CAMPBELL SWAN

Summary

DUNCAN CAMPBELL SWAN, M.Sc.

1907-1960

Wencan Campbell Swan died in London in December, 1960, at the end

of a period of study Jeave during which he had paid attention to his special

interests im the field of economic entomology, in particular to grape phylloxera,

to mites of horticultural interest and to the biological control of St. John’s wort

leaf beetle (Chrysomela hyperict).

Mr, Swan was elected a member of the Society in 1932 soon after his arrival

in South Australia to take up a position of assistant entamologist at the Wuite

Agricultura] Research Institute under the Jate Professor James Davidson. Tis

service to the Society included periods as Seeretary (1040-1942), Vice-President

and President (1947-1949), and a further period of fve years as Councillor,

Mr. Swan was born and educated in Perth, Western Australia, and gradu-

ated with an Honours degree in Science in the University of that State. He

was awarded a Hackett Research Studentship. He was awarded the degree oF

Master of Science by the University of Adelaide in 1935.

During the period 1942-1946 he served in the Pacilic Area with the Medical

Unit of the Royal Anstralian Air Force as entomologist, and in 1946 succeeded

Professor Davidson as head of the Department vf Entomology at the Waite

Insitute, with status from 1955, of Reader in the University of Adelaide.

This Department has had a threefold duty to the State of South Australia.

The first has been to provide an advisory service in economic entomology ta

the State Department of Agriculture, the second to provide courses in entomology

in the faculties of the University and the third to pursue research into the

problems suggested by the deficiencies in knowledge revealed in the exercise

of the other two functions.

Mr. Swan was an extremely competent hiologist, and it is perhaps in the

exercise of his wide knowledge of Australian fauna and flora that he excelled

in his contribution to the first of these duties, Over the years he contributed

a succession Of papers to the Journal of Agriculture of South Australia, excel-

lently illustrated by himself, on the insects of major cconomic importance to

the State. His service with the Air Foree vave him, in addition, a wide know-

ledge of medical entomology.

He chose to make his contribution to the third of these duties hy becom-

ing the Australian authority on the grape phylloxera, not only by his know-

ledge of the classical literature on this pest but by undertaking field studies in

the infested areas in eastern Australia. Another field of knowledge to which

he paid attention was the taxonomy ard biology of the mites of horticultural

importance.

His premature death has meant that much of this special knowledge has

remained unpublished. However, his ficld data and his collections have heen

brought together and referred to the appropriate specialists with a view to

ultimate publication in appropriate form, TAP

FLLM.B.

1934, Dermatitis cansed by i mite (Pediculoldes ventricosus) and its occurrence in Aus-

tralia. Med, J. Anse, 1994, Nov, 3, 573,

A scarah beetle (Aphodius taamaniae Hope) destructive to pastures in the: smuth-

east of South Australia, J. Agr. 8. Aust., 87, 1149-1136,

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING

THE YEAR 1960-61

Nov., 1960. Du. T. O. Brownie: “Preliminary Observations on the Ecology of

the Australian Kangaroo Tick Ornithodoros gurneyji”.

Apr., 1961. Mr. J. R. Harris: “Salt in Turf Grasses”.

May, 1961. Mr. F. F. Taonemann: “Principles of Digital Computers”,

June, 1961. Mr. S, B. Harr: “The Likely Development of Metropolitan Ade-

laide, 1961-1991”.

ExHiprrs

During the year, the following members exhibited material at Ordinary

Meetings:

Dx. C. G, STEPHENS and Mr. K. I. Norrucotr—cxhibits of new soil maps.

Mr. L, W. Parkin and Mr. B. P. Weee—tectonic maps.

Dr. B. Damy—artificial diamond dust,

CHANGE OF RULES AND BY-LAWS

The following Rules and By-laws were amended at the Annual General

Mecting in October, 1960, to read as follows:

Rule X1.

(1) The financial year of the Society shall end on the last day of June in

each year, and the Annual Meeting shall be held in the month of July

or in such other month and upon a date and at a place to be appointed

by the Council.

By-law II,

(4) Nominations for officers and members of the Council, on the prescribed

form, shall be lodged with the Secretary by 4 p.m. on the day of the

June Council Mecting.

By-law V1,

(1) The library shall be supervised by the Librarian. Subject to control

the Council, he shall be responsible for the receipt of publications,

the distribution of the Society's transactions and the general care and

maintenance of the library and the loan of books, (a) directly to mem-

bers of the Svciety, (b) through the Commonwealth Inter-Library

loan system, to members and other scientific and technical organiza-

tions, and. to the general public.

SIR WILLIAM MITCHELL, CENTENARIAN

Summary

225

The hay-itch mite, Pediculoides tentricasus (Newport) (Acarina + Pediouloididae)}

in South Australia. J. Agr. 8. Auyé., 37, 1259-1299.

The red-legged earth mitu, Halotydeus. destructor (Tucker) in South Australia, with

remarks upon Penthaleus major (Duges). J. Agr. 5, Aust., 38, 353-367.

1985, A weevil attacking mallow (Malva parviflora L, andl M. nicacensis All.) in South

Australia, J. Agr, 8, Aust, 38, 1125-1128,

1936. Berlese’s fuid. Remarks upon its preparallon and use as a mounting mediym. Bull.

ent. Res, 27 (3), 389-391,

1937. Iusevts and other invertebrates of economic importancé in South Australia ching

the period July, 1934, to fume, 1936, J. Ayr, S. Aust., 40, 717-731.

1940. The tucerne fea (Sinynthurns viridis Lj). J. Agr, S, Aust., 43, 462-471,

1941. ‘The control of ants. J. Agr. S. Aust., 44, 373-375.

The control of silverfish. J, Agr. S. Aust,, 44, 420-422,

Notes on the lesser grain borer (Rhizopertha dominica Pabr.) in South Australia.

J. Agr. 5S. Aust., 45, 45-52,

1942. The bark beetle, Hylustes afer Payk. (Coleoptera : Svolytidac), attacking pines in

Seuth Australia. J, Agr, S. Ansd., 48, 46-90,

i Stephen, V. A.) An injector for liquid fomigants. J. Aust. Inst. Agric. Sct.

8 (1). 26,

1949, Fruit flies. Dept. Agric. §. Aust... 1949,

(With Browning, T. 0.) The black field cricket (Gryllulus servillet Sanss.). J.

Agr, $8. Aust., 52, 323,

1951. (With Lower, H. F.) An interim note on the control of the lucerne fea and red-

legeed curth mite. J. Agr. 8. Aust., 54, 433,

1955. raceay and grasshoppors in South Australia. Dep. Agric. S. Aust. Bull. No. 440

1956).

Joint Papers with J. Davidson

1933. Davidson, J.. and Swan, D. C. A method for obtaining samples of the popula-

tion af Collembola (Symphyleona) in pastures. Bull. ent. Res., 24 (3), 351-352.

1938. Andrewartha, H. G,, Davidson, J.. and Swan, D.C. The “grasshopper” problem in

South Australia, J, Agr. 8, Aust. 44, 865-571,

Andrewartha, H. G.. Davidson, J., and Swan, D. C. Vegelalion types associated

with the plague grasshopper in South Australia, Dep, Agric. S. Aust, Ball. No. 353.

1943, Davidson, J.. and Swan, D. C. The incubation period of the eggs of Halotydeus

Garrlchne Puri (Avarina) at different temperaturcs, Aust. J. exp. Bial. med. Set.

2, 1OT-LL0.

SIR WILLIAM MITCHELL

K,C.M.G., M.A., D.Se, — Centenarian

The President, Council and Fellows of the Society extend their congratu-

lations to Sir William Mitchell on his attaining his hundredth birthday during

the year. Sir William became a Fellow of the Society in 1925, when he was

Vice-Chancellor of the University, on the same occasion as did the late Sir

George Murray, then Chancellor of the University, during the presidency of the

late Sir Douglas Mawson. This was at a time when scientific activity in the

University was rapidly developing. The Society was to become closely asso-

ciated with the University for the next few years, and Mawson was succeeded

in the office of President by a serics of professors of the University who, all of

them, contributed both to the Councils of the Society and to its publications.

The clection of the Vice-Chancellor and Chancellor to fellowship at this time

was a most appropriate and welcome token of their interest in and support of

the aims of the Society.

BALANCE SHEET

Summary

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

REVENUE

ACCOUNT

Receipts and Payments for Nine Months Ended 30th June, 1961

£ s.d,

To Balance, 1/10/60 = : . 59011 1

» Subscriptions os ; 340 15 4

;, Government Grant ‘ 1312 0 0

;; Sale of Publications, etc. 7619 7

+ Rent of Rooms .. 20 9 6

: Interest—

Endowment Fund £363 1 1

Savings Bank 32.5 4

——— — 395 6 5

£2,736 1 11

Audited and found correct.

By Printing and Publishing Velie 84,

Reprints, etc. } . 1,408 19

» Library Assistants 67 16

;, Clerieal Assistance ; 125 0

» Printing and Stationery e we s0 5

» Postage and Duty Stamps. a: 48 i

», Cleaning and Polishing . 53 18

» Insurance - . 3.421

» Lighting . : si ” - 717

é Binding , a 297 4

» Publications, ete. s f . 6 O

» Cabinet... : as 7 rn 31 10

» scales : . 6 15

» Balanee—

Savings Bank of S.A., Rundle St. 599 13 1

£2,736 11

» Account Outstanding at 30/6/61 . 282 3

. Balance of Uncommitted Funds ., 317 10 1

F. M. ANGEL I Hon. F. J, MITCHELL,

N. S. ANGEL, A.U.A. Com, | Auditors. Ilon. Treasurer.

Adelaide, 6th July, 1961.

ENDOWMENT FUND

Z sd £ sic

To Balance, 1/10/60 . 9670 0 0 By Revenue Transfer 363 1

» Investment Interest— Balance—

Com'wealth In- Com’wealth —_In-

scribed Stack .. £344 11 1 scribed Stock ..£9,220 0 0

S.A. Inscribed S.A. Inscribed

Stock e: ° 410 0) Stock 150 0 0

S.A. Gas Co. S.A, Gas Ca.

Bonds 14 0 0 Bonds 300

—————— 865 1 1 ———-————— 9,670 0 |

£10,033 1 1 £10,033 1

Audited and found correct.

The Commonwealth Stock has heen verified by certificate, and the S.A

Stock and the Gas Co. Bonds have been inspected in the hands of the Treasurer.

F. M. ANGEL l

N.S. ANGEL, AULA. Com, Jf

Adelaide, 6th July, 1961.

Hon.

Auditors.

F. J, MITCHELL,

Hon. Treasurer.

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL AND

LIST OF FELLOWS, 1961

Summary

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror, Water Howcnin, F,G,S.

1930 Joun McC. Brack, A.LS.

1931 Pror. Sta Doucitas Mawson, O.B.E., D.Se., B.E,, F.R.S,

1933 Pror. J. Burton Cietann, M.D.

1935 Pror. T. Harvey Joanston, M.A., D.Sc.

1935 Pror. J. A. Paescort, D,Se,, F\A.C.I.

1943 Herperr Womensuey, A.L.S., F.R.ES.

1944 Pror. J. G, Woon, D.Sc., Ph.D,

1945 Ceci T. Mapvican, M.A., B.E., D.Se., F.G.S.

1946 Heroenr M. Hare, O.B.E.

1955 L. Keira Waro, I.S,0., B.A, B.E., D.Sc.

1956 WN, B, Trnparr, B.Se.

1957 CC. S. Piren, D.Sc.

1960) Th WW. Finuayson.

1961 KR, L. Seeqnr, Ph.D,

LIST OF FELLOWS

AS AT 30th SEPTEMBER, 1961.

Those marked with an asterisk (*) liave contributed papors published in the Society's

Transactions, Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Membcrs.

Any change in address or wny other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrears.

Date of

Date of Honnrary Honorary F ws

Election Election ‘ > nai

1895 1949 *Crevanp, Pror. J, B., M.D., Dashwood Road, Beaumont, $.A.—Verva Medal,

1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-37: President, 1927-25, 1940-41; Vice-

President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

1913 1955 “Osnony, Prov. T. G. B., D.Se,, 103 Ward Strect, North Adelaide—Council,

1915-20, 1922-24: Vice-Presidené, 1924-25, 1926-27; President, 1925-26,

1912 1955 °Waro, L. K., 15.0:, B.A., B.E., D.Sc., 22 Northumberland Street, Heath-

pool, Marryatville, §,A—Council, 1924-97, 1933-35; Vice-President,

1927-28; President, 1925-30.

Date of

Election FELLows

1946, “Anse, Pnor, A. Ay, M.D., DSc., Ph.D., Department of Anatomy, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

1959, Aitken, P., B,Sc,, South Australian Museum, North Terrace., Adelaide, S.A,

1927. *AuperMaN, Pror. A. R., Ph.D, D.Se., F.G.S., Department of Geology, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.—Couneil, 1937-42, 1954-57.

1951, *Annerson, Mns.'S. H,, B,Se., G1 Lakeman Street, North Adelaide, S.A.

1935. *°ANnoneWwARTHA, H. G., M.Ag.Se., Dise., Zoology Dept.. University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. —Couned, 1949-50: Vice-President, 1950-51, 1942-53;

President, 1951-52.

1935, *AnpaewanvHa, Mus. H. C,, B.Agr.Sc, M.Sc. (nee H. V. Steele), 29 Claremont

Avenne, Netherby, S.A.

1929. *Ancrn, F. M., 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside, S.A.

1939. *AnceL, Miss L. M., M.Sc., 2 Moore Street, Toorak, Adelaide, S.A.

1960. -Ancupoup, KR. T., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, $A.

1945. *Bantuerr, H. K., L.Th., 2 Abbotshall Road, Lower Mitcham, S.A,

1958. Baten. P. Eos Greatimpat af Geography, University of California, Riverside, Cali-

ornia, U.S.A.

1950. Brcx, R. G., B.Ag.Sc., BR.D.A., Lynewood Park, Mil-Lel, via Mount Gambier, S,A.

1932. Bree, P. R,, D.D.Se., L,D.S,, Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1928, Best, R. J., D.Se., F.A.C.1., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adelaide.

328 LIST OF FELLOWS

Daté of

Election.

1956, Buacx, A. B, ASASM.. MAMLM., 36 Woodcroft Avenue, St, Georges, S.A,

Tid, snack, KE, C., M,B,, B.S, Maill Read, Tranmere, S.A.

1950), a ri N. Js M.B., B.S., FRCS, (Eng.), FR.A.C.S., 19 Marlborough St, Cullege

wrk, S.A.

1945. +*°Bonytuon, GC. W., BiSe., A.A.C.1., Romalo House, Romalo Avenue, Muill, S.A.

1945, *Boonmsara, C. D., M.Se,, B.Sc.For., 6 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, §.A,

1947. "Bowers, D. R. Pub. tLond.), D.LC., F.C.5.. Department of Geology, University,

Glasgaw, Seotland,

1957, artes i _ Mh, Dept. of Entomology, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No,

1), Adelaicle, S.A.

1957, Buier, W. G. B.A.. c/o Public Library, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1944, *Beruipen, Miss N. Ti, M.Se., C.8.1.R.0., Div. Plant Industry, P.O. Box 109, Can-

berra, AC.T,

1958, Bora, 1. 51 Richmond Road, Westbourne Park. S.A.

1932. *Canmppent, Prov, T, D,. D.D.Se., D.Se,, 24 Jeyningtun Street, Tusmore, S.A—

Gouneil, 1928-352, 1935, 1942-45; Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934-35.

1960. Canner, C., 2 Harris St., Glenelg, S.A.

1955, Cannowus, B, B., R.D.Ocn., 26 Dequettville Terrace, Kent Town, 5.A.

19535, Canren, A. N. B.Sc. 8 Scott St, Maroubra Bay, NSW.

1960. Cariey, D. E., & Gudmore Torrace, Whyalli, S.A.

1957, ?CiupPunmacy, G, M., B.Sc, Lindsay Avenve, Alice Springs, N-7,

$955. =Crotuien, E. A,, Hydroelectric Commission, Hobart, Tas,

(949. i vai F. &., Geology Department, University of Queenslasd, St, Lucia, Bris-

bane, 2.

192), "Corren, . Cy, EARZS., J.P., South Australian Museum, North ‘Terrace, Advulaide—

Gouncil, 1945-46, 1948-49. Vice-President, 1949-50, 1951-52; President, 1950-51;

Programmie Secretary, L959-.

1956, Grawronn, A. R., B.Sec., Mines Department, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide, S.A.

1956. Darty, B., Ph.D., Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A.—Programme Searetary, 1957-59.

1951. Davison, A. L, C., Ph.D. BSc, c/o Messrs, Simpsan & Rronkrian, 35 Grenfell St.,

Adelaide, S.A-

195), Detaxn, C. M,, M.B., B.S., DPW. D.T.M., 29 Gilbert Street, Goodwood, SA—

, Council, 1952-60.

1930. Dex, TE. V., Box 12. Aldgate, S.A,

1957, Dour, K. ML, M.Ag.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bay, No. 1), Adelaide. S.A.

1959), Dunzor, P. BR. G., B,So,, 13 Walton Ave, Clearview, S.A-

1944. Dunyrone. 5, M. L., MLB, B.S. 170 Vayneham Road, St, Petors, S.A,

1931. Dwyer, J, M., MLB, B.8,, 157 Bast Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1933. *Eanoney, Miss C. M,, M.S8e.,. F.L.8., Department of Botany, University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.—Couneil, 1943-46,

1945, "Enaronns, $. J, B.A. M.Se, PHD. Zoglogy Depurtment, University oF Adelotee,

North Terrace, Adulaide, S,A.-Counell, 1954-55; Programme Secretary, 1955-36;

Seeretury, V56-57.

1902. *Epourt, A. G., 10 Farrell Street, Glenele, § A—Conneil, 1949-53,

1956. "Bremen, H., Dr.rer.nat, State Herbarium, Botanic Garden, North Terrace, Adelaide,

S.A.

1959. Fiecoen, D. R., Bada. Dept. of Zoclnwy, University of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A.

i927) "Winuayvson, WH. W., 305 Ward St, North Adelaide—Verca Medal, 1960; Cauncil,

1937-40.

1951, Frsmern. R. H., 21 Seaview Road. Lynton, S.A.

Tio. = =Foxper, H. W., 15 Anburn Ave, Myrtle Bank, S.A,

1958. *Forues, B. G., PhD., #.G.S., 9 Flinders Koad, Hillerest, S.A.

1958. Forp, A. W., P.LC.S., AC.C.S., 3850 South Terrace, Bankstown, N.S.W,

1958. Forpe, N. Dip.For., C,5.1,.R.0., Canberra, A.C,T,

1954. Gmsor, A, A., A.W,A.S.M., Mines Departinent, 169 Rundle St. Adelaide, S.A.

1953. “Grarssxun, M. F., D.Sc. Geolozy Department, University of Adclaide, North ‘I'ex-

face, Adelaide, S:A.—Couneil, 1953-54; Viee-Presiclent, 1958-59.

1935. {Gornsack, H., Coremandcl Valley, S.A.

1959, Gnoes, Miss L. M.A. B.A, MUSe., Dept. of Anutumy unl Histology, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, 5,A,

1948. Gross, G. F., M.Sc., South Australian Museum, Adelaide, S,A.—Secretary,, 1950-33.

1944. Guerra, D. J. B.Se., c/o W.A, Petroleum Co., 231 Adelaide Terrace, Perth, W.A,

Datel

Election

1922,

1913,

1930,

1946,

load,

1960,

1985.

1960.

144.

1951,

1950).

102d,

19444,

1047,

1928,

L9G),

1945,

1950,

1957.

1958.

1954,

193%.

19:19,

1933,

1960.

1941.

1922,

1958.

1948,

ISL,

1953.

1939,

1930.

L950),

1920,

1948,

1945,

1953,

1939.

1958.

1951.

1933,

1935,

1936.

157.

1944.

LIST OF FELLOWS eee

*Hare, H. M,, O.B,E., 12 Belle Vue Phice, Unley Park, $.A.-Vereo Medal, 1046;

Council, 1931-34, 1950-53, 1956-4; Vice-President, 1934-36, 1937-38: President,

1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-50, 1953-56.

Hani, D, KR, Tea Tree Gully, S.A.

fHancock, N, L., 3 Bewdley, 66 Beresford Kosd, Rose Bay, NiS.W.

*Tanoy, Mrs. J. B. (nee A. CG. Beokwith}, MSe., Stewart Ave., Salisbury, S.A-

Hanns, J. 2. BiSe., c/o Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1), Adelaide, S.A,

Harrison, J, 7 McQuillan Ave., Renown Park, S.A,

Havyzacz, J. F., B.Sc., G8 Pleasant Avenue, Glandore, S.A.

Hayaran. D. L., Ph.D,, Genetics Department, University of Adelaide, North ‘Terrave.

Adelaide, S.A.

Heanor, Kt, 1, B.AgrSe., 49 Halsbnry Avenue, Kingswood, S.A.

Hoornc, L. J., 46 Kauri Parade, Seadliff, S.A,

Horwrrs, R.G, 1, D.Se., Glenside Road, Woodbury Till, Stirling West, 5-A.

*Hossreiy, 2, $,, Phb,, 132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, $.A.

Huamne, D. §. W., M-P.S., J-P., 238 Payncham Road, Payneham, S.A.

“Merron, J. T.. B.Se., A.S.A.S.M., 10 Bellevue Place, Unley Park—Cowncil, 1957-.

Trourp, P., 14 Wyatt Roacl, Burnside, $.A.

Inaram, L. J. 34 Lexington Road, Tenley South, S.A.

“Trssup, 1, Wi, M-Sc:, 6 North Penna Parade, Helair, S.A,

*Jouns, RK. -K., B.Se,, Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide, §.A,

Jonnsow, B., B.Sc-Agr., Ph.D,, Waite Institute {Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adelaide

*Tounson, W., B.Sc. (Hons), 33 Ryan Avenue, Woodville West, S.A,

Keats, A, I, BE, 44 LeFevre Terrace, North Adelatce, S.A,

Pitatea H M., Ph.D. M.B., F.RG.S., Khakhar Buildings, C.F. Tank Road, Ram-

hay, Tndia,

“Kine, D., M.Sc. ¢/0 Utah Development Co., Roam 37A, 'T. & G. Bldg. Brisbane, 0.

*Kueeman, A. W., Ph.D., Pept, of Geology, University ef Adelaide, North. Terms;

Aer i S.A. Seeretury, 1945-46; Vice-President, 1946-49, 1950-51. President,

1949-5N,

KucueL, R. H., Koseworthy Agricultural College, Roseworthy, S.A,

*Lancrorn-Sairm, T., BA., M.S8e,, Ph.D,, Dept. of Geography, University of Sydney,

Sydney, N.S.W. :

Lrxpon, G. A, M.D,, B.S. FRCP, ¢/o, Elder’s Trustee and Executor Go. Lind.

37 Curries Strest, Adelaide, S.A.

Tinosay, HL A., 110 Gross Road, Ulighgate, S.A.

Loruan, T. BR. ON,, N.DH. (ON.Z.), Director, Botanic Garden, Adelaide, S.A—

TRSOSUTEE, 1952-53; Caunoil, 1959-57; View Prestdent, 157.58, 1960-615 President,

158-60,

*“Lupsroox, Mrs. N. TL, M.A... Ph.D. DLC. F.GLS.. Department of Minas, 169

italia St., Adelaide, S.4,—Couneil, 1958-60; Viea-Prestdent, 1980-61; President,

Hel.

Matnamr, TD. A., B.Se. (Tons.), Watte Tnstitute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adelaide.

Manstan., T. 7. M.Agr.Sc,, PhD, C.S.0R.0., Division of Soils (Private Mail Bag,

No. 1), Adelaide, S.A-—Couneil, 948-52,

Martin, Miss H. A., c/o Department of Botany ond Biology, University of Brilish

Colombia, Vancouver §, Canada.

Mayo, G. M. E., BAg.Se,, Ph.D. 29 Angas Rd, lower Miteham, 5.A.

Mavo, Sin Hersert, LL.B. O.C., 90 Northgate St. Unley Park, S.A.

Bounces i N., M.B.E., BSc., B.AgrSe., Roseworthy Agricultural College, Roxe-

worthy, Ss,

f* Mines, K, R., D,Se,, F.G.S., (1 Church Road, Mitcham, 5.4,

Minne, K, Ly, FC.A., 14 Burlington Street, Walkerville, S.A.

Mincnam, V. H,. 30 Wainhouse Street, Torrensville, S.A.

"Mims, R, G., B.Se., B Myrtle Re, Seacliff, $A.

aioe e F, J,, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, §,4.—Treasurer,

958-.

Mitrenett, Poor, Sm M, L,, MSc. ¢/u Elder's Trustee and Exeoutor Co, Ltd., 37

Currie Street, Adelaide.

¢Mrrenrui,, Pror. Sma W., K.C.M.G,, M.A, D.Sc., Fitzroy Terrace, Prospeat, S.A.

*Mountrorp, C. P., 25 First Avenue, St. Peters, Adelaide, $.A,

*“Munmim, Ivan A., B.Se. (Hons.), c/o Australiun Atomic Energy Connnission, P.O.,

Coogee, N.S.W.

Ninnes, A. RB. B.A., R.D.A,, 62 Sheffield Steet, Malvern, $.A.

250

LIS OF FELLOWS

Dalco of

Election

1945. *Nowrucore, K. H,, B.AgrSe, ALAS, C.S.1R.O., Division of Soils (Private Mail

Bag, No. 1), Adelaide. S.A.

1930, Ockenpen, G. F., BuA., 68 Holbrooks fd., Flinders Park, S.A,

1956. O’Drrcorn, Ee g. B. St, 9 Vinall Street, Dover Gardens, S.A,

1937_ “Parkin, L. W., MiSe., AS-T.C., Department af Mines, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide,

: S.A.-Secretary, 1953-56; Vire- President. 1956-57, 1958-59: President, 1057-58.

1949. Parkinson, K, J., BSc), 91 Stuart St., Hillcrest, 5.A,

1929. Pautt, A, G.. MA, B.Se., 10 Milton Avenue, Pullarton Extute, S.A,

1926. *Pyper, GC. S,, D. Se, CS.LR, 0, , Division of Sofls {Private Mil Bug, No. 1), Adelaide—

Verca Medal, 1957: Coune i, 1841-43, Viewe-Prevident, 1943-45, 1946-47; Pre-

sident, 1943-1946,

1948, Pownr, J. K.. Bise., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Actolnide, S.A.

1S5. *PRescor, Pruor, J. AL, CUBE. DSe, KAACA. ERS. 83 Cross Road, Myrtle

Bank, ‘S.A —Vereo Medal, 1938; Council, 1927-30! 1935-39; Vice-President,

1930-32; Prestedent, 1933-33; Fditor, 1955-,

1957. *Prneie, Miss L. A, B., Box 876c, G.P.O., Adelaide, S.A.

1945, °Pryox, L. D., M.Se., Dip.For., 32 La Perouse Street, Grifith, Canberra, A.C.T,

1950. *Rarrrean, J. 11. M.Se., Newcastle University College, Tigh's TTill, 2N, NSW.

1944, Ricemian, D, $., DSe., BAgrSe., C.S,1,K.0., Division of Biochemistry. "Adelaide,

1947, Rrepe., W. BR. B.Se. c/o Seripps Tnstitution of Duyanh gap hy: Dept. of Palavin-

tology, University of California, La Jolla, Culiforia, USA

1947. Rix, C. E., 42 Waymoiutl Avenue, Glandore, $.A.

1953. Rocrrs, Paor. W. P,, DSc Ph.D, FA.A,, M.LBial., Zoilowy Dept, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

I95!. Rowe, 8, Ay 22 Belly Street, Firle, 5.4.

1950. Shere Prov. E. A. B.Se,. A.M, University of Advlaide, North Terrace, Adelide,

195]. Russi. L. D., ¢/o Adelaide Boys’ High School, West ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1945, Eyam, J. R,, Old Penula Estate, Penola, 5A,

1933. Scrwemen, M., MLB., B.S., (75 North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A

1959. Sertoppr, f,, Division of Land Research and Divisional Survey, CS.1.R43., Gane

berra, A.C.T.

L051, *Scorr, ‘TP, D., M.sSe, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, $4, —

Programme Seeretary, 1953.54, 1956-57; Seeretury, 1Q57-.

1937 sien GC. B,,, Dise., Department of Zoology, University, North ‘Terrace, Adelaide,

1925. °Sreano, PL., Port. Elliot, S.A.

1936, "Sueanp, K. Dido, CSR... Division of Kisherics and Oceanography, University

of W.A,, Nedlands, W.A,

1954. Suepnenn, R. G., B. Sc... oo Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St... Adelaide, S.A-

1459, SHepiey, ‘Miss F. A., M.Sc. 97 North Terrace, Kensingtim Gdns., S.A.

1934_ SHINKFIELD, R. C., 87 Canterbury Avenue, Trinity Gardens, 5.A,

1925. +Santn, Sin Tom Bann, Kt, B.A, 25 Currie Strect, Adelaide, S.A.

1941. *Sourncorr, RB. V., MDs, BS), D.T.M, & H., 13 Jasper Street, Myre Park, S.A.—

Gonneil, 1949- 51, 1952-533, 1957- G0; Treasurer, 1951.52: Vice-President, 1953-54,

1955-56, 1961; President, 1954: ‘55, 1960-UL,

1936, Seurnwoon, A. RM, D., MS (Adel), MRCP, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide, §,4.

N47. “Seecnt, RL, Ph.D.. Botany Deparbnent, University of Melbourne—Verco Medal,

196; Gouneil, 1951-52, 1958-60; Pragranme Seoretury, 1959-53: Vice-Prestdlent,

196

1936, |*Smuees, KR. C., M.Sc... 5 Baker Street, Sonerton Park, S.A,

1949. *Sexyv. A. H., M. Se, “Gealogy Department, University of Tasmania, Hobart, ‘Las.

IYSI. SrrapMan, Rey. W. R., 8 Blairgowrie Koad, St. Georges, S.A,

1938, *Sveruens, C. G., D.Sc, C.S.1.R.0., Division of Seils (Private Mail Baw, No. 1). Ade-

jaide—Vereo Medal 1959: Counail, 1959-54: Vice-President, 1954-55, 1956-57;

Président, 1955-56.

I955. Swatve, G. D., MLB. B.S., 220 Esplanade, Lares North, S.A

1H51. 9 Swaisus, FP. M.Ag.Se.. 13 Derwont Ave., Rostrevor, S.A.

aac, SyMons,, E. F,,, Uranium Treatment Plant, Port Pirie, S.A.

1934, Sens, G., 385 Murray Strect, Lower ‘Mitcham, §.A.— Editor, 1947-55; Council,

1958, Tarytor, D. . Dept. of Entomology, Waite Tnstlinte (Private Mail Bag. Noe. 1),

Adclaide, § A.

1959, Tayzton, D. J., 23 Westbourne St., Prahran Mast, Vic.

Date of

Election

1929,

1948,

1938.

1957.

1959,

1940.

1933,

1935,

1959.

1959,

1960.

1950.

1953.

1954,

195-4.

1959,

1946.

1950,

1946.

1938.

1933.

1954.

1944.

1957.

1960.

i949.

1944,

LIST OF FELLOWS 231

*Tayior, J. K., B.A. M.Sc., G.S.L1.0,, Division of Soils (Private Mail Bag, No. 1),

Adelaide—Council, 1940-43, 1947-50; Librarian, 1951-52; Vice-President, 1952+

53, 1954-55; President, 1953-54,

*Tuomas, I. M., M,Se. (Wales), M-I.Biol.. Department of Zoolagy, University of

Adelaide—Seeretury, 1948-50; Council, 1950-53; Vice-President, 1955-56, 1957-55:

President, 1956-57; Assistant Editor, 1958-.

*THomas, Mrs. I, M. (nee P. M. Mawson), M.Se,, Department of Zoology, University

of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

Tuomas, J., B.Sc.. Woodleigh Road, Blackwood, S.A,

THomson, B, P,, M.Se,, 33 Oaklands Road, Parkholme, $.A.

“Tuomson, Cary. J. M., 135 Military Road, Semaphore South, S.A.

*TinbaLr, N. B., BSc, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A—

Verco Medal, 1956; Secretary, 1935-36; Council, 1946-47: Vice-President, 1947-

48, 1949-50; President, 1948-49; Librarian, 1953-

*Tucxer, B. M.. B.Sc, C.$.1,R.0., Division of Soils (Private Mail Bag, No. 1),

Adelaide, S.A,

‘Twwipare, C. RB. Ph.D., M.Se., Dept, of Geography, University of Adelside, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

Bi ar M. J., Dept. of Physiology, University of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide,

Tyan, A, E., c/o Australia Mineral Develapment Laboratories, Flemington $t.,

Parkside, S.A.

Vistreu, J. T., Box 92, Part Lincoln, S.A.

Waveney, R, AY B.A. MLA. Ph.D., Warne State University, Detoit, Michigan;

U.S.A.

*Wenn, B. P.. M.Sc., Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide, 5.A.

Weuts, C. B,, BoAg.Se., Broadlees, Waverley Ridge, Crafers, S.A.

Wnheban, Prov. W. F.. Department of Physiclogy, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Aclelaido, S.A,

*Wuirtie, A. W.G., M.Se., Department of Feemamie Geology, University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Acelaide. S.A,

Wittman, L. D., “Dumosa,” Meningic, S.A.

*Winson, Pror. A. F., D.Se,, Dept. uf Gcology, University of Queensland, St. Lucia,

Brishane, Qld.

*Winson, J. O., 42 Wilson Terrace, DaCosta Park, Glenelu, S.A.

*Wosrerstey, H., F.R.E.S., A.L.S. (Hon. causa), South Australian Museum, North

Terrace, Adelaide —Vereao Medal, 1943; Secretary, 1936-37; Kuitor, 1937-43,

1945-47; President, 1943-44; Vice-President, 1944-45; Rep. Flora and Fauna Pro-

teclion Committee, 1945; Treasurer, 1950-51, 1956-59.

*Wommnstey, H. B. §., D.Sc., Botany Department, University of Adelaide, North Ter-

Adelaide, §.A.—Couneil, 1960-,

Womerstey, J, §., B.Sc,, Dept. of Forests, Lae, New Guinea.

Woops, R, V., B.Se., Mt, Crawford, S.A,

*Worrner, H., Ph.D., 16 Reece Ave., Klenizig, 5.A.

Yeates, J. N., A.M.LE., A,M.LM.E., Highways and Local Government Dept,,

Adelaide, 8.A.

Zimmen, W. J., Dip.For,, F.L.S, (uond,), 7 Rupert $t., Footscray West, W.12, Vie.

GENERAL INDEX

Summary

GENERAL INDEX

Names printed in italics as separate entries indicate that the farms are néw ty science,

Acarina, deseriplions of two new

Australian Smarididae: —R.

Southeott .

Adelaide System, magnesite of the:

G. Forbes

Anabama granite, field ‘relationships

of: R. C, Mirarns

A new species and some new records

in the géenha Cloaeina Linstow

(Nematoda; Strongyloidea) from

Western Australia: P. M. Thomas

Balance Sheet, 1961

Blinnan Dome, geophysical. investi-

gation of; 1, A. Mumme

Blinman Dome, the geological strue-

ture of: Re P. Wehb

Brownell, P. F. (see Specht, RL.

Prowaell PF, and Hewett,

: M.

Cleland, J. B. (see Specht, BR. L., and

Cleland, J. B.)

Cloacina, a note on the accirrence

o£ ovsophayeal tooth in: P. M.

Thomas “0 08 7

Claacina setonicis

Correa alba punnosa

Corren, « taxonomic revision ‘of the

genus: P. G. Wilson

Gorrea lawrenetqna cordifolia

Correa lawrenciana genoensis

Correa lawrenciana glundulifera

Correa reflexa cortacea

Correa reflexa nummulariifolia

Descriptions of two new Australian

Smarididae (Avarinu) with re-

marks on chaetotaxy and geo-

graphical distributions KR. V.

Southeott

Dunean Campbell Swan, Memoir

and Bibliography :

Early peadsetiort of subterrancan

clover seed by A. W. Howard:

D. E, Symon

Eucalyptus clucephora, * (listribrtion

in part of the Mount Lofty Ranges:

RK. L. Specht, 2. F. Brownell, and

P.M. Hewett _

Field relationships of the Anabama

granite: TR. C. Mirams

Finlayson, H. H.: Mitchell's wombat

in South Australia

Flora. conservation in Sonth Aus-

tralia. 1. The preservation of

plant formations anc associations

recorded in South Australia! R. L.

Specht and J, B. Cleland

Yorbes, B. G.: Magnesite of the Adu-

laide System; a discussion of its

origin i ee # "

Geological structures of the Blinman

Dome: B. P. Webb - .

Geophysical inyestigution of — the

Biinman Dormer T, A. Mumme _

Groundwater horizon, the occurrence

of a shallow: H. Wopfner ...

Hewett, P. M. (see Specht, R. L.,

Brownell, P. F., aac Hewett,

BM.)

Howard, A. W.: the early produc-

tion of subterrancan clover seed

hy: D. E. Symon ns Lf

Inglewood district, Sclerophyll ‘com-

inuuities in: Helone A. Martin

Kramp, P. L.: Sonje medusae from

Northern Australia cs 2

Lectures. and Exhibits, 1960-61

List of Fellows

Lndbraok, N. H,; Permian to Creta-

ceous subsurface stratigraphy be-

tween Lake Phillipson and the

Peake and Denison Ranges, South

Australia _ = “ Fn we

Ludbrook, N. H.: Revision of the

Tate mollusean types: Pelecypoda-

Nuculidae and Nueulanidae

Magnesite of the Adelaide System: a

discussion of its ongin: B,

Forbes

Martin, Hele ne A.: _Seleraphyll com-

munities in the Inglewood district,

Mente Lolty Ranges, South Aus-

tralia

Mawson, P. M.; A new “species and

some new secords in the genus

Cloacina —Linstow (Nematoda:

Strongylnidea) from Western

sonar iL : 4

Mawson, P. M.: A note on the oocur-

rence of i opaiapesl teeth in

evies of the genus Cloacina

(CNemutoda: Strongyloides )

L77

217

197

223.

227

‘5S

234 GENERAL INDEX

Medusae from Northern Australia:

P. L. Kramp

Memoir and Bibliography,

Campbell Swan... -

Mirams, R, C,: Field relationships of

the Anabama Granite —

Mitchell, Sir William, ccontenarian

Mitchell’s wombat in South Aus-

tralia: TT, HW. Finlayson

Mount Lofty Ranges, plant ecology

of parts of the. 2. The distribu-

tion, of F ucaluptus elagophara,

R, L. Specht, P. F. Brownell

and P. M. ee colt

Mumme, I. Geophysical investi~

gation of fhe Blinman Dome

Dunean

Nematoda: Strongyloidea, a new

species and some new records of

from Western Australias P. M.

Mawson

Netmiitoda: Strongyloidea, a note on

the occurrence of oveseuphavenl

teoth in the genus Cloacina;

M. Mawson _

Nahin Australia, some Medusae

from: P. L. Kramp

Occurrence of a shallow ground-

water horizon and its natural out-

Jets in north-easternmost South

Anstralia: H. Wopfner

Oceurrence of oesophageal teeth in

the genus Cloacina; P. M. Mawson

Oesophageal teeth, note on the occur-

rence of in the genus Clodcina:

P. M. Mawson — ks

Puleeypoda-Nuculidae and = Nueu-

lanidae, revision of the Tate mol-

muscan types: N. H. Ludbrook ..

Permian to Cretaceous subsurface

stratigraphy between Lake Phillip-

son and the Peake and Denison

Ranges, South Australia: N, I.

Ladbrook a

Plant ecology of part of the Mount

Lofty Ranges, South Australia. 2,

The distribntion of Eucalyptus

elueophora: R. L. Specht, P, F.

Brownell and P. M, Hewett

ef the Tate mollnsean

Feléeypoda-Nuculidae and

. H. Ludbrook

Revision

types:

Nuculanidae; N

LOT

155

Sclerophyll conimunilies in the Tngle-

wood district, Mount Lofty

Ranges, South Australia: Helene

A, Martin ae 7

Sir Willian Mitehe i, centenariun —

Smarididae, descriptions of two new

South Australian: RB, V, Sautheutt

Some medusac front Northern Aus-

tralia: P. L. Kramp -.

South Australia, fora conservation

in, 1. The preservation of plant

formations and associations re-

corded in South Australia: HK. L.

Specht and J. B. Cleland ,

South Australia, Mitchell's wombat

in: He. Finlayson .,

Southeott, RV. Descriptions of

two new Australian Smarididae

(Acarina) with remarks an chaeto-

toxy and geovraphical mang ies

Specht, R. L., and Cleland, J.

Flora conservation in South’ hates

lia, 1, The preservation of plant

formations and associations ro-

corded in South Australia

Specht, Tt. L,, Brownell, P. F., and

Hewett, P. M.: Plant ecology. of

part of the Maunt Lofty Ranues,

South Australia, 2. The distrihu-

tion of Ruealyptus. elaeophara

Subsurface — stratieraphy between

Lake Phillipson and the Peake and

Denison Ranges: N. H. Ludbrook

Subterranean clover seed, the early

production of, by <A, W. Howard:

D, E. Symon

Swan, Dimncan Campbell, Memoir

and Bibliournahy ‘ fs

Symon, D Vhe early production

by A, W. Howard of subterranean

clover seed

Tate Molluscan iypes, revision of:

H.. Ludbrook

tPugihiotes revision of the “genus

Carrvea: P, G. Wilson .

Webb, B. P.: The geologieal struc-

tures of the Blininan Dome

Western Australia, a new species and

new records of the Benus Cloacina

from: P, M, Thomas.

Wilson, P. G.: A taxonomic revision

of the #enus Correa ...

Wopfner, H.: The aceurrence of a

shallow groundwater horizon and

its natural outlets in north-castern-

most South. Australia.

225

133

197

177

207

133

177

CONTENTS

B. P. Wess: The Geological Structure of the Blinman Dome

I. A. Mumme: Geophysical Investigation of the Blinman Dome

H. Worrner: The Occurrence of a Shallow Groundwater Horizon and its

Natural Outlets in North-Easternmost South Australia

D. E. Symon: The ey Production by A. W. Howard of atin

Clover Seed .

P. G. Witson: A Rgeanehiie Revision of tha eae Goma (Communi

cated by Hj. Eichler.) . ;

N. H. Lupproox: Revision of the Tate Mottusean Types Peleeypoda

Nuculidae and Nuculanidae .

N. H. Lupsroox: Permian to Cretaceous Subsurface Shicsehe Ramee

Lake Phillipson and the Peake and Denison Ranges, South Australia

P. M. Mawson: A New Species and Some New Record in the Genus

Cloacina Linstow (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) from Western Australia

P. M. Mawson: A Note on the Occurrence of Oesophageal Teeth in the

Species of the Genus Cloacina (Nematoda: Strongyloidea) .

HELENE A. Martin: Sclerophyll Communities in the Inglewood District,

Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia . : : ce

R. C. Mmams: Field Relationships of the Anabama Granite

R. L. Srecur, P. F. BRownett AND P. M. Hewerr: Plant Ecology of Pes

of the Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia, 2. The Distribution of

Eucalyptus elaeophora

R. L. Specur anp J. B. CLELAND: Flora ee in South Treaty,

1. The Preservation of Plant Formations and Associations Recorded

in South Australia 7

R. V. Sourscotr: Descriptions of Two New Australian Smarididae

(Acarina) with Remarks on pees and Seuzaphical Distribu-

tion -

P. L. Kramp: Boas es ae Soctiaee eee

H. H. Fintayson: Mitchell's Wombat in South Australia .

B. G. Forsers: Masigts of the Adelaide Sree A Discussion of its

Origin

Memoir and Bibliography, a Campbell en :

List of Lectures and Exhibits, 1960-1961

Sir William Mitchell, Centenarian

Balance Sheet

Awards of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal aie List of F ee 1961

Index